TGS en - 81991877562

Operator’s Manual
Trucknology Generation TGS

without Multifunctional Steering Wheel
81.99187-7562
CAUTION PRINTER’S IMPRINT
For your safety
This vehicle and its attachments, bodies and conversions are
only allowed to be put to their designated use. Comply with MAN Nutzfahrzeuge Aktiengesellschaft
the information contained in this operator’s manual and the Dachauer Straße 667
instructions provided by the specific manufacturers. 80995 München
Misuse of this vehicle can have serious consequences and www.man-mn.com
must therefore be avoided at all costs. No liability is accepted
Copy deadline: 02.2007
for incorrect use.
Improper handling of the vehicle and changes to the vehicle We reserve the right to make modifications in the course of further
– particularly if this involves electronic components and the development.
accompanying software as well as operation with service © 2007 MAN Nutzfahrzeuge Aktiengesellschaft
products not approved by MAN Nutzfahrzeuge – can cause
vehicle malfunctions and damage. This can impair the Reprinting, copying or translation, even of extracts, is not allowed
road-worthiness and operational reliability of your vehicle without the written approval of MAN Nutzfahrzeuge AG. All rights under
and, in turn, invalidate your operating permit, your insurance the copyright law are strictly reserved by MAN Nutzfahrzeuge AG.
cover and claims due to defects and/or under the purchase Changes require the written approval of MAN Nutzfahrzeuge AG. The
warranty. vehicle manufacturer shall not be liable for any damages attributable to
unauthorised changes made to this Operator’s Manual.
2
Operator’s Manual
Trucknology Generation TGS

without Multifunctional Steering Wheel
81.99187-7562 2nd edition

4
Publications and information relating to your vehicle
PUBLICATIONS AND INFORMATION RELATING TO YOUR VEHICLE
Publications supplied with the vehicle CAUTION Maintenance Record

This is a warning reference. It Authorised service workshops use this record
We supply the following publications with the refers to a danger. to confirm that maintenance work has been
vehicle: These safety instructions warn carried out properly and at the correct intervals.
– Operator’s Manual against possible injury (risk of serious It also includes details of the service products
– Brief Overview or fatal injury). are recommended and approved by MAN. As
– Maintenance Record with inserted Data Card • The instructions provide a result, the Maintenance Record should be
These publications must always be kept close information for avoiding the kept in the vehicle at all times. You will need
to hand in the vehicle so that they are available damage. As a result, you should to submit this whenever making any warranty
to every user. They must be passed on to comply with them carefully. claims.
every owner as they are a necessary part of
the vehicle package. WARNING
Data Card
This is a warning reference. It
This includes, amongst other details:
Information in this Operator’s Manual refers to a danger.
– Vehicle type and vehicle number
These safety instructions warn
– Vehicle identification number (chassis
What is covered in this description against possible damage to property.
number)
All equipment for this series is described, • The instructions provide
– Engine type and number
irrespective of whether it is installed in your information for avoiding the
– The most important units that are installed in
vehicle or not. Some equipment items were not damage. As a result, you should
your vehicle.
available at the time of going to press or were comply with them carefully.
The Data Card is inserted in an inside pocket
only available in certain markets. in the Maintenance Record.
Note
Due to the large number of models available,
These notes provide additional
the figures in this Operator’s Manual may differ Maintenance Manual
information which may prove invaluable.
from your vehicle. You should therefore treat This describes the maintenance work to be
them as basic diagrams. performed on your vehicle.
Further publications relating to your vehicle
The Maintenance Manual is not supplied with
Notes in this Operator’s Manual the vehicle. This can be obtained from any MAN
Basic safety instructions for vehicle operation, Brief Overview
Service workshop.
see “Safe working with the vehicle”, Page 399. The Brief Overview summarises the main
Safety instructions and additional notes are controls in your vehicle.
identified as follows:
5
Publications and information relating to your vehicle
Further information relating to your vehicle more than 3 months. MAN Works Standard M
3069 part 3 offers you useful information in this
Trucknology® mobil – manual for regard.
breakdown assistance/recovery/towing
This manual describes the correct procedures
for towing and recovery. It is intended for
professional recovery companies and is not
supplied with the vehicle. This can be obtained
from any MAN Service workshop.
Guide to Fitting Bodies

Attachments, body components and
conversions must be installed/performed
in accordance with the valid MAN Guide to
Fitting Bodies.
The Guide to Fitting Bodies is not supplied
with the vehicle. It can be viewed online at
www.manted.de or obtained from any MAN
Service workshop.
Attachments, bodies and conversions

Information relating to the vehicle’s
attachments, bodies and conversions can
be found in the documents supplied by
the manufacturer in question. This applies
especially to information regarding operation
and maintenance as well as to the warranty
conditions.
Taking out of operation or putting into

storage
Special measures are required in order to keep
your vehicle in good condition if it is to be
taken out of operation or put into storage for
6
Content
CONTENT
List of abbreviations ............................................ 12 Sockets .......................................................... 56

Sun blind ......................................................... 57
Vehicle identification ............................................ 13 Lighting
Exterior lighting ................................................ 58
Vehicle operation Interior lighting ................................................. 65
Opening and closing doors, central locking Heating, ventilation, air-conditioning system and auxiliary heater
Opening and closing doors from the outside .................... 15 Heating, ventilation and auxiliary air heater ..................... 68
Opening and closing doors from the inside ..................... 16 Air-conditioning system, auxiliary air-conditioning unit
Storage lockers and stowage compartments ...................... 17 and auxiliary air heater ......................................... 74
Driver's and co-driver's seats Roof hatch ..................................................... 81
Static seats, Grammer ......................................... 20 Sliding roof .................................................... 82
Air-sprung comfort seats, Grammer ............................ 22 Auxiliary heaters
Air-sprung comfort and luxury seats, Isringhausen .............. 24 Safety, function and use of auxiliary heaters ................. 84
Co-driver's seat bench and centre seat ......................... 27 Webasto coolant pre-heater ................................. 86
Heated and ventilated seats .................................... 28 Eberspächer coolant pre-heater ............................. 89
Seat belts ........................................................ 29 Auxiliary air heater, Eberspächer ............................. 92
Bunks and shelves behind the seats .............................. 31 On-board service
Adjusting the steering wheel ...................................... 33 Storage box with clipboard ..................................... 95
Survey of controls Running gear
Cab Electronically controlled air suspension (ECAS)
Cab, left-hand drive vehicles ................................. 34 Function of the air suspension ............................... 96
Cab, right-hand drive vehicles ............................... 36 Leaf/air suspension .......................................... 98
Instrument panel ............................................ 38 Air/air suspension .......................................... 100
Switches, buttons and dials .................................. 40 Air-sprung leading and trailing axle ............................ 102
Check lamps ................................................ 42 Steered leading or trailing axle ................................ 107
Displays on the rev counter and speedometer .................... 44 Continuous Damping Control (CDC) ........................... 108
Turn indicators ................................................... 46 BEKA-MAX central lubrication system ......................... 109
Wiping, washing and heating the windscreen ..................... 47 Roof spoiler ..................................................... 110
Opening and closing windows .................................... 49 Opening and closing the front flap ............................... 111
Setting and heating the outside mirrors ........................... 51 Side-impact protection devices .................................. 113
Electric horn, air horn and acoustic reversing warning ............. 53 Tilting the cab forwards and backwards manually ................ 116
Lighting cigarettes ................................................ 55 Tilting the cab forwards and backwards electrically ............... 119
7
Content
Brake systems Power take-offs

Electronic brake system (EBS) ................................ 123 Clutch-dependent power take-offs with manual
Parking brake (handbrake) .................................... 130 gearbox ................................................... 188
Frequent-stop brake .......................................... 133 Engine-dependent power take-off with manual gearbox ..... 191
Anti-jackknife brake Power take-offs with automated gearbox .................... 193
Sustained-action brakes Power take-off with automatic gearbox ...................... 196
Engine brake, MAN PriTarder, Intarder and MAN BrakeMatic PTO on transfer case ....................................... 199
Use, effect and function of the sustained-action brakes ...... 136 Differential locks and transfer case
Non-controlled engine brake ................................ 137 Engaging and disengaging differential locks and the
Controlled engine brake and MAN PriTarder (primary transfer case with all-wheel drive ........................... 201
retarder) .................................................... 138 Differential locks
Intarder (secondary retarder) ............................... 140 Disengaging and engaging differential locks with rear
MAN BrakeMatic ........................................... 142 wheel drive ................................................. 204
Driving Tyre pressure monitoring system
Starting and switching off the engine Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPM) .................... 206
Battery master switch and battery isolator switch ............ 144 Trailer operation
Starting the engine ......................................... 146 Important notes on safety and operation ....................... 208
Important things to remember after starting the engine ...... 148 Rockinger normal hitch system ................................ 212
Starting in an emergency ................................... 151 Ringfeder normal hitch system ................................ 214
Switching off the engine .................................... 152 Ringfeder low hitch system .................................... 217
Switching off the engine in an emergency ................... 153 Rigid drawbar (central axle) trailer ............................. 220
Vehicle speed control functions Semitrailer operation
Cruise control (FGR) and road speed limiter (FGB) .......... 155 Important notes on safety and operation ....................... 225
Lane Guard System Jost fifth wheel coupling ....................................... 231
Lane Guard System (LGS) ................................. 158 Adjustment device for fifth wheel couplings made by Jost ...... 233
Manual gearbox Georg Fischer fifth wheel coupling ............................ 235
MAN ComfortShift and ZF 16 S manual gearbox ............ 160 Georg Fischer dual height fifth wheel coupling ................. 237
Automated gearbox Holland Euro-Hitch fifth wheel coupling ........................ 240
MAN TipMatic 12-speed .................................... 164 Interchangeable bodies
MAN TipMatic 12-speed Fleet .............................. 170 Interchangeable body ......................................... 241
MAN TipMatic 12-speed for all-wheel drive .................. 176 Other equipment
Automatic gearbox Ladder on the cab ............................................ 243
ZF 6 HP automatic gearbox ................................. 182 Breakdown call (HelpCall) ..................................... 245
MAN HydroDrive and differential locks ........................ 185 Axle load display .............................................. 246
8
Content
Snowplough and gritter equipment (mounting plate) ........... 247 Tyres and wheels ............................................. 331
Compressed air in the cab .................................... 249 Changing a wheel ............................................. 334
Tow-starting and towing away ................................... 344
Displays and check lamps Jump starting and start assistance ............................... 347
Displays and messages about the vehicle status ................. 251 Releasing spring-loaded brake cylinders in an emergency ....... 353
Overview of displays and messages ............................. 254 Partially masking the headlights, right-hand/left-hand traffic ...... 354
Vehicle menu ................................................... 288 Changing the engine oil ......................................... 362
Poly-V-belt ...................................................... 363
Regular inspection work and care procedures Fuel system ..................................................... 364
Checking and maintenance points ............................... 293 Electrical system ................................................ 365
Summary of inspection work and care procedures ............... 297 Changing bulbs ................................................. 376
Description of inspection work and care procedures Air filter
Perform the following checks before starting the engine Dry air filter ................................................... 390
Every day before starting the engine ........................ 299
Every week before starting the engine ...................... 304 Cleaning and care
Every month before starting the engine ..................... 306 Cleaning and care of the vehicle ................................. 393
Every six months before starting the engine ................. 308
Perform the following checks after starting the engine Important notes on safety and environmental protection
Every day after starting the engine .......................... 309 Safety
Every week after starting the engine ........................ 312 Safe working with the vehicle ................................. 399
Every month after starting the engine ....................... 313 Environmental protection
After off-road driving ........................................ 314 Disposing of hazardous substances ........................... 403
Safe handling of batteries ..................................... 404
Normal operation
Running in ...................................................... 315 Technical data
Economical driving .............................................. 316 Vehicle designation .............................................. 407
EU monitoring device (tachograph) .............................. 322 Characteristic data, checking and setting values, fill quantities ... 408
Loading the vehicle .............................................. 323
Immobiliser ..................................................... 324
Winter operation ................................................ 325
Off-road driving ................................................. 329
Do-it-yourself jobs
Wheels, tyres, changing wheels
9
Content
10
Abbreviations
ABBREVIATIONS
A EVB Exhaust Valve Brake

A Ampere
ABS Anti-lock Braking System F
ACC Adaptive Cruise Control FAME Fatty Acid Methyl Ester (biodiesel)
ADR Accord pour le transport de matières dangereux par route FBA Parking brake system
(international agreement for the transport of dangerous goods) FFR Vehicle management computer
AGB Automatic road speed limiter FGB Road speed limiter
AGR Exhaust gas recirculation FGR Cruise control
ASA Turning and lane change assistance FIN Vehicle identification number
ASR Anti-Spin Regulator FMI Failure Mode Identification
FWI Flexible maintenance interval
C FWS Flexible maintenance system
CAN Controller Area Network
CC Cruise Control G
CDC Continuous Damping Control GDK Controlled diesel catalytic converter (exhaust gas
CNG Compressed Natural Gas aftertreatment)
CR Common Rail GPS Global Positioning System
CRT Continuously Regenerating Trap GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
GTY Off-board vehicle gateway (radio module)
D GUS Commonwealth of Independent States
DD Direct Drive
DIAG OBDU (On-Board Diagnostic Unit) for complete vehicle H
HGB Maximum speed limiter
E HGS Hydrostatic Gearchange System (no linkage)
EBS Electronic Brake System HYDRO MAN Hydro Drive
ECAM Electronically Controlled Air Management (replaced by PSC)
ECAS Electronically Controlled Air Suspension I
EDC Electronic Diesel Control INST Instrumentation
EFR Electronic shock absorber control (ESAC)
EOL End Of Line K
EPB Electro-Pneumatic Brake K1 Brake circuit 1 (example)
ESP Electronic Stability Program KSC Fuel service centre
11
Abbreviations
KSM Customer-specified module (control unit for external data S

exchange) SBW RA Steer By Wire Rear Axle (electronically controlled steered
trailing axle)
L SML Side Marker Light
LED Light Emitting Diode SPN Suspect Parameter Number
LGS Lane Guard System SW Headlights
LWR Headlight beam regulator
T
M TBM On-board telematics module
MAN CATS MAN Computer-Assisted Test System TCO Tachograph (EU monitoring device)
MFL Multifunction steering wheel TCU Transmission Control Unit (automated manual gearbox)
MTCO Modular tachograph TPM Tyre Pressure Monitor
N U
NLA Trailing axle UDS On-board data logger
NMV Engine-dependent PTO mounted on front of gearbox
V
O V Volt
OBD On-Board Diagnosis VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure (Association of German
OD Overdrive Engineers)
VLA Steered leading axle
P
PDF Diesel particulate filter (exhaust post-treatment) W
PSC Pneumatic System Controller (electronically controlled W Watt
management) WSK Torque converter and clutch system
R Z
RAS Rear Axle Steering ZBR Central on-board computer (body controller)
RDRA Tyre pressure control system ZFR Additional vehicle computer
RET P Primary retarder ZWS Time-based maintenance system
RET S Secondary retarder
RME Rapeseed Methyl Ester
12
Vehicle identification
Vehicle model
MODEL PLATE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE MODEL

NUMBER (FIN/VIN)
The model plate is located on the left-hand door The model number (also referred to as
pillar at the co-driver’s side. the model code index number) contains
The model plate contains the following data: The vehicle identification number (chassis information on the model series and the
– Vehicle identification number (chassis number) is given at the following locations: technical identification of the chassis. The
number) – On the model plate model number is contained in the vehicle
– Vehicle type (model) – On the longitudinal member: identification number, at the 4th to 6th digits,
– Vehicle number – At the front right forward of the front axle e.g. H05.
– Operating permit number or The model number is given at the following
– K-value (exhaust opacimeter reading – At the front right behind the front axle (bar locations:
/particulate emissions value) code) – In the vehicle documents
– Weights, axle loads – In the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle menu”, – On the model plate
Page 288 – In the FIN/VIN number
– In the Data Card inserted in the inside pocket – In the vehicle number
in the Maintenance Record. – In the Data Card inserted in the inside pocket
in the Maintenance Record.
13
Vehicle identification
Engine number
VEHICLE NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER
The engine number can be seen:

– On the Data Card inserted in the inside
pocket in the Maintenance Record
– In the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle menu”,
Page 288.
The vehicle number describes the technical

equipment of a vehicle and can be specified
instead of the vehicle identification number
(FIN/VIN) for all questions relating to the
vehicle’s attachments, bodies and conversions.
It contains the model number (e.g. H05) at the
1st to 3rd digits, followed by a 4-digit tally
number (e.g. 0592).
The vehicle number is given at the following
locations:
– On the longitudinal member at the front right
ahead of the front axle
– In the vehicle documents
– On the Data Card inserted in the inside
pocket in the Maintenance Record
14
Vehicle operation
Opening and closing doors from the outside
OPENING AND CLOSING DOORS, CENTRAL LOCKING
CAUTION The door is unlocked.

Danger of accidents!
Doors that are not closed properly Note
when driving may slam closed or Unlocking one door only unlocks that
swing open, representing a risk of particular door.
trapping and accidents. • Pull the handle 2 and open the door
Therefore:
• Do not drive unless the doors are Closing and locking the door
properly closed. • Swing the door closed with moderate force
• Insert the key 1 into the lock and turn in
direction B
Opening and closing doors from The door is locked.
the outside Locking one door locks the other door as well.
The hazard warning lights flash twice to confirm
Opening and closing with the key that the doors have been locked correctly.
Unlocking and opening the door Extra closing feature

In vehicles with an electrical sliding roof, you
can hold the key 1 in the lock position B (for
more than 2 seconds) to close the sliding roof
as well.
• Insert the key 1 into the lock and turn in

direction A
15
Vehicle operation
Opening and closing doors from the inside
Opening and closing doors from

the inside
Closing and locking the door
Note
Locking and unlocking with the central
locking system is also possible when the
ignition is switched off.
• Swing the door closed with moderate force
• Press the rocker switch 3

The driver’s and co-driver’s doors are locked.
Unlocking and opening the door
• Pull the lever 1

Alternatively
• Press the rocker switch 4
The driver’s door is unlocked.
Alternatively
• Press the rocker switch 4 twice
• Push the lever 1 into the handle recess The driver’s and co-driver’s doors are unlocked.
The door is locked. • Pull the lever 2 and push open the door
Alternatively
Note
If a signal sounds when the driver’s door
is opened, this means the parking brake
has not been applied. Always apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle.
16
Vehicle operation
Storage lockers and stowage compartments
STORAGE LOCKERS AND STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS
Storage lockers in the cab Closing the storage lockers

• Use the loop 4 to pull the storage locker flap 2
Note downwards
The vehicle tool kit is located in the • Carefully press the storage locker flap to
storage locker on the co-driver’s engage the catch
side. The fire extinguisher (special
equipment), the first-aid kit and the
warning light are accessible from inside Stowage compartments and
the cab on the storage locker. drawer in the cab
Opening the storage lockers Stowage compartment

The storage locker on the driver’s side can also
be accessed in the cab through a flap behind • Push the lever under the storage locker flap 2
the driver’s seat. upwards with your finger in the direction of
the arrow 3
Opening the stowage compartment:

• Press lightly against the stowage
compartment 6
• Pull the handle 1 behind the driver’s or Closing the stowage compartment:
co-driver’s seat • Swivel the storage locker flap 2 upwards • Push the stowage compartment closed
The storage locker flap springs open.
Drawer
Opening the drawer:
17
Vehicle operation
• Lift the lever 7 and pull out the drawer Removing the cup holder Opening the storage lockers
Closing the drawer:
• Slide the drawer closed and make sure the
catch engages
WARNING
Danger of damage!
Stepping on the drawer can damage
it.
Therefore:
• Do not step on the drawer
Cup holders in the cab

• Push the cup holder forwards and remove it • Unlock the storage locker 1 with the key
Inserting the cup holder upwards
Storage lockers on the frame

CAUTION
Danger of damage!
• Do not load any storage locker with
more than 100 kg
• Do not cover or seal holes in the
base of the storage locker
• Do not transport any materials
containing acid or solvents or any
flammable or explosive materials • Fold out the T-handle 2 in direction A
• Place the cup holder on the tray 1 and in the storage locker
engage it in the notch 2
Note
The compartments in the storage locker
can be converted to horizontal and
vertical by a MAN Service workshop.
18
Vehicle operation
• Turn the T-handle 2 in direction C

• Pull the T-handle 2 and open the door
Closing the storage lockers
CAUTION
If the T-handle is left sticking out or
the storage locker is left open, it could
strike or catch on people or objects.
Therefore:
• Close the storage locker and fold in
the T-handle in direction B before
setting off
• Close the doors
• Turn the T-handle 2 in direction D
• Fold in the T-handle 2 in direction B
19
Vehicle operation
Static seats, Grammer
DRIVER'S AND CO-DRIVER'S SEATS
• Fasten your seat belt before every

trip
• Do not install child seats onto the
Seat adjustment
seats
CAUTION
Danger of fatal injury! Controls
– Adjusting the seats when driving The full range of controls is described, whether
distracts your attention from the they are fitted or not.
road. Serious accidents can be 1 Setting the seat surface angle
caused. 2 Setting the fore/aft position
– If the seat is not engaged, it may 3 Setting the seat surface height
slip uncontrollably during driving. 4 Setting the backrest angle
This may restrict your ability to
steer and operate the brakes, and
can cause an accident.
– If the seat belt is not fastened
correctly, it cannot reliably function
as a restraint. In an accident, the
driver and co-driver may be thrown
out of their seats.
– These seats are not suitable
for securing child seats. In an
accident, child seats cannot be
reliably restrained.
Therefore:
• Do not adjust the seats unless the
vehicle is stationary
• Make sure you can hear the seat
locking device clip in
20
Vehicle operation
Setting the fore/aft position

• Pull the bar 2 upwards
• Push the seat forwards or backwards
• Release the bar
• Push the seat forwards or backwards until
you hear it engage
Setting the backrest angle

• Take your weight off the backrest
• Pull the lever 4 upwards
• Move the seat to the desired position
• Release the lever when you are in the
desired position
Setting the seat surface angle

• Move the seat to the desired position (adjust
the amount of weight applied to the front area
of the seat surface)
• Release the lever when you are in the
desired position
Setting the seat surface height

• Pull the rear of the lever 3 upwards
• Adjust the amount of weight applied to the
seat until the desired height is attained
• Release the lever
21
Vehicle operation
Air-sprung comfort seats, Grammer
Air-sprung comfort seats, Note

The seat can only be set when there
Grammer
is a load on it and there is at least 7 bar
reservoir pressure in the compressed air
Seat adjustment
system.
CAUTION
Danger of fatal injury! Controls
caused. 2 Setting the arm rests
– If the seat is not engaged, it may 3 Setting the backrest angle
slip uncontrollably during driving. 4 Setting the seat surface height
This may restrict your ability to 5 Setting the vertical damper (soft/hard)
steer and operate the brakes, and 6 Quick lowering facility (facilitates getting
can cause an accident. in and out)
– If the seat belt is not fastened 7 Setting the rest position
correctly, it cannot reliably function 8 Setting the fore/aft position
out of their seats.
Therefore:
trip
seats
22
Vehicle operation
Air-sprung comfort seats, Grammer
Setting the seat surface angle Setting the vertical damper (soft/hard) • Fold the bottom bunk upwards, see “Bunks
• Pull the lever 1 upwards Setting the damper makes it possible to adapt and shelves behind the seats”, Page 31
• Move the seat to the desired position (adjust the cushioning properties of the seat optimally • Push the lever 7 downwards and, at the same
the amount of weight applied to the front area for any carriageway and any driver. time, pull the bar 8 upwards
of the seat surface) • Move the lever 5 to the left or right • Push the seat back as far as the stop
• Release the lever when you are in the • Release the lever and the bar
desired position Quick lowering facility (facilitates getting • Push the seat forwards or backwards until
in and out) you hear it engage
Setting the arm rests Raising and lowering the seat facilitates getting
The arm rests fold up and down and can be in and out. Setting the driving position
tilted to any angle in between. After getting in: • Push the lever 7 downwards and, at the same
Setting lower: • Press the pushbutton 6 (pushbutton time, pull the bar 8 upwards
• Turn the knurled screw 2 to the left disengages) • Push the seat forwards
Setting higher: The seat is raised to the driving position. • Release the lever and the bar
• Turn the knurled screw 2 to the right Before getting out: • Push the seat forwards or backwards until
Fold up the arm rest when sitting down on or • Press the pushbutton 6 (pushbutton you hear it engage
getting up from the seat. engages)
The seat is lowered. Setting the fore/aft position
Setting the backrest angle • Pull the bar 8 upwards
• Take your weight off the backrest Setting the reclined position • Push the seat forwards or backwards
• Pull the lever 3 upwards • Release the bar
WARNING
• Move the seat to the desired position • Push the seat forwards or backwards until
• Release the lever when you are in the you hear it engage
desired position In the reclined position, the seat is
pushed back as far as the stop.
Setting the seat surface height It is then no longer possible to
• Pull the rear of the lever 4 upwards reach the pedals and the steering
The seat is raised. wheel reliably, or to see backwards
• Push the rear of the lever 4 downwards adequately using the rear view mirror.
The seat is lowered. Therefore:
• Release the lever when the desired height is • Always move the seat to the
reached driving position before starting to
drive
23
Vehicle operation
Air-sprung comfort and luxury seats, Isringhausen
Air-sprung comfort and luxury Note

The seat can only be set when there
seats, Isringhausen
is a load on it and there is at least 7 bar
reservoir pressure in the compressed air
Seat adjustment
system.
CAUTION
Danger of fatal injury! Controls on the seat
caused. 2 Setting the depth of the seat cushion
– If the seat is not engaged, it may 3 Setting the horizontal cushioning
slip uncontrollably during driving. 4 Setting the arm rests
This may restrict your ability to 5 Setting the angle of the top part of the
steer and operate the brakes, and backrest
can cause an accident. 6 Setting the backrest angle
– If the seat belt is not fastened 7 Setting the lumbar support and lateral
correctly, it cannot reliably function support
as a restraint. In an accident, the 8 Setting the seat surface height
driver and co-driver may be thrown 9 Setting the vertical damper (soft/hard)
out of their seats. 10 Quick lowering facility (facilitates getting
– These seats are not suitable in and out)
for securing child seats. In an 11 Setting the reclined position
accident, child seats cannot be 12 Setting the fore/aft position
Therefore:
trip
seats
24
Vehicle operation
Setting the fore/aft position The seat is raised. Setting the depth of the seat cushion
• Pull the bar 12 upwards • Push the lever 8 downwards • Pull the lever 2 upwards
• Push the seat forwards or backwards The seat is lowered. • Push the seat cushion into the desired
• Release the bar position
• Push the seat forwards or backwards until Quick lowering facility (facilitates getting • Release the lever
you hear it engage in and out) • Push the seat cushion forwards or
Raising and lowering the seat facilitates getting backwards until you hear it engage
Setting the angle of the entire backrest in and out.
• Take your weight off the backrest After getting in: Setting the horizontal cushioning
• Pull the lever 6 upwards • Push the pushbutton 10 upwards Horizontal cushioning on:
• Move the seat to the desired position The seat is raised to the driving position. • Turn the lever 3
• Release the lever when you are in the Before getting out: Horizontal cushioning off (blocked):
desired position • Push the pushbutton 10 downwards • Pull the lever upwards
The seat is lowered.
Setting the angle of the top part of the Setting the lumbar support and lateral
backrest Setting the vertical damper (soft/hard) support
• Take your weight off the backrest Setting the damper makes it possible to adapt The air chambers in the backrest can be inflated
• Pull the lever 5 upwards the cushioning properties of the seat optimally and deflated independently of one another. This
• Move the seat to the desired position for any carriageway and any driver. means the contour of the backrest adapts to the
• Release the lever when you are in the Setting maximum cushioning: shape of your body.
desired position • Move the lever 9 upwards Making the lumbar support firmer (admitting
Setting minimum cushioning: air):
Setting the seat surface angle • Move the lever 9 downwards • Press the front or middle button 7 to +
• Pull the lever 1 upwards Making the lumbar support softer (venting air):
• Move the seat to the desired position (adjust Setting the arm rests • Press the front or middle button 7 to –
the amount of weight applied to the front area The arm rests fold up and down and can be Making the lateral support firmer (admitting air):
of the seat surface) tilted to any angle in between. • Press the rear button 7 to +
• Release the lever when you are in the Setting lower: Making the lateral support softer (venting air):
desired position • Turn the knurled screw 4 to the left • Press the rear button 7 to –
Setting higher:
Setting the seat surface height • Turn the knurled screw 4 to the right
The height of the seat surface is infinitely Fold up the arm rest when sitting down on or
variable. getting up from the seat.
25
Vehicle operation
Reclined position
WARNING
In the reclined position, the seat is
pushed back as far as the stop.
It is then no longer possible to
reach the pedals and the steering
wheel reliably, or to see backwards
adequately using the rear view mirror.
Therefore:
• Always move the seat to the
driving position before starting to
drive
Setting the reclined position:
• Fold the bottom bunk upwards, see “Bunks
and shelves behind the seats”, Page 31
• Pull the bars 12 and 11 upwards at the same
time
• Push the seat back as far as the stop
• Release the bar
you hear it engage
Setting the driving position:
• Pull the bars 12 and 11 upwards at the same
time
• Push the seat forwards
• Release the bars
you hear it engage
26
Vehicle operation
Co-driver's seat bench and centre seat
Co-driver's seat bench and centre Therefore:

• Do not fold down the backrest or
seat
fold up the seats unless the vehicle
is stationary
Description
• Make sure you can hear the
The position of the individual seats on the backrest clip in
co-driver's seat bench for 2 people and the • Fasten your seat belt before every
co-driver's centre seat is not adjustable. trip
The backrest of the centre seat on the seat • Do not install child seats onto the
bench and the individual centre seat can be seats
folded forwards to provide a writing surface and The individual co-driver's centre seat is not
bottle holder and to allow access to the bunks. illustrated.
There is stowage space available beneath the
seat bench seats. Folding down the backrest
CAUTION Folding the backrest forward

Danger of fatal injury! • Push the lever 1 backwards
– Folding down the backrest and • Fold the backrest forwards until you hear it
folding up the seats whilst driving clip in
distract you from the road. Serious
accidents can be caused. Folding up the backrest
– If the backrest is not engaged, it • Push the lever 1 backwards
may fold forwards during driving. It • Fold the backrest up until you hear it clip in
cannot then function reliably as a
restraint during braking. Folding the seats up
– If the seat belt is not fastened
correctly, it cannot reliably function • Raise the seats at the front
out of their seats.
27
Vehicle operation
Heated and ventilated seats
Heated and ventilated seats Switching off the seat heating:

• Turn the dial to position 0
CAUTION
Danger of damage! Temperature control
The seat may get very hot if no-one
is sitting on it. Danger of burns! Seat heating
Therefore:
• Switch off the seat heating before
leaving the seat
Note
Do not switch the seat heating on for
longer than absolutely necessary when
the engine is not running! Otherwise the
battery may be run flat. It will then no
longer be possible to start the engine.
Seat heating
Switching on the seat heating:

• Switch on the ignition
• Turn the dial upwards
Switching off the seat heating:
• Turn the dial to position 0
Seat ventilation
Switching on the seat ventilation:
• Turn the dial downwards
When the seat ventilation is switched on, there
may be a slight noise and a gentle air flow.
Switching on the seat heating: Switching off the seat ventilation:
• Switch on the ignition • Turn the dial to position 0
• Turn the dial downwards
28
Vehicle operation
Seat belts
SEAT BELTS
Special note – Do not place the seat belt over hard or fragile • Press the buckle latch into the seat belt catch
objects in your clothing, such as ball-point until you hear it engage
CAUTION pens or spectacles. The belt must fit snugly around your torso and
Danger of fatal injury! – Re-tighten your seat belt at frequent intervals lap!
If the seat belt is not fastened when driving by pulling at the shoulder belt.
correctly, it cannot reliably function – Always keep the seat belts clean and dry.
as a restraint. In an accident, the – Fit new seat belts to replace any that have
Adjusting the belt height for static
driver and co-driver may be thrown been damaged or severely strained in an seats
out of their seats. accident. Have the belt anchorages checked
Therefore: at a MAN Service workshop. • Adjust the driver’s and co-driver’s seat, see
• Fasten your seat belt before every – Do not make any modifications to seat belts. “Driver's and co-driver's seats”, Page 20
trip, even when driving in town – Comply with the national regulations in force
– The seat belts can only offer optimum in the country in which you are operating.
protection if the seat back is almost upright,
see “Driver's and co-driver's seats”, Page 20.
Putting on your seat belt
– Sit with your back against the seat back
and the seat belt fitting snugly in the area
• Smoothly pull the belt with its buckle latch
between your neck and shoulder.
over your shoulder and over your lap
– The shoulder belt must run approximately
along the middle of your shoulder – never
across your throat!
– Only one person is allowed to be secured
with one seat belt.
– The seat belt must not be twisted and must • Press the button 2 and move the belt height
lie snugly against your body! adjuster 1 up or down so the shoulder belt
– The lap belt must always fit snugly and run passes approximately over the middle of
across the base of your lap – not across your your shoulder – never across your throat!
stomach! • Release the button 2
– Do not move the seat to positions in which • Make sure you hear belt height adjuster 1
it is impossible to have the seat belt fit you clip in
correctly!
29
Vehicle operation
Seat belts
Unfastening the seat belt
• Press the red button on the catch

• Hold the buckle latch until the seat belt has
retracted of its own accord
Warning if seat belt is not worn
After the ignition is switched on, the “Seat belt

check” check lamp remains lit until the driver
has put on the seat belt.
A warning signal sounds if the driver drives the
vehicle at more than approx. 15 km/h without
wearing a seat belt. The warning sound stops:
– after approx. 2 minutes or
– once the driver has put on the seat belt or
– once the vehicle has been braked to a halt
30
Vehicle operation
Bunks and shelves behind the seats
BUNKS AND SHELVES BEHIND THE SEATS
Removing and securing the jack Shelf and provisional bunk • Swivel the provisional bunk 1 forwards until
you can hear the provisional bunk engage
Removing the jack Opening
CAUTION
Danger of injury!
Loose objects may be thrown off the
shelf in the event of an accident or
emergency braking.
Injuries and damage to the vehicle
can be caused.
Therefore:
• Remove loose objects from the
shelf before driving
• Push the driver’s and co-driver’s seats
forwards and fold the backrests forwards, • Fold the top cushion 2 over to the front
• Open the Velcro fastener 3 see “Driver's and co-driver's seats”, Page 20 The provisional bunk is set up.
• Remove the warning light 4 and first-aid kit 5 • Remove objects and the rubber mat from the
• Unscrew the wing screw 2 shelf Folding away
• Remove the jack • Fold over the cushion 2
Securing the jack

• Insert the jack into the holder 7 whilst pushing
the foot of the jack under the guide 6
• Close the holder 7
• Screw in the wing screw 2
• Secure the warning light 4 and first-aid kit 5
with the Velcro fastener 3
31
Vehicle operation
Bunks and shelves behind the seats
On both sides:
• Press the lever 3 upwards until you can hear
it engage
• Fold the shelf 1 over backwards
• Place the rubber mat in the shelf
• Adjust the driver’s and co-driver’s seat, see
“Driver's and co-driver's seats”, Page 20
Shelf
CAUTION
Danger of injury!
Loose objects may be thrown off the
shelf in the event of an accident or
emergency braking.
Injuries and damage to the vehicle
can be caused.
Therefore:
• Remove loose objects from the
shelf before driving
32
Vehicle operation
Adjusting the steering wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
– There must be sufficient reservoir pressure in The steering wheel is locked faster.
the compressed air system in order to adjust
the steering wheel.
– First adjust the driver’s seat, see “Driver's
and co-driver's seats”, Page 20, then adapt
the steering wheel to the changed seat
position.
CAUTION
Adjusting the steering wheel when
driving distracts your attention from
the road. Serious accidents can be • Press the top of the rocker button 1
caused.
Therefore:
• Do not adjust the steering wheel
unless the vehicle is at a standstill
and the parking brake applied.
CAUTION
It is no longer possible to steer safely
when the steering wheel is folded
fully forwards.
Therefore:
• Only fold the steering wheel fully
forwards when getting into and out • Set the rake and reach of the steering wheel
of the vehicle • Release the rocker button
The steering wheel is locked again after approx.
5 seconds.
Alternatively
• Press the bottom of the rocker button 1
33
Vehicle operation
Cab, left-hand drive vehicles
SURVEY OF CONTROLS
Cab 9 Interior lighting, see “Interior lighting”, – Rotary switch for differential locks and
Page 65 transfer case, see “Differential locks
Cab, left-hand drive vehicles 10 Sustained-action brake, see and transfer case”, Page 201
1 – Central locking, see “Opening and “Sustained-action brakes”, Page 136 21 Rocker button for adjusting steering
closing doors, central locking”, 11 – Cruise control and road speed limiter, wheel
Page 15 see “Vehicle speed control functions”, 22 Ignition lock, see “Starting the engine”,
– Electric window lifters, see “Opening Page 155 Page 146
and closing windows”, Page 49 – Semiautomatic gearbox, see 23 Front flap release lever, see “Opening
– Outside mirror, see “Setting and “Automated gearbox”, Page 164 and closing the front flap”, Page 111
heating the outside mirrors”, Page 51 12 Audio system, navigation, see separate 24 – Parking lights and headlight low beam
2 MAN Truckphone, see separate operator's manual – Fog lamps and rear fog lamp
operator's manual, or mobile phone 13 Glasses compartment see “Exterior lighting”, Page 58
preparation 14 – Heating and ventilation, see “Heating, 25 Door handle and door lock, see “Opening
3 Air nozzle on the side window ventilation and auxiliary air heater”, and closing doors, central locking”,
4 – Turn indicators, see “Turn indicators”, Page 68 Page 15
Page 46 – Air-conditioning system, auxiliary
– Headlight high beam and headlight air-conditioning unit and auxiliary air
flash, see “Exterior lighting”, Page 58 heater, see “Air-conditioning system,
– Electric horn and air horn, see “Electric auxiliary air-conditioning unit and
horn, air horn and acoustic reversing auxiliary air heater”, Page 74
warning”, Page 53 15 Central air nozzles
– Windscreen wipers and washers, see 16 Fuses and relays, see “Electrical
“Wiping, washing and heating the system”, Page 365
windscreen”, Page 47 17 Sockets, see “Sockets”, Page 56
5 Space for additional devices, e.g. 18 Cigarette lighter and ashtray, see
electronic toll system “Lighting cigarettes”, Page 55
6 Steering wheel 19 Drawer
7 Instrument panel, see “Instrument panel”, 20 – Rocker switch, emergency off switch
Page 38 and dial, see “Switches, buttons and
8 EU monitoring device (tachograph), see dials”, Page 40
manufacturer’s operating instructions
34
Vehicle operation
Cab, left-hand drive vehicles
35
Vehicle operation
Cab, right-hand drive vehicles
Cab, right-hand drive vehicles – Electric horn and air horn, see “Electric 23 Front flap release lever, see “Opening
1 – Central locking, see “Opening and horn, air horn and acoustic reversing and closing the front flap”, Page 111
closing doors, central locking”, warning”, Page 53 24 – Parking lights and headlight low beam
Page 15 – Windscreen wipers and washers, see – Fog lamps and rear fog lamp
– Electric window lifters, see “Opening “Wiping, washing and heating the see “Exterior lighting”, Page 58
and closing windows”, Page 49 windscreen”, Page 47 25 Door handle and door lock, see “Opening
– Outside mirror, see “Setting and 12 Audio system, navigation, see separate and closing doors, central locking”,
heating the outside mirrors”, Page 51 operator's manual Page 15
2 MAN Truckphone, see separate 13 Glasses compartment
operator's manual, or mobile phone 14 – Heating and ventilation, see “Heating,
preparation ventilation and auxiliary air heater”,
3 Air nozzle on the side window Page 68
4 – Cruise control and road speed limiter, – Air-conditioning system, auxiliary
see “Vehicle speed control functions”, air-conditioning unit and auxiliary air
Page 155 heater, see “Air-conditioning system,
– Semiautomatic gearbox, see auxiliary air-conditioning unit and
“Automated gearbox”, Page 164 auxiliary air heater”, Page 74
5 Sustained-action brake, see 15 Central air nozzles
“Sustained-action brakes”, Page 136 16 Fuses and relays, see “Electrical
6 Space for additional devices, e.g. system”, Page 365
electronic toll system 17 Sockets, see “Sockets”, Page 56
7 Steering wheel 18 Cigarette lighter and ashtray, see
8 Instrument panel, see “Instrument panel”, “Lighting cigarettes”, Page 55
Page 38 19 Drawer
9 EU monitoring device (tachograph), see 20 – Rocker switch, emergency off switch
manufacturer’s operating instructions and dial, see “Switches, buttons and
10 Interior lighting, see “Interior lighting”, dials”, Page 40
Page 65 – Rotary switch for differential locks and
11 – Turn indicators, see “Turn indicators”, transfer case, see “Differential locks
Page 46 and transfer case”, Page 201
– Headlight high beam and headlight 21 Rocker button for adjusting steering
flash, see “Exterior lighting”, Page 58 wheel
22 Ignition lock, see “Starting the engine”,
Page 146
36
Vehicle operation
Cab, right-hand drive vehicles
37
Vehicle operation
Instrument panel
Instrument panel 8 – Time 17 Select language, see “Vehicle menu”,

– Trip counter Page 288
Instrument panel, Euro 4 – Speed [mph] 18 Fuel gauge
see “Displays on the rev counter and
1 Rev counter, see “Important things to speedometer”, Page 44
remember after starting the engine”, 9 Warning speed, see “Displays on the rev Instrument panel, Euro 5
Page 148 counter and speedometer”, Page 44
2 – Outside temperature See detailed illustration for differences
10 Display of reservoir pressure in brake
– Black ice warning compared to Euro 4 instrument panel.
circuit II, see “Electronic brake system
– Total mileage (EBS)”, Page 123 19 Gauge for reducing agent (AdBlue)
see “Displays on the rev counter and 11 – Yellow messages on display, see 20 Reservoir pressure in brake circuits I
speedometer”, Page 44 “Displays and messages about the and II, see “Electronic brake system
3 Turn indicators in tractor vehicle vehicle status”, Page 251 (EBS)”, Page 123
4 Display, see “Displays and messages – Trip odometer or speed in mph, see
about the vehicle status”, Page 251, see “Displays on the rev counter and
“Overview of displays and messages”, speedometer”, Page 44
Page 254, see “Vehicle menu”, – Vehicle menu see “Vehicle menu”,
Page 288 Page 288
5 Check lamps, see “Check lamps”, 12 – Yellow messages on display, see
Page 42, see “Displays and messages “Displays and messages about the
about the vehicle status”, Page 251, see vehicle status”, Page 251
“Overview of displays and messages”, – Vehicle menu see “Vehicle menu”,
Page 254 and see “Exterior lighting”, Page 288
Page 58 13 Reservoir pressure in brake circuit I,
6 Sensor for automatically adjusting the see “Electronic brake system (EBS)”,
brightness of the instrument lighting and Page 123
the EU monitoring device display, see 14 Differential locks, see “MAN HydroDrive
“Interior lighting”, Page 65 and differential locks”, Page 185 and see
7 Speedometer, see “Starting the engine”, “Differential locks and transfer case”,
Page 146 Page 201
15 Coolant temperature, see “Overview of
displays and messages”, Page 254
16 Instrument lighting, see “Interior
lighting”, Page 65
38
Vehicle operation
Instrument panel
39
Vehicle operation
Switches, buttons and dials
Switches, buttons and dials Symbol Description Symbol Description

– Yellow messages on display, see MAN BrakeMatic in vehicle with
Symbol Description “Displays and messages about non-controlled engine brake, see
Hazard warning lights, see “Exterior the vehicle status”, Page 251 “Use, effect and function of the
lighting”, Page 58 – Vehicle menu see “Vehicle menu”, sustained-action brakes”, Page 136
Emergency off switch, see Page 288 and see “MAN BrakeMatic”,
“Switching off the engine in an – Yellow messages on display, see Page 142
emergency”, Page 153 “Displays and messages about MAN BrakeMatic in vehicle with
Battery isolator switch, see “Battery the vehicle status”, Page 251 controlled engine brake, MAN
master switch and battery isolator – Trip odometer or speed in mph, PriTarder and Intarder, see
switch”, Page 144 see “Displays on the rev counter “Use, effect and function of the
Parking light, see “Exterior lighting”, and speedometer”, Page 44 sustained-action brakes”, Page 136
Page 58 – Vehicle menu see “Vehicle menu”, and see “MAN BrakeMatic”,
Headlight low beam, see “Exterior Page 288 Page 142
lighting”, Page 58 Window lifters on driver’s and Trailing axle, see “Air-sprung
Headlight high beam, see “Exterior co-driver’s sides, see “Opening leading and trailing axle”, Page 102
lighting”, Page 58 and closing windows”, Page 49 Leading axle, see “Air-sprung
Rear fog lamp, see “Exterior Seat heating and ventilation, see leading and trailing axle”, Page 102
lighting”, Page 58 “Heated and ventilated seats”, Trailing axle, starting-traction
Fog lamps and rear fog lamp, see Page 28 control, see “Air-sprung leading
“Exterior lighting”, Page 58 Seat heating, see “Heated and and trailing axle”, Page 102
ventilated seats”, Page 28 Leading axle, starting-traction
Headlight beam regulator, see
Night lighting in roof, see “Interior control, see “Air-sprung leading
“Exterior lighting”, Page 58
lighting”, Page 65 and trailing axle”, Page 102
Changing over from road speed Trailing axle of trailer or semitrailer,
limiter to cruise control and vice – Interior lighting in roof, see see manufacturer’s operating
versa, see “Vehicle speed control “Interior lighting”, Page 65 (centre instructions
functions”, Page 155 console) Trailing axle of trailer or semitrailer,
Select language, see “Vehicle Windscreen heating, see “Wiping, see manufacturer’s operating
menu”, Page 288 washing and heating the instructions for starting-traction
Instrument lighting, see “Interior windscreen”, Page 47 control
lighting”, Page 65 Sliding roof, see “Sliding roof”, Air suspension, see “Electronically
Page 82 controlled air suspension (ECAS)”,
Page 96
40
Vehicle operation
Switches, buttons and dials
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description

Raising the spin threshold, see Liftgate, see the operating Changing between the electric horn
“Electronic brake system (EBS)”, instructions provided by the body and air horn, see “Electric horn,
Page 123 manufacturer air horn and acoustic reversing
Raising the spin threshold, see Light test, see “Exterior lighting”, warning”, Page 53
“Electronic brake system (EBS)”, Page 58 Warning sound when reversing,
Page 123 Headlight cleaning system, see night lowering, see “Electric horn,
Frequent-stop brake, see “Exterior lighting”, Page 58 air horn and acoustic reversing
“Frequent-stop brake”, Page 133 warning”, Page 53
– Working spotlight
Power take-off I, see “Power – Cargo space lighting Deactivate warning sound when
take-offs”, Page 188 reversing, see “Electric horn,
see “Exterior lighting”, Page 58
Power take-off II, see “Power Cargo space lighting, see “Exterior air horn and acoustic reversing
take-offs”, Page 188 lighting”, Page 58 warning”, Page 53
Power take-off III, see “Power Priority vehicle light(s), see “Exterior Breakdown call, see “Breakdown
take-offs”, Page 188 lighting”, Page 58 call (HelpCall)”, Page 245
Engine-dependent PTO, see “Power Priority vehicle light, see “Exterior LGS, Lane Guard System, see
take-offs”, Page 188 lighting”, Page 58 “Lane Guard System”, Page 158
Low hitch system, see “Important Winter service, see “Exterior Continuous Damping Control
notes on safety and operation”, lighting”, Page 58 (CDC), see “Continuous Damping
Page 208 – Manoeuvring light Control (CDC)”, Page 108
Tractor vehicle body cooling, see the – Additional working light Transverse lock(s) on rear axle(s),
operating instructions provided by (manoeuvring light) see “Differential locks”, Page 204
the body manufacturer see “Exterior lighting”, Page 58 Interaxle lock on rear axle, see
Trailer body cooling, see the Additional marker light for trailer “Differential locks”, Page 204
operating instructions provided operation (GUS), see “Exterior Adjust the steering wheel, see
by the body manufacturer lighting”, Page 58 “Adjusting the steering wheel”,
Defrost tractor vehicle body cooling, Cab tilt mechanism, see “Tilting Page 33
see the operating instructions the cab forwards and backwards
provided by the body manufacturer electrically”, Page 119
Defrost trailer body cooling, see the Central lubrication system, see
operating instructions provided by “BEKA-MAX central lubrication
the body manufacturer system”, Page 109
41
Vehicle operation
Check lamps
Check lamps Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Interaxle lock on rear axle Air filter
Check lamps on the instrument panel
Electronically controlled air
suspension (ECAS) Trailer ABS
Description of meanings, see “Displays and
messages about the vehicle status”, Page 251 Brake system Emergency off fault
and see “Overview of displays and messages”,
Page 254. Parking brake Turn indicators on tractor vehicle
Symbol Meaning Turn indicators on trailer

Flame start
Central warning light Tyre pressure monitoring system
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (TPM)
Digital EU monitoring device, see
Lane Guard System (LGS)
Anti-spin regulator (ASR) operating instructions for the EU
monitoring device
Seat belt check Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Off-road gear, transfer case
Tipper operation (see the operating
Fuel filter heater
instructions provided by the body Neutral position, transfer case
manufacturer)
Steering, trailing axle Liftgate (see the operating Fuel level
Hydraulic system instructions provided by the body
manufacturer)
Exhaust check
Engine oil pressure
Windscreen washers Charge check
Cab lock
Starting-traction control for
Scandinavia Headlight low beam (driving lights)
Rocker switch and dial check lamps
Gearbox High beam
Symbol Significance
Engine Fog lamp Frequent-stop brake, see
“Frequent-stop brake”, Page 133
Rear axle transverse locks Rear fog lamp
42
Vehicle operation
Check lamps
Symbol Significance
Ringfeder low hitch system, see
“Ringfeder low hitch system”,
Page 217
Tractor vehicle body cooling, see
the operating instructions provided
by the body manufacturer
Trailer body cooling, see the
operating instructions provided
by the body manufacturer
Defrost tractor vehicle body
cooling, see the operating
instructions provided by the body
manufacturer
Defrost trailer body cooling, see the
operating instructions provided by
the body manufacturer
43
Vehicle operation
Displays on the rev counter and speedometer
DISPLAYS ON THE REV COUNTER AND SPEEDOMETER
Displays on the rev counter Total mileage

The total mileage 1 is displayed in kilometres.
Outside temperature
Speedometer displays
Changing over between trip odometer and

speed in mph
The central warning light lights up yellow and

an acoustic signal sounds.
CAUTION
The outside temperature 3 is displayed in °C. Danger of accidents!
When the vehicle is at a standstill or driving The road surface may already be icy
very slowly, the displayed outside temperature even though the outside temperature
may be slightly higher than the actual outside is a few degrees warmer than 0°C.
temperature, due to the heat radiated by the This means the outside temperature
display cannot detect the presence of Changing the display 4 between trip odometer
engine and the auxiliary heater.
and speed in mph:
black ice, and therefore cannot give
Black ice warning a black ice warning ahead of a bridge
The black ice warning 2 is triggered at between or wooded lane even if the bridge or
-5 °C and +8 °C when the outside temperature wooded lane is icy.
is rising or between +3 °C and -10 °C when the Therefore:
outside temperature is falling and the vehicle is • Adjust your driving to take account
being driven at a speed in excess of 10 km/h. of the weather conditions
44
Vehicle operation
Displays on the rev counter and speedometer
Therefore:
• Only set the time when the vehicle
is at a standstill.
Setting the time (hour display only):
• Apply the parking brake
• Call up the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle
menu”, Page 288.
• Select the “Vehicle” menu item
• Select the “Settings” menu item
• Select the “Set time” menu item
Note
• Press the button briefly
When the time is set on the EU
The display changes over every time the button
monitoring device, the time on the
is pressed briefly.
rev counter display is automatically set
The button used for changing the display 4 is
as well.
the same as the one used for clearing a yellow
message on the display, see “Displays and
messages about the vehicle status”, Page 251. Warning speed
When the individually set warning speed is
Zeroing the trip odometer display exceeded, the “Warning speed” indicator 6
• Long button press comes on.
The factory-set warning speed is 60 km/h.
Time Setting the warning speed:
The time 5 is displayed in “24-hour format”. • Call up the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle
menu”, Page 288.
CAUTION • Select the “Vehicle” menu item
Danger of accidents! • Select the “Settings” menu item
Do not set the clock unless the • Select the “Warning speed” menu item
vehicle is at a standstill.
Otherwise, you will be distracted from
the traffic. Accidents may result if
you brake too late or veer off the
carriageway.
45
Vehicle operation
Turn indicators
TURN INDICATORS
Prolonged flashing The turn indicator on the right-hand side of the The turn indicator switches off.
vehicle flashes.
Left-hand turn indicators When the steering wheel has returned to the
straight-ahead position, the steering column
Symbols on the display
stalk automatically springs back to position 0.
Alternatively
• Press the steering column stalk beyond the
pressure point A to position 0
The turn indicator switches off.
Brief flashing
Left-hand turn indicators

• Press the steering column stalk up to the
pressure point C and hold it there
• Press the steering column stalk downwards The turn indicator on the left-hand side of the
beyond the pressure point C to position D vehicle flashes. 1 Flashing left
The turn indicator on the left-hand side of the • Release the steering column stalk, the 2 Flashing right
vehicle flashes. steering column stalk springs back to 3 Flashing in trailer
When the steering wheel has returned to the position 0
straight-ahead position, the steering column The turn indicator switches off.
stalk automatically springs back to position 0.
Alternatively Right-hand turn indicators
• Press the steering column stalk past the • Press the steering column stalk up to the
pressure point C to position 0 pressure point A and hold it there
The turn indicator switches off. The turn indicator on the right-hand side of the
vehicle flashes.
Right-hand turn indicators • Release the steering column stalk, the
• Press the steering column stalk upwards steering column stalk springs back to
beyond the pressure point A to position B position 0
46
Vehicle operation
Wiping, washing and heating the windscreen
WIPING, WASHING AND HEATING THE WINDSCREEN
Wiping Stage A: Intermittent wipe Washing

Stage B: Slow wipe
CAUTION Stage C: Fast wipe Washing and wiping once:
Danger of injury! • Briefly press the end of the stalk 1 up to the
Risk of injury when cleaning the stop
windscreen from outside.
Setting the intermittent wipe time
Washing and wiping for as long as the end
Therefore: of the stalk is pressed, followed by another 3
Default setting
• Switch off the windscreen wipers wipes:
When the vehicle is stationary, the wipers
• Briefly press the end of the stalk 1 up to the
Note operate about every 10 seconds.
stop and hold it there
Check that the wiper blades are not The intermittent wipe time can be set between
frozen to the windscreen before setting approx. 2.5 and max. 60 seconds.
off in frosty weather. The intermittent wipe time depends on the Heating
vehicle’s speed during driving. The higher the
speed the lower the intermittent wipe time. Switching on
Switch on the windscreen heating when the
Setting another intermittent wipe time windscreen is icy or misted over.
• Briefly turn the end of the stalk 1 to stage A The windscreen heating only functions when
• Turn the end of the stalk back to stage 0 the engine is running.
and then • Start the engine
• Turn the end of the stalk back to stage A
The time you kept the end of the stalk in stage 0
corresponds to the new intermittent wipe time
(max. 60 seconds).
The windscreen wipers wipe with the
intermittent wipe time.
• Turn the end 1 of the steering column stalk in
the direction of the arrow and select the Note
desired wiping speed The intermittent wipe time reverts to
The end of the stalk engages at each stage. approx. 10 seconds (default) when the
Stage 0: Off (rest position of the windscreen ignition is switched off.
wipers)
47
Vehicle operation
Wiping, washing and heating the windscreen
• Press the top of the rocker switch

The check lamp in the switch lights up yellow.
Switching off
• Press the bottom of the rocker switch
The check lamp in the switch goes out.
48
Vehicle operation
Opening and closing windows
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS
Safety Electric window lifters in the doors • Pull and hold the rocker buttons 2 and 3 until
the door window reaches the desired position
MAN does everything technically possible Opening the door window partly or fully or is closed
to prevent inappropriate behaviour with Alternatively
inflammable objects and liquids. • Briefly press the rocker buttons
The door windows close fully.
CAUTION
Danger of accidents/risk of fire!
Do not throw out waste as this Electric window lifters in the centre
pollutes the environment and can console
endanger other people.
– The waste is a hazard to other road
users such as motorcyclists and
drivers of convertibles.
– Glowing tobacco residue (e.g.
cigarette butts) can cause forest
fires and vehicle fires. • Switch on the ignition
Therefore: • Press and hold the rocker buttons 2 and 3
• Do not throw any objects out of the until the door window reaches the desired
window position
Alternatively
CAUTION • Briefly press the rocker buttons
Danger of accidents! The door windows open fully.
• Make sure no-one gets trapped by The opening movement of the door window Opening the window:
the closing window can be stopped in any position by pressing the • Press the bottom of the rocker button
rocker button again. Closing the window:
• Press the top of the rocker button
Closing the door window partly or fully The windows can be opened and closed even
It is also possible to close the windows when when the ignition is switched off.
the battery master switch or isolator switch is
switched off.
49
Vehicle operation
Opening and closing windows
Note If the closing force exceeds a certain value

When the vehicle is locked from outside, again, the closing is stopped without lowering
the rocker buttons for the door windows the window.
are deactivated. The window can now be closed without
They can be reactivated by switching on anti-trap protection within about 10 seconds:
the ignition or using the rocker buttons 1 • Remove the obstacle from the window
or 4. • Press the rocker button again
Anti-trap protection
If the closing force exceeds a certain value

whilst the window is closing (e.g. due to an
obstacle), the closing movement is stopped
immediately and the window is reopened a little.
This allows any obstacles to be removed from
the window.
CAUTION
Danger of injury!
In certain cases where the closing
force is not quite reached, it is not
certain that the closing movement
will be stopped despite the anti-trap
protection, e.g. in the case of thin
objects.
Therefore:
• Ensure that the window closing
area is free from objects
Closing the window within about 10 seconds:
• Remove the obstacle from the window
• Press the rocker button again
50
Vehicle operation
Setting and heating the outside mirrors
SETTING AND HEATING THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS
CAUTION Adjusting the mirrors

Do not set the outside mirrors unless Selecting the left- or right-hand side of the
the vehicle is at a standstill. vehicle
Otherwise, you will be distracted from • Switch on the ignition
the traffic. Accidents may result if Adjusting the mirror on the left of the vehicle:
you brake too late or veer off the • Press button 4
carriageway. Adjusting the mirror on the right of the vehicle:
Therefore: • Press button 6
• Only set the time when the vehicle
is at a standstill Selecting a mirror
Setting the kerb mirror:
• Press the rocker switch 7 to E
Controls Setting the main mirror:
• Press the rocker switch 7 to F
The buttons for adjusting the outside mirrors
Setting the wide-angle mirror:
are located in the driver’s door.
• Press the rocker switch 7 to G
1 Briefly swivel the main mirror on the
co-driver's side outwards
Adjusting mirrors
2 Mirror heater check lamp
• Press the button 5 in the direction of the
3 Switch mirror heater on and off
appropriate arrow:
4 Select mirror on left-hand side of vehicle
For main and wide-angle mirrors:
5 Adjust mirror
– A swivel outwards
6 Select mirror on right-hand side of vehicle
– B swivel upwards
7 Select mirror
– C swivel inwards
– D swivel downwards
For kerb mirror on co-driver’s side:
– A Mirror surface backwards
– B Mirror surface towards vehicle
– C Mirror surface forwards
– D Mirror surface outwards
51
Vehicle operation
Setting and heating the outside mirrors
Briefly swiveling the main mirror Note

The outside mirror heaters are
on the co-driver's side outwards
automatically switched off when the
engine is switched off.
You can use this function as a manoeuvring aid,
The outside mirror heaters remain off
for example, to give you a quick overview of the
even when the ignition is switched on
situation or when turning with the tractor-trailer
again.
unit at an acute articulation angle.
• Press button 1 The mirror heaters are switched off if the vehicle
The mirror is swivelled outwards. electrical system voltage drops below 23 volts.
The mirror swivels back to its starting position The outside mirror heaters are switched back
automatically after about 30 seconds or if you on again automatically when the voltage rises
press the button 1 again. again.
Heating the outside mirrors
Switching on
Switch on the mirror heaters when the outside
mirrors are iced or misted over.
The outside mirror heaters only function if the
ignition is switch on.
• Press button 3 briefly
Check lamp 2 comes on
The mirror heaters of all outside mirrors, except
the front mirror, are switched on.
Switching off
• Press button 3 briefly again
Check lamp 2 goes out
The mirror heaters of all outside mirrors are
switched off.
52
Vehicle operation
Electric horn, air horn and acoustic reversing warning
ELECTRIC HORN, AIR HORN AND ACOUSTIC REVERSING WARNING
Therefore:
Electric horn This operates the electric horn.
• Comply with the local regulations
in force
Air horn
Setting the acoustic warning to a lower
• Switch on the ignition volume
The check lamp in the switch lights up green. Note
• Press button 1 Always select the volume of the acoustic
This operates the air horn. reversing warning before engaging
reverse gear.
Wait at least 2 seconds before engaging
Acoustic reversing warning, reverse gear again.
2-stage
Introduction
• Press the bottom of the rocker switch An acoustic warning always sounds when the
The check lamp in the switch goes out. vehicle is driven in reverse.
To reduce the noise level when reversing,
e.g. when making deliveries at night, it is
possible to switch the acoustic warning to a
lower volume or to switch it off altogether. The
hazard warning lights are switched on when the
acoustic warning is switched off.
CAUTION
Danger of accidents! • Press the top of the rocker button once
The acoustic reversing warning may The check lamp in the rocker button lights up
possibly only be set to a lower volume green.
or switched off at certain times (e.g. The acoustic warning is given at a lower
at night). volume.
• Press button 1
53
Vehicle operation
Electric horn, air horn and acoustic reversing warning
Switching off the acoustic warning Therefore: Note

• Press the top of the rocker button a second • Comply with the local regulations The acoustic warning is automatically
time in force set to full volume after the engine starts.
The check lamp in the rocker button lights up
yellow. Switching off the acoustic warning
The warning tone is switched off and the hazard
Note
warning lights are switched on.
Always switch off the acoustic reversing
warning first and then engage reverse
Switching the warning tone to full volume
gear.
• Press the top of the rocker button a third time
Wait at least 2 seconds before engaging
The check lamp in the rocker button goes out.
reverse gear again.
Note
The warning tone is automatically set to
full volume after the engine starts.
Acoustic reversing warning,

1-stage
Introduction
An acoustic warning always sounds when the
vehicle is driven in reverse.
To reduce the noise level when reversing, e.g.
when making deliveries at night, it is possible
to switch the acoustic warning off.
The check lamp in the rocker button lights up
CAUTION yellow.
Danger of accidents! The acoustic warning is switched off.
The acoustic reversing warning may
possibly only be set to a lower volume Switching on the acoustic warning again
or switched off at certain times (e.g. • Press the top of the rocker button again
at night). The check lamp in the rocker button goes out.
This operates the acoustic warning.
54
Vehicle operation
Lighting cigarettes
LIGHTING CIGARETTES
– Excessively high power

Safety
consumption can lead to damage
to the cigarette lighter.
MAN does everything technically possible
Therefore, please always ensure the
to prevent inappropriate behaviour with
following:
inflammable objects and liquids.
• Use a plug that contacts the centre
Please always comply with the following safety
of the socket using the central
note.
contact.
CAUTION • Only use apparatus with a max.
Danger of accidents/risk of fire! total power of 24 V/120 W (5 A).
Do not throw out litter as this pollutes
the environment and can endanger
Lighting cigarettes
other people. • Press in the cigarette lighter 3
– The waste is a hazard to other road The cigarette lighter springs out when the
users such as motorcyclists and heating coil is glowing.
drivers of convertibles. • Immediately pull out the cigarette lighter and
– Glowing tobacco residue (e.g. use it
cigarette butts) can cause forest • Push the cigarette lighter back into the socket
fires and vehicle fires. • Dispose of cigarette ash and butts in the
Therefore: ashtrays 2
• Do not throw any objects out of the
window
WARNING
Danger of damage!
When using the cigarette lighter as a
24 volt socket: • Switch on the ignition
– Only use apparatus that has a • Briefly press the compartment 1
suitable plug. It is not permitted for The compartment opens.
the contact to be on the bimetallic
spring arms of a plug.
55
Vehicle operation
Sockets
SOCKETS
Sockets in the cab
The sockets 1 are located in the footwell on the

co-driver's side.
White cap: Socket for 12 V/180 W (2-pin, 15 A)
Black cap: Socket for 24 V/300 W (2-pin)
WARNING
Danger of damage!
• Only connect apparatus with max.
12 V/180 W or 24 V/300 W total
power
56
Vehicle operation
Sun blind
SUN BLIND
Manual operation
Sun blind downwards
• Use the tab 2 to pull the sun blind to the

required position
Sun blind upwards

• Pull the loop 1 downwards
The sun blind rolls up automatically.
Note
Loop 3 is for the sun blind on the
co-driver’s side.
57
Vehicle operation
Exterior lighting
LIGHTING
Exterior lighting The headlight low beam is switched on Rear fog lamp (switch with one setting)
Note Switching on the rear fog lamp

Comply with the national and local • Switch on the headlight low beam
regulations in force when using the • Pull the rotary switch
exterior lighting. The rear fog lamp is switched on.
Check lamp 3 comes on.
Parking lights and headlight low beam
(driving lights) Switching off the rear fog lamp
• Push the rotary switch
Switching on the parking lights The rear fog lamp is switched off.
The check lamp goes out.
Note
Check lamp 2 comes on The rear fog lamp goes out automatically
if the headlight low beam and parking
Switching off the parking lights and light or the ignition is switched off. The
headlight low beam rear fog lamp remains switched off even
• Turn the rotary switch to position 0 if the ignition or headlight low beam is
The headlight low beam, the parking lights and switched back on.
the side marker lights are switched off.
Check lamp 2 goes out.
Acoustic signal for lighting

• Turn the rotary switch to position A When the driver leaves the vehicle, an acoustic
The parking lights and the side marker lights signal sounds as a reminder if the parking light
are switched on. or headlight low beam is still switched on.
• Switch off the parking lights and headlight
Switching on the headlight low beam low beam
• Switch on the ignition The acoustic signal stops.
• Turn the rotary switch to position B
58
Vehicle operation
Exterior lighting
Fog lamps and rear fog lamp (switch with Switching off the fog lamps and rear fog
two settings) lamp
• Push the rotary switch
Switching on the fog lamps The fog lamps and rear fog lamp are switched
off.
The check lamps go out.
Headlight high beam and headlight flash
Switching on the headlight high beam

• Switch on the headlight low beam
The blue “headlight high beam” check lamp

comes on.
Switching off the headlight high beam

• Pull the steering column stalk beyond the
• Switch on the headlight low beam
pressure point E to position F
• Pull the rotary switch to position C
• Release the steering column stalk
The fog lamps are switched on.
The steering column stalk springs back to
position 0.
The headlight high beam is switched off.
Switching on the rear fog lamp
• Pull the rotary switch to position D
goes out.
The rotary switch springs back to position C. • Pull the steering column stalk beyond the
The rear fog lamp and fog lamps are switched pressure point E to position F
Headlight flash
on. • Release the steering column stalk
• Pull the steering column stalk up to the
Check lamps 1 and 3 come on. The steering column stalk springs back to
pressure point E and hold it there
position 0.
The headlight high beam comes on.
Switching off the rear fog lamp only The headlight high beam is switched on.
• Pull the rotary switch to position D again
comes on.
The rotary switch springs back to position C.
The rear fog lamp is switched off.
The steering column stalk springs back to
Check lamp 3 goes out.
position 0.
59
Vehicle operation
Exterior lighting
The headlight high beam goes out. Daytime driving lights • Call up the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle
The blue “headlight high beam” check lamp menu”, Page 288.
goes out. EU daytime driving lights (acc. to ECE) • Select the “Settings” menu item
• Switch on the ignition • Select the “Daytime dr. lights” menu item
Hazard warning lights The daytime driving lights are switched on
automatically and a separate bulb in the Automatic driving with lights during the
Switching on the hazard warning lights headlight unit comes on. day for Austria
• Switch on the battery master switch or When the headlight low beam is switched on,
isolator switch, see “Starting the engine”, the daytime driving lights go out. • Start the engine
Page 146. Headlight low beam is automatically switched
Daytime driving lights for Scandinavia on when the engine is running.
• Switch on the ignition Switch off:
• Start the engine • Turn the rotary switch for the parking lights
The headlights are automatically switched on at and headlight low beam to position B
a dimmed level as daytime driving lights when • Turn the rotary switch for the parking lights
the engine is running. and headlight low beam to position 0
Daytime driving lights for the UK (DIM/DIP) Cornering light

• Start the engine
The cornering light comes on when:
• Switch on the parking light
– The headlight low beam is switched on.
The headlights are switched on at a dimmed
– The vehicle speed is less than 40 km/h.
level as daytime driving lights (DIM/DIP) when
– The turn indicator is switched on (vehicle
the parking light is switched on.
• Press the top of the rocker switch without ESP).
If gas discharge lamps are used for headlight
The hazard warning lights are switched on. – The turn indicator is switched on or/and
low beam, then the fog lamps are switched on
The red check lamp in the switch flashes. turning has begun by turning the steering
instead of the headlight low beam.
All turn indicators flash at intervals. wheel (vehicle with ESP).
The green “turn indicator” check lamps for the
Deactivating and activating the daytime
tractor vehicle and the trailer light up on the Working spotlight and manoeuvring light
driving lights
instrument panel.
The daytime driving lights can be deactivated
Overview
in countries where they are not a legal
Switching off the hazard warning lights Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, it
requirement or where their use is prohibited.
• Press the bottom of the rocker switch may be equipped with additional exterior lights:
Permanently deactivating and activating:
60
Vehicle operation
Exterior lighting
Rocker switch for working spotlight or load deck Rocker switch for manoeuvring light or Rocker switch for one or two priority vehicle
lighting with green check lamp. additional working spotlight (manoeuvring light(s) with yellow check lamp.
light) with yellow check lamp.
Switching on
The check lamps in the switches light up yellow.
Switching off
The check lamps in the switches go out.
Priority vehicle light(s)
Overview
Rocker switch for cargo space lighting with Rocker switch for the third priority vehicle light
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, it
yellow check lamp. with yellow check lamp.
may be equipped with one, two or three priority
vehicle light(s).
Switching on
The check lamps in the switches light up.
61
Vehicle operation
Exterior lighting
Note Switching off The check lamp in the switch goes out.
The check lamp in the corresponding • Press the bottom of the rocker switch The snowplough and gritter lights are switched
switch does not light up if a priority The position lamps are switched off. off.
vehicle light is defective. Immediately The check lamp in the switch goes out.
renew the blown fuse or defective Headlight cleaning system
bulb in the priority vehicle light. Obtain Snowplough and gritter lights
MAN Service workshop assistance if Note
necessary. Remove stubborn dirt (e.g. insect
Switching on
remains) at regular intervals, e.g. when
Note refuelling.
Switching off
Perform a light test before commencing • Switch on the ignition
snow clearing operations, see following • Switch on the headlight low beam
The check lamps in the switches go out.
pages.
Position lamps for the CIS • Switch on headlight low beam
Switching on

The headlights are sprayed with washing water
• Press the top of the rocker switch to clean them.
The snowplough and gritter lights are switched
Note
• Press the top of the rocker switch on.
The headlight washing procedure
The position lamps are switched on. The check lamp in the switch lights up green.
cannot be repeated using the rocker
The check lamp in the switch lights up green. switch before the headlight low beam
Switching off
has been switched off and back on
again.
62
Vehicle operation
Exterior lighting
Light test for exterior lighting low beam, headlight high beam, auxiliary high • Switch off the ignition and remove the key if
beam headlight, fog lamps and cornering light necessary
CAUTION
Alternatively
Danger of accidents! Note
The vehicle’s operating permit may The light test must be ended and
be invalidated and continuing to drive confirmed in order to ensure trouble-free
may not be permitted if there is a monitoring of the bulbs.
malfunction of the exterior lighting.
Therefore: Performing a light test
• Immediately rectify the malfunction The vehicle must be stationary.
in the exterior lighting • Apply the parking brake
• Shift the gearbox to neutral N
Function • Switch on the ignition
The light test checks the function of the exterior
lighting on the tractive unit and the trailer.
The light test must be performed and confirmed
when the vehicle is handed over as well as after • Pull the steering column stalk for longer than
a new bulb has been fitted or when the number 1 second
of lights is changed. The message “END light The light test for the exterior lighting starts.
test” is shown on the display if the light test was Each exterior lamp is switched on and off
successful. again at least once. Only once this sequence
The light test lasts a maximum of 2 minutes. It is complete can the light test be ended or
involves all the exterior lights being switched on cancelled.
for approx. 1.5 seconds and then off again one • Get out and check the function of the exterior
after the other. The driver can check the exterior lights
lights of the vehicle without the help of another End and confirm the light test:
• Press the top of the rocker button • Pull the steering column stalk for longer than
person. The engine may be switched off or
The display shows the message “Light test”, 1 second and then release it
running at idling speed, e.g. whilst charging the
which means that the light test can be started. The message “END light test” is shown on the
brake system.
The following exterior lights (if fitted) are Note display if the light test was successful.
switched on and back off again: The light test is automatically cancelled
Turn indicators, brake lamp, parking lights, without any result if it is not started within Cancelling the light test
side marker lights, rear fog lamp, headlight about 20 seconds. • Press the top of the rocker button
63
Vehicle operation
Exterior lighting
The display shows “Light test ABORT”, which Therefore:

means the light test was cancelled without a • Set the headlight range correctly
result. In vehicles with air/air suspension, the
electronic control unit controls the vehicle
Note
level and there is no need for the driver to
The light test is cancelled without adjust the headlight beam.
yielding any result if the engine is
In vehicles with semi-pneumatic and leaf-spring
started during the light test.
suspension, the headlight range must be set
so as not to dazzle other road users. The driver
Headlight beam regulator (LWR) must therefore ensure that the dial is in the right
position.
Basic setting by the manufacturer or body
builder
To ensure road safety, the manufacturer and,
if applicable, the body manufacturer must
always define the headlight beam setting for
the unladen vehicle.
– When the vehicle is unladen, the basic
setting (calibration) of the dial is at position
0, the headlight range is correct.
– If the vehicle’s body is modified, i.e. the 0
level is changed, the body manufacturer is
responsible for recalibrating the vehicle.
Setting of the headlight range by the driver When the vehicle is unladen:
• Turn the dial to 0 (basic setting)
WARNING Reduce the headlight beam:
Danger of dazzling! • Turn the dial upwards
The light/dark boundary of the Increase the headlight beam:
headlight beam cone changes its • Turn the dial downwards
position as the vehicle is laden.
This can dazzle oncoming vehicles.
Serious accidents can be caused.
64
Vehicle operation
Interior lighting
Interior lighting Switching on the reading light – The entry and interior lights go out after a few
• Press the rocker switch 2 on the left (I) seconds of courtesy time after the driver’s or
Interior lighting, for the driver and co-driver co-driver’s door is closed.
Switching off – The entry and interior lights are switched off if
Switching on and off using the door contact • Press the rocker switch 2 on the right (0) the ignition is switched on during the courtesy
time.
Interior lighting in roof – The interior lighting is dimmed and switched
off if one of the cab doors is left open for more
Switch on: than 5 minutes.
Adjusting the instrument lighting
The instrument lighting includes the instrument

panel, rocker switches, EU monitoring device,
heating and air-conditioning system.
CAUTION
• Press the rocker switch 1 on the right (II) Do not adjust the instrument lighting
The interior lighting comes on automatically unless the vehicle is at a standstill.
when the driver’s or co-driver’s door is opened. Otherwise, you will be distracted from
The interior lights are switched on or off the traffic. Accidents may result if
depending on the driver's or co-driver's door. • Press the top of the rocker switch you brake too late or veer off the
The interior lighting switches off after a time The check lamp in the switch lights up green. carriageway.
delay once the driver’s and co-driver’s doors Switch off: Therefore:
have been closed. • Press the bottom of the rocker switch • Only adjust the instrument lighting
The check lamp in the switch goes out. when the vehicle is at a standstill
Switching on the continuous light • Switch on the ignition
• Press the rocker switch 1 on the left (I) Time-controlled entry and interior lights
– The entry and interior lights for the

Switching off
corresponding side of the vehicle are
• Move rocker switch 1 into its central position
switched on when the driver’s or co-driver’s
(0)
door is opened.
65
Vehicle operation
Interior lighting
Certain check lamps can light up both yellow

and red (e.g. central warning light). The check
lamp for headlight high beam always lights up
blue. The check lamps for headlight low beam,
the fog lamps and the trailer turn indicators
always light up green.
Check lamp test with the ignition key

The check lamp test takes place automatically
(every time before the engine starts) and takes
about 6 seconds in all.
The test procedure is immediately cancelled if
• Press and hold the button on the instrument the engine is started during the check lamp test.
panel until the required brightness is • Apply the parking brake
achieved • Switch on the ignition, see “Starting the
When you press the button, the brightness engine”, Page 146
changes and cycles from the darkest to the
brightest level and vice versa. The adjustment
is infinitely variable.
Check lamp test
Necessity for and procedure of the check

lamp test
Using the check lamp test, check the function The check lamps light up at all positions, i.e.
of all check lamps on the instrument panel. a symbol or horizontal line must be visible at
For reasons of road safety, the check lamp test each position.
can only be performed when the vehicle is at a The check lamps alternate between red and
standstill. yellow after about 3 seconds.
Individual check lamps may not be present, due If a symbol or horizontal line is not visible at a
to the various equipment variants in the vehicle. position, the check lamp has failed and needs
Dashes must light up instead during the check to be replaced at a MAN Service workshop.
lamp test!
66
Vehicle operation
Interior lighting
Check lamp test with the Vehicle menu

• Call up the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle
menu”, Page 288
• Call up the “Vehicle” menu item
• Call up the “Monitoring data” menu item.
• Call up the “Diagnosis” menu item
• Call up the “Check lamps” menu item.
The menu items “Red symbols” and “Yellow
symbols” are indicated. The cursor remains on
the “Red symbols” menu item.
The check lamps light up at all positions, i.e.
a symbol or horizontal line must be visible at
each position.
• Call up the “Yellow symbols” menu item
Here too, the check lamps light up at all
positions.
If a symbol or horizontal line is not visible at a
position, the check lamp has failed and needs
to be replaced at a MAN Service workshop.
Note
The Vehicle menu closes automatically
if no button is pressed for about 30
seconds.
67
Vehicle operation
Heating, ventilation and auxiliary air heater
HEATING, VENTILATION, AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM AND AUXILIARY HEATER
Heating, ventilation and auxiliary

air heater
Controls and indications on the display
Heating and ventilation controls
1 Setting the temperature

2 Adjusting the blower
3 Display
4 Ventilating side windows
5 Adjusting the air distribution
6 Changing over between fresh air and
recirculating air
9 Adjusting the blower
Auxiliary air heater (auxiliary heater)

controls
2 Set values
7 Input mode (progam)
8 Heating
9 Set values
68
Vehicle operation
69
Vehicle operation
Heating and ventilation displays Adjusting the ventilation Adjusting the central air nozzles
Adjusting the blower speed

The blower alters the volume of air flowing
in. The display 3 indicates the speed of the
blower 13.
Increasing the blower power:
• Press button 2
Reducing the blower power:
• Press button 7
Switching off the blower:
• Press button 7 until the display 13 goes out
Adjusting the air distribution between the

Opening:
11 Ventilating side windows footwell and windscreen
• Turn the knurled wheels 12 upwards
12 Recirculating air Upper body ventilation only:
Closing:
13 Blower speed • Turn the rotary switch 5 to the bottom left
• Turn the knurled wheels 12 downwards
(position D)
Adjusting the direction of the outflowing air:
Auxiliary air heater (independent heater) Footwell and windscreen ventilation:
• Move the grips 11 in the desired direction
displays • Turn the rotary switch 5 to the top right
(position B)
10 – Switch-on point (1, 2 or 3) Side windows
Windscreen ventilation only:
– Input mode (progam) Maximum ventilation of side windows:
• Turn the rotary switch 5 to the bottom right
14 Weekday • Press button 4 until symbol 11 appears on
(position C)
15 Temperature or time or heating duration the display
Footwell ventilation only:
16 Auxiliary air heater (independent heater) No ventilation for side windows:
• Turn the rotary switch 5 to the top left
– No symbol displayed: switched off • Press button 4 until symbol 11 goes out on
(position A)
– Symbol displayed: switched on the display
Other intermediate speeds are possible.
Switching on fresh air or recirculating air
It is possible to switch over to recirculating
air mode in order to prevent unpleasant and
poisonous exhaust emissions (smog) getting
into the interior of the cab (e.g. when you are
70
Vehicle operation
driving through a tunnel). The interior air is then Maximum heating Auxiliary air heater (independent heater)
recirculated. Switch back to fresh air mode
as soon as possible, to prevent the windows For quickly heating up the inside of the cab: Function and safety
fogging up. • Press button 6 until symbol 12 goes out on The auxiliary air heater is used to heat up
Changing to recirculating air mode: the display 3 the cab interior and defrost the windows. It
• Press button 6 until symbol 13 appears on • Turn the rotary switch 1 all the way to the operates by burning fuel and can be operated
the display right when the engine is running or at standstill.
Changing to fresh air mode: • Turn the rotary switch 5 to the top right
(position B) CAUTION
• Press button 6 until symbol 12 goes out on
• Press button 4 until symbol 11 appears on Danger of explosion and fire!
the display
the display Danger of explosion in areas where
Adjusting the heater • Press button 2 until the maximum blower flammable vapours or dust can form,
speed is reached e.g. when refuelling and near fuel,
Switching on and increasing the temperature: • Open the air nozzles at the side windows coal, wood or grain stores or similar.
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to the right • Open the central air nozzles Therefore, switch off the auxiliary air
Reducing the temperature: heater:
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to the left Maximum ventilation • If flammable vapours or dust can
Switching off: form
• Turn the rotary switch 1 all the way to the left For quickly ventilating the inside of the cab: • Before and during refuelling
• Press button 6 until symbol 12 goes out on • When loading and unloading
Deicing the windows the display 3 hazchem vehicles
• Turn the rotary switch 1 all the way to the left
• Press button 6 until symbol 12 goes out on • Turn the rotary switch 5 to the top right CAUTION
the display 3 (position B) Danger of intoxication!
• Press button 4 until symbol 11 appears on • Press button 4 until symbol 11 appears on Hot and intoxicating exhaust gases
the display the display are produced when the auxiliary air
• Turn the rotary switch 5 to the bottom right • Press button 2 until the maximum blower heater is operated.
(position C) speed is reached Therefore:
• Turn the rotary switch 1 all the way to the • Open the air nozzles at the side windows • Switch off the auxiliary air heater
right • Open the central air nozzles in enclosed areas (e.g. garages)
• Press button 2 until the maximum blower
speed is reached Switching on and off manually
Switching on:
71
Vehicle operation
• Press button 8 until symbol 16 appears on • Press button 7 Note

the display “P” and the time hours flash. For hazchem vehicles:
The set temperature 15 is indicated on the Setting the hour: The switch-on points and the heating
display. • Press button 2 or 9 duration cannot be entered. It is not
Switching off: • Press button 7 possible to have the auxiliary air heater
• Press button 8 until symbol 16 goes out on “P” and the minute tens flash. switched on automatically.
the display Setting the minute tens: Entering switch-on point 1:
• Press button 2 or 9 • Press button 7 twice
Setting the temperature • Press button 7 “P1” 10 and the weekday 14 appear on the
The temperature can be set between 12 °C and “P” and the minute ones flash. display with the time or “OFF” 15.
26 °C. If the display indicates more than 26 °C Setting the minute ones: If no button is pressed for about 15 seconds,
or “HI”, the temperature remains at 26 °C. The • Press button 2 or 9 input mode is cancelled without the set values
blower speed cannot be adjusted. • Press button 7 being stored.
Increasing the temperature: The time is programmed. The display shows • Press button 2 or 9
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to the right the weekday and the time. The temperature is “P1” and the weekday flash.
Reducing the temperature: displayed after about 15 seconds. Setting the desired weekday:
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to the left • Press button 2 or 9
Entering switch-on points and heating • Press button 7
Entering the time duration and switching on auxiliary air “P1” and the time hours flash.
heater automatically (activating) Setting the desired switch-on hour:
Note • Press button 2 or 9
3 switch-on points can be entered. The
For hazchem vehicles: • Press button 7
weekday and time must be set for each
The time cannot be entered.
switch-on point. “P1” and the minute tens flash.
• Press button 7 The pre-set heating duration is 120 minutes. Setting the minute tens of the desired switch-on
The display shows the weekday 14 and the This can be changed and applies to all time:
time 15. switch-on points. • Press button 2 or 9
• Press button 2 or 9 The auxiliary air heater is switched on • Press button 7
“P” 10 and the weekday 14 flash on the display, automatically at the activated switch-on points “P1” and the minute ones flash.
“CLOC” 15 is indicated. and heats for the set heating duration. Setting the minute ones of the desired
If no button is pressed for about 15 seconds, switch-on time:
input mode is cancelled without the set values • Press button 2 or 9
being stored. • Press button 7
Setting the weekday: The values for switch-on point 1 are stored.
• Press button 2 or 9
72
Vehicle operation
“P1” 10, the weekday 14 and the time 15 appear Deactivating automatic switch-on
on the display. • Press button 7 twice
The switch-on point is active. This means that Switch-on point 1 10, the weekday 14 and the
the auxiliary heater will be switched on at the time 15 appear on the display.
set time on the set day. If no button is pressed for about 15 seconds,
Entering switch-on point 2: input mode is cancelled without the set values
• Press button 7 being stored.
• Press button 2 or 9 and proceed as described Deactivating switch-on point 1:
for switch-on point 1 • Press button 2 or 9
Or jump to switch-on point 3: The switch-on point and the weekday flash.
• Press button 7 • Repeatedly press button 2 or 9 until “OFF”
Entering switch-on point 3: appears in place of the time 15 on the display.
• Press button 7 • Press button 7
• Press button 2 or 9 and proceed as described Switch-on point 1 is stored. Switch-on point 1 10
for switch-on point 1 and “OFF” appear on the display. The switch-on
Or jump to the heating duration: point is not active. This means that the auxiliary
• Press button 7 heater is only switched on automatically when
“H” 10 and the heating duration 15 appear on at least one of the other switch-on points is
the display. active.
Entering the heating duration “H”: Deactivating switch-on point 2:
• Press button 2 or 9 • Press button 2 or 9 and proceed as described
“P” and the heating duration flash. for switch-on point 1
• Press button 2 or 9 Or jump to switch-on point 3:
The values for the heating duration are stored. Deactivating switch-on point 3:
“H” and the heating duration appear on the • Press button 2 or 9 and proceed as described
display. for switch-on point 1
• Press button 7 or store the values and exit the input mode:
The weekday, the time and the next active • Press button 7 twice
switch-on point appear on the display. The weekday, the time and the next active
The temperature is displayed after about switch-on point appear on the display.
15 seconds. The temperature is displayed after about
15 seconds.
73
Vehicle operation
Air-conditioning system, auxiliary air-conditioning unit and auxiliary air heater
Air-conditioning system, auxiliary • Press button 2 until AC/ECO 9 Changing over between fresh air and
appears on the display 4 recirculating air
air-conditioning unit and auxiliary
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to the 12 Set the temperature
air heater AUTO position
Auxiliary air-conditioning unit controls
Functions and notes
How the auxiliary air-conditioning unit
3 Set the temperature
works
Functions of the air-conditioning system 8 Low-temperature accumulator
Cooling the interior of the cab when the engine
The air-conditioning system keeps the 12 Set the temperature
is switched off (auxiliary air-conditioning
temperature constant and maintains good 13 Cooling when the engine is switched off
unit): The necessary cooling power is
visibility from the cab. The following functions
taken from a low-temperature accumulator.
are integrated:
This low-temperature accumulator can be Auxiliary air heater (independent heater)
– Cooling
continuously recharged during driving. When controls
– Heating
the low-temperature accumulator is full, the
– De-humidification 3 – Set the temperature
cab air conditioning can run for up to eight
This function reduces the humidity of the air – Set values
hours.
blown in. Good visibility is soon restored if 10 Input mode (progam)
the windows are fogged up. 11 Heating
Auxiliary air heater function
The air-conditioning system can only be 12 – Set the temperature
The auxiliary air heater is used for warming
operated when the engine is running. – Set values
up the cab interior. It can be operated with the
WARNING engine switched off or running.
Danger of damage!
To ensure maximum function from Controls and indications on the display
the air-conditioning system, the
air-conditioning system must also be Air-conditioning system controls
operated for about 10 minutes every 1 Adjusting the blower
month even during the cold season. 2 Cooling when the engine is running
This prevents the moving parts from 3 Setting the temperature
“seizing up”. 4 Display
Therefore, once a month: 5 Ventilating the side windows
6 De-humidifying the incoming air
7 Adjusting the air distribution
74
Vehicle operation
75
Vehicle operation
Air-conditioning system and auxiliary Auxiliary air heater (independent heater) Adjusting the central air nozzles
air-conditioning unit displays displays
14 – Switch-on point (1, 2 or 3)

– Input mode (progam)
19 Weekday
21 Temperature or time or heating duration
22 Auxiliary air heater (independent heater)
– No symbol displayed: switched off
– Symbol displayed: switched on
Adjusting the ventilation
Adjusting the blower speed

The blower alters the volume of air flowing in. Opening:
The display 4 indicates the blower speed 20. • Turn the knurled wheels 19 upwards
15 Ventilating the side windows
Automatic control of blower power: Closing:
16 Air-conditioning system:
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to the AUTO position • Turn the knurled wheels 19 downwards
– No indication: switched off
The blower power is automatically controlled Adjusting the direction of the outflowing air:
– AC/ECO: Cooling switched on when
according to the set temperature and the • Move the grips 18 in the desired direction
the engine is running
– AC: De-humidification switched on temperature in the cab.
Increasing the blower speed: Side windows
17 Recirculating air
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to the right Ventilating the side windows:
18 Auxiliary air-conditioning unit:
Reducing the blower speed: • Press button 5 until symbol 15 appears on
– No indication: switched off
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to the left the display
– Ice crystal only: Cooling switched on
Switching off the blower: No ventilation for side windows:
when the engine is switched off
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to 0 • Press button 5 until symbol 15 goes out on
– Ice crystal and ring: Low-temperature
the display
accumulator switched on
20 Blower speed
Adjusting the air distribution between the
21 Temperature or time
footwell and windscreen
Upper body ventilation only:
• Turn the rotary switch 7 to the bottom left
(position D)
76
Vehicle operation
Footwell and windscreen ventilation: • Press button 3 or 12 The air-conditioning compressor is switched on
• Turn the rotary switch 7 to the top right The set temperature 21 is indicated on the continuously. This causes the fuel consumption
(position B) display. to increase.
Windscreen ventilation only: If the set temperature is higher than the actual Switching off:
• Turn the rotary switch 7 to the bottom right interior temperature, the heating is switched on • Press button 6 until AC goes out
(position C) automatically.
Footwell ventilation only: Switching off Auxiliary air-conditioning unit
• Turn the rotary switch 7 to the bottom left • Press button 12 until LOW is indicated
(position A) Notes
Other intermediate speeds are possible. Cooling when the engine is running – The low-temperature accumulator is only
The best cooling effect is achieved when the charged when it is switched on, the engine is
Switching on fresh air or recirculating air windows and the roof hatch or sliding roof are running and there is surplus power.
It is possible to switch over to recirculating closed. – Always switch on the low-temperature
air mode in order to prevent unpleasant and Switching on: accumulator so that it is charged
poisonous exhaust emissions (smog) getting • Press button 2 until AC/ECO appears on the automatically when the engine is running
into the interior of the cab (e.g. when you are display 4 and there is surplus power. Only switch it
driving through a tunnel). The interior air is then Setting the temperature: off if the auxiliary air-conditioning unit is not
recirculated. Switch back to fresh air mode • Press button 3 or 12 going to be required for some time (e.g.
as soon as possible, to prevent the windows The set temperature 21 is indicated on the during the winter months).
fogging up. display. – For faster charging, the power required by
Changing to recirculating air: The air-conditioning compressor is switched the air-conditioning system can be reduced.
• Press button 9 until symbol 17 appears on on if necessary. This can cause the fuel This can be done by selecting recirculating
the display consumption to increase. air mode, raising the desired temperature,
Changing to fresh air mode: Switching off: reducing the blower speed or closing the
• Press button 9 until symbol 17 goes out on • Press button 2 until AC/ECO goes out windows.
the display
De-humidification Switching the low-temperature accumulator
Air-conditioning system The de-humidification function is not dependent on and off
on the set temperature (heating or cooling). Switching on:
Heating when the engine is running Switching on: • Press button 8 until the ice crystal with ring
Switching on: • Press button 6 until AC appears on the appears at position 18 on the display 4
• Press button 2 until AC/ECO goes out on the display 4 The low-temperature accumulator is now
display 4 The air blowing in is de-humidified. charged.
Setting the temperature: Charging status indicator:
77
Vehicle operation
– The ring is flashing: The low-temperature • Press button 9 until symbol 17 goes out on • Press button 3 until the maximum
accumulator is being charged. the display 4 temperature is indicated
– The ring is not flashing: The low-temperature • Press button 3 until HIGH is indicated
accumulator is full. • Turn the rotary switch 7 to the top right Auxiliary air heater (independent heater)
Switching off: (position B)
• Press button 8 until symbol 18 goes out • Press button 5 until symbol 15 appears Function and safety
• Turn the rotary switch 1 all the way to the The auxiliary air heater is used to heat up
Cooling when the engine is switched off right the cab interior and defrost the windows. It
Switching on: • Open the air nozzles at the side windows operates by burning fuel and can be operated
• Press button 8 until the ice crystal with ring • Open the central air nozzles when the engine is running or at standstill.
appears at position 18 on the display 4
CAUTION
• Press button 13 Maximum ventilation
Danger of explosion and fire!
Setting the temperature:
• Press button 3 or 12 For quickly ventilating the inside of the cab: Danger of explosion in areas where
The set temperature 21 is indicated on the • Press button 9 until symbol 17 goes out on flammable vapours or dust can form,
display. the display 4 e.g. when refuelling and near fuel,
Charging status indicator: • Press button 12 until the desired temperature coal, wood or grain stores or similar.
– The ring is not flashing: The low-temperature is indicated Therefore, switch off the auxiliary air
accumulator is still sufficiently charged. • Turn the rotary switch 7 to the top right heater:
– The ring is flashing: The low-temperature (position B) • If flammable vapours or dust can
accumulator will soon be empty. • Press button 5 until symbol 15 appears form
If only button 13 has been pressed, only the ice • Turn the rotary switch 1 all the way to the • Before and during refuelling
crystal appears at position 18. In this case, the right • When loading and unloading
charging status is not indicated. • Open the air nozzles at the side windows hazchem vehicles
Switching off: • Open the central air nozzles
CAUTION
• Press button 13
Deicing the windows Danger of intoxication!
The cooling function of the auxiliary
Hot and intoxicating exhaust gases
air-conditioning unit is deactivated as soon
• Press button 5 until symbol 15 appears on are produced when the auxiliary air
as the engine is started.
the display 4 heater is operated.
• Turn the rotary switch 7 to the bottom right Therefore:
Maximum heating when the engine is
(position C) • Switch off the auxiliary air heater
running
• Turn the rotary switch 1 to the right in enclosed areas (e.g. garages)
For quickly heating up the inside of the cab:
78
Vehicle operation
Switching on and off manually • Press button 10 Note

Switching on: “P” and the time hours flash. For hazchem vehicles:
• Press button 11 until symbol 22 appears on Setting the hour: The switch-on points and the heating
the display • Press button 3 or 12 duration cannot be entered. It is not
The set temperature 21 is indicated on the • Press button 10 possible to have the auxiliary air heater
display. “P” and the minute tens flash. switched on automatically.
Switching off: Setting the minute tens: Entering switch-on point 1:
• Press button 11 until symbol 22 goes out on • Press button 3 or 12 • Press button 10 twice
the display • Press button 10 “P1” 14 and the weekday 19 appear on the
“P” and the minute ones flash. display with the time or “OFF” 21.
Setting the temperature Setting the minute ones: If no button is pressed for about 15 seconds,
The temperature can be set between 12 °C and • Press button 3 or 12 input mode is cancelled without the set values
26 °C. If the display indicates more than 26 °C • Press button 10 being stored.
or “HI”, the temperature remains at 26 °C. The The time is programmed. The display shows • Press button 3 or 12
blower speed cannot be adjusted. the weekday and the time. The temperature is “P1” and the weekday flash.
Setting the temperature: displayed after about 15 seconds. Setting the desired weekday:
• Press button 3 or 12 • Press button 3 or 12
Entering switch-on points and heating • Press button 10
Entering the time duration and switching on auxiliary air “P1” and the time hours flash.
heater automatically (activating) Setting the desired switch-on hour:
Note • Press button 3 or 12
3 switch-on points can be entered. The
For hazchem vehicles: • Press button 10
weekday and time must be set for each
The time cannot be entered.
switch-on point. “P1” and the minute tens flash.
• Press button 10 The pre-set heating duration is 120 minutes. Setting the minute tens of the desired switch-on
The display shows the day of the week 19 and This can be changed and applies to all time:
the time 21. switch-on points. • Press button 3 or 12
• Press button 3 or 12 The auxiliary air heater is switched on • Press button 10
“P” 14 and the weekday 19 flash on the display, automatically at the activated switch-on points “P1” and the minute ones flash.
“CLOC” 21 is indicated. and heats for the set heating duration. Setting the minute ones of the desired
If no button is pressed for about 15 seconds, switch-on time:
input mode is cancelled without the set values • Press button 3 or 12
being stored. • Press button 10
Setting the weekday: The values for switch-on point 1 are stored.
• Press button 3 or 12
79
Vehicle operation
“P1” 14, the weekday 19 and the time 21 appear Deactivating automatic switch-on
on the display. • Press button 10 twice
The switch-on point is active. This means that “P1” 14, the weekday 19 and the time 21 appear
the auxiliary heater will be switched on at the on the display.
set time on the set day. If no button is pressed for about 15 seconds,
Entering switch-on point 2: input mode is cancelled without the set values
• Press button 10 being stored.
• Press button 3 or 12 and proceed as Deactivating switch-on point 1:
described for switch-on point 1 • Press button 3 or 12
Or jump to switch-on point 3: The switch-on point and the weekday flash.
• Press button 10 • Repeatedly press button 3 or 12 until “OFF”
Entering switch-on point 3: appears in place of the time 21 on the display.
• Press button 3 or 12 and proceed as Switch-on point 1 is stored. “P1” 14 and “OFF”
described for switch-on point 1 appear on the display. The switch-on point is
Or jump to the heating duration: not active. This means that the auxiliary heater
• Press button 10 is only switched on automatically when at least
“H” 12 and the heating duration 21 appear on one of the other switch-on points is active.
the display. Deactivating switch-on point 2:
Entering the heating duration “H”: • Press button 3 or 12 and proceed as
• Press button 3 or 12 described for switch-on point 1
“P” and the heating duration flash. Or jump to switch-on point 3:
• Press button 3 or 12 • Press button 10
• Press button 10 Deactivating switch-on point 3:
The values for the heating duration are stored. • Press button 3 or 12 and proceed as
“H” and the heating duration appear on the described for switch-on point 1
display. or store the values and exit the input mode:
• Press button 10 • Press button 10 twice
The weekday, the time and the next active The weekday, the time and the next active
switch-on point appear on the display. switch-on point appear on the display.
The temperature is displayed after about The temperature is displayed after about
15 seconds. 15 seconds.
80
Vehicle operation
Roof hatch
Roof hatch Closing
WARNING
Unlocking
Danger of damage!
If the roof hatch is left open:
– Rain water or snow can penetrate
into the cab
– Someone could climb into the cab
from the outside
Therefore:
• Close the roof flap fully before
leaving the vehicle if there is any
risk of rain or snow
• Pull the roof hatch downwards with the bar 1
• When doing this, you can stop the hatch in
various positions by pushing the bar forwards
• Swivel the bar 1 on the roof hatch downwards slightly
• Push the bar backwards slightly to close the
Opening hatch directly
• Push up the hatch Locking after closing

• When doing this, you can stop the hatch in
various positions by pushing the bar forwards • To lock the roof hatch in the closed position,
slightly swivel the bar upwards and make sure the
There are three positions. roof hatch is securely locked.
Locking the intermediate positions
• Push the bar upwards and make sure the

roof hatch is securely locked in position
81
Vehicle operation
Sliding roof
Sliding roof Therefore:

• Close the sliding roof fully before
Tilting and opening the roof leaving the vehicle if there is any
risk of rain or snow
Lowering and closing the roof
• Press the top of the rocker button until the

sliding roof has reached the required position
or is closed
Extra closing feature

• Lift the bar 1 slightly and push it back
Holding the vehicle key in the lock position
(for longer than 2 seconds) in the outside Closing
door handle also closes the sliding roof, see • Push the bar 1 forwards as far as the stop
“Opening and closing doors, central locking”,
Page 15 Emergency operation
• Press the bottom of the rocker button until The sliding roof remains open when the vehicle
the roof has been raised to its end position is locked using the remote control. If the sliding roof motor fails:
• Release the rocker button
• Press the bottom of the rocker button again Insect screen
until the roof has reached the required
position Opening
WARNING The insect screen should also left open if the
Danger of damage! sliding roof is open during driving, in order to
ensure better ventilation in the cab.
If the sliding roof is left open:
– Rain water or snow can penetrate
into the cab
– Someone could climb into the cab
from the outside
• Remove the edge protection 2
82
Vehicle operation
Sliding roof
• Unscrew and remove the screws 4 (4 pcs.) – Turn anticlockwise: Open sliding roof
of the cover for the sliding roof motor
• Remove the cover 3
• Press the plastic insert 5 in the sliding roof

motor upwards as far as the stop
• Insert a 5 mm Allen key 6 into the plastic

insert and turn the emergency operating
device
– Turn clockwise: Close sliding roof
83
Vehicle operation
Safety, function and use of auxiliary heaters
Auxiliary heaters Safety air-conditioning unit and auxiliary air

heater”, Page 74 or
CAUTION
Safety, function and use of auxiliary heaters – the controls are located on the centre
Danger of explosion and fire!
console
Function Danger of explosion in areas where – Coolant pre-heater (auxiliary water heater) –
flammable vapours or dust can form, the control is located on the dashboard
The auxiliary heater can be operated when e.g. when refuelling and near fuel, – Auxiliary air heater and coolant pre-heater
the vehicle is at a standstill (with the engine coal, wood or grain stores or similar.
switched off or running), or when the vehicle is Therefore, switch off the auxiliary air Auxiliary air heater
being driven. The fuel is drawn from the main heater:
fuel tank or a separate gas bottle. • If flammable vapours or dust can The auxiliary air heater is used for warming up
form the cab interior. It should preferably be used
Note • Before and during refuelling when the cab needs to be kept warm for an
If the refuelling reminder is shown on the • When loading and unloading extended period of time as it draws less current
display, this indicates that the vehicle hazchem vehicles than a coolant pre-heater. It can be operated
only has a minimum amount of fuel
with the engine switched off or running.
remaining. Drive to a refuelling station CAUTION
without delay. Danger of intoxication! Coolant pre-heater
Switch on the auxiliary heater at least once a Hot and intoxicating exhaust gases
month for about 10 minutes during the time are produced when the auxiliary air The coolant pre-heater is predominantly used
of the year when the heating is not normally heater is operated. for pre-heating the coolant in the engine (warm
required. Therefore: start).
• Switch off the auxiliary air heater It can also be used for deicing the windows and
Note in enclosed areas (e.g. garages) for temperature control in the cab during breaks
The auxiliary heater consumes a lot of
(only if the ignition is switched on). However, it
electrical power. As a result, only run the
Possible auxiliary heaters in the vehicle does not have sufficient heating power to fully
auxiliary heater for as long as necessary
replace an auxiliary air heater.
when the engine is switched off, and – Auxiliary air heater, The ignition must be switched on and the
do not switch it on several times in – integrated in the heating and ventilation heating set as described in “De-icing the
succession. Otherwise, the battery may see “Heating, ventilation and auxiliary air windows” in order to de-ice the windows
become discharged and it will no longer heater”, Page 68 and pre-heat the cab slightly, see “Heating,
be possible for the engine to start under – integrated in the air-conditioning system ventilation, air-conditioning system and
the vehicle’s own power. see “Air-conditioning system, auxiliary auxiliary heater”, Page 68. Otherwise only
the coolant will be heated.
84
Vehicle operation
Safety, function and use of auxiliary heaters
The current consumption can be expected to

be higher than with an auxiliary air heater if
only the cab is heated. It can therefore only be
operated for a short time when the vehicle is at
a standstill.
Auxiliary air heater and coolant pre-heater
You can make the most of the benefits of both

heating systems. This can be done by using
the coolant pre-heater to pre-heat the engine
and speed up defrosting of the windows and
by using the auxiliary air heater for heating
over longer periods when the vehicle is at a
standstill. Each of the heating systems can be
used to provide additional heating, although the
coolant pre-heater has the advantage of being
connected to the same air distribution channels
as the regular vehicle heating system.
85
Vehicle operation
Webasto coolant pre-heater
Webasto coolant pre-heater 8 Time The display 2 of the standard clock shows a
9 Memory number fault code display if a malfunction occurs.
Switching on the coolant pre-heater using The coolant pre-heater can be switched on If the voltage supply is interrupted (e.g. repairs,
the standard clock and off manually by pressing button 6 or batteries disconnected), all of the set values as
automatically by programming a heating start well as the time, weekday and memory will be
Note
time. deleted. The switch-on duration reverts to the
Comply with the instructions for safety,
• Switch on the ignition, press the battery factory setting (120 minutes).
function and use of auxiliary heaters,
master switch, see “Starting the engine”, Always set the time/day of the week using the
see “Safety, function and use of auxiliary
Page 146 setting mode first following a power failure.
heaters”, Page 84!
The standard clock allows you to program 3 Note Note
switch-on times (although only one can be Before switching on the coolant Keep the hot air vents of the heater clear.
activated) up to 7 days in advance. It also has pre-heater, set the maximum
a wake-up function. temperature, the blower and the air Setting mode
distribution as required, see “Heating,
ventilation and auxiliary air heater”, You have 5 seconds to adjust any symbols
Page 68 or see “Air-conditioning which start flashing using buttons 4 and 5. If no
system, auxiliary air-conditioning unit adjustments are made within this time, the time
and auxiliary air heater”, Page 74. indicated on the display is stored. The numbers
When the ignition is switched on, the clock on the display change faster if buttons 4 or 5
displays the current time 2 and the day of the are pressed for longer than 2 seconds.
week 1. To make a symbol flash, press the relevant
Both the display and the buttons are illuminated button for longer than 2 seconds.
when the heater is on. The flame signal 3 indicates the heater is
The heating period is 120 minutes when operating.
the ignition is switched off (factory setting).
However, this can be altered for a single Immediate heating
1 Day of the week
heating operation or permanently. Unlimited
2 Time Switching on
sustained heating is possible when the ignition
3 Operational status indicator • Press button 6
is switched on (until the batteries go flat).
4 Forwards The flame signal 3 indicates the heater is
If the ignition is switched off whilst the heater
5 Backwards operating.
is operating in sustained heating mode, the
6 Immediate heating The display and the buttons are illuminated.
display shows a remaining time of 15 minutes
7 Program selection
and the heater continues to operate.
86
Vehicle operation
Switching off • Press button 7 to select the desired memory • Press button 4 or 5 in order to set the
• Press button 6 number 9 operating time
The heating is stopped, the display and button • Press button 7 until the memory number 9
lighting go out. flashes Displaying the remaining operating time
• Press button 4 or 5 in order to set the This is only possible in programming mode.
Time programmed time 2
Note
The programmed time is stored if no other
The remaining operating time is the
Checking the time button is pressed, and the programmed day
time for which the heater remains
– Ignition off flashes.
operational. It can only be changed
• Press button 8 • Press button 4 or 5 in order to set the
when the heater is operating and the
– Ignition on programmed time 2
The time appears on the display The programmed day is stored if no other
button is pressed. This completes the setting. • Press button 5
Setting the time and day The remaining operating time is displayed.
• Press button 8 Checking/activating the programming
The time 2 flashes. • Press button 7 repeatedly until the desired Changing the remaining operating time
• Press button 4 or 5 in order to set the time 2 memory number 9 appears • Press button 5 until the time 2 flashes
• The time is stored if no other button is It is possible to select between memory • Press button 4 or 5 in order to set the
pressed within about 5 seconds, and the day numbers 1, 2 and 3. Programming is remaining operating time
of the week flashes. deactivated if no memory number is displayed. The modified remaining operating time is stored
• Press button 4 or 5 in order to set the day of if no other button is pressed.
the week 1 Deleting programming
The day of the week is stored if no other button • Press button 7 repeatedly until the time is Checking the wake-up time
is pressed. This completes the setting. displayed and no memory number 9 appears • Press button 7 until the bell symbol and the
alarm time appear on the display.
Programming Programming the operating time
Changing the wake-up time
Note An alarm time can only be programmed in a
Setting the programmed time and
This is only possible when the heater is standard clock. The alarm time is not linked to
programmed day
switched off. a day of the week.
Note • Press and hold button 5 for three seconds • Press button 7 until the bell symbol and the
Press button 7 several times to change The operating time flashes. alarm time appear on the display.
between the memory numbers and the The possible operating time range is 10 to • Press buttons 4 or 5 to set the alarm time
time mode. 120 minutes.
87
Vehicle operation
The modified alarm time is stored if no other Fault code display Fault code Cause
button is pressed. F 01 Unsuccessful start (after 2 start
Fault codes on the standard clock display attempts)
Note F 02 Flame cancel from heater
The alarm switches off after 5 minutes operation (after more than 5
or when one of the buttons is pressed. attempts)
F 03 Undervoltage / overvoltage
Cancelling the wake-up time F 04 Premature flame detection
• Press button 7 until the bell symbol is no F 05 Water pump
longer displayed F 06 Temperature sensor
discontinuity or short circuit
Vehicles equipped for hazardous goods F 07 Metering pump discontinuity or
transport short-circuit
F 08 Burner motor defective
Note F 09 Glow plug interruption or short
No programming is possible circuit
– The time can be set. A fault code appears on display 2 of the F 10 Overheating
– The current time and the day of the week are standard clock when a fault occurs. The fault F 11 Temperature sensor tripped
always displayed. prevents the heater from being operated. F 12 Battery isolator switch
– The alarm time can be programmed in a The fault code display / operating lock-out
standard clock. remains in effect until the fault has been
The auxiliary heater is switched on and off using remedied. To do this:
the immediate heat button 6. • Switch off the heater with the immediate heat
button 6
The fault code display / operating lock-out is
cancelled.
• Switch the heater back on
In the event of fault code display F10
(overheating), the fault code display / operating
lock-out can be cancelled by briefly removing
fuse F284 for at least 10 seconds with the
heater switched on.
88
Vehicle operation
Eberspächer coolant pre-heater
Eberspächer coolant pre-heater 7 Backwards If the ignition is switched off whilst the heater
6 Immediate heating is operating in sustained heating mode, the
Switching on the coolant pre-heater using 8 Program selection display shows a remaining time of 15 minutes
the standard clock 9 Time and the heater continues to operate.
10 Memory number If the voltage supply is interrupted (e.g. repairs,
D5WSC HYDRONIC coolant pre-heater and The coolant pre-heater can be switched on batteries disconnected), all of the set values as
heater for breaks with standard clock for and off manually by pressing button 7 or well as the time, day of the week and memory
vehicles without bunks. automatically by programming a heating start will be deleted; the switch-on duration reverts
Note time. to the factory setting (120 minutes).
Comply with the instructions for safety, • Switch on the ignition, press the battery Always set the time/day of the week using the
function and use of auxiliary heaters, master switch, see “Starting the engine”, setting mode first following a power failure.
see “Safety, function and use of auxiliary Page 146
Note
heaters”, Page 84! Note Keep the hot air vents of the heater clear.
The standard clock allows you to program 3 Before switching on the coolant
switch-on times (although only one can be pre-heater, turn the temperature rotary Adjust mode:
activated) up to 7 days in advance. switch all the way to the right and
set the desired setting on the blower You have 5 seconds to adjust any symbols
and air distribution rotary switch, see which start flashing using buttons 5 and 6. If no
“Heating, ventilation and auxiliary air adjustments are made within this time, the time
heater”, Page 68 or see “Air-conditioning indicated on the display is stored. The numbers
system, auxiliary air-conditioning unit on the display change faster if buttons 5 and 6
and auxiliary air heater”, Page 74. are pressed for longer than 2 seconds.
When the ignition is switched on, the clock To make a symbol flash, press the
displays the current time 2 and the day of the corresponding button for longer than
week 1. 2 seconds.
Both the display and the buttons are illuminated The flame signal 4 indicates the heater is
when the heater is on. operating.
The heating period is 120 minutes when
the ignition is switched off (factory setting). Immediate heating
1 Day of the week
2 Time However, this can be altered for a single
heating operation or permanently. Unlimited Activating
3 Temperature unit
sustained heating is possible when the ignition • Press button 7
4 Operational status indicator
5 Forwards is switched on (until the batteries go flat).
89
Vehicle operation
The flame signal 4 indicates the heater is Programming Programming the operating time
operating.
Note
The display and the buttons are illuminated. Setting the programmed time/programmed
This is only possible when the heater is
day
switched off
Deactivating
Note • Press and hold button 6 for three seconds
• Press button 7
Press button 8 several times to change The operating time flashes.
The heating is stopped, the display and button
between the memory numbers and the The possible operating time range is 10 to
lighting go out.
time mode. 120 minutes.
Time • Press button 8 to select the desired memory • Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the
number 10 operating time
Checking the time • Press button 8 until the memory number 10
– Ignition off flashes Displaying the remaining operating time
• Press button 9 • Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the This is only possible in programming mode
– Ignition on programmed time 2
Note
The time appears on the display The programmed time is stored if no other
The remaining operating time is the
button is pressed, and the programmed day
time for which the heater remains
Setting the time/day flashes
operational. It can only be changed
• Press button 9 • Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the
when the heater is operating and the
The time 2 flashes. programmed time 2
• Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the time 2 The programmed day is stored if no other
button is pressed. This completes the setting. • Press button 6
• The time is stored if no other button is
The remaining operating time is displayed.
pressed within about 5 seconds, and the day
of the week flashes Checking/activating the programming
• Press button 8 repeatedly until the desired Changing the remaining operating time
• Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the day of
memory number 10 appears • Press button 6 until the time 2 flashes
the week 1
It is possible to select between memory • Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the
The day of the week is stored if no other button
numbers 1, 2 and 3. Programming is remaining operating time
is pressed. This completes the setting.
deactivated if no memory number is displayed. The modified remaining operating time is stored
if no other button is pressed.
Deleting programming
• Press button 8 repeatedly until the time
is displayed and no memory number 10
appears
90
Vehicle operation
Vehicles equipped for hazardous goods

transport
Note
No programming is possible
– The time can be set.
– The current time and the day of the week are
always displayed.
The auxiliary heater is switched on and off using
the immediate heat button 7.
91
Vehicle operation
Auxiliary air heater, Eberspächer
Auxiliary air heater, Eberspächer Controls Switching on the heater using the timer
switch
Functional description
The heater switches over to power saving
7-day timer switch with temperature selection mode when the required temperature has been
(modular clock) reached. The heater reverts to the higher power
The heater timer switch has a temperature output when the temperature falls below the set
governor and permits 3 switch-on times to temperature.
be programmed in advance within a 24-hour The heater switches itself off if the temperature
period. Alternatively, a switch-on time up to 7 in the cab is higher than the minimum
days in advance can be programmed (in this temperature which can be set on the heater,
case, only one switch-on can be activated). i.e. if the vehicle is parked in the sun.
The heater can be switched on and off manually The heater then switches itself back on
or automatically by programming a heating automatically if the temperature reverts to
start time. The heating period is 120 minutes 1 Day of the week below the minimum temperature setting.
in each case (factory setting). However, this 2 Continuous display
3 Operational status indicator Note
can be altered for a single heating operation or
4 Temperature selection Keep the hot air vents of the heater clear.
permanently.
The current time and the current day of the 5 Forwards
week are always displayed. 6 Backwards Vehicles for transporting hazardous
The display of the heater timer switch shows 7 Immediate heating: Switching on and off substances
a fault code and the heater symbol 3 flashes 8 Program selection
Note
within 15 seconds of a malfunction occurring. 9 Clock time
The auxiliary heater is switched on and
Refer to the end of this section for the meaning 10 Memory number
off using the immediate heat button 7.
of the fault code. No programming is permitted.
Setting the temperature
Note – The time can be set.
Comply with the instructions for safety, • Set the required temperature on rotary – The current time and the day of the week are
function and use of auxiliary heaters, switch 4 always displayed.
see “Safety, function and use of auxiliary
heaters”, Page 84!
92
Vehicle operation
Immediate heating Note Setting the time/day

The heater continues to operate for • Press button 9 until the time 2 flashes
Switching on as long as the ignition is switched on. • Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the time 2
The heater continues to operate for • The time is stored if no other button is
15 minutes after the ignition is switched pressed within about 5 seconds, and the day
off. This period can be extended to max. of the week flashes
120 minutes by pressing button 5 or • Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the day of
reduced to min. 1 minute by pressing the week 1
button 6. The day of the week is stored if no other button
is pressed. This completes the setting.
Switching off
Note
• Press button 7
After setting the day of the week, you
The heating is stopped, the display and button
can press button 9 to limit the flashing of
lighting go out.
the day of the week.
If you only want to set the time, you can
Setting mode
– Immediate heating with ignition off press button 9 twice after setting the
• Press button 7 You have 5 seconds to adjust any symbols time to skip the flashing of the day of the
The operating indicator 3 indicates the heater which start flashing using buttons 5 and 6. If week, thereby bypassing the opportunity
is operating. no adjustments are made within this time, the to set the day of the week.
The set heating period is displayed time indicated on the display is stored. Pressing
– Immediate heating with ignition on buttons 5 and 6 for longer than 2 seconds Programming
• Press button 7 causes the numbers to change more quickly.
The operating indicator 3 indicates the heater The display goes blank approx. 10 seconds Setting the programmed time/programmed
is operating. after the ignition is switched off. day
The time and the day of the week are displayed. To make a symbol flash, press the
Note
corresponding button briefly.
Press button 8 several times to change
The flame signal 3 indicates the heater is
between the memory numbers and the
operating.
time mode.
Time • Press button 8 to select the desired memory
number 10
Checking the time • Press button 5 or 6 briefly until the
Continuous time display programmed time 2 flashes
93
Vehicle operation
• Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the Note

programmed time 2 After a programmed heating operation,
The programmed time is stored if no other the day of the week 1 on the display
button is pressed, and the programmed day is advanced by one. This means no
flashes. further programming is required if the
• Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the driver wants the heating to come on at
programmed day 1 the same time as programmed on the
The programmed day is stored if no other following day.
button is pressed. This completes the setting.
Programming the operating time – one-time
Checking/activating the programming • Press button 7 until the display 2 flashes
• Press button 8 repeatedly until the desired • Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the
memory number 10 appears operating time
It is possible to select between memory
numbers 1, 2 and 3. Programming is Programming the operating time –
deactivated if no number is displayed. permanent
Note
Switching off program control
This is only possible when the heater is
• Press button 8 repeatedly until the time
switched off
is displayed and no memory number 10
appears • Press and hold button 6 for three seconds
All settings (time, day of the week, memories) The operating time flashes.
are reset if the electrical power is disconnected The possible operating time range is 10 to
(e.g. during repairs, when the batteries are 120 minutes
disconnected). Also, the operating time reverts • Press button 5 or 6 in order to set the
to the factory setting of 120 minutes. Always set operating time
the time using the setting mode first following a
power failure. Switching off the heater
• Press button 7
Operating indicator 3 goes out.
The heater blower continues to operate until
the heater has cooled down (“post-operation”).
94
Vehicle operation
Storage box with clipboard
ON-BOARD SERVICE
Storage box with clipboard Operation • Fold up the lid 1 and position it vertically
(2nd position)
WARNING Opening the front compartment On both sides:
Danger of damage! • Fold up the lid 1 • Pull out the lid
• Do not step on or lean on the The lid can be locked in two positions.
storage box
• Empty the storage box before Opening the rear compartment
tilting the cab forwards • Fold up the lid 3
• Do not transport corrosive
substances or substances Using the front lid as a clipboard
containing solvents
CAUTION
Overview
Danger of accidents by braking too
late or veering off the carriageway
due to using the clipboard when
driving.
Therefore: • Place the clipboard 1 on the steering wheel
• Always keep an eye on the traffic • Press the clamping rail 2 to fix the paper in
place
1 Front lid: Removable and can be used as

a writing support (clipboard)
2 Clamp: For holding paper in place
3 Rear lid: With 2 drinks storage places
95
Vehicle operation
Function of the air suspension
RUNNING GEAR
WARNING
Electronically controlled air
Danger of damage!
suspension (ECAS) Vehicle with a particularly low frame
height (referred to as a vehicle with
optimised volume):
The gap between the tyres and the
middle part of the mudguards is very
small. Even at the normal ride height,
The air suspension keeps the vehicle’s frame
there may not be sufficient clearance
at the same height irrespective of the loading
for driving with snow chains. The
status. In addition, it makes it possible to
mudguards can be damaged.
lower or raise the body, e.g. for loading and
Therefore:
unloading. To do this, the ignition must be
• Before driving, check whether At the unladen ride height, the vehicle’s frame
switched on and there must be adequate
there is sufficient clearance is lowered below the ride height in order to
compressed air available. The suspension
• If there is not sufficient clearance result in almost the same frame height as when
travel depends on the type of vehicle.
available: Raise the frame to the vehicle is laden (compensation for tyre
The following versions are possible:
maximum 40 mm above the ride deformation).
– Leaf/air suspension: There is only air
height and drive at a maximum
suspension on the rear axle(s)
speed of 50 km/h (30 mph). Other levels that can be programmed and
– Air/air suspension: Front and rear axles have
air suspension adjusted
When the ignition is switched on, the frame is Adjustable levels Two more levels can be programmed. After
raised or lowered to the height that was set programming, these levels can be set as
when the ignition was last switched off. Ride height and unladen ride height required, e.g. for loading or unloading after
The frame height (level) is programmed and set The ride height must be set before you start to driving up to a loading ramp.
using the control unit installed in a mounting on drive.
the side of the console for the driver’s seat. If the rocker button is installed in the vehicle, Programmable levels that cannot be
The following frame heights (levels) can be set: the unladen ride height of the unladen vehicle adjusted (automatic lowering)
– Ride height can be set before driving. The function for adjusting a level may be
– Unladen ride height, if the “air suspension” blocked in a vehicle with a tipper body, crane
rocker button is installed body and/or a support system (outriggers)
– 2 other programmable levels as soon as the power take-off is engaged
96
Vehicle operation
(special equipment). In this case, the vehicle is Check lamps and display messages
automatically raised or lowered to a predefined
level when the power take-off is switched on.
WARNING
Danger of damage!
If the vehicle is not automatically set
to a predefined level after the power
take-off is switched on:
Rapid changes in load (when the
payload is lifted off or lowered
onto the vehicle) can result in the
vehicle’s frame moving upwards
or downwards suddenly. Possible
consequences: A message appears on the display in the event
– Damage to shock absorbers and of deviations from the ride height. The “air
springs suspension” check lamp comes on. It goes out
– Reduced stability after the ride height is reached.
Therefore: More information on fault messages, see
• Lower the frame fully before “Overview of displays and messages”,
switching on the power take-off Page 254.
• Vehicle with a support system
(outriggers): Secure the vehicle on
its supports
The ride height is restored automatically after
the power take-off has been disengaged.
97
Vehicle operation
Leaf/air suspension
Leaf/air suspension Rocker button – The tyres may rub against the
central part of the mudguards if the
Controls frame is set below the ride height.
The tyres and mudguards may be
Control unit damaged.
Therefore:
• Set the normal ride height for
driving
• If possible, do not move the vehicle
if its frame is above or below the
ride height
• If you have no other alternative,
only drive the vehicle at walking
pace and only for short distances
Changing between the ride height and the
unladen ride height
Raising or lowering to a non-programmed
level
Raising or lowering with the control unit
1 Raising the vehicle’s frame
CAUTION • Press button 8
2 Lowering the vehicle’s frame
Danger of accidents and damage! Check lamp 7 comes on.
3 Setting or programming level 1
– When the frame is set above or • Press button 1 or 2
below the ride height, the vehicle’s Hold button 1 or 2 until the required level is
7 Check lamp for vehicle’s frame at rear
braking and steering properties will reached.
8 Selecting vehicle’s frame at rear
be different. • Press button 8
9 Setting the ride height
– When the frame is above or below Check lamp 7 goes out.
10 STOP button
the ride height, there may be either
Note no suspension travel remaining, or Raising or lowering to a programmed level
Pressing the STOP button immediately the remaining suspension travel • Switch on the ignition
stops any control procedure (raising, may be very short. As a result, the • Press button 8
lowering and readjusting). The level running gear and frame may suffer Check lamp 7 comes on.
reached is kept constant. damage if the vehicle is driven. • Press button 3 M1 or 4 M2 briefly
The rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered to
the programmed level M1 or level M2.
98
Vehicle operation
Leaf/air suspension
Setting the ride height • Set a programmed level The check lamp in the rocker button lights up
• Switch on the ignition • Switch off the ignition and press button 5 yellow.
• Press button 8 STOP within 10 seconds The chassis is lowered or raised to the unladen
Check lamp 7 comes on. The vehicle’s frame is held at the set height (for ride height.
• Press button 9 briefly about 5 hours maximum).
The rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered to Setting the ride height
the ride height. Deactivating the extended skyhook • Switch on the ignition
• Press button 8 • Switch on the ignition The check lamp in the rocker button must come
Check lamp 7 goes out. Alternatively on. If it does not, the ride height is already set.
• Press and hold button 10 STOP (for at least • Press the bottom of the rocker button
Programming a level 2 seconds) The check lamp in the rocker button goes out.
The vehicle’s frame remains at the set level, The chassis is lowered or raised to the ride
• Switch on the ignition although it is no longer kept at the set height height.
• Raise or lower the frame to the required level (control function is switched off).
• First press button 10 STOP at the same time
as button 3 or 4 Setting the ride height and unladen ride
Level 1 is programmed using button 3 (M1). height with the rocker button
Level 2 is programmed using button 4 (M1).
Setting the unladen ride height
Extended skyhook (stand-by) • Switch on the ignition
Procedure
The frame can be kept constantly at the set
height for loading and unloading with the
ignition switched off. This is possible for up
to about 5 hours providing there is sufficient
reservoir pressure in the air suspension
system.
Activating the extended skyhook

• Raise or lower the vehicle’s frame to the
desired height
or • Press the top of the rocker button
99
Vehicle operation
Air/air suspension
Air/air suspension Rocker button – The tyres may rub against the
central part of the mudguards if the
Controls frame is set below the ride height.
Control unit damaged.
Therefore:
driving
• If possible, do not move the vehicle
if its frame is above or below the
ride height
• If you have no other alternative,
only drive the vehicle at walking
pace and only for short distances
Changing between the ride height and the
unladen ride height
Raising or lowering to a non-programmed
level
Raising or lowering with the control unit
1 Raising the vehicle’s frame
CAUTION • Press button 5: Raise at front
2 Lowering the vehicle’s frame
Danger of accidents and damage! and/or
– When the frame is set above or • Press button 8: Raise at rear
below the ride height, the vehicle’s Check lamps 6 and/or 7 come on.
5 Selecting vehicle’s frame at front
braking and steering properties will • Press button 1 or 2
6 Check lamp for vehicle’s frame at front
be different. Keep the buttons pressed until the required
7 Check lamp for vehicle’s frame at rear
– When the frame is above or below level is reached.
8 Selecting vehicle’s frame at rear
the ride height, there may be either • Press button 5
9 Setting the ride height
no suspension travel remaining, or and/or
10 STOP button
the remaining suspension travel • Press button 8
Note may be very short. As a result, the Check lamps 6 and/or 7 come on.
Pressing the STOP button immediately running gear and frame may suffer
stops any control procedure (raising, damage if the vehicle is driven. Raising or lowering to a programmed level
lowering and readjusting). The level • Switch on the ignition
reached is kept constant. • Press button 8
Alternatively
100
Vehicle operation
Air/air suspension
• Press button 5 ignition switched off. This is possible for up

Check lamps 6 or 7 come on to about 5 hours providing there is sufficient
• Press button 3 or 4 briefly reservoir pressure in the air suspension
The vehicle is raised or lowered to the system.
programmed level 1 (M1) or level 2 (M2).
Activating the extended skyhook
Setting the ride height • Switch on the ignition
• Switch on the ignition • Raise or lower the vehicle’s frame to the
• Press button 8 desired height
Alternatively or
• Press button 5 • Set a programmed level
Check lamps 6 or 7 come on • Switch off the ignition and press button 10
• Press button 9 briefly STOP within 5 seconds • Press the top of the rocker button
The vehicle is raised or lowered to the ride The vehicle’s frame is held at the set height (for The check lamp in the rocker button lights up
height. about 5 hours maximum). yellow.
• Press button 8 The chassis is lowered or raised to the unladen
Alternatively Deactivating the extended skyhook ride height.
• Press button 5 • Switch on the ignition
The check lamp goes out. Alternatively Setting the ride height
• Press and hold button 10 STOP (for at least • Switch on the ignition
Programming a level 2 seconds) The check lamp in the rocker button must come
The vehicle’s frame remains at the set level, on. If it does not, the ride height is already set.
• Switch on the ignition although it is no longer kept at the set height • Press the bottom of the rocker button
• Raise or lower the frame to the required level (control function is switched off). The check lamp in the rocker button goes out.
• First press button 10 STOP at the same time The chassis is lowered or raised to the ride
as button 3 or 4 Setting the ride height and unladen ride height.
Level 1 is programmed using button 3 (M1). height with the rocker button
Level 2 is programmed using button 4 (M2).
Setting the unladen ride height
Extended skyhook (stand-by) • Switch on the ignition
Application
The frame can be kept constantly at the set
height for loading and unloading with the
101
Vehicle operation
Air-sprung leading and trailing axle
Air-sprung leading and trailing axle Controls Activating the starting-traction control
CAUTION
EU starting-traction control
Functional description In a vehicle with steered and lifting
The starting-traction control can be switched on axle:
in order to achieve better traction (grip between The axle is fixed in the middle
tyres and the carriageway). In this case, the position (straight-ahead position)
load on the driven axle is greater than the when the starting-traction control
leading or trailing axles. is switched on. This means the
In the case of lifting axles: The leading or trailing vehicle’s steering properties will be
axle is raised as long as the max. permitted changed.
driven axle load is not exceeded by more 30 % Therefore:
(e.g. 11.5 t + 30 % = 14.9 t). Otherwise the axle • Drive slowly and carefully
Rocker button for the front-axle starting-traction • Bear in mind that the turning circle
remains lowered and loaded with the remaining control.
load. may be larger
In the case of non-lifting axles: The leading or
WARNING
trailing axle remains lowered and loaded with
Danger of damage!
the remaining load.
In a vehicle with lifting axle and tipper
The starting-traction control is automatically
body, crane body or liftgate (lifting
switched off as soon as the vehicle reaches
platform):
a speed of 30 km/h. The leading or trailing axle
Rapid changes in load, e.g. when
is once again fully loaded. The check lamp in
the payload is lifted off or lowered
the button goes out.
onto the vehicle, can result in the
vehicle’s frame moving upwards or
downwards suddenly. Having an axle
lowered improves the stability of the
Rocker button for the trailing-axle vehicle.
starting-traction control. Therefore:
• Switch off the starting-traction
control before and during loading
and unloading of the tipper body
102
Vehicle operation
• Switch off the starting-traction In the case of non-lifting axles: The axle
control before and during remains lowered and loaded with the remaining
operating the crane body or liftgate load or it simply coasts along.
(lifting platform)
• Check whether the axle is lowered Controls and indication on the display
before starting operation of the
body
The check lamp in the switch lights up yellow as
soon as the load on the axle has been reduced
(visual feedback signal).
Switching off the starting-traction control The check lamp indicates that the
The starting-traction control is deactivated starting-traction control is switched on.
automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds
30 km/h. Activating the starting-traction control
Alternatively
• Press the top of the rocker button again. CAUTION
Rocker button for the leading-axle Danger of accidents!
The check lamp in the rocker button goes out.
starting-traction control. In a vehicle with steered and lifting
Starting-traction control for Scandinavia axle:
The axle is fixed in the middle
Functional description position (straight-ahead position)
The starting-traction control can be switched on when the starting-traction control
in order to achieve better traction (grip between is switched on. This means the
tyres and the carriageway). In this case, the vehicle’s steering properties will be
load on the driven axle is greater than the changed.
leading or trailing axles. Therefore:
In the case of lifting axles: If the max. permitted • Drive slowly and carefully
driven axle load is not exceeded, the axle is • Bear in mind that the turning circle
raised. Otherwise the axle remains lowered and may be larger
loaded with the remaining load.
Rocker button for the trailing-axle
starting-traction control.
103
Vehicle operation
WARNING weight for as long as the rocker button is Note

Danger of damage! pressed. We recommend switching off the load
In a vehicle with lifting axle and tipper reduction when the road is slippery,
body, crane body or liftgate (lifting Reducing the load smoothly on the driven even when the vehicle is partially
platform): axle and switching off the starting-traction laden or unladen. This increases the
Rapid changes in load, e.g. when control cornering force and improves the driving
the payload is lifted off or lowered • Give the bottom of the rocker button a long properties.
onto the vehicle, can result in the press
vehicle’s frame moving upwards or The load on the driven axle is reduced smoothly Controls
downwards suddenly. Having an axle for as long as the rocker button is pressed.
vehicle. Switching off the starting-traction control
Therefore: • Press the bottom of the rocker button briefly.
• Switch off the starting-traction
control before and during loading Load reduction
and unloading of the tipper body
• Switch off the starting-traction Functional description
control before and during This function is possible in vehicles with a
operating the crane body or liftgate non-lifting leading or trailing axle.
(lifting platform) The load reduction can be switched on in order
• Check whether the axle is lowered to achieve better traction at the driven axle (grip
before starting operation of the between tyres and the carriageway). It can also Rocker button for relieving the leading axle.
body be used when driving unladen or partially laden,
• Briefly press the top of the rocker button in which case driving properties are improved
The starting-traction control is switched on and on a dry, grippy carriageway and tyre wear is
the driven axle is loaded with its maximum reduced on the axle with the reduced load.
permitted load plus 30 % of this weight (as with During load reduction, the load on the driven
starting-traction control acc. to EU regulations, axle is greater than the non-driven axle.
e.g. 11.5 t + 30 % = 14.9 t). If the maximum permitted driven axle load is
• Give the top of the rocker button a long press exceeded, the leading or trailing axle remains
The starting-traction control is switched on loaded with the remaining load. Otherwise, the
and the load on the driven axle is increased axle simply coasts along.
smoothly to the maximum technically possible
104
Vehicle operation
grippy carriageway and tyre wear is reduced on

the raised axle.
If the maximum permitted driven axle load is
not exceeded, the leading or trailing axle is
raised. Otherwise the axle remains lowered and
loaded.
Note
We recommend switching off raising
when the road is slippery, even when
the vehicle is partially laden or unladen.
This increases the cornering force and
Rocker button for relieving the trailing axle. improves the driving properties. Rocker button for raising the trailing axle.
Switching on load reduction Controls Raising the axle

CAUTION
The check lamp in the switch lights up yellow as
soon as the load on the axle has been reduced
(visual feedback signal). In a vehicle with steered and lifting
axle:
Switching off load reduction The axle is fixed in the middle
• Press the top of the rocker button again position (straight-ahead position)
The check lamp in the switch goes out. during raising and lowering. The
steering properties of the vehicle are
Raising (lifting) different when the wheels are being
raised or lowered back into contact
Function with the road.
This function is possible in vehicles with a Therefore:
Rocker button for raising the leading axle.
lifting leading or trailing axle. • Do not raise or lower the axle
Raising can be switched on in order to achieve unless the vehicle is stationary
better traction at the driven axle (grip between
tyres and the carriageway). It can also be used
when driving unladen or partially laden, in which
case driving properties are improved on a dry,
105
Vehicle operation
WARNING
Danger of damage!
In a vehicle with a tipper body, crane
body or liftgate (lifting platform):
Rapid changes in load (when the
payload is lifted off or lowered
onto the vehicle) can result in the
vehicle’s frame moving upwards or
downwards suddenly. Having an axle
vehicle.
Therefore:
• Lower the axle before and during
loading and unloading of the tipper
body
• Lower the axle before and during
operating the crane body or liftgate
(lifting platform)
• Check whether the axle is lowered
before starting operation of the
body
The check lamp in the switch lights up yellow
as soon as the axle has been raised or the load
on the axle has been reduced (visual feedback
signal).
Lowering the axle

The check lamp in the switch goes out.
106
Vehicle operation
Steered leading or trailing axle
Steered leading or trailing axle

CAUTION
Danger of injury!
The leading or trailing axle may steer
unexpectedly when the engine is
started.
Therefore:
• When starting the engine and
when the engine is running, make
sure that no-one is standing within
the steering arc of the steered axle
A message appears on the display if the trailing The “rear axle steering” check lamp lights up
CAUTION axle is not operational. The “central warning and an acoustic signal sounds if the leading
Danger of accidents! light” lights up and an acoustic signal sounds. axle is not operational.
– The leading or trailing axle is
not steered when the engine is CAUTION
switched off. Danger of accidents!
– A valve test is performed after the The vehicle’s steering properties
engine is started. It takes about are restricted if the “STOP” signal
5 seconds. The axle is not steered appears on the display when there is
during this time. a malfunction in the steered trailing
Therefore: axle. This can result in critical driving
• Do not push the vehicle or allow it situations. Reversing is then no
to roll when the engine is switched longer possible.
off Therefore:
• Wait 5 seconds after starting the • Stop the vehicle – taking account
engine before driving off of the traffic situation
• When towing, make sure that the • Obtain workshop assistance
axle is not in contact with the
carriageway
107
Vehicle operation
Continuous Damping Control (CDC)
Continuous Damping Control The check lamp in the rocker switch lights up
(CDC) green.
Functional description Switching off

The Continuous Damping Control uses various The check lamp in the rocker switch goes out.
input parameters to ascertain the current
driving and loading condition, and automatically
controls damping of the vehicle. Advantages:
– Increased comfort when driving unladen and
with partial loads
– Greater roll stability and driving safety
– Reducing the stress on the vehicle’s cargo
Stronger damping can be selected for special
vehicle applications involving an extremely high
centre of gravity or when transporting liquids.
Switching stronger damping on and off
Switching on
108
Vehicle operation
BEKA-MAX central lubrication system
BEKA-MAX central lubrication

system
Function
The vehicle’s central on-board computer (ZBR)

triggers the lubrication cycle at intervals,
depending on the set lubrication interval.
The interval and the quantity of lubricant per
actuation can only be changed or adjusted by
a MAN Service workshop.
Manual interim lubrication
Manual interim lubrication can be triggered as

follows, if required:
• Press the rocker button

Lubrication is performed.
A message appears on the display for the
duration of the lubrication.
109
Vehicle operation
Roof spoiler
ROOF SPOILER
Correct setting Setting the roof spoiler

CAUTION
Danger of injury!
You could slip and fall off the vehicle
when adjusting. Severe injuries could
result.
Therefore:
• Make sure you are standing on a
solid surface with enough grip
WARNING
Danger of damage! • Unscrew the knurled screw 1 on one of the
– The max. permitted vehicle height two supports
can vary from country to country. • Hold the roof spoiler firmly and unscrew the
When set correctly, the roof spoiler reduces
– The max. permitted vehicle height knurled screw 1 on the other support
wind resistance and, therefore, lowers fuel
might be exceeded by loading onto • Move the roof spoiler to the desired position
consumption by up to 2 l / 100 km (e.g.
a low-loader or railway wagon. and retighten the knurled screws
the difference between 28 and 35 mpg).
This would result in damage when
Consequently, the roof spoiler must be set
driving under bridges or through
correctly. Comply with the following instructions
tunnels.
when doing this:
Therefore:
– The roof spoiler must not project over the
• Set the roof spoiler so the
body.
max. vehicle height permitted
– An imaginary extension of the roof spoiler
in the country in question is not
beyond its rear edge should exactly meet
exceeded. Comply with national
the front edge of the body.
regulations when doing this.
• Lower the roof spoiler before
loading the vehicle onto a
low-loader or a railway wagon.
Adjusting the roof spoiler correctly:
110
Vehicle operation
Opening and closing the front flap
OPENING AND CLOSING THE FRONT FLAP
CAUTION Note
Danger of accidents! The two gas springs 5 help in opening
Danger of injury from trapping fingers the front flap and fix it in the fully open
in the windscreen wiper linkage when position.
the windscreen wipers are switched
on. Closing the front flap
Therefore: • Use the loop 6 to pull the front flap
• Switch off the windscreen wipers downwards and swing it closed with
before opening the front flap moderate force
Make sure you can hear the locking device of
the front flap clip in.
Front flap
• Pull the release 3 for the front flap in the cab
Opening The front flap is now unlocked and springs
Opening and closing the front
open. flap on snowplough and gritter
• Push the locking device under the front flap vehicles
2 upwards with your finger
Opening
Note
On many snowplough and gritter
vehicles, it is not possible to open
the normal front flap with the front
implement mounted.
These vehicles are equipped with an
additional, smaller front flap 8 especially
for snowplough and gritter vehicles.
• Switch off the windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper arms 1 must be in the
rest position.
• Swivel the front flap 4 upwards
111
Vehicle operation
Opening and closing the front flap
• Close the front flap 8

• Swivel the levers 7 on the left and right sides
of the front flap upwards
This locks the front flap.
• Swivel the levers 7 on the left and right sides

of the front flap downwards
This unlocks the front flap.
• Pull the front flap 8 forwards and lift it out of

the bottom holders 9
Closing
• Insert the front flap 8 into the bottom
holders 9
112
Vehicle operation
Side-impact protection devices
SIDE-IMPACT PROTECTION DEVICES
Side-impact protection device with 2 Bottom side-impact protection device

pin closure
Folding open the top protection device
CAUTION
The side-impact protection devices
protrude sideways when they are
opened. Opening them on the road
can impede the flow of traffic and
result in a serious accident.
following:
• Push the top protection device 1 upwards
• Make sure that the side-impact
out of its rubber mountings and open it
protection devices do not impede
downwards
the flow of traffic
• Pull the spring cotter pins 4 on the inside out Folding open the bottom side-impact
Side-impact protection device of the retaining pins 3 protection device
• Pull the retaining pins 3 out of the top
supports of the protection device
1 Top side-impact protection device
113
Vehicle operation
• Pull the spring cotter pins 4 out of the • Pull the retaining pin with cable 3 over the Side-impact protection device with
retaining pins 3 top protection device and insert it back into bolted closure
• Pull the retaining pins 3 out of the bottom the bottom supports of the protection device
supports of the protection device • Secure the retaining pins 3 using spring Opening
cotter pins 4
CAUTION
Folding closed the bottom protection Danger of accidents!
device The side-impact protection device
• Pull the spring cotter pins 4 out of the protrudes sideways when it is
retaining pins 3 opened. Opening them on the road
• Hold the bottom protection device firmly and can impede the flow of traffic and
pull the retaining pins 3 out of the bottom result in a serious accident.
supports of the protection device Therefore, please always ensure the
• Fold the bottom protection device 2 following:
downwards and press it into the rubber • Make sure that the side-impact
mountings protection device does not impede
• Insert the retaining pins 3 into the bottom the flow of traffic
• Push the bottom protection device 2 upwards
out of its rubber mountings and open it
• Secure the retaining pins using spring cotter
upwards
pins 4
Folding closed the top protection device

• Fold the top protection device 1 upwards and
press it into the rubber mountings
• Insert the retaining pins 3 into the top
• Secure the retaining pins 3 using spring
cotter pins 4
• Unlock the protection device 5 by pulling

forcefully on its underside
114
Vehicle operation
• Swing the protection device 5 open upwards
Closing
• Fold the protection device 5 downwards to
close it and press forcefully on its underside
to lock it
115
Vehicle operation
Tilting the cab forwards and backwards manually
TILTING THE CAB FORWARDS AND BACKWARDS MANUALLY
The windscreen wiper arms must

Preparations The windscreen wiper arms must be in the rest
be in the rest position.
position.
CAUTION • Open the front flap before tilting
• Switch off the ignition
Danger of fatal injury! the cab forwards
• Secure loose objects in the cab
• When pumping, keep enough
Excessive proximity to the running • Switch off the auxiliary heater, see “Heating,
distance between the operating
engine can cause a pacemaker to ventilation and auxiliary air heater”, Page 68,
rod and the cab and indicator
fail. Cardiac arrest can be caused. see “Air-conditioning system, auxiliary
• In vehicles equipped for
Therefore: air-conditioning unit and auxiliary air heater”,
snowplough or gritter operation,
• Keep at least 20 cm away from the Page 74 and see “Auxiliary heaters”, Page 84
remove the implement (e.g.
running engine • Empty the storage lockers
snowplough) before tilting
• Empty the storage box
CAUTION • Fold away the folding table
WARNING
Danger of accidents! • Open the front flap, see “Opening and closing
Danger of damage!
Tilting the cab forwards and the front flap”, Page 111
In vehicles with an air-sprung front
backwards can result in serious • In vehicles equipped for snowplough or
axle and 385/65 R 22.5 tyres, there
accidents. gritter operation, remove the implement (e.g.
will be a collision between the cab
Therefore: snowplough) before tilting
• Keep the area in front of the cab entrance and the tyres when the
clear vehicle is lowered at the front.
• Make sure the space between the This will cause damage to the cab
cab and the chassis is clear entrance and the tyres.
• Do not lean on the vehicle Therefore:
• Always tilt the cab forwards to its • Raise the vehicle at the front
final position before tilting the cab forwards, see
“Air/air suspension”, Page 100
WARNING • Use chocks and apply the parking brake to
Danger of damage! prevent the vehicle from rolling away
Components can be damaged during • Shift the gearbox to neutral “N”
the tilting procedure. • Switch off the windscreen wipers, see
Therefore, before tilting: “Wiping, washing and heating the
• Switch off the windscreen wipers windscreen”, Page 47
116
Vehicle operation
• Remove the rod 1 and operating rod 2 for • Move the lever 4 of the changeover valve to Tilting backwards
wheel nut spanners under the front flap and the top as far as the stop
leave the front flap open Note
WARNING Make sure the cab locks are clear before
• Close the doors
Danger of damage! you tilt the cab backwards.
The operating rod 2 can damage
Tilting forwards the cab and the indicator during
pumping.
Therefore:
• When pumping, keep enough
• Move the lever 4 of the changeover valve to

the bottom as far as the stop
• If fitted, fold down the cover 3 in the • Place the wheel nut spanner with elbow
co-driver’s side entrance fitting onto the hexagon profile 5
WARNING
Danger of damage!
• Place wheel nut spanner 7 with elbow fitting The operating rod 2 can damage
6 from tool kit onto the hexagon profile 5 the cab and the indicator during
• Continue pumping using the operating rod 2 pumping.
until the cab has reached its final position Therefore:
The cab is unlocked and tilts forwards. • When pumping, keep enough
• Place wheel nut spanner 7 with elbow fitting
6 from tool kit onto the hexagon profile 5
117
Vehicle operation
• Continue pumping using the operating rod 2

until the cab has reached its final position
The cab tilts backwards.
• Continue pumping until you hear the cab
engage in the cab locks
• Stow the chocks and tools
• Close the front flap
• If fitted, close the cover 3 in the co-driver’s
side entrance
Checking the locking

CAUTION The “STOP” sign and the “Cab lock” check lamp
Danger of accidents! 9 and “central warning light” 8 must go out.
The cab can tilt forwards during sharp Note
braking if it is not completely locked. If this fault message does not go out,
Serious accidents can be caused. either the cab has not been fully lowered
Therefore: or the cab locks are defective.
• Always check the locks after tilting Do not drive the vehicle if the cab locks
the cab backwards are defective. Immediately inform a MAN
• The lever 4 of the changeover Service workshop.
valve must be pointing downwards • Tilt the cab fully backwards if the
• Turn the ignition key to the on position aforementioned fault message is triggered
You must be able to hear the cab engage in the
cab locks.
118
Vehicle operation
Tilting the cab forwards and backwards electrically
TILTING THE CAB FORWARDS AND BACKWARDS ELECTRICALLY
The windscreen wiper arms must

Preparations • Secure loose objects in the cab
be in the rest position.
• Switch off the auxiliary heater, see “Heating,
CAUTION • Open the front flap before tilting
ventilation and auxiliary air heater”, Page 68,
Danger of fatal injury! the cab forwards
see “Air-conditioning system, auxiliary
• In vehicles equipped for
Excessive proximity to the running air-conditioning unit and auxiliary air heater”,
snowplough or gritter operation,
engine can cause a pacemaker to Page 74 and see “Auxiliary heaters”, Page 84
remove the implement (e.g.
fail. Cardiac arrest can be caused. • Empty the storage lockers
snowplough) before tilting
Therefore: • Empty the storage box
• Keep at least 20 cm away from the • Fold away the folding table
WARNING
running engine • Open the front flap, see “Opening and closing
Danger of damage!
the front flap”, Page 111
CAUTION In vehicles with an air-sprung front
• In vehicles equipped for snowplough or
Danger of accidents! axle and 385/65 R 22.5 tyres, there
gritter operation, remove the implement (e.g.
will be a collision between the cab
Tilting the cab forwards and snowplough) before tilting, see
backwards can result in serious entrance and the tyres when the
accidents. vehicle is lowered at the front.
This will cause damage to the cab Tilting forwards
Therefore:
• Keep the area in front of the cab entrance and the tyres.
Therefore: Note
clear
• Raise the vehicle at the front The cab can also be tilted manually if the
• Make sure the space between the
before tilting the cab forwards, see electrical cab tilt mechanism fails, see
cab and the chassis is clear
“Air/air suspension”, Page 100 “Tilting the cab forwards and backwards
• Do not lean on the vehicle
• Use chocks and apply the parking brake to manually”, Page 116.
• Always tilt the cab forwards to its
final position prevent the vehicle from rolling away
• Shift the gearbox to neutral “N”
WARNING • Switch off the windscreen wipers, see
Danger of damage! “Wiping, washing and heating the
Components can be damaged during windscreen”, Page 47
the tilting procedure. The windscreen wiper arms must be in the rest
Therefore, before tilting: position.
• Switch off the windscreen wipers • Switch off the ignition
119
Vehicle operation
Vehicle with plastic bumper • Fold down the cover 1 in the co-driver’s side Note
entrance If the rubber cap 3 is lost, the magnetic
pushbutton can also be operated with
another metallic object (e.g. vehicle
key). It is only necessary to touch the
magnetic pushbutton with the metallic
object.
• Continue pressing the rubber cap until the
cab has reached its final position
Vehicle with steel bumper

The check lamp in the switch lights up yellow. • Move the lever 2 of the changeover valve to
the top as far as the stop
Note
If the check lamp in the switch does
not come on, the front flap must still be
opened.
• Close the doors

The check lamp in the switch lights up yellow.
Note
If the check lamp in the switch does
not come on, the front flap must still be
• Press the rubber cap 3 to operate the opened.
magnetic pushbutton
• Close the doors
The cab is unlocked and tilts forwards.
120
Vehicle operation
Tilting backwards • Press the rubber cap 3 to operate the

magnetic pushbutton
Vehicle with plastic bumper The cab tilts backwards.
• Continue pressing the rubber cap until you
Note
hear the cab engage in the cab locks
Make sure the cab locks are clear before
you tilt the cab backwards. Note
You will hear the pump motor running
“heavily” after the cab has engaged in
the cab locks.
• Close the cover 1 in the co-driver’s side
entrance
• Move the lever 2 of the changeover valve to • Close the front flap
the top as far as the stop
CAUTION
• Press the rubber cap 3 to operate the
magnetic pushbutton
The cab can be tilted by unauthorised
The cab is unlocked and tilts forwards.
persons from the outside when the
Note cab tilt mechanism is switched on.
If the rubber cap 3 is lost, the magnetic Accidents and injuries to persons can
• Move the lever 2 of the changeover valve to be caused.
pushbutton can also be operated with
the bottom as far as the stop Therefore:
another metallic object (e.g. vehicle
key). It is only necessary to touch the • Always switch off the rocker switch
magnetic pushbutton with the metallic after tilting the cab backwards
object. • Press the top of the rocker switch
• Continue pressing the rubber cap until the The check lamp in the switch goes out.
cab has reached its final position
Note
Make sure the cab locks are clear before
you tilt the cab backwards.
121
Vehicle operation
Therefore: Note
• Always switch off the rocker switch If this fault message does not go out,
after tilting the cab backwards either the cab has not been fully lowered
• Press the top of the rocker switch or the cab locks are defective.
The check lamp in the switch goes out. Do not drive the vehicle if the cab locks
are defective. Immediately inform a MAN
Service workshop.
Checking the locking • Tilt the cab fully backwards if the
CAUTION aforementioned fault message is triggered
Danger of accidents! You must be able to hear the cab engage in the
cab locks.
The cab can tilt forwards during sharp
braking if it is not completely locked.
• Move the lever 2 of the changeover valve to
the bottom as far as the stop
Therefore:
• Press the rubber cap 3 to operate the
• Always check the locks after tilting
magnetic pushbutton
the cab backwards
The cab tilts backwards.
• The lever 2 of the changeover
• Continue pressing the rubber cap until you
valve must be pointing downwards
hear the cab engage in the cab locks
• Turn the ignition key to the on position
Note
You will hear the pump motor running
“heavily” after the cab has engaged in
the cab locks.
CAUTION
The cab can be tilted by unauthorised
persons from the outside when the
cab tilt mechanism is switched on.
Accidents and injuries to persons can
be caused.
The “STOP” sign and the “Cab lock” check lamp

5 and “central warning light” 4 must go out.
122
Vehicle operation
Electronic brake system (EBS)
BRAKE SYSTEMS
Electronic brake system (EBS) MAN BrakeMatic harmonises the functions of Malfunction of the electronic braking
the EBS and the sustained-action brake, see system
Functional description “Use, effect and function of the sustained-action
brakes”, Page 136.
Integrated functions
CAUTION
The electronic braking system optimises the
braking procedure. It makes it easier to cope
with critical driving situations and shortens the The EBS is unable to surpass the
braking distance. In addition, the braking power physical limits of the brake system.
is better distributed between all wheels. Please bear this in mind, in particular
The following functions are integrated in the when driving on slippery, wet and
electronic braking system: unsurfaced roads. Do not let the
– Service brake (pedal brake) increased safety offered by EBS lead
– Anti-lock brake system (ABS) you into taking risks!
– Brake assistant Therefore:
• Always adapt your driving style, A message appears on the display if EBS is
– Drag torque control
and in particular your speed, to not operational. The “central warning light” and
Additional functions may be integrated
the road surface and the traffic the “brake system” check lamps come on and
depending on the equipment in the vehicle:
conditions a signal sounds.
– Anti-spin regulator (ASR)
– Electronic Stability Program (ESP) • Always be ready to brake
CAUTION
– Coupling force control • Always maintain a sufficient safety
– Hill holder distance
– An EBS malfunction alters the
Make sure nothing is obstructing the movement
Note braking and driving characteristics
of the pedals. Always keep the driver’s footwell
After a change in the load, the vehicle of the vehicle.
free from objects.
feels slightly different when braking. The – You have to press the brake pedal
EBS first has to adapt the brake force down further and with more force
distribution to the changed vehicle load. before the brakes take effect.
For it to do this, the vehicle must be – The brake lamps will not come on
braked a few times. in certain circumstances.
123
Vehicle operation
– The vehicle is braked without a released (allowing them to cool down) if the
brake control function if EBS fails. effect of the sustained-action brake is sufficient.
The wheels are more prone to This offers the advantages of reducing brake
locking up during braking – there is lining/pad wear and improving the braking
a risk of skidding! You can expect effect when the services brakes are next used.
the braking effect to be reduced.
Therefore: Malfunction of the service brakes (pedal
• Drive slowly and carefully brake)
• Have the system checked Reservoir pressure gauge for Euro 4:
at a MAN Service workshop
immediately
More information on fault messages, see
“Overview of displays and messages”, – If the reservoir pressure in both brake circuits
Page 254. is below 6 bar when the ignition is switched
on, the reservoir pressure in circuit II is
Service brake (pedal brake) always displayed.
– The reservoir pressure in brake circuit II is
Functional description displayed in normal operation. The reservoir
The service brakes act on all load-bearing pressure in circuit I is only displayed if it is
wheels of the vehicle by means of two lower than the reservoir pressure in circuit II.
independent compressed air circuits. The The reservoir pressure is too low if the
pressure gauges for the front axle (brake circuit compressed air gauge of a brake circuit
The reservoir pressure in brake circuits I and II
I) and rear axle (brake circuit II) indicate the displays below 6 bar.
is displayed.
reservoir pressure present in the corresponding
Reservoir pressure gauge for Euro 5:
brake circuit.
Avoiding brake overheating

Braking to keep the vehicle at a constant
speed for a long time (e.g. when driving
downhill) causes the brake linings/pads
to get very hot. If possible, switch on the
sustained-action brake in order to reduce the
wear on the service brake and to avoid the
linings overheating. The service brakes can be
124
Vehicle operation
• If the pressure is not reached: Do CAUTION

not set the vehicle in motion Danger of accidents!
• Determine the cause of the – Driving errors (e.g. safety distance
problem and have the defect from vehicle in front too short,
repaired at a MAN Service excessive speed) cannot be
workshop. compensated for by ABS. You
If one of the brake system’s reservoir circuits should not assume that the braking
should fail, the other circuit, the parking brake distance will be shortened!
system, the sustained-action brake system – ABS does not take effect at slower
and the auxiliary consumers remain functional. than about 5 km/h.
However, it cannot be guaranteed that the – The functions of the ABS may be
service brakes will function adequately. restricted if the differential lock is
Then, a message and the “STOP” symbol For more information about check lamps and switched on and there is tension in
appear on the display. The “central warning messages on the display, refer to an overview the driveline.
light” and the “brake system” check lamps come containing information about dealing with Therefore:
on and a signal sounds. the particular malfunction, see “Overview of • Always adapt your driving style,
displays and messages”, Page 254. and in particular your speed, to
CAUTION the road surface and the traffic
Danger of accidents! conditions
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
An adequate braking effect cannot • Always be ready to brake
be assured if the reservoir pressure Functional description • Always maintain a sufficient safety
in brake circuits I or II is too low. The A vehicle equipped with ABS retains its distance
vehicle cannot be driven! Serious directional stability and steering function even ABS only functions with restrictions when the
accidents can be caused. when the brakes are fully applied on a slippery differential locks are engaged. The “ABS” check
Therefore: road surface, because the wheels do not lock lamp comes on in this case.
• Stop immediately, taking into up.
account the situation on the The brake pedal must be pressed right down,
road regardless of road conditions, in order to obtain
• Run the engine at increased revs the shortest possible braking distance.
until the pressure is reached (the
message goes out)
125
Vehicle operation
Malfunction of the anti-lock brake system • Always adapt your driving style, ABS functional check when towing a trailer
and in particular your speed, to with ABS
the road surface and the traffic
conditions
• Always be ready to brake
• Always maintain a sufficient safety
distance
• Have the system checked at a
MAN Service workshop
ABS functional check when towing a trailer

without ABS
A message appears on the display if ABS is

not operational. The “central warning light” and A message appears on the display if the trailer
the “ABS” check lamps come on and a signal ABS is not operational. The “central warning
sounds. light” and the “ABS” check lamps come on and
a signal sounds.
CAUTION The point at which the check lamps go out and
Danger of accidents! the display message disappears depends on
The vehicle is braked without ABS the type of the trailer ABS.
control if ABS fails. Therefore:
– The wheels are more prone Brake assistant
to locking up during braking –
Danger of skidding! The “ABS info in trailer” check lamp comes on. The brake assistant assists the driver during
– You can expect the braking effect emergency braking. In such situations, the
to be reduced. brake assistant detects that the brake pedal
This also applies to the trailer if it is is being operated rapidly. It responds by
not equipped with ABS or if its ABS increasing the braking power and thereby
has failed. reduces the braking distance.
Therefore: Do not reduce the pressure applied to the brake
pedal for as long as you still want to brake the
vehicle.
126
Vehicle operation
Drag-torque control Anti-spin regulation active
A drag torque is created when shifting

down, when decelerating, when using the
sustained-action brake or due to the resistance
in the driveline when driving downhill. This
increases the tendency of the driven wheels to
lock, irrespective of whether the service brakes
are applied or not. The ABS only applies to
the service brakes and has no effect in this
case. Drag-torque control compensates for
this effect. It recognises situations of this kind
and intervenes by increasing the engine torque • Press the top of the rocker button
gradually and in good time before the wheels The “ASR” check lamp flashes yellow.
can lock. The “ASR” check lamp comes on when ASR is
The spin threshold increase is active.
active.
Anti-spin regulator (ASR) Deactivating the spin threshold increase
Malfunction of the anti-spin regulation
• Press the top of the rocker button again
Functional description A message appears on the display if ASR is
Alternatively
The anti-spin regulator (ASR) prevents the not operational. The “central warning light” and
driven wheels from spinning when moving off the “ASR” check lamps come on and a signal
and accelerating. This keeps the vehicle stable. sounds.
Anti-spin regulation ASR is only activated if Coupling force control
there is adequate reservoir pressure in the Switching on the spin threshold increase
brake circuits. Rocker button, if vehicle is only equipped with Coupling force control matches the braking
Switching on the spin threshold increase ASR: effort between the tractor vehicle and the trailer
means the ASR permits increased spin up or semitrailer. The objectives are that the trailer
to a speed of about 40 km/h. Under certain or semitrailer on the one hand, and the tractor
circumstances (e.g. operation with snow vehicle on the other, should brake according to
chains, loose ground), this can improve the their own weight and that the load should be
vehicle’s traction. Switch off the spin threshold evenly distributed between the brakes.
increase when these circumstances no longer
apply.
127
Vehicle operation
Electronic stability program (ESP) Malfunction in the electronic stability

program
The electronic stability program ESP helps the
driver to cope in critical driving situations by
automatically braking and reducing the engine
torque. This applies, for example, to sudden
passing manoeuvres or when cornering with
excessive speed, in order to reduce skidding,
jackknifing of the tractor-trailer unit and to limit
its tendency to roll over.
CAUTION • Press the top of the rocker button

Danger of accidents! The “ASR” check lamp flashes yellow.
The ESP is unable to surpass the The spin threshold increase is active.
physical limits of the brake system. A message appears on the display if ESP is
Please bear this in mind, in particular not operational. The “central warning light” and
Deactivating the spin threshold increase
when driving on slippery, wet and the “ESP” check lamps come on and a signal
unsurfaced roads. Do not let the sounds.
Alternatively
increased safety offered by ESP lead • Switch off the ignition
you into taking risks! Activating the spin threshold increase
Therefore: Rocker button, if vehicle is equipped with ASR
• Always adapt your driving style, and ESP:
Hill holder
and in particular your speed, to
the road surface and the traffic Functional description
conditions. The hill holder is activated after the vehicle is
• Always be ready to brake braked using the service brake. It prevents the
• Always maintain a sufficient safety vehicle from rolling away unintentionally. The
distance brake pressure is maintained after the brake
pedal is released. As soon as the required
engine torque is produced when moving off, the
brake is released automatically and the vehicle
moves off. The usual moving-off procedure with
the parking brake is no longer necessary.
128
Vehicle operation
The hill holder is not activated after the vehicle • Press the top of the rocker button
is braked to a standstill with active ABS. The check lamp in the rocker button comes on.
CAUTION
Deactivating the hill holder
The hill holder is deactivated when The check lamp in the rocker button goes out.
the ignition is turned off. The vehicle
can roll away uncontrollably if the
parking brake is not applied.
Therefore:
• Always apply the parking brake
after parking the vehicle
• Use wheel chocks to prevent the
vehicle from rolling away
Activating the hill holder

The hill holder should be activated during
normal driving. In certain situations (e.g.
manoeuvring on a level surface), it may be a
good idea to deactivate the hill holder.
The hill holder is deactivated after the ignition
is switched on.
129
Vehicle operation
Parking brake (handbrake)
Parking brake (handbrake) Therefore:

• Do not apply the parking brake
Functional description and safety whilst driving
The parking brake acts mechanically on the Applying the parking brake
wheels of the rear axle(s) by spring force when
the spring-loaded brake cylinders are vented.
In the case of a pneumatic front axle parking
brake, the brake acts on the wheels of the front
axle.
CAUTION
The “Parking brake” check lamp comes on.
– The vehicle can roll away
uncontrollably if the parking brake CAUTION
is not applied. Danger of accidents!
– Chocks can be used in addition to If the vehicle or the tractor-trailer unit
the brakes to prevent the vehicle is parked with its brakes hot from
from rolling away. • Push the lever 1 backwards until it engages operation:
Therefore: The brake materials (brake shoes
The parking brake has been applied when the
• Always apply the parking brake and discs) contract as they cool, and
lever can no longer be moved forwards without
when parking the vehicle the braking effort of the parking brake
pulling the lever catch 2.
• Always use chocks is reduced. The vehicle is no longer
CAUTION sufficiently braked.
CAUTION Danger of accidents! Therefore:
Danger of accidents! • Always check that the lever 1 has • Always use chocks
Vehicle with pneumatic front axle engaged completely.
parking brake:
Partial application of the parking brake
Only operate the handbrake whilst
driving if there is an emergency, • Push the lever 1 backwards gradually until
e.g. if the service brake fails. The the biting point
wheels can lock and the vehicle may • Hold the lever in the desired position
jack-knife.
130
Vehicle operation
As soon as you release the lever, it CAUTION The trailer is now braked again.
automatically moves forwards into the released Danger of accidents! If this check reveals that the tractor vehicle’s
position. The vehicle can roll away in the brake is unable to hold the tractor-trailer unit
The “Parking brake” check lamp comes on. test position. This could result in an then the place you have selected for parking
accident. up the tractor-trailer unit is not suitable. Find a
Releasing the parking brake Therefore: suitable place to park up the tractor-trailer unit.
• Always be ready to apply the
service brakes during the test Parking brake malfunction
procedure
• Switch off the frequent-stop brake, see The reservoir pressure in brake circuit III must
“Frequent-stop brake”, Page 133 be sufficient to enable the parking brake to be
released.
• Pull the lever catch 2

The lever automatically moves forwards into
the released position.
The “Parking brake” check lamp goes out.
Test position • Apply the parking brake

If the reservoir pressure in brake circuit III is too
• Press the lever 1 in, push it further back
low, a STOP message appears on the display.
The test position can be used on uphill or beyond the detent position and hold it there
The “Parking brake” check lamp lights up and
downhill gradients to check whether the braking The brakes of the trailer are released, the
an acoustic signal sounds.
effect of the spring actuator is sufficient to brake combination is now only held by the brake of
the stationary vehicle and trailer or semitrailer. the tractor vehicle.
If the vehicle has a pneumatic front axle parking After the check:
brake then the test must also be performed on • Release the lever 1
the solo vehicle. The lever automatically returns to the parking
brake position.
131
Vehicle operation
– The rear or front wheels can

lock up if there is a rapid or
sudden pressure loss. This might
cause the vehicle to skid. Serious
accidents can be caused.
Therefore:
• Stop immediately, taking into
account the situation on the
road
• Run the engine at increased revs
until the pressure is reached (the
message goes out)
The display message, the “brake system” check • Do not move the vehicle if the
lamp and the central warning light can go pressure is not reached
out again under certain circumstances. Only • Determine the cause of the
the “parking brake” check lamp remains lit, problem and have the defect
although the parking brake is not applied. This repaired at a MAN Service
indicates the reservoir pressure in brake circuit workshop
III is too low.
CAUTION
The rear or front wheels might be
braked if the reservoir pressure
in brake circuit III is too low. The
vehicle cannot be driven!
– The brake linings/pads come into
contact with the drums or discs if
there is a slow pressure loss or if
the reservoir pressure is too low.
They become very hot, undergo
more rapid wear and could catch
fire.
132
Vehicle operation
Frequent-stop brake
Frequent-stop brake Switching the frequent-stop brake on and Extended frequent-stop brake
off
Functional description and safety Function
Switching on If the extended frequent-stop brake is
The frequent-stop brake requires less The frequent-stop brake only operates when preselected, the frequent-stop brake is
compressed air than the parking brake. the ignition is switched on, at speeds below switched on automatically as soon as the
Therefore, apply the frequent-stop brake when about 3 km/h or when the vehicle is stationary. vehicle is braked to slower than about 2 km/h.
stopping only briefly. • Bring the vehicle to a standstill To do this, a mode must be selected with the
However, always apply the parking brake (hand mode switch and a gear must be engaged.
brake) if the stopping point is located on an The frequent-stop brake is disengaged
uphill or downhill gradient. automatically as soon as the vehicle moves off
It is not possible to activate the frequent-stop again.
brake after braking the vehicle to a standstill
with active ABS. Preselecting
CAUTION
– The frequent-stop brake cannot be
used as a parking brake.
– The frequent-stop brake does not
operate when the battery master
switch or battery isolator switch is • Press the top of the rocker switch
turned off. The check lamp in the switch lights up yellow.
Therefore: The frequent-stop brake is switched on.
• Apply the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle Switching off
Note The check lamp in the switch goes out. • Press the top of the rocker switch 1
If the ignition is switched off whilst the The frequent-stop brake is switched off.
frequent-stop brake is applied but the
handbrake is not applied, an acoustic
signal sounds.
133
Vehicle operation
Frequent-stop brake
The check lamp comes on.
Stopping and switching on

• Release the accelerator (take your foot off
the pedal).
• Use the service brakes and bring the vehicle
to a standstill
The frequent-stop brake is switched on
automatically.
Moving off and switching off

• Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate)
The frequent-stop brake is switched off
automatically.
Revoking the preselection

• Press the bottom of the rocker switch 1
134
Vehicle operation
Anti-jackknife brake
Anti-jackknife brake Switching on
Introduction and safety
When the anti-jackknife brake is applied, only

the trailer is braked in order to extend the
tractor/trailer combination.
CAUTION
– If the trailer does not have ABS,
the wheels may lock. This might
cause the vehicle to skid. Serious
– If only the anti-jackknife brake
• Slowly press lever 1 towards B
is used, the trailer brakes may
The trailer or the semitrailer brakes. The brakes
overheat. The braking power may
of the tractor vehicle are not active in this case.
be reduced and a serious accident
can result.
Switching off
Therefore:
• Exercise great caution when using • Release the lever 1
the anti-jackknife brake The lever automatically returns to the initial
• Only use the anti-jackknife position A.
brake to extend the tractor/trailer The brakes of the trailer or semitrailer are
combination released.
The “parking brake” check lamp goes out.
135
Vehicle operation
Use, effect and function of the sustained-action brakes
SUSTAINED-ACTION BRAKES
Engine brake, MAN PriTarder, Effect of the engine brake and MAN – Adaptive braking when the cruise control or
Intarder and MAN BrakeMatic PriTarder (primary retarder) road speed limiter is active:
If you want to reduce the programmed speed
The effectiveness of the primary retarder (e.g. when driving downhill), it is possible to
Use, effect and function of the
depends on the engine speed (high engine achieve a slower speed by briefly braking
sustained-action brakes
speed = high level of brake effectiveness). The with the service brakes. This speed is no
effect of the primary retarder is automatically longer exceeded for as long as the effect
Using the sustained-action brakes
cancelled if the engine speed is below approx. of the sustained-action brake is sufficient
The sustained-action brakes are used for 850 rpm. This avoids stalling of the engine. to prevent it. The cruise control and road
braking the vehicle without wear. As a result, Shift down to a lower gear to continue speed limiter are deactivated in this case.
they are used on long downhill stretches braking, or operate the service brakes. The They have to be reactivated by the driver as
for maintaining a constant speed or for sustained-action brakes are automatically soon as the programmed road speed needs
decelerating from a high speed. This reduces switched back on when the engine speed to be readopted.
wear on the service brakes and retains their exceeds approx. 1000 rpm. Additional functions may be integrated
full braking effect for emergency braking. The optimum braking effect is indicated on depending on the vehicle equipment:
Sustained-action brakes can be activated in the rev counter (2 green LEDs, see “Important – Activating the sustained-action brake when
any gear. things to remember after starting the engine”, the cruise control or road speed limiter is
Correct use of the sustained-action brakes see Page 148). active:
“Economical driving”, Page 316. The sustained-action brake is automatically
However, do not just use only the Effect of the Intarder (secondary retarder) activated when the programmed speed is
sustained-action brake to brake the vehicle exceeded on a downhill stretch in order to
The effectiveness of the Intarder depends on
as, if the service brake system is not used, maintain the set speed (+ approx. 2 to 4 km
the vehicle speed (high speed = high braking
the brake linings/pads will become hard /h).
effectiveness)
(“vitrification”) over time, leading to a reduction
in service brake power. If this is the case, have
Functions of MAN BrakeMatic
the brake linings/pads checked immediately by
a MAN Service workshop. The following functions are integrated in MAN
BrakeMatic:
– Activating the sustained-action brake when
braking with the service brakes.
136
Vehicle operation
Non-controlled engine brake
Non-controlled engine brake Indication for the engine brake activated – The sustained-action brake cannot
be used as a parking brake.
Controls and indicators Therefore:
• Do not activate the engine brake
Steering column stalk on a slippery road
• Operate the service brakes if
necessary
• Shift down to a lower gear at low
engine revs, or use the service
brakes
before leaving the vehicle
• Additionally, use chocks to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away
The “engine brake” symbol indicates the engine • Press button 2
brake is activated. The sustained-action brake brakes the vehicle
with maximum braking power.
Braking with the engine brake The “engine brake” symbol is shown on the
1 Steering column stalk display.
2 ON/OFF button: Activating or Engaging
deactivating Disengaging
CAUTION
Danger of accidents! • Press button 2
Display for optimum braking effect Alternatively
Optimum braking effect is achieved when the – There is a risk of skidding or sliding
if the carriageway is slippery (rain, • Press the accelerator pedal
rev counter needle is in the light green range, The “engine brake” symbol is no longer shown.
see “Important things to remember after starting ice, snow, mud, etc.)!
the engine”, Page 148. – The effect of the brake may
be interrupted when the clutch
is operated. The vehicle may
therefore accelerate if you change
gear whilst driving downhill!
– The lower the engine speed, the
lower the braking power.
137
Vehicle operation
Controlled engine brake and MAN PriTarder (primary retarder)
Controlled engine brake and MAN PriTarder Controls and indicators

(primary retarder)
Steering column stalk
Cooling
When the MAN PriTarder or torque converter

and clutch system (WSK) is activated, always
make sure that the engine revs do not fall below
approx. 1600 rpm in order to ensure adequate
cooling. This prevents power reduction of
the braking effort from taking effect too soon.
In particular when negotiating long downhill
stretches, shift to lower gears in order to keep The level (small number, e.g. 1) indicates
the engine speed above approx. 2000 rpm. the current braking level. A low level, e.g. 1,
The high engine speed does not affect fuel indicates low sustained-action braking power.
consumption since the fuel injection system
does not supply fuel when the vehicle is 1 Steering column stalk: Gradually
coasting. increasing or reducing the braking effort
2 MAX/OFF button: Activating with
maximum braking effort or switching
off
Display for optimum braking effect

Optimum braking effect is achieved when the
rev counter needle is in the light green range,
see “Important things to remember after starting
the engine”, Page 148.
Indicator for engaged primary retarder When the sustained-action brake is activated
When the sustained-action brake is activated by the MAN BrakeMatic, the “retarder
by the driver using the steering column stalk, operation” symbol appears on the display
the “retarder operation” symbol appears on the without the level.
display with the level.
138
Vehicle operation
Controlled engine brake and MAN PriTarder (primary retarder)
Braking with the primary retarder The “retarder operation” symbol appears on the Disengaging
display with the level. • Hold the steering column stalk 1 upwards
CAUTION
until the “retarder operation” symbol is no
Activating and gradually increasing the longer displayed
– There is a risk of skidding or sliding braking effort Alternatively
if the carriageway is slippery (rain, • Briefly press the steering column stalk 1 • Press button 2
ice, snow, mud, etc.)! upwards (direction “+”) Alternatively
– The effect of the brake may The braking effort is increased by one level. • Press the accelerator pedal
be interrupted when the clutch Alternatively The “retarder operation” symbol is no longer
is operated. The vehicle may • Press the steering column stalk 1 upwards shown.
therefore accelerate if you change and hold it there
gear whilst driving downhill! The braking effort is gradually increased.
– The lower the engine speed, the The “retarder operation” symbol appears on the
lower the braking power. display with the level.
– The sustained-action brake cannot • Release the steering column stalk
be used as a parking brake. The steering column stalk springs back to its
Therefore: initial position. The vehicle brakes with the set
• Do not activate the braking effort.
sustained-action brake on a
slippery road Reducing the braking effort gradually and
switching off
necessary
• Briefly press the steering column stalk 1
• Shift down to a lower gear at low
downwards (direction “–”)
engine revs, or use the service
The braking effort is reduced by one level.
brakes
Alternatively
• Press the steering column stalk 1 downwards
and hold it there
The braking effort is gradually reduced.
The steering column stalk springs back to its
Activating at maximum braking effort initial position. The vehicle brakes with the set
• Press button 2 braking effort.
The sustained-action brake brakes the vehicle The sustained-action brake is switched off
with maximum braking power. when switching back from level 1 to level 0.
139
Vehicle operation
Intarder (secondary retarder)
Intarder (secondary retarder) Controls and indicators
Function Steering column stalk
The Intarder is a hydrodynamic, oil-filled

retarder that is mounted on the gearbox. It
converts braking energy into heat that has to
be dissipated through the cooling system.
When the Intarder is activated, always make
sure that the engine revs do not fall below
approx. 1600 rpm in order to ensure adequate
cooling. This prevents power reduction of
the braking effort from taking effect too soon. The level (small number, e.g. 1) indicates
In particular when negotiating long downhill the current braking level. A low level, e.g. 1,
stretches, shift to lower gears in order to keep indicates low sustained-action braking power.
the engine speed above approx. 2000 rpm.
The high engine speed does not affect fuel 1 Steering column stalk: Gradually
consumption since the fuel injection system increasing or reducing the braking effort
does not supply fuel when the vehicle is 2 MAX/OFF button: Activating with
coasting. maximum braking effort or switching
off
Display for engaged Intarder

When the sustained-action brake is activated
by the driver using the steering column stalk,
the “retarder operation” symbol appears on the
display with the level.
When the sustained-action brake is activated

by the MAN BrakeMatic, the “retarder
operation” symbol appears on the display
without the level.
140
Vehicle operation
Intarder (secondary retarder)
Braking with the Intarder Activating and gradually increasing the Disengaging
braking power • Hold the steering column stalk 1 upwards
CAUTION
• Briefly press the steering column stalk 1 until the “retarder operation” symbol is no
upwards (direction “+”) longer displayed
– There is a risk of skidding or sliding The braking power is increased by one level. Alternatively
if the carriageway is slippery (rain, Alternatively • Press button 2
ice, snow, mud, etc.)! • Press the steering column stalk 1 upwards Alternatively
– The lower the road speed, the and hold it there • Press the accelerator pedal
lower the braking power. The braking power is gradually increased. The “retarder operation” symbol is no longer
– At the start of a journey in very The “retarder operation” symbol appears on the shown.
cold weather, the braking effect is display with the level.
delayed on the first occasion. • Release the steering column stalk
– The sustained-action brake cannot The steering column stalk springs back to its
be used as a parking brake. initial position. The vehicle brakes with the set
Therefore: braking effort.
• Do not activate the
sustained-action brake on a Reducing the braking effort gradually and
slippery road switching off
• Briefly press the steering column stalk 1
necessary
downwards (direction “–”)
The braking effort is reduced by one level.
Alternatively
• Press the steering column stalk 1 downwards
and hold it there
The braking effort is gradually reduced.
Activating at maximum braking effort • Release the steering column stalk
• Press button 2 The steering column stalk springs back to its
The sustained-action brake brakes the vehicle initial position. The vehicle brakes with the set
with maximum braking power. braking effort.
The “retarder operation” symbol appears on the The sustained-action brake is switched off
display with the level. when switching back from level 1 to level 0.
141
Vehicle operation
MAN BrakeMatic
MAN BrakeMatic Controls and indications on the display Indications on the display
The activated MAN BrakeMatic is indicated by
Function Controls the brake shoes around the symbol for the
selected cruise control.
MAN BrakeMatic is switched on automatically
after the ignition is switched on.
No check lamp in the rocker button lights
up. Functional description, see “Use, effect
and function of the sustained-action brakes”,
Page 136.
CAUTION
There is a risk of skidding or sliding if
the carriageway is slippery (rain, ice,
snow, mud, etc.)!
Therefore: Rocker button in a vehicle with non-controlled
• Switch off BrakeMatic if the engine brake. MAN BrakeMatic and cruise control activated.
carriageway is slippery
Rocker button in a vehicle with controlled MAN BrakeMatic and road speed limiter
engine brake, MAN PriTarder, torque converter activated.
and clutch system or Intarder.
142
Vehicle operation
MAN BrakeMatic
Deactivating and activating MAN

BrakeMatic
Deactivating MAN BrakeMatic

Reactivating MAN BrakeMatic

MAN BrakeMatic deactivated and cruise control

activated.
MAN BrakeMatic deactivated and road speed

limiter activated.
143
Vehicle operation
Battery master switch and battery isolator switch
DRIVING
Starting and switching off the Switching off • Turn the lever 2 anticlockwise up to the stop
engine and remove it
WARNING
• Refit protective cap 1 on the master switch
Danger of damage!
Battery master switch and battery isolator
Vehicle with Euro 5 type approval: Electrical battery isolator switch
switch
The proportioning system is blown
empty for about 2 minutes after the Function
Mechanical battery master switch
ignition is switched off. Residues
will be left in the proportioning
Switching on
system if the vehicle electrical
system is switched off during this
time. This may result in damage to
the proportioning system (blockage
due to crystal formation or freezing
of the reducing agent).
Therefore:
• Wait at least 2 minutes before
switching off
WARNING
Danger of damage! The switch automatically breaks the connection
The combustion air blower and the between the batteries and the electrical system
auxiliary heater circulating pump about 35 seconds after activation once all
• Remove the protective cap 1 from the master
continue running. This is to allow the current consumers have been switched off.
switch
• Attach the lever 2 and turn it clockwise up to auxiliary heater to cool down.
Therefore: Switching off
the stop
To protect against dirt: • Do not switch off the battery
WARNING
• Fit protective cap 1 on the lever master switch whilst the auxiliary
Danger of damage!
heater is still running
Vehicle with Euro 5 type approval:
• Remove the protective cap 1 from the lever
144
Vehicle operation
Battery master switch and battery isolator switch
The proportioning system is blown Note

empty for about 2 minutes after the The EU monitoring device continues to
ignition is switched off. Residues operate.
will be left in the proportioning
system if the vehicle electrical Switching on the electrical connection
system is switched off during this • Press the bottom of the switch as far as the
time. This may result in damage to stop (to stage II)
the proportioning system (blockage The switch springs back to the neutral position
due to crystal formation or freezing (stage I).
of the reducing agent). The electrical connection between the loads
Therefore: and the batteries is restored.
• Wait at least 2 minutes before
switching off Neutral position
• Press the bottom of the switch to stage I
WARNING
(middle position of the switch)
Danger of damage!
In the neutral position, the electrical battery
The combustion air blower and the isolator switch does not automatically
auxiliary heater circulating pump disconnect the loads from the batteries.
continue running. This is to allow the
auxiliary heater to cool down.
Therefore:
• Do not switch off the battery
isolator switch whilst the auxiliary
heater is still running
• Press the top of the switch
In this position, the connection between the
batteries and all electrical loads (except for the
EU monitoring device) is disconnected as soon
as they are switched off.
It will then not be possible to start the engine
either.
145
Vehicle operation
Starting the engine
Starting the engine Unlocking the steering in each case, see “Interior lighting”, Page 65.
The test procedure is immediately cancelled if
WARNING
Ignition key positions the engine is started during the check lamp test.
• Never lock the steering when the Note
vehicle is in motion. Remove the If the “immobiliser” symbol appears on
ignition key whenever you leave the display together with the “Code
the vehicle, even if only for a short invalid interlock active” text, this means
time. an incorrect ignition key has been used.
• If fitted, switch on the electrical battery With the engine cold:
isolator switch or mechanical battery master
switch
• Insert the ignition key in the steering/starter
lock (position 0)
• Jog the steering wheel from side to side and,
whilst doing this, turn the ignition key towards
0 Inserting or removing ignition key position I
I Radio position This unlocks the steering.
II Driving position: Ignition switched on
III Start position Switching on the ignition
WARNING • Apply the parking brake

Danger of accidents! • Shift the gearbox to neutral N
• Never switch off the ignition whilst The message “PRE-GLOW” appears on the
• Press the clutch pedal down fully
the vehicle is being driven, i.e. display during preheating. The “Flame start”
• Do not depress the accelerator
always leave the ignition key in check lamp comes on. However, there is a
driving position II. Note malfunction in the flame start system if the
The engine cannot be started unless the check lamp starts flashing only about 4 seconds
gearbox is in neutral (N) or you have after the ignition has been switched on. Contact
pressed the clutch pedal down fully. a MAN Service workshop.
• Turn the ignition key to position II • Wait until an acoustic signal sounds after the
The immobiliser is deactivated automatically. preheating time
All the check lamps come on, the red lamps first
and then the yellow lamps, for about 3 seconds
146
Vehicle operation
Starting the engine
Then the message “START ENGINE” is

displayed. As long as this message appears
on the display, the engine is ready to start.
If the engine is not started whilst this
message is displayed, the message “REPEAT
PRE-GLOW” is displayed for approx. 5 seconds
and an acoustic signal sounds. In this instance:
• Turn back the ignition key to position 0
(switch off ignition)
• Switch the ignition back on
Running the starter motor
• Turn the ignition lock up to the stop in

position III
• Do not run the starter motor for more than
10 seconds
• Release the ignition key when the engine has
started running
Note
Release the ignition key after the engine
has started. The key springs back to the
driving position.
If the engine does not start
• Turn back the ignition key to position 0

(switch off ignition)
• Wait about 30 seconds to give the batteries
time to recover
• Repeat the start procedure as described
above
147
Vehicle operation
Important things to remember after starting the engine
Important things to remember after starting • If the cause cannot be Engine speed ranges (eco band)
the engine determined and eliminated,
contact a MAN Service workshop
Check lamps and oil pressure immediately
• If the malfunction is indicated
whilst driving: Stop the vehicle
immediately, taking account of the
traffic situation, and switch off the
engine
• Check the oil pressure, see “Every day after
starting the engine”, Page 309
Once the engine has started, the flame start
system continues to operate for up to 6 minutes
depending on the coolant temperature. The
“flame start” check lamp flashes during this 1 Eco band: Economy range
time. 2 2 green LEDs: Optimum economical
range (bestpoint)
WARNING 3 Red: Warning zone – maximum permitted
WARNING Danger of engine damage! engine speed – engine at risk!
Danger of engine damage! • Do not run the engine above 800
Insufficient or excessive oil pressure rpm during the entire post-ignition Sustained-action brake operation / coasting
can cause engine damage. phase (when the “Flame start”
Therefore, if the “oil pressure” check check lamp is flashing) WARNING
lamp comes on and the central The other lamps and lights go out when Danger of engine damage!
warning light starts flashing: their check or warning functions have been Exceeding the maximum permitted
• Stop the engine immediately completed. Do not move off until the STOP engine speed can lead to engine
• Check the oil level and correct it, symbol on the display has gone out. damage.
see “Every day before starting the Make sure you have sufficient
engine”, Page 299 braking effect available before driving
• Determine and eliminate the cause downhill. Do this by:
of the insufficient or excessive oil • Shifting down to a lower gear or
pressure range in good time and
148
Vehicle operation
• Switching on the sustained-action • Repair the malfunction

brake immediately, obtain workshop
• Keeping an eye on the rev counter, assistance if necessary.
the needle must not move into the • If lower priority faults are indicated,
red zone 3 on the scale remedy the problem at the next
available opportunity or enlist the
assistance of a workshop!
Example of a stop message on the display:
If the maximum permitted engine speed is

exceeded, the check lamps 4 and 5 come on.
The “Workshop” symbol and the “Engine speed
too high” message appear on the display. An
warning signal sounds and the rev counter
The maximum available engine speed range is needle moves into the red zone on the scale.
shown on the rev counter scale and 2 green
LEDs 2 light up to indicate the engine speed Malfunction indicators
range within which optimum engine braking is CAUTION A stop message is active if:
achieved. Danger of accidents! – Central warning light 1 flashes red
Operating the sustained-action brake, see Failure to respond to displayed – The STOP symbol and a message appear
“Engine brake, MAN PriTarder, Intarder and malfunctions might lead to accidents on the display
MAN BrakeMatic”, Page 136. entailing damage to property and – Acoustic signal sounds
personal injury. In addition, a check lamp may light up red,
• If a stop message appears, stop e.g. 2.
the vehicle immediately, taking More information on fault messages, see
account of the traffic situation! “Overview of displays and messages”,
• If necessary, switch off the engine, Page 254.
apply the parking brake and
secure the vehicle to prevent it
from rolling away.
149
Vehicle operation
Engine torque reduced country of registration or in another country

where the vehicle is operated.
Engine power reduced
The engine has a self-protection feature that

can reduce the engine power. This may happen
depending on the outside temperature, the
operating altitude and the coolant temperature.
The central warning light comes on and a

message appears on the display when the tank
The "exhaust gas check" check lamp on the for reducing agent (AdBlue) is empty (Euro 5).
speedometer starts flashing and a message • Top up the reducing agent (AdBlue)
appears on the display if: immediately or have the malfunction put
– the exhaust gas emissions (NOx) are too right
high (Euro 4 and 5) If the warning is not heeded, fuel consumption
– a malfunction occurs in a system which may be increased. The engine torque is
monitors or affects the exhaust gas quality noticeably reduced in the following cases:
(EGR, sensor, etc.) (Euro 4 and 5) – After the next vehicle standstill if the tank for
– the tank for the reducing agent (AdBlue) is reducing agent is empty (Euro 5).
empty (Euro 5) – After approx. 50 operating hours if there is a
– a malfunction prevents dosing (consumption) malfunction in a system which monitors the
of reducing agent (Euro 5) exhaust gas quality (Euro 4 and 5).
In this case, it may be a against the law or
other regulations to operate the vehicle in
EU countries and possibly other countries.
This could be punishable by law. In addition,
incentives offered on the purchase and/or
during the operation of the vehicle (e.g. tax
reductions, road tolls) may be invalidated
retrospectively. This may be the case in the
150
Vehicle operation
Starting in an emergency
Starting in an emergency
An emergency start may be required if it is

not possible to start the engine but the vehicle
needs to be moved, e.g. because it has broken
down in a dangerous area or area with poor
visibility.
• Engage 1st gear
• Release the parking brake
• Release the clutch pedal
• Turn the ignition lock up to the stop in
position III
• Do not run the starter motor for more than
10 seconds
The starter is activated and pulls the vehicle.
151
Vehicle operation
Switching off the engine
Switching off the engine Switching off the engine It is no longer possible to turn the steering
wheel.
Safety notes
Coolant temperature
WARNING
Danger of engine damage!
• If the engine has been running
under a high load, the coolant
temperature will be quite high
(above 95 °C). Under such
circumstances, do not stop the
engine immediately, but let it idle
for approx. 1 to 2 minutes first. • Shift the gearbox to neutral N
Unintentional increase in power or engine • Turn the key anticlockwise up to the stop 0
speed (ignition off)
Observe the following rules in order to avoid This stops the engine.
injury to personnel and damage to the engine: • Lock the steering (see description below)
Operate the brake immediately if the
engine power or speed output increases Locking the steering
unintentionally. If the engine speed does not
WARNING
drop, stop the vehicle immediately – taking
account of the traffic situation – and switch off
the ignition. Stall the engine if necessary. • Never lock the steering when the
vehicle is in motion.
• Always have the key in driving
position II (ignition on) when
towing the vehicle.
• Turn the key to position 0 and pull it out
• Turn the steering wheel until the steering lock
can be heard to engage
152
Vehicle operation
Switching off the engine in an emergency
Switching off the engine in an emergency Check lamp Emergency off switch on the wing panel
extension
Emergency off switch – General
Switching off
Function
Do not operate the emergency off switch unless
the vehicle is stationary.
The emergency off switch is located on the
instrument panel and on the outside on the wing
panel extension on the driver’s side.
The emergency off switch disconnects the
battery from the vehicle electrical system
(exception: power is still supplied to the EU
monitoring device).
The red “emergency off malfunction” check
WARNING lamp comes on in the panel of check lamps
Danger of damage! only during a check lamp test and if there
Vehicle with Euro 5 type approval: is a malfunction in the cable. In this case, • Bring the vehicle to a standstill
The proportioning system is blown immediately drive to the nearest MAN Service • Apply the parking brake
empty for about 2 minutes after the workshop! • Move the side panel forwards if necessary
ignition is switched off. Residues • Open the red security flap 7 upwards
will be left in the proportioning • Flick the toggle switch 8 upwards
system if the vehicle electrical All loads are disconnected from the vehicle
system is switched off during this electrical system, with the exception of the EU
time. This may result in damage to monitoring device.
the proportioning system (blockage
due to crystal formation or freezing Switching on
of the reducing agent). • Press the red security flap 7 down and make
Therefore: sure you can hear it clip shut
• Restart the vehicle as quickly • Switch on the electrical battery master
as possible after operating the switch, see “Starting the engine”, Page 146.
EMERGENCY OFF switch
153
Vehicle operation
Switching off the engine in an emergency
Emergency off switch at the driver’s All loads are disconnected from the vehicle
position electrical system, with the exception of the EU
monitoring device.
Switching off
Switching on
• Press the security flap 9 down and make sure
you can hear it clip shut
• Switch on the electrical battery isolator
switch
• Bring the vehicle to a standstill

• Open the red security flap 9 upwards
• Flick the toggle switch 10 upwards
154
Vehicle operation
Cruise control (FGR) and road speed limiter (FGB)
Vehicle speed control functions Note Control and indications on the display
Using the cruise control incorrectly, e.g.
Cruise control (FGR) and road speed limiter on hilly roads, leads to increased fuel Steering column stalk
(FGB) consumption, see “Economical driving”,
Page 316.
Road speed limiter
Cruise control Any maximum speed can be programmed
Any desired speed can be programmed between a speed of 25 km/h and the statutory
between a speed of 25 km/h and the statutory speed limit. This speed is not exceeded, even if
speed limit. This speed is maintained with no the accelerator pedal continues to be pressed
need to press the accelerator, providing the when the speed limit is reached.
engine power is sufficient to do so. Heavily depressing the accelerator (e.g. for
By pressing the accelerator (accelerating), it is overtaking, as in the case of kickdown) does
possible to drive faster than the desired speed not switch off the road speed limiter, just
for a maximum of about 10 seconds. Gearshifts temporarily interrupts it. It is possible to drive
1 Steering column stalk:
can be performed by pressing the ComfortShift faster than the stored maximum speed. After
– Switching on and storing the speed
button. The cruise control is not switched off this, the stored maximum speed applies again.
after the ignition is switched on
in this case, just temporarily interrupted. The Additional functions are available when MAN
– Increasing or decreasing the speed
desired speed is once more maintained after BrakeMatic is switched on, see “Use, effect
and storing it
the accelerator pedal or the ComfortShift button and function of the sustained-action brakes”,
2 “MEM/OFF” switch: Deactivating and
is no longer pressed. Page 136.
reactivating with the last programmed
The cruise control is switched off by pressing The programmed speed is cancelled when the
speed
the accelerator pedal, clutch pedal, service ignition is switched off.
brakes or operating the sustained-action brake
for more than 10 seconds.
Additional functions are available when MAN
BrakeMatic is switched on, see “Use, effect
and function of the sustained-action brakes”,
Page 136.
The programmed speed is cancelled when the
155
Vehicle operation
Cruise control/road speed limiter rocker Cruise control preselected and no road BrakeMatic activated
switch speed programmed
The activated MAN BrakeMatic is indicated

Changing between cruise control and road by the brake shoes around the symbol
speed limiter. Road speed limiter or cruise control for the selected cruise control. When the
preselected and switched on sustained-action brake is activated by the MAN
Road speed limiter preselected and no road BrakeMatic, the “Engine brake” or “Retarder”
speed programmed symbol also appears, see “Sustained-action
brakes”, Page 136.
Preselecting, switching on and switching

off
Preselecting and switching on

The cruise control is preselected after the
ignition is switched on.
Cruse control and road speed limiter must
be preselected and switched on in order to
operate.
The selected vehicle speed control function and It is possible to change over between cruise
the road speed at which the engine power is control and the road speed limiter at any time.
reduced automatically are displayed.
156
Vehicle operation
One of the vehicle speed control functions is Reducing and programming the speed
always preselected or switched on. • Pull the steering column stalk 1 backwards
(towards “SET-”)
Preselecting cruise control The road speed is reduced.
• Press the bottom of the changeover switch Once the desired road speed has been
The check lamp in the rocker switch goes out, reached:
the road speed limiter is deactivated. • Release the steering column stalk 1
Preselecting the road speed limiter initial position. The road speed is stored and
• Press the top of the changeover switch maintained.
The check lamp in the rocker switch comes on,
cruise control is deactivated. Switching off
• Press switch 2 towards “OFF”
Switching on and storing the speed after Alternatively
the ignition is switched on • Operate the clutch, service brakes or
• Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the sustained-action brake
required speed
• Push the steering column stalk 1 forwards Switching back on with the most recently
(towards “SET+”) or pull it backwards stored speed
(towards “SET-”) • Press switch 2 towards “MEM”
The road speed is programmed. It is controlled The last stored speed is shown on the display.
and maintained. It is controlled and maintained.
Note
Increasing and programming the speed
The programmed speed is cancelled
• Push the steering column stalk 1 forwards
when the ignition is switched off.
(towards “SET+”)
The road speed is increased.
Once the desired road speed has been
reached:
• Release the steering column stalk 1
initial position. The road speed is stored and
maintained.
157
Vehicle operation
Lane Guard System An acoustic warning signal (rumble strip) The yellow “Lane Guard System passive” check
sounds as soon as the vehicle crosses a lane lamp comes on if the Lane Guard System
Lane Guard System (LGS) marking. does not provide warnings due to particular
The Lane Guard System optically evaluates the influences.
Functional description lateral lane markings, therefore these markings The Lane Guard System does not provide
need to be present and clearly visible. Equally, warnings:
The Lane Guard System is a comfort system the windscreen must be clean in the area of the – When the turn indicators are switched on
for highly developed roads (e.g. motorway) that video camera. – At a road speed below 60 km/h
informs the driver if the vehicle crosses the lane – If both lane markings are not detected
markings inadvertently. CAUTION
correctly, e.g. when the carriageway is
Note snowy or muddy, if the road surface has
The Lane Guard System warns the been repaired, when there are several
At relatively high speeds (above approx. driver if the vehicle crosses the lane
75 km/h), the Lane Guard System markings on the carriageway (at roadworks),
markings inadvertently. It does not in the wet (reflections) or on tight bends.
warning is not given until the vehicle has keep the vehicle within the lane.
crossed the lane marking. – If there is dirt build-up on the windscreen in
Therefore: the area of the video camera
• The driver is responsible for More information on fault messages, see
keeping the vehicle within the “Overview of displays and messages”,
lane when driving. Page 254.
Limits of the Lane Guard System Switching on the Lane Guard System
Note
The Lane Guard System is already
switched on if an acoustic signal sounds
when the ignition is switched on and the
check lamp in the rocker switch does not
light up.
The lane is optically scanned by a video • Switch on the ignition
camera 1 behind the windscreen. The Lane
Guard System evaluates the lateral lane
markings in the video image.
158
Vehicle operation

The check lamp in the rocker switch goes out.
As soon as the vehicle crosses the left or right
lane marking, an acoustic signal (rumble strip)
sounds from the left or right loudspeaker (in
addition to the radio).
Switching off the Lane Guard System

The check lamp in the rocker switch lights up
yellow.
159
Vehicle operation
MAN ComfortShift and ZF 16 S manual gearbox
Manual gearbox Controls and indications on the display Indications on the display
MAN ComfortShift and ZF 16 S manual Selector lever

gearbox
MAN ComfortShift and ZF 16 S manual

gearboxes are synchromesh 16-speed
range-change gearboxes with pneumatically
assisted mechanical gearshifts. They consist
of a 4-speed gearshift gearbox with a splitter
group and a range-change group on the output
end. The range-change group on the output
end doubles the number of gears to 8. The 4 Low range
individual gears can be “halved” again by 5 High range
1 Toggle switch (range-change group) 6 Number: Engaged gear
the splitter group, thereby dividing the ratio
– Pressed down: Gears 1 to 4 and N: Neutral position
range into 16 finely spaced gears that can
reverse gear (low range) R: Reverse
be engaged in sequence if necessary. The
– Pressed up: Gears 5 to 8 (high range) –: No gear engaged
permitted speed range of the engine must be
2 Rocker switch (splitter group) 7 High splitter group
taken into account. The engaged gear is shown
– Pressed up: High splitter group 8 Low splitter group
on the display as soon as the power link-up
– Pressed down: Low splitter group – Bars 4 and 5 filled in: Engaged range-change
occurs.
3 ComfortShift button (only with MAN group (illustration shows low range)
It is necessary to press the clutch pedal down
ComfortShift) – Bars 4 and 5 not filled in: Preselected
fully every time you move off.
The shift pattern indicates the position of the range-change group (illustration shows high
Changing gear:
selector lever in the individual gears. range)
ZF 16 S: The clutch pedal must be pressed
Neutral position N is located in the shift gate – Triangles 7 and 8 filled in: Engaged splitter
down fully.
between 3rd/7th and 4th/8th gears. group (illustration shows low splitter group)
MAN ComfortShift: The ComfortShift button
can be pressed instead of pressing the clutch – Triangles 7 and 8 not filled in: Preselected
pedal at speeds above 5 km/h. splitter group (illustration shows high splitter
group)
160
Vehicle operation
Check lamps and display messages – Select a lower starting-off gear, e.g.: Starting off
– 2nd gear, low splitter group when the
CAUTION
tractor/trailer unit is fully laden (40 t) on
the flat.
– 1st gear, low splitter group when the tractor There is no engine braking effect
/trailer unit is fully laden (40 t) on an uphill when the shift lever is in neutral
slope. position (N) or the clutch pedal
– Select lower revs for starting off, e.g.: is pressed down. The vehicle can
– 600 - 800 rpm on the flat. gather pace rapidly on an incline.
– 800 - 1000 rpm on a hill. Serious accidents can be caused.
– Do not release the ComfortShift button until Therefore:
the gear has been engaged. • Always apply the parking brake
– Do not let the clutch slip for longer than whenever the vehicle is at a
necessary, and no more than 1.5 seconds. standstill
More information on fault messages, see • Do not allow the vehicle to start
– Do not increase the engine revs until the
“Overview of displays and messages”, moving
clutch has engaged (take your foot off the
Page 254.
clutch pedal or release the ComfortShift
WARNING
button before you start accelerating).
Moving off and using the clutch Danger of damage!
– Manoeuvre only in the lowest gear and do
High clutch wear is caused by:
not let the clutch slip more than absolutely
Using the clutch – Not engaging the clutch fully
necessary.
Operating the vehicle’s clutch correctly is very (“slipping the clutch”).
– Never keep the vehicle “hanging on a slope”
important in terms of achieving a long service – Releasing the ComfortShift button
with the clutch slipping. Use the service
life. Incorrect operation drastically curtails 3 too soon.
brakes or the parking brake instead.
the service life. In the worst-case scenario, – Selecting an excessively high
– Never control the vehicle’s speed by slipping
the clutch could be irreparably damaged by gear.
the clutch (e.g. on roundabouts or when
overheating within a very short time. – Excessive engine revs when
shifting down).
The heavier the load on the vehicle and the engaging the clutch.
steeper the uphill or downhill slope, the lower Therefore:
the gear you should select. Clutch wear can be • Start off in a low gear
reduced significantly by selecting a low starting • Start off with low engine revs
gear and a low starting engine speed and by • Press the clutch pedal down fully
not accelerating until the clutch has engaged.
Recommendations for a long clutch service life:
161
Vehicle operation
• Do not release the ComfortShift • Starting off, forwards: Engage first gear with Note
button until the gear has been the shift lever It is not possible to shift back (gate
engaged Alternatively lock-out) if the engine speed range is
• Do not press the accelerator pedal • Starting off in reverse: Engage reverse gear exceeded (overrevving) when shifting
(accelerate) until the clutch has with the shift lever down into the gate between 1st/5th and
fully engaged • Release the parking brake 2nd/6th gears.
• Do not rush gearshifts and do not • Release the clutch pedal
exert excessive force The vehicle now moves off. Shifting from 4th to 5th gear and back
• Press the accelerator pedal (“accelerate”) again: Changing between range-change
Note
groups
The engine revs are restricted when Note
Shifting up from 4th to 5th gear, and
starting off, in order to protect the clutch. Only select reverse gear when the
shifting down involves changing between
The restriction on the engine revs is only vehicle is at a standstill and the engine
range-change groups.
lifted when the power link-up through the is at idling speed.
Changing between range-change groups:
clutch is complete. A buzzer sounds as a warning whenever
• Preselect the range-change group:
reverse gear is engaged.
– Press the toggle switch 1 up: High range
– Press the toggle switch 1 down: Low range
Changing gear • Press the clutch pedal down fully
or with MAN ComfortShift when driving at more
Changing gears 1 to 4 and 5 to 8: Changing than 5 km/h:
gear within the range-change group • Press the ComfortShift button
• Press the clutch pedal down fully • Shift the gearbox to neutral (N)
or with MAN ComfortShift when driving at more The range-change group is now changed.
than 5 km/h: • Engage the appropriate gear with the
• Press the ComfortShift button selector lever
• Engage the appropriate gear with the • Release the clutch pedal or ComfortShift
selector lever button
• Press the toggle switch 1 down: Engage the • Release the clutch pedal or ComfortShift • Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate)
low range button
• Press the bottom of the rocker switch 2: • Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate)
Engage the low range in the splitter group
• Shift the gearbox to “N”
162
Vehicle operation
Note • Change between range-change groups Therefore, please always ensure the
Only press the toggle switch 1 if you again following:
are going to change gear immediately • Always apply the parking brake
afterwards. Engaging a split gear: Changing the splitter when parking the vehicle
Do not shift down before you have group • Always use chocks
decelerated so that the engine will not It is a good idea to engage the splitter group in • Release the accelerator (take your foot off
overrev in the lower gear, i.e. so you order to stay within the optimum speed range the pedal)
do not run the engine outside its speed of the engine (e.g. interurban driving). • Apply the service brakes, brake the vehicle to
range. Change the splitter group: a standstill and press the clutch pedal down
• Preselect the splitter group: completely at the same time
No range-change group change – Press the top of the rocker switch 2: High • Apply the parking brake
splitter group • Press the toggle switch down: Engage the
– Press the bottom of the rocker switch 2: low range
Low splitter group • Push the slide switch back: Engage the low
• Press the clutch pedal down fully range in the splitter group
or when driving at more than 5 km/h: • Shift the gearbox to neutral (N)
• Press the ComfortShift button 3 For stopping, parking and leaving the vehicle:
The splitter group is now changed. • Switch off the engine
• Engage the required gear with the selector • Use wheel chocks to prevent the vehicle from
lever if necessary rolling away
• Release the clutch pedal or ComfortShift
button Tow-starting and towing away
For tow-starting and towing away see
If the symbols 4, 5 and 9 flash, this means “Tow-starting and towing away”, Page 344.
Stopping, parking and leaving the vehicle
the preselected range-change group does not
match the engaged range-change group. The CAUTION
gearshift has not been performed. Danger of accidents!
The range-change group can only be changed – The vehicle can roll away
providing the engine remains within its uncontrollably if the parking brake
permitted speed range. is not applied.
If the range-change group was not changed – Chocks can be used in addition to
when shifting down: the brakes to prevent the vehicle
• Reducing the speed from rolling away.
163
Vehicle operation
MAN TipMatic 12-speed
Automated gearbox – Drive forwards: D External neutral switch

– Manoeuvre forwards: DM
MAN TipMatic 12-speed – Neutral: N
– Drive reverse: R
Functional description – Manoeuvre reverse: RM
The MAN TipMatic is a combination of Steering column stalk

a constant-mesh gearbox with electronic
/pneumatic gearshift and an automated dry
clutch. The automated clutch (no clutch pedal)
means the driver does not operate the clutch.
The driver can choose to drive the vehicle
in automatic or manual mode. The system is
operated using the mode switch on the centre
3 External neutral switch
console and the steering column stalk on the
right next to the steering wheel. The gear that
Automatic mode
is engaged is shown on the display.
Mode switch 1 Steering column stalk: Changing gear

2 Button: Changing between automatic
and manual mode
Number: Driving forwards, engaged gear

N: Neutral position
Switch positions:
164
Vehicle operation
Manual mode Number: Engaged gear Starting off
Check lamps and display messages Reducing clutch wear
WARNING
Danger of damage!
The clutch can be damaged if the
vehicle rolls backwards against the
driving direction of the selected
starting gear.
following:
• Do not let the vehicle roll in the
opposite direction to the selected
Number: Driving forwards, engaged gear starting gear
N: Neutral position
There is a risk of overloading the clutch if you
The triangles show the number of gears that A message appears on the display together start off several times in quick succession, if
you can shift up or down at your current speed. with the “Stop” or “Workshop” symbol if the you select an excessively high gear for moving
gearbox is not operational. The “central warning off or if you manoeuvre the vehicle for too long.
Manoeuvring light” and the “Gearbox” check lamps come on Therefore:
and a signal sounds. • Start off in a low gear
More information on fault messages, see • Shift down to a lower gear if necessary
“Overview of displays and messages”, • Do not increase the engine revs (accelerate)
Page 254. until the clutch has engaged
If stopping for a prolonged period (more than
1 minute), move the mode switch to N. This
engages and, therefore, relieves the clutch.
Note
A warning message appears on the
display if the clutch is overloaded.
After the warning message has been
displayed, the next moving off is always
R: Manoeuvre reverse
performed in 1st gear.
D: Manoeuvre forward
165
Vehicle operation
Starting off forwards The vehicle now moves off in reverse. • Always be ready to apply the
The gearbox ECU engages 3rd gear when the Pulling the steering column stalk towards the brakes in good time using the
vehicle first moves off (after ignition on). The driver makes it possible to shift into 2nd reverse brake pedal
heavier the load on the vehicle and the steeper gear. • Use the sustained-action brake
the uphill or downhill slope, the lower the gear system (engine brake/retarder)
you should select. DM is for manoeuvring. Automatic mode • Shift down in good time
The gearbox ECU automatically selects the • Never turn the mode switch to N
optimum starting gear after the first moving off Driving in automatic mode when you are driving
(automatic mode). The gearbox control unit selects the necessary • Only actuate the mode switch
• Turn the mode switch to D (drive forwards gear automatically in automatic mode. The when the vehicle is at a standstill
mode) automatic gearbox changes gear whenever and the engine is idling
3rd gear is indicated on the display. the engine is no longer in the optimum speed
If you wish to select another gear: range. The gear is shown on the display. Manual gearshifts in automatic mode
• Pull the steering column stalk 1 towards Gearshifts are possible at any time whilst
CAUTION driving.
the driver or press it away from the driver,
see the description of “Manual gearshifts in
automatic mode” in this section – The automatic control unit
• Wait approx. 2 seconds automatically shifts up to the next
• Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and gear as soon as the engine speed
release the parking brake at the same time reaches the red zone on the rev
The vehicle moves off. counter. The engine braking effect
is cancelled whilst the gearbox is
Starting off in reverse changing gear.
There are 2 reverse gears available. 1st – When the gearbox is in N, no gear
gear is preselected using the mode switch. is engaged and there is no engine
The gearbox does not engage 2nd gear braking effect.
automatically. RM is for manoeuvring. As a result, the vehicle can
• Turn the mode switch to R (drive reverse accelerate suddenly when you are
driving downhill. Serious accidents Shifting up one gear:
mode).
can be caused. • Briefly pull steering column stalk 1 towards
R (reverse gear) is indicated on the display and
Therefore, please always ensure the the steering wheel
a warning buzzer sounds.
following: Shifting up several gears:
• Wait approx. 2 seconds
• Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and • Take extra care and proceed with
release the parking brake at the same time caution when driving downhill
166
Vehicle operation
• Pull steering column stalk 1 towards the • Press the accelerator pedal down all the way • Never turn the mode switch to N
steering wheel several times or pull and hold (kickdown position). when you are driving
it The vehicle accelerates rapidly. • Only actuate the mode switch
Shifting down one gear: when the vehicle is at a standstill
• Briefly push steering column stalk 1 away Manual mode and the engine is idling
from the steering wheel
WARNING
Shifting down several gears: Driving in manual mode
Danger of damage!
• Push steering column stalk 1 away from the In manual mode it is up to the driver to engage
steering wheel several times or push and the gear. The automatic gearbox does not shift The gearbox does not automatically
hold it even when the engine revs move out of the shift up to the next higher gear when
This activates manual mode. The selected gear optimum range. The engaged gear is shown the vehicle accelerates whilst driving
is shown on the display. on the display. downhill. The engine might overrev,
Automatic mode is reactivated after about leading to engine damage.
CAUTION Therefore, please always ensure the
10 seconds. The gearbox control unit once
Danger of accidents! following:
again selects the necessary gear automatically
from this point on. – The engine braking effect is • Do not exceed the permitted
cancelled whilst the gearbox is engine speed range
Note changing gear. • Use the service brakes (pedal
A gearshift command using the steering – When the gearbox is in N, no gear brake) in good time
column stalk 1 is not performed if the is engaged and there is no engine
selected gear would result in the engine braking effect. Gearshifts in manual mode
exceeding its maximum revs or running As a result, the vehicle can Switching to manual mode:
slower than its minimum revs. accelerate suddenly when you are • Press button or end of stalk 2
driving downhill. Serious accidents Shifting up one gear:
Kickdown can be caused. • Briefly pull steering column stalk 1 towards
You can use the kickdown position of the Therefore, please always ensure the the steering wheel
accelerator pedal if you require the next following: Shifting up several gears:
lower gear in this mode, e.g. for accelerating • Take extra care and proceed with • Pull steering column stalk 1 towards the
or on an uphill gradient. In this case, the caution when driving downhill steering wheel several times or pull and hold
gearbox changes gear earlier and the required • Always be ready to apply the it
acceleration or pulling power is achieved more brakes in good time using the Shifting down one gear:
quickly. However, this is at the expense of brake pedal • Briefly push steering column stalk 1 away
significantly higher fuel consumption. • Use the sustained-action brake from the steering wheel
• Shift down in good time Shifting down several gears:
167
Vehicle operation
• Push steering column stalk 1 away from the gear. This can lead to so-called “crunching” You can change gear by operating the steering
steering wheel several times or push and of the gears and cause the vehicle to come column stalk 1.
hold it to a standstill. This results in increased wear.
Switching back to automatic mode if required: Therefore: Stopping and parking the vehicle
• Press button 2 again • Always select manual mode when driving
off-road Brief stopping
Note
• Change gear as little as possible If you are stopping briefly, e.g. at traffic lights,
A gearshift command using the steering
• Engage a low gear before negotiating difficult you can leave the selected mode engaged.
column stalk 1 is not performed if the
stretches Always apply the service brakes when doing
selected gear would result in the engine
• Do not change gear when driving on rough this.
exceeding its maximum revs.
terrain with alternating load The gearbox engages the appropriate starting
If the engine speed drops below the
gear in automatic mode.
minimum speed then the clutch is
Manoeuvring The gearbox engages 3rd gear in manual
disengaged in order to prevent the
mode.
engine from stalling. The modes for manoeuvring forwards DM and
manoeuvring reverse RM are intended for very Stopping for a long time and parking the
Off-road driving slow driving. There are 2 manoeuvring gears vehicle
available. The engine speed is limited. Switch the mode switch to N if stopping for a
WARNING
Danger of damage! Note longer time (longer than about 1 minute) or
When manoeuvring, the clutch is if parking the vehicle. This closes the clutch,
Changing gear off-road places a
controlled using the accelerator pedal. therefore taking the strain off it without a gear
particularly high load on the gearbox.
This places a great deal of load on the being engaged.
Therefore:
• Always drive in manual mode clutch. Therefore, only use manoeuvring CAUTION
during off-road driving mode rarely and for a short period. Danger of accidents!
• Do not change gear when driving • Turn the mode switch to manoeuvre forwards – The vehicle can roll away
on rough terrain DM or manoeuvre reverse RM. uncontrollably if the service brakes
The running resistance can change rapidly The selected manoeuvring mode is shown on or parking brake are not applied.
during off-road driving. The gearbox is unable the display. First gear is engaged. – Chocks can be used in addition to
to engage the necessary gears in a predictive • Wait approx. 2 seconds the brakes to prevent the vehicle
way. Therefore, gearshifts may be delayed or • Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and from rolling away.
may be into the wrong gear. release the parking brake at the same time Therefore, please always ensure the
The electronically controlled synchronisation The vehicle now moves off. following:
process may be too slow when changing
168
Vehicle operation
• Always apply the parking brake • Never turn the mode switch to N Brake test rig (dynamometer)
after parking the vehicle when you are driving
• Use wheel chocks to prevent the • Only actuate the mode switch CAUTION
vehicle from rolling away when the vehicle is at a standstill Danger of accidents!
• Always turn the mode switch to N and the engine is idling When the roller on the brake test rig
is turning, the gearbox control unit
Frequent stopping with external neutral detects the driving vehicle function.
position When the mode switch is set to drive
In order to avoid having to operate the mode mode, a gear is engaged and the
switch when making frequent stops, e.g. when clutch is engaged. The vehicle can
collecting refuse, the gearbox can be shifted to move off. Serious accidents can be
neutral N using the external neutral switch. caused.
To do this, a mode must be selected with the Therefore, please always ensure the
mode switch and a gear must be engaged. following:
When the external neutral position is switched • After driving onto the brake test rig,
on, the gearbox is then automatically shifted to turn the mode switch to N
neutral N if the vehicle is travelling slower than • Have all work on the brake
20 km/h. dynamometer carried out by
Switching on the external neutral position: qualified personnel from the MAN
CAUTION • Press button 3 Service workshop only
Danger of accidents! The neutral position is shown on the display
There is no engine braking effect with a flashing N.
when the gearbox is in neutral N. Switching off the external neutral position:
As a result, the vehicle can • Press button 3 again
accelerate suddenly when you are The selected mode and the starting gear are
driving downhill. Serious accidents shown on the display.
can be caused.
Therefore, please always ensure the Tow-starting and towing away
following:
The engine cannot be tow-started. For towing
• Take extra care and proceed with
away, see “Tow-starting and towing away”,
caution when driving downhill
Page 344.
• Always be ready to apply the
brakes in good time using the
brake pedal
169
Vehicle operation
MAN TipMatic 12-speed Fleet
MAN TipMatic 12-speed Fleet Switch positions: Automatic mode

– Drive forwards: D
Functional description – Manoeuvre forwards: DM
– Neutral: N
The MAN TipMatic is a combination of – Drive reverse: R
a constant-mesh gearbox with electronic – Manoeuvre reverse: RM
clutch. The automated clutch (no clutch pedal) Steering column stalk
The driver can choose to drive the vehicle
in automatic mode. Manual shifts are only
possible when stationary (for starting off), when
coasting and in the event of a fault in automatic
mode. The system is operated using the mode
switch on the central console and the steering
N: Neutral position
column stalk on the right next to the steering
wheel. The gear that is engaged is shown on
Manual mode when stationary and when
the display.
the vehicle is coasting
Mode switch 1 Steering column stalk: Changing gear

2 Button: Changing over between
automatic and manual modes, only
when stationary and when the vehicle is
coasting

N: Neutral position
170
Vehicle operation
The triangles show the number of gears that A message appears on the display together If you stop for a relatively long time (more
you can shift up or down at your current speed. with the “Stop” or “Workshop” symbol if the than 1 minute), turn the mode switch to “N”.
gearbox is not operational. The “central warning This means the clutch is engaged and thereby
Manoeuvring light” and the “Gearbox” check lamps come on relieved.
and a signal sounds.
Note
More information on fault messages, see
“Overview of displays and messages”,
Page 254.
Starting off
Reducing clutch wear
Starting off forwards
WARNING The gearbox ECU engages 3rd gear when the
Danger of damage! vehicle first moves off (after ignition on). The
The clutch can be damaged if the heavier the load on the vehicle and the steeper
vehicle rolls backwards against the the uphill or downhill slope, the lower the gear
R: Manoeuvre reverse driving direction of the selected you should select. DM is for manoeuvring.
D: Manoeuvre forward starting gear. The gearbox ECU automatically selects the
Number: Engaged gear Therefore, please always ensure the optimum moving-off gear after the first moving
following: off.
Check lamps and display messages • Do not let the vehicle roll in the • Turn the mode switch to D (drive forwards
opposite direction to the selected mode)
starting gear 3rd gear is indicated on the display.
There is a risk of overloading the clutch if you If you wish to select another gear:
start off several times in quick succession, if • Pull the steering column stalk 1 towards
you select an excessively high gear for moving the driver or press it away from the driver,
off or if you manoeuvre the vehicle for too long. see the description of “Manual gearshifts in
Therefore: automatic mode” in this section
• Start off in a low gear • Wait approx. 2 seconds
• Shift down to a lower gear if necessary • Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and
• Do not increase the engine revs (accelerate) release the parking brake at the same time
until the clutch has engaged The vehicle moves off.
171
Vehicle operation
Starting off in reverse CAUTION

There are 2 reverse gears available. 1st Danger of accidents!
gear is preselected using the mode switch. – The automatic control unit
The gearbox does not engage 2nd gear automatically shifts up to the next
automatically. RM is for manoeuvring. gear as soon as the engine speed
• Turn the mode switch to R (drive reverse reaches the red zone on the rev
mode). counter. The engine braking effect
R (reverse gear) is indicated on the display and is cancelled whilst the gearbox is
a warning buzzer sounds. changing gear.
• Wait approx. 2 seconds – When the gearbox is in N, no gear
• Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and is engaged and there is no engine
release the parking brake at the same time braking effect.
The vehicle now moves off in reverse. As a result, the vehicle can Shifting up one gear:
Pulling the steering column stalk towards the accelerate suddenly when you are • Briefly pull steering column stalk 1 towards
driver makes it possible to shift into 2nd reverse driving downhill. Serious accidents the steering wheel
gear. can be caused. Shifting up several gears:
Therefore, please always ensure the • Pull steering column stalk 1 towards the
Automatic mode following: steering wheel several times or pull and hold
• Take extra care and proceed with it
Driving in automatic mode caution when driving downhill Shifting down one gear:
The gearbox control unit selects the necessary • Always be ready to apply the • Briefly push steering column stalk 1 away
gear automatically in automatic mode. The brakes in good time using the from the steering wheel
automatic gearbox changes gear whenever brake pedal Shifting down several gears:
the engine is no longer in the optimum speed • Use the sustained-action brake • Push steering column stalk 1 away from the
range. The gear is indicated on the display. • Shift down in good time steering wheel several times or push and
• Never turn the mode switch to N hold it
when you are driving This activates manual mode. The selected gear
• Only actuate the mode switch is shown on the display.
when the vehicle is at a standstill Automatic mode is reactivated after about 10
and the engine is idling seconds. The gearbox control unit once again
selects the necessary gear automatically from
Manual gearshifts in automatic mode this point on.
Gearshifts are only possible when stationary
and when the vehicle is coasting.
172
Vehicle operation
Note As a result, the vehicle can Gearshifts in manual mode

A gearshift command using the steering accelerate suddenly when you are Changing over to manual mode is only possible
column stalk 1 is not performed if the driving downhill. Serious accidents when stationary and when the vehicle is
selected gear would result in the engine can be caused. coasting.
exceeding its maximum revs or running Therefore, please always ensure the Switching to manual mode:
slower than its minimum revs. following: • Press button or end of stalk 2
• Take extra care and proceed with Shift up 1 gear:
Kickdown caution when driving downhill • Briefly pull steering column stalk 1 towards
Kickdown is not possible. • Always be ready to apply the the steering wheel
brakes in good time using the Shifting up several gears:
Manual mode brake pedal • Pull steering column stalk 1 towards the
• Use the sustained-action brake steering wheel several times or pull and hold
Driving in manual mode • Shift down in good time it
In manual mode it is up to the driver to engage • Never turn the mode switch to N Shifting down 1 gear:
the gear. The automatic gearbox does not shift when you are driving • Briefly push steering column stalk 1 away
even when the engine revs move out of the • Only actuate the mode switch from the steering wheel
optimum range during coasting. The engaged when the vehicle is at a standstill Shifting down several gears:
gear is shown on the display. and the engine is idling • Push steering column stalk 1 away from the
The control unit changes over to automatic steering wheel several times or push and
WARNING
mode as soon as the accelerator pedal is hold it
Danger of damage!
pressed or the cruise control “accelerates”. Switching back to automatic mode if required:
The gearbox does not automatically
Manual gearshifts are then no longer possible. • Press button 2 again
shift up to the next higher gear when
CAUTION the vehicle accelerates whilst driving Note
Danger of accidents! downhill. The engine might overrev, A gearshift command using the steering
– The engine braking effect is leading to engine damage. column stalk 1 is not performed if the
cancelled whilst the gearbox is Therefore, please always ensure the selected gear would result in the engine
changing gear. following: exceeding its maximum revs.
– When the gearbox is in N, no gear • Do not exceed the permitted If the engine speed drops below the
is engaged and there is no engine engine speed range minimum speed then the clutch is
braking effect. • Use the service brakes (pedal disengaged in order to prevent the
brake) in good time engine from stalling.
173
Vehicle operation
Off-road driving Note therefore taking the strain off it without a gear
When manoeuvring, the clutch is being engaged.
The MAN TipMatic 12-speed Fleet is not controlled using the accelerator pedal.
designed for off-road driving. This places a great deal of load on the CAUTION
clutch. Therefore, only use manoeuvring Danger of accidents!
WARNING mode rarely and for a short period. – The vehicle can roll away
Danger of damage! uncontrollably if the service brakes
• Turn the mode switch to manoeuvre forwards
Changing gear off-road places a or parking brake are not applied.
DM or manoeuvre reverse RM.
particularly high load on the gearbox. – Chocks can be used in addition to
The selected manoeuvring mode is shown on
Therefore: the brakes to prevent the vehicle
the display. First gear is engaged.
• Avoid driving off consolidated from rolling away.
• Wait approx. 2 seconds
roads if possible Therefore, please always ensure the
• Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and
The running resistance can change rapidly release the parking brake at the same time following:
during off-road driving. The gearbox is not The vehicle now moves off. • Always apply the parking brake
able to anticipate situations and engage an You can change gear by operating the steering after parking the vehicle
appropriate gear beforehand. Therefore, the column stalk 1. • Use wheel chocks to prevent the
gearshift may be late, or a wrong gear may be vehicle from rolling away
engaged. Stopping and parking the vehicle • Always turn the mode switch to N
The electronically controlled synchronisation
process may be too slow when changing gear. Brief stopping Tow-starting and towing away
This can lead to so-called “crunching” of the If you are stopping briefly, e.g. at traffic lights,
gears and cause the vehicle to come to a you can leave the selected mode engaged. The engine cannot be tow-started. For towing
standstill. This results in increased wear. Always apply the service brakes when doing away, see “Tow-starting and towing away”,
this. Page 344.
Manoeuvring The gearbox engages the appropriate starting
gear in automatic mode. Brake test rig (dynamometer)
The modes for manoeuvring forwards DM and
The gearbox engages 3rd gear in manual CAUTION
manoeuvring reverse RM are intended for very
mode. Danger of accidents!
slow driving. There are 2 manoeuvring gears
available. The engine speed is limited. When the roller on the brake test rig
Stopping for a long time and parking the is turning, the gearbox control unit
vehicle detects the “driving vehicle” function.
Switch the mode switch to N if stopping for a
longer time (longer than about 1 minute) or
if parking the vehicle. This closes the clutch,
174
Vehicle operation
When the mode switch is set to drive

mode, a gear is engaged and the
clutch is engaged. The vehicle can
move off. Serious accidents can be
caused.
following:
• After driving onto the brake test rig,
turn the mode switch to N
• Have all work on the brake
dynamometer carried out by
qualified personnel from the MAN
Service workshop only
175
Vehicle operation
MAN TipMatic 12-speed for all-wheel drive
MAN TipMatic 12-speed for all-wheel drive Controls and indications on the display Steering column stalk
Functional description Mode switch
The MAN TipMatic is a combination of

a constant-mesh gearbox with electronic
clutch. The automated clutch (no clutch pedal)
The driver can choose to drive the vehicle in
both automatic and manual mode. The system
is operated using the mode switch on the centre
console and the steering column stalk on the
right next to the steering wheel. The gear that
is engaged is shown on the display. 1 Steering column stalk: Changing gear
If the mode switch is switched to DX, the gear 2 Button: Changing between automatic
Switch positions: and manual mode
changes take place at higher engine speeds.
– Drive forwards: D, DX
This gearshift programme is intended for driving
– Manoeuvre forwards: DM Automatic mode
off-road and under difficult conditions (steep
– Neutral: N
inclines in hilly regions, heavy transport). The
fuel consumption can be expected to be higher.
– Manoeuvre reverse: RM

N: Neutral position
176
Vehicle operation
The X on the right next to the number/N is only D: Manoeuvre forward Starting off
indicated in DX mode. Number: Engaged gear
Manual mode Check lamps and display messages
WARNING
Danger of damage!
The clutch can be damaged if the
vehicle rolls backwards against the
driving direction of the selected
starting gear.
following:
• Do not let the vehicle roll in the
opposite direction to the selected
starting gear
There is a risk of overloading the clutch if you
start off several times in quick succession, if
The triangles show the number of gears that A message appears on the display together you select an excessively high gear for moving
you can shift up or down at your current speed. with the “Stop” or “Workshop” symbol if the off or if you manoeuvre the vehicle for too long.
gearbox is not operational. The “central warning Therefore:
Manoeuvring light” and the “Gearbox” check lamps come on • Start off in a low gear
and a signal sounds. • Shift down to a lower gear if necessary
More information on fault messages, see • Do not increase the engine revs (accelerate)
“Overview of displays and messages”, until the clutch has engaged
Page 254. If stopping for a prolonged period (more than
1 minute), move the mode switch to N. This
engages and, therefore, relieves the clutch.
Note
R: Drive reverse
177
Vehicle operation
Starting off forwards • Wait approx. 2 seconds Therefore, please always ensure the
In automatic mode, the gearbox calculates the • Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and following:
start gear, irrespective of whether the mode release the parking brake at the same time • Take extra care and proceed with
switch is in position D or DX. The vehicle now moves off in reverse. caution when driving downhill
In manual mode, the following gears are Pulling the steering column stalk towards the • Always be ready to apply the
engaged for moving off: driver makes it possible to shift into 2nd reverse brakes in good time using the
– Mode switch in position D: 3rd gear. gear. brake pedal
– Mode switch in position DX: 2nd gear. • Use the sustained-action brake
The heavier the load on the vehicle and Automatic mode system (engine brake/retarder)
the steeper the uphill or downhill slope, the • Shift down in good time
lower the gear you should select. DM is for Driving in automatic mode • Never turn the mode switch to N
manoeuvring. The gearbox control unit selects the necessary when you are driving
• Switch the mode switch to the drive forwards gear automatically in automatic mode. The • Only actuate the mode switch
position automatic gearbox changes gear whenever when the vehicle is at a standstill
The selected gear is shown on the display. the engine is no longer in the optimum speed and the engine is idling
If you wish to select another gear: range. The gear is indicated on the display.
• Pull the steering column stalk towards the Manual gearshifts in automatic mode
CAUTION Gearshifts are possible at any time whilst
driver or press it away from the driver,
Danger of accidents! driving.
see the description of “Manual gearshifts in
automatic mode” in this section – The automatic control unit
• Wait approx. 2 seconds automatically shifts up to the next
• Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and gear as soon as the engine speed
release the parking brake at the same time reaches the red zone on the rev
The vehicle now moves off. counter. The engine braking effect
is cancelled whilst the gearbox is
Starting off in reverse changing gear.
There are 2 reverse gears available. 1st – When the gearbox is in N, no gear
gear is preselected using the mode switch. is engaged and there is no engine
The gearbox does not engage 2nd gear braking effect.
automatically. RM is for manoeuvring. As a result, the vehicle can
• Turn the mode switch to R (drive reverse accelerate suddenly when you are
mode). driving downhill. Serious accidents
can be caused. Shifting up one gear:
R (reverse gear) is indicated on the display and
a warning buzzer sounds.
178
Vehicle operation
• Briefly pull steering column stalk 1 towards quickly. However, this is at the expense of • Use the sustained-action brake
the steering wheel significantly higher fuel consumption. system (engine brake/retarder)
Shifting up several gears: • Press the accelerator pedal down all the way • Shift down in good time
• Pull steering column stalk 1 towards the (kickdown position). • Never turn the mode switch to N
steering wheel several times or pull and hold The vehicle accelerates rapidly. when you are driving
it • Only actuate the mode switch
Shifting down one gear: Manual mode when the vehicle is at a standstill
• Briefly push steering column stalk 1 away and the engine is idling
from the steering wheel Driving in manual mode
WARNING
Shifting down several gears: In manual mode it is up to the driver to engage
Danger of damage!
• Push steering column stalk 1 away from the the gear. The automatic gearbox does not shift
steering wheel several times or push and even when the engine revs move out of the The gearbox does not automatically
hold it optimum range. The engaged gear is shown shift up to the next higher gear when
This activates manual mode. The selected gear on the display. the vehicle accelerates whilst driving
is shown on the display. downhill. The engine might overrev,
CAUTION leading to engine damage.
Automatic mode is reactivated after about
Danger of accidents! Therefore, please always ensure the
10 seconds. The gearbox control unit once
again selects the necessary gear automatically – The engine braking effect is following:
cancelled whilst the gearbox is • Do not exceed the permitted
from this point on.
changing gear. engine speed range
Note – When the gearbox is in N, no gear • Use the service brakes (pedal
A gearshift command using the steering is engaged and there is no engine brake) in good time
column stalk 1 is not performed if the braking effect.
selected gear would result in the engine As a result, the vehicle can Gearshifts in manual mode
exceeding its maximum revs or running accelerate suddenly when you are Switching to manual mode:
slower than its minimum revs. driving downhill. Serious accidents • Press button or end of stalk 2
can be caused. Shifting up one gear:
Kickdown Therefore, please always ensure the • Briefly pull steering column stalk 1 towards
You can use the kickdown position of the following: the steering wheel
accelerator pedal if you require the next • Take extra care and proceed with Shifting up several gears:
lower gear in this mode, e.g. for accelerating caution when driving downhill • Pull steering column stalk 1 towards the
or on an uphill gradient. In this case, the • Always be ready to apply the steering wheel several times or pull and hold
gearbox changes gear earlier and the required brakes in good time using the it
acceleration or pulling power is achieved more brake pedal Shifting down one gear:
179
Vehicle operation
• Briefly push steering column stalk 1 away way. Therefore, gearshifts may be delayed or The selected manoeuvring mode is shown on
from the steering wheel may be into the wrong gear. the display. First gear is engaged.
Shifting down several gears: The electronically controlled synchronisation • Wait approx. 2 seconds
• Push steering column stalk 1 away from the process may be too slow when changing • Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and
steering wheel several times or push and gear. This can lead to so-called “crunching” release the parking brake at the same time
hold it of the gears and cause the vehicle to come The vehicle now moves off.
Switching back to automatic mode if required: to a standstill. This results in increased wear. You can change gear by operating the steering
• Press button 2 again Therefore: column stalk 1.
• Before driving off-road, switch the mode
Note
switch to DX Stopping and parking the vehicle
A gearshift command using the steering
• Always select manual mode when driving
column stalk 1 is not performed if the
off-road Brief stopping
selected gear would result in the engine
• Change gear as little as possible If you are stopping briefly, e.g. at traffic lights,
exceeding its maximum revs.
• Engage a low gear before negotiating difficult you can leave the selected mode engaged.
If the engine speed drops below the
stretches Always apply the service brakes when doing
minimum speed then the clutch is
• Do not change gear when driving on rough this.
disengaged in order to prevent the
terrain with alternating load The gearbox engages the appropriate starting
engine from stalling.
gear in automatic mode.
Manoeuvring In manual mode, the start gear preselected
Off-road driving using the mode switch is engaged.
The modes for manoeuvring forwards DM and
WARNING
manoeuvring reverse RM are intended for very Stopping for a long time and parking the
Danger of damage!
slow driving. There are 2 manoeuvring gears vehicle
Changing gear off-road places a available. The engine speed is limited. Switch the mode switch to N if stopping for a
particularly high load on the gearbox.
Note longer time (longer than about 1 minute) or
Therefore:
When manoeuvring, the clutch is if parking the vehicle. This closes the clutch,
• Always drive in manual mode
controlled using the accelerator pedal. therefore taking the strain off it without a gear
during off-road driving
This places a great deal of load on the being engaged.
• Do not change gear when driving
on rough terrain clutch. Therefore, only use manoeuvring CAUTION
The running resistance can change rapidly mode rarely and for a short period. Danger of accidents!
during off-road driving. The gearbox is unable • Turn the mode switch to manoeuvre forwards – The vehicle can roll away
to engage the necessary gears in a predictive DM or manoeuvre reverse RM. uncontrollably if the service brakes
or parking brake are not applied.
180
Vehicle operation
– Chocks can be used in addition to • After driving onto the brake test rig,
the brakes to prevent the vehicle turn the mode switch to N
from rolling away. • Have all work on the brake
Therefore, please always ensure the dynamometer carried out by
following: qualified personnel from the MAN
• Always apply the parking brake Service workshop only
after parking the vehicle
• Use wheel chocks to prevent the
• Always turn the mode switch to N
Tow-starting and towing away
The engine cannot be tow-started. For towing

away, see “Tow-starting and towing away”,
Page 344.
Brake test rig (dynamometer)
CAUTION
When the roller on the brake test rig
is turning, the gearbox control unit
detects the “driving vehicle” function.
When the mode switch is set to drive
mode, a gear is engaged and the
clutch is engaged. The vehicle can
move off. Serious accidents can be
caused.
following:
181
Vehicle operation
ZF 6 HP automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox Controls and indications on the display External neutral switch for TGS
ZF 6 HP automatic gearbox Mode switch
The gearbox comprises a hydrodynamic

torque converter with lock-up clutch and a
planetary gearbox on the output end. The
torque converter is a wear-free moving-off
device that smoothly transmits the necessary
input torque. The gears in the planetary
gearbox are shifted automatically. After the
vehicle has moved off, the lock-up clutch
3 External neutral switch
establishes a direct mechanical connection
between the engine and the planetary gearbox.
Switch positions: Indication on the display
The power losses that otherwise occur in
– Drive forwards, unrestricted mode: D
converter gearboxes are thereby eliminated.
– Drive forwards, restricted mode: D1, D2, D3
Operation is via the mode switch in the centre
– Neutral: N
console. The gear that is engaged is shown on
the display.
– D: Drive forwards, unrestricted mode

– D1, D2, D3: Drive forwards, restricted mode
– N: Neutral position
– R: Drive reverse
– Number: Engaged gear
182
Vehicle operation
Check lamps and display messages – R: Drive reverse CAUTION

The heavier the load on the vehicle and the Danger of accidents!
steeper the uphill or downhill slope, the lower When the gearbox is in N, no gear
the gear you should select. is engaged and there is no engine
The restricted modes D1 and D2 should only braking effect.
be selected under exceptional circumstances, As a result, the vehicle can
e.g. in heavy urban traffic, on uphill or downhill accelerate suddenly when you are
inclines, in order to prevent frequent upshifts or driving downhill. Serious accidents
downshifts (gear hunting). Preventing upshifts can be caused.
in this way causes fuel consumption to increase Therefore, please always ensure the
during normal driving. following:
• Never turn the mode switch to N
Moving off and driving when you are driving
For more information about check lamps and Note

Kickdown
messages on the display, refer to an overview The vehicle starts moving immediately
You can use the kickdown position of the
containing information about dealing with when the mode switch is set to a mode.
accelerator pedal if you require the next
the particular malfunction, see “Overview of You must therefore always apply the
lower gear in this mode, e.g. for accelerating
displays and messages”, Page 254. service brakes before changing gear.
or on an uphill gradient. In this case, the
A mode better suited to the actual road
gearbox changes gear earlier and the required
Normal operation speed can be selected at any time when
acceleration or pulling power is achieved more
the vehicle is being driven.
quickly. However, this is at the expense of
Modes • Turn the mode switch to the required mode significantly higher fuel consumption.
The following forwards ranges can be selected The selected mode and the engaged gear are • Fully depress the accelerator pedal
with the mode switch: shown on the display. (kickdown position)
– D: Drive forwards, unrestricted mode • Wait approx. 2 seconds The vehicle accelerates rapidly.
Start off in 2nd gear, automatic upshifts up to • Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and
6th gear release the parking brake at the same time Changing the driving direction
– D1, D2, D3: Drive forwards, restricted mode The vehicle now moves off. • Release the accelerator (take your foot off
– D3: Start off in 1st gear, automatic upshifts
the pedal)
up to 3rd gear
• Use the service brakes and bring the vehicle
– D2: Start off in 1st gear, automatic upshifts
to a standstill
up to 2nd gear
• Run the engine at idling speed
– D1: Start off in 1st gear – no upshifts
• Turn the mode switch to N
183
Vehicle operation
• Turn the mode switch to the required position Frequent stopping with external neutral
• Wait approx. 2 seconds position
• Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) and In order to avoid having to operate the mode
release the service brakes at the same time switch when making frequent stops, e.g. when
collecting refuse, the gearbox can be shifted to
Stopping and parking the vehicle neutral N using the external neutral switch.
To do this, a mode must be selected with the
Brief stopping mode switch and a gear must be engaged.
If you are stopping briefly, e.g. at traffic lights, When the external neutral position is switched
you can leave the selected mode engaged. on, the gearbox is then automatically shifted to
Always apply the service brakes when doing neutral N if the vehicle is travelling slower than
this. 20 km/h.
Switching on the external neutral position:
CAUTION • Press button 3
Stopping for a long time and parking the
Danger of accidents! The neutral position is shown on the display
vehicle
Switch the mode switch to N if stopping for a There is no engine braking effect with a flashing N.
longer time (longer than about 1 minute) or if when the gearbox is in neutral N. Switching off the external neutral position:
parking the vehicle. As a result, the vehicle can • Press button 3 again
accelerate suddenly when you are The selected mode and the starting gear are
CAUTION driving downhill. Serious accidents shown on the display.
Danger of accidents! can be caused.
– The vehicle can roll away Therefore, please always ensure the Tow-starting and towing away
uncontrollably if the service brakes following:
or parking brake are not applied. • Take extra care and proceed with The engine cannot be tow-started. For towing
– Chocks can be used in addition to caution when driving downhill away, see “Tow-starting and towing away”,
the brakes to prevent the vehicle • Always be ready to apply the Page 344.
from rolling away brakes in good time using the
Therefore, please always ensure the brake pedal
following: • Never turn the mode switch to N
• Always apply the parking brake when you are driving
when parking the vehicle • Only actuate the mode switch
• Use wheel chocks to prevent the when the vehicle is at a standstill
vehicle from rolling away and the engine is idling
• Always turn the mode switch to N
184
Vehicle operation
MAN HydroDrive and differential locks
MAN HydroDrive and differential The front-wheel drive is automatically • Only use snow chains approved by
disengaged if the vehicle is driven faster MAN
locks
than approx. 28 km/h. It is automatically • After mounting snow chains,
reengaged if the vehicle is driven slower than check whether there is sufficient
approx. 23 km/h. clearance between the chains and
Front-wheel drive is automatically disengaged the hydraulic lines
MAN HydroDrive
MAN HydroDrive is a non-permanently if the oil gets too hot. This can occur after only a
engaged hydrostatic drive for the front wheels. few minutes when driving at just under 28 km/h. Differential locks
A pump mounted on the gearbox power take-off As a rule, the oil will not get too hot at speeds The differential locks can be engaged to
drives wheel hub motors in the wheel section below approx. 20 km/h. Front-wheel drive is prevent the individual wheels of the rear
of the front axle. automatically switched back on once the oil driven axles from spinning before negotiating
MAN HydroDrive is designed for intermittent temperature has dropped below the threshold unfavourable or unconsolidated ground (e.g.
operation at low speed (max. approx. 2000 value. sand, water, mud).
operating hours or approx. 5 % of total Front-wheel drive is automatically switched Depending on the equipment in the vehicle, it
mileage). As a result, the front-wheel drive off when ABS takes effect. It is automatically is possible to engage the transverse lock (with
should only be engaged when additional switched back on after the intervention. 4 driven wheels) or the interaxle lock and the
traction is needed at below approx. 28 km/h. transverse locks in succession (with 6 driven
Operation with snow chains wheels) in addition to the front-wheel drive.
WARNING Only affects the driven front axle: Snow chains
Danger of damage! CAUTION
approved by MAN are not available for all
Danger of accidents and damage!
– Cavitation occurs in the oil circuit tyre sizes. You can contact any MAN Service
when driving in gears 5 and workshop for information about which tyre sizes – The functions of the ABS may be
higher. This leads to damage have which snow chains approved for them. restricted if the differential lock is
in the hydraulic system. switched on and there is tension in
– The hydraulic oil is very viscous WARNING the driveline.
at external temperatures below Danger of damage! – When the transverse lock is
approx. -10 °C. Hydraulic lines can be damaged engaged on solid ground, there is
Therefore: when driving with snow chains. This no differential function between the
• Only drive in gears 1 to 4 can result in oil loss and failure of the left and right wheels. It is harder to
• At outside temperatures below front wheel drive. steer the vehicle. Danger of axle
-10 °C: Engage MAN HydroDrive • Only fit snow chains if this is drive damage.
approx. 5 minutes after starting the approved by MAN for the tyre size Serious accidents can be caused.
engine in question Therefore:
185
Vehicle operation
• Always adapt your driving style, A MAN HydroDrive (front wheel drive) Check lamps and display messages
and in particular your speed, to B Rear axle interaxle lock
the road surface and the traffic C Rear axle transverse locks
conditions.
• Only engage or disengage the Displays on the instrument panel
differential lock at low speed (max.
7 km/h) or, even better, when the
vehicle is at a standstill.
• Do not drive on consolidated
ground with the transverse lock
engaged
• Disengage the transverse lock
immediately after reaching firm
ground
A message appears on the display together
with the “HydroDrive” symbol if MAN
Controls and displays on the instrument
HydroDrive is not operational.
panel
For information about check lamps and
1 MAN HydroDrive (front wheel drive) messages on the display, refer to an overview
Rotary switch
2 Rear axle interaxle lock containing information about dealing with
3 Rear axle transverse locks the particular malfunction, see “Overview of
displays and messages”, Page 254.
Engaging and disengaging MAN

HydroDrive
Engaging MAN HydroDrive

• Turn the rotary switch to position A
MAN HydroDrive is engaged.
Display 1 comes on
Disengaging MAN HydroDrive

0 MAN HydroDrive and differential locks • Turn the rotary switch to position 0
disengaged MAN HydroDrive is disengaged
186
Vehicle operation
Display 1 goes out After engaging or disengaging

• Carefully press the accelerator pedal and
Engaging and disengaging differential drive on slowly
locks
Note
If the display 3 remains lit after
Before engaging or disengaging
disengaging: Stop the vehicle and
drive backwards for a few metres until
the pedal)
the display goes out.
• Bring the vehicle to a standstill
Only engage or disengage the differential locks
disengaging: Make minor steering
at low speed (max. 7 km/h) or, even better,
correction movements to the left and
when the vehicle is at a standstill. The wheels
right until the display goes out.
must not spin.
Engaging differential locks

• Turn the rotary switch to position B
The rear axle interaxle lock is engaged in
addition to front-wheel drive.
Displays 1 and 2 come on.
• Turn the rotary switch to position C
The transverse locks of the rear axles are
additionally engaged.
Displays 1, 2 and 3 come on
Disengaging differential locks

The differential locks can be disengaged in
reverse order.
Disengaging all differential locks:
• Turn the rotary switch to position 1
Displays 2 and 3 go out.
Only front-wheel drive is engaged.
187
Vehicle operation
Clutch-dependent power take-offs with manual gearbox
Power take-offs Controls and indication on the display Steering column stalk
Clutch-dependent power take-offs with Power take-off rocker switch

manual gearbox
Function
Clutch-dependent power take-offs are driven

by the countershaft of the manual gearbox.
Actuation is pneumatic. The required air
pressure for engagement is at least 6.2 bar
in reservoir circuit 4. Power transmission is
dependent on the vehicle clutch. This means:
Power transmission to the PTO is interrupted
when the clutch is pressed. 1 Steering column stalk: Increasing or
Only engage and disengage the power reducing working speed
Engaging and disengaging power take-off I. 2 MEM/OFF switch: Switching working
take-offs when the vehicle is at a standstill, the
engine is running and the gearbox is in neutral speed on and off
position N. It is not allowed to be engaged or
disengaged under load. Display for power take-off
They can be operated when the vehicle is at a
standstill and the engine is running or when the
vehicle driving without any gear changes.
Operating time of the power take-offs
Power take-offs for an operating period of up to

max. 60 minutes:
– NH/4
– NL/4 Engaging and disengaging power take-off II.
Power take-offs for sustained operation:
– NH/1
– NL/1
– N221/10
188
Vehicle operation
The symbol indicates the power take-off is Increasing the working speed Starting off with the power take-off
operating (the example illustrated shows • Push the steering column stalk 1 upwards operating
PTO I). (towards “SET+”)
WARNING
Alternatively
Danger of damage!
Engaging the power take-off • Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate)
Do not change gear if the power
• Stop as described for the gearbox, see Reducing the working speed take-off is operating when you are
“Manual gearbox”, Page 160 driving. Otherwise, the gearbox may
• Press the clutch pedal down fully WARNING be damaged.
• Run the engine at idling speed Danger of damage! Therefore:
• Shift the gearbox to neutral (N) Danger of gearbox damage if the • Do not change gear when driving
N means: No gear engaged and no power engine revs are too low when the with the power take-off engaged
link-up. power take-off is engaged. • Press the clutch pedal down fully
• Wait briefly (approx. 5 seconds) to allow the Therefore: • Move off as described for the gearbox, see
countershaft to stop • Do not let the engine revs drop “Manual gearbox”, Page 160
• Make sure that the implement driven by the below 800 rpm when the power In vehicles that are not allowed to be moved
PTO is switched off take-off is engaged and under when their power take-off is engaged,
• Press the top of the rocker switch load. engagement of the power take-off is linked
• Increase the engine revs to 800 to 1300 rpm • Pull the steering column stalk 1 downwards to a gearbox gear interlock. This prevents a
The check lamp in the rocker switch lights up (towards “SET–”) gear being engaged when the power take-off
yellow. Alternatively has been engaged. The gearbox remains in
• Release the clutch pedal • Release the accelerator (take your foot off neutral (N).
The power take-off symbol is shown on the the pedal)
display. Disengaging the power take-off
Switching off the working speed
Working speed • Switch off the implement driven by the PTO Only disengage the power take-off when the
• Press switch 2 towards “OFF” vehicle is at a standstill, the engine is running
Switching on the working speed and the gearbox is in neutral position N.
The working speed for the power take-off is • Stop as described for the gearbox
pre-programmed. • Press the clutch pedal down fully
• Press switch 2 towards “MEM” • Shift the gearbox to neutral (N)
Engine running at working speed. • Switch off the implement driven by the PTO
189
Vehicle operation
• Wait approx. 3 seconds and slowly let out the • Always disengage the power
clutch pedal take-off before parking the vehicle
The check lamp in the rocker switch goes out. • Only disengage the power take-off
The power take-off symbol on the display goes when the vehicle is at a standstill,
out. the engine is running and the
gearbox is in neutral position N
Stopping the vehicle and switching off the
engine
WARNING
Danger of damage!
The reservoir pressure in the
compressed air system drops
significantly when the vehicle is
parked up for long periods. If the
power take-off was not switched off,
the dog clutch of the power-take off
disengages.
When the engine is restarted, the
reservoir pressure in the compressed
air system rises again and the dog
clutch of the power take-off then
re-engages automatically.
If the drivetrain clutch is engaged
(clutch pedal not pressed) at the
same time as the dog clutch is
engaged then the dog clutch will be
damaged and the power take-off will
not work.
Therefore:
190
Vehicle operation
Engine-dependent power take-off with manual gearbox
Engine-dependent power take-off with Controls and indication on the display 2 MEM/OFF switch: Switching working
manual gearbox speed on and off
Power take-off rocker switch
Function Display for power take-off
The input shaft of the PTO is directly connected

to the input shaft of the engine. Power
is transmitted via a hydraulically actuated
multi-disc clutch. Control is pneumatic. The
required air pressure for engagement is at least
6 bar in reservoir circuit 4. Power transmission
is independent of the vehicle clutch.
The PTO is allowed to be switched on and off
when the vehicle is stationary with its engine
running or when the vehicle is driving. It can be
engaged or disengaged under load.
Engaging and disengaging the power take-off.
It can be operated when the vehicle is
stationary with its engine running or when The symbol indicates the power take-off is
Steering column stalk operating.
the vehicle is driving.
The engine-dependent power take-off is
suitable for sustained operation. Engaging the power take-off

• Leave the engine running at idling speed
• Shift the gearbox to neutral (N)
N means: No gear engaged and no power
link-up.
• Wait briefly (approx. 5 seconds) to allow the
countershaft to stop
• Increase the engine revs to 800 to 1300 rpm
1 Steering column stalk: Increasing or
yellow.
reducing working speed
191
Vehicle operation
Engine-dependent power take-off with manual gearbox
The power take-off symbol is shown on the Switching off the working speed Stopping the vehicle and switching off the
display. • Press switch 2 towards “OFF” engine
WARNING
Working speed Starting off with the power take-off
Danger of damage!
operating
Switching on the working speed The reservoir pressure in the
WARNING compressed air system drops
The working speed for the power take-off is
Danger of damage! significantly when the vehicle is
pre-programmed.
• Press switch 2 towards “MEM” Do not change gear if the power parked up for long periods. If the
Engine running at working speed. take-off is operating when you are power take-off was not switched off,
driving. Otherwise, the gearbox may the dog clutch of the power-take off
Increasing the working speed be damaged. disengages.
• Push the steering column stalk 1 upwards Therefore: When the engine is restarted, the
(towards “SET+”) • Do not change gear when driving reservoir pressure in the compressed
or with the power take-off engaged air system rises again and the dog
• Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) • Press the clutch pedal down fully clutch of the power take-off then
• Move off as described for the gearbox, see re-engages automatically.
Reducing the working speed “Manual gearbox”, Page 160. If the drivetrain clutch is engaged
In vehicles that are not allowed to be moved (clutch pedal not pressed) at the
WARNING when their power take-off is engaged, same time as the dog clutch is
Danger of damage! engagement of the power take-off is linked engaged then the dog clutch will be
Danger of gearbox damage if the to a gearbox gear interlock. This prevents a damaged and the power take-off will
engine revs are too low when the gear being engaged when the power take-off not work.
power take-off is engaged. has been engaged. The gearbox remains in Therefore:
Therefore: neutral (N). • Always disengage the power
• Do not let the engine revs drop take-off before parking the vehicle
below 800 rpm when the power Disengaging the power take-off
take-off is engaged and under
load. • Press the clutch pedal down fully
• Push the steering column stalk 1 downwards • Shift the gearbox to neutral (N)
(towards “SET–”) • Press the bottom of the rocker switch
Alternatively The check lamp in the rocker switch goes out.
• Release the accelerator (take your foot off The power take-off symbol on the display goes
the pedal) out.
192
Vehicle operation
Power take-offs with automated gearbox
Power take-offs with automated gearbox Controls and indication on the display Steering column stalk
Function Power take-off rocker switch
Clutch-dependent power take-offs are driven

by the countershaft of the automated gearbox.
Actuation is pneumatic. The air pressure
required for engaging is at least 6.2 bar in
reservoir circuit 4.
Only engage and disengage the power
take-offs when the vehicle is at a standstill, the
engine is running and the gearbox is in neutral
position N. They are not allowed to be engaged
or disengaged under load.
They can be operated when the vehicle is at a 1 Steering column stalk: Increasing or
standstill and the engine is running or when the reducing working speed
Engaging and disengaging power take-off I. 2 MEM/OFF switch: Switching working
vehicle driving without any gear changes.
speed on and off
Operating time of the power take-offs
Display for power take-off
Power take-off for an operating period of up to
max. 60 minutes:
– NH/4
Power take-offs for sustained operation:
– NH/1
– NAS/10
Engaging and disengaging power take-off II.
193
Vehicle operation
The symbol indicates the power take-off is Alternatively Therefore:

operating (the example illustrated shows • Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) • Only actuate the mode switch
PTO I). when the vehicle is at a standstill
Reducing the working speed and the engine is idling
Engaging the power take-off • Move off as described for the gearbox, see
WARNING “Automated gearbox”, Page 164.
• Stop as described for the gearbox, see Danger of damage! No gear changes are performed when the
“Automated gearbox”, Page 164. Danger of gearbox damage if the vehicle is driving with the power take-off
• Leave the engine running at idling speed engine revs are too low when the operating. Manual gearshifts are not possible
• Turn the mode switch to N power take-off is engaged. either.
N means: No gear engaged and no power Therefore: In vehicles that are not allowed to be moved
link-up. • Do not let the engine revs drop when their power take-off is engaged,
• Wait briefly (approx. 5 seconds) to allow the below 800 rpm when the power engagement of the power take-off is linked
countershaft to stop take-off is engaged and under to a gearbox gear interlock. This prevents a
• Make sure that the implement driven by the load. gear being engaged when the power take-off
PTO is switched off • Push the steering column stalk 1 downwards has been engaged. The gearbox remains in
• Press the top of the rocker switch (towards “SET–”) neutral (N).
• Increase the engine revs to 800 to 1300 rpm Alternatively
The check lamp in the rocker switch lights up • Release the accelerator (take your foot off Disengaging the power take-off
yellow. the pedal)
The power take-off symbol is shown on the Only disengage the power take-off when the
display. Switching off the working speed vehicle is at a standstill, the engine is running
• Switch off the implement driven by the PTO and the gearbox is in neutral position N.
Working speed • Press switch 2 towards “OFF” • Stop as described for the gearbox
Switching on the working speed Starting off with the power take-off • Press the bottom of the rocker switch
The working speed for the power take-off is operating The check lamp in the rocker switch goes out.
pre-programmed. The power take-off symbol on the display goes
• Press switch 2 towards “MEM” WARNING out.
Engine running at working speed. Danger of damage!
Do not operate the mode switch if the
Increasing the working speed power take-off is operating when you
• Push the steering column stalk 1 upwards are driving. Otherwise, the gearbox
(towards “SET+”) may be damaged.
194
Vehicle operation
Stopping the vehicle and switching off the

engine
WARNING
Danger of damage!
The reservoir pressure in the
power take-off was not switched off,
the dog clutch of the power-take off
disengages.
When the engine is restarted, the
reservoir pressure in the compressed
air system rises again and the
dog clutch of the power take-off
re-engages automatically. The dog
clutch will be damaged and the
power take-off will not work.
Therefore:
• Always disengage the power
take-off before parking the vehicle
• Only disengage the power take-off
when the vehicle is at a standstill,
the engine is running and the
195
Vehicle operation
Power take-off with automatic gearbox
Power take-off with automatic gearbox Controls and indication on the display 2 MEM/OFF switch: Switching working
speed on and off
Function Power take-off rocker switch
Display for power take-off
The input shaft of the PTO is directly connected
to the input shaft of the engine. Power
is transmitted via a hydraulically actuated
multi-disc clutch. Control is pneumatic. The air
pressure required for engaging is at least 6 bar
in reservoir circuit 4.
The PTO is allowed to be switched on and off
when the vehicle is stationary with its engine
running or when the vehicle is driving. It can be
engaged or disengaged under load.
It can be operated when the vehicle is
stationary with its engine running or when
Engaging and disengaging the power take-off.
the vehicle is driving.
The power take-off is suitable for sustained The symbol indicates the power take-off is
Steering column stalk operating.
operation.
Engaging the power take-off
• Stop as described for the gearbox, see “ZF

6 HP automatic gearbox”, Page 182
N means: No gear engaged and no power
link-up.
• Wait briefly (approx. 5 seconds) to allow the
countershaft to stop
• Increase the engine revs to 800 to 1300 rpm
1 Steering column stalk: Increasing or
reducing working speed
yellow.
196
Vehicle operation
The power take-off symbol is shown on the Switching off the working speed The check lamp in the rocker switch goes out.
display. • Press switch 2 towards “OFF” The power take-off symbol on the display goes
out.
Working speed Starting off with the power take-off
Note
operating
The power take-off can also be
Switching on the working speed
WARNING disengaged automatically when certain
Danger of damage! disengagement criteria are met, e.g.
pre-programmed.
Do not operate the mode switch if the when the brakes are applied or a
• Press switch 2 towards “MEM”
power take-off is operating when you predefined speed is exceeded.
Engine running at working speed.
are driving. Otherwise, the gearbox
Increasing the working speed may be damaged. Parking the vehicle
• Push the steering column stalk 1 upwards Therefore:
• Only actuate the mode switch WARNING
(towards “SET+”) Danger of damage!
Alternatively when the vehicle is at a standstill
and the engine is idling The reservoir pressure in the
• Move off as described for the gearbox, see
Reducing the working speed “ZF 6 HP automatic gearbox”, Page 182
In vehicles that are not allowed to be moved
WARNING power take-off was not switched off,
when their power take-off is engaged,
Danger of damage! the dog clutch of the power-take off
engagement of the power take-off is linked
Danger of gearbox damage if the disengages.
to a gearbox gear interlock. This prevents a
engine revs are too low when the When the engine is restarted, the
gear being engaged when the power take-off
power take-off is engaged. reservoir pressure in the compressed
has been engaged. The gearbox remains in
Therefore: air system rises again and the dog
neutral (N).
• Do not let the engine revs drop clutch of the power take-off then
below 800 rpm when the power re-engages automatically.
Disengaging the power take-off
take-off is engaged and under The dog clutch will be damaged and
load. Only disengage the power take-off when the the power take-off will not work.
vehicle is at a standstill, the engine is running Therefore:
• Push the steering column stalk 1 downwards
(towards “SET–”) and the gearbox is in neutral position N.
Alternatively • Stop as described for the gearbox
• Release the accelerator (take your foot off • Turn the mode switch to N
the pedal) • Press the bottom of the rocker switch
197
Vehicle operation
• Always disengage the power

take-off before parking the vehicle
• Only disengage the power take-off
when the vehicle is at a standstill,
the engine is running and the
198
Vehicle operation
PTO on transfer case
PTO on transfer case Steering column stalk Engaging the power take-off
Function • Stop as described for the gearbox, see

“Manual gearbox”, Page 160 or see
Power transmission is dependent on the vehicle “Automated gearbox”, Page 164
clutch. This means: Power transmission to the • Press the clutch pedal down fully
PTO is interrupted when the clutch is pressed. • Leave the engine running at idling speed
Only engage and disengage the power take-off • Move the selector lever or mode witch to
when the vehicle is at a standstill, the engine is neutral N
running and the gearbox is in neutral position N. N means: No gear engaged and no power
It is not allowed to be engaged or disengaged link-up.
under load. It can be operated when the vehicle • Wait briefly (approx. 5 seconds) to allow the
is at a standstill and the engine is running countershaft to stop
or when the vehicle driving without any gear • Make sure that the implement driven by the
changes. 1 Steering column stalk: Increasing or PTO is switched off
The power take-off is suitable for sustained reducing working speed • Press the top of the rocker switch
operation. 2 MEM/OFF switch: Switching working • Increase the engine revs to 800 to 1300 rpm
speed on and off The check lamp in the rocker switch lights up
Controls and indication on the display yellow.
Display for power take-off • Release the clutch pedal
Power take-off rocker switch The power take-off symbol is shown on the
display.
Working speed
Switching on the working speed

pre-programmed.
• Press switch 2 towards “MEM”
Engine running at working speed.
Increasing the working speed

The symbol indicates the power take-off is • Push the steering column stalk 1 upwards
Engaging and disengaging the power take-off. operating. (towards “SET+”)
199
Vehicle operation
PTO on transfer case
Alternatively Therefore: Stopping the vehicle and switching off the

• Press the accelerator pedal (accelerate) • Do not change gear when driving engine
with the power take-off engaged
• Press the clutch pedal down fully WARNING
Reducing the working speed
• Move off as described for the gearbox, Danger of damage!
WARNING see “Manual gearbox”, Page 160 or see The reservoir pressure in the
Danger of damage! “Automated gearbox”, Page 164 compressed air system drops
Danger of gearbox damage if the In vehicles that are not allowed to be moved significantly when the vehicle is
engine revs are too low when the when their power take-off is engaged, parked up for long periods. If the
power take-off is engaged. engagement of the power take-off is linked power take-off was not switched off,
Therefore: to a gearbox gear interlock. This prevents a the dog clutch of the power-take off
• Do not let the engine revs drop gear being engaged when the power take-off disengages.
below 800 rpm when the power has been engaged. The gearbox remains in When the engine is restarted, the
take-off is engaged and under neutral (N). reservoir pressure in the compressed
load. air system rises again and the dog
• Push the steering column stalk 1 downwards Disengaging the power take-off clutch of the power take-off then
(towards “SET–”) re-engages automatically.
Alternatively • Stop as described for the gearbox If the drivetrain clutch is engaged
• Release the accelerator (take your foot off • Press the clutch pedal down fully (clutch pedal not pressed) at the
the pedal) • Move the selector lever or mode witch to same time as the dog clutch is
neutral N engaged then the dog clutch will be
Switching off the working speed • Switch off the implement driven by the PTO damaged and the power take-off will
• Switch off the implement driven by the PTO • Press the bottom of the rocker switch not work.
• Press switch 2 towards “OFF” • Wait approx. 3 seconds and slowly let out the Therefore:
clutch pedal • Always disengage the power
Starting off with the power take-off The check lamp in the rocker switch goes out. take-off before parking the vehicle
operating The power take-off symbol on the display goes • Only disengage the power take-off
out. when the vehicle is at a standstill,
WARNING the engine is running and the
Danger of damage! gearbox is in neutral position N
Do not change gear if the power
take-off is operating when you are
driving. Otherwise, the gearbox may
be damaged.
200
Vehicle operation
Engaging and disengaging differential locks and the transfer case with all-wheel drive
Differential locks and transfer case – When the transverse lock is

engaged on solid ground, there is
Engaging and disengaging differential no differential function between the
locks and the transfer case with all-wheel left and right wheels. It is harder to
drive steer the vehicle. Danger of axle
drive damage.
Functional description Serious accidents can be caused.
Therefore:
The differential locks and the transfer case • Always adapt your driving style,
can be engaged to prevent the individual and in particular your speed, to
wheels of the driven axles from spinning before the road surface and the traffic
negotiating unfavourable or unconsolidated conditions.
ground (e.g. sand, water, mud). • Only engage or disengage the A Off-road gear
The following versions are possible: differential lock at low speed (max. B Neutral position
– On-road gear only 7 km/h) or, even better, when the C On-road gear
– On-road and off-road gear vehicle is at a standstill. D Rear axle interaxle lock
– On-road gear, off-road gear and neutral • Do not drive on consolidated E – With non-permanently engaged
In neutral, there is no force transmission from ground with the transverse lock all-wheel drive: Front wheel drive
the transfer case to the axles. Use of neutral engaged incl. transfer case interaxle lock and
is only restricted to towing; in the event of • Disengage the transverse lock front axle interaxle lock
defects in the engine and gearbox area, the immediately after reaching firm – With permanently engaged all-wheel
otherwise necessary removal of the propshafts ground drive: Interaxle lock on the transfer
is not required. case
Controls and displays on the instrument F Rear axle transverse locks
CAUTION
panel G Front axle interaxle and transverse locks
– The functions of the ABS may be Rotary switch
restricted if the differential lock is Example for version with on-road gear, off-road
switched on and there is tension in gear and neutral, 8 driven wheels:
the driveline.
201
Vehicle operation
Rocker switch 3 – With non-permanently engaged Engaging and disengaging differential

all-wheel drive: Front-axle drive incl. locks and the transfer case
transfer case interaxle lock
– With permanently engaged all-wheel Before engaging or disengaging
drive: Transfer case interaxle lock • Release the accelerator (take your foot off
4 Rear axle interaxle lock the pedal)
5 Rear axle transverse locks • Bring the vehicle to a standstill
6 Neutral position Only engage or disengage the differential locks
7 Front axle interaxle and transverse locks and the transfer case at low speed (max. 7 km
/h) or, even better, when the vehicle is at a
Changing between on-road gear, off-road standstill. The wheels must not spin.
gear and neutral
Engaging differential locks and the transfer
WARNING
Changing between the 1st and 2nd front axle case
Danger of damage!
transverse lock. Engaging the rear axle interaxle lock:
No transfer case oil supply when the • Turn the rotary switch to position D
input shaft is turning and the vehicle Display 4 comes on.
Display on the instrument panel is stationary. Also engaging the front wheel drive incl.
Therefore: transfer case interaxle lock:
• If there is no power take-off, only • Turn the rotary switch to position E
use transfer case neutral position Displays 1, 3 and 4 come on.
for towing in the event of engine or Also engaging the rear axle transverse lock(s):
gearbox damage • Turn the rotary switch to position F
• If the engine is running and the Displays 1, 3, 4 and 5 come on.
transfer case is in neutral, do not Also engaging the front axle transverse lock(s):
engage a gear • Turn the rotary switch to position G
• Release the accelerator (take your foot off Displays 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 come on
the pedal)
• Apply the service brakes and bring the Engaging the front axle transverse locks
vehicle to a standstill Engaging the front axle transverse locks:
1 Front axle interaxle lock • Turn the rotary switch to position A, B or C • Turn the rotary switch to position G
2 Off-road gear When the rotary switch has been turned to Engaging the 1st front axle transverse lock:
position A (off-road gear) or B (neutral) then • Press the bottom of the rocker switch (switch
the corresponding displays 2 or 6 light up. in neutral position)
202
Vehicle operation
The check lamp in the rocker switch does not

come on.
Engaging the 2nd front axle transverse lock:
yellow.
After engaging or disengaging

drive on slowly
Note
disengaging: Stop the vehicle and
drive backwards for a few metres until
the display goes out.
If displays 3 and/or 7 remain lit after
203
Vehicle operation
Disengaging and engaging differential locks with rear wheel drive
Differential locks • Always adapt your driving style, Engaging differential locks
and in particular your speed, to • Release the accelerator (take your foot off
Disengaging and engaging differential the road surface and the traffic the pedal)
locks with rear wheel drive conditions • Brake the vehicle to a halt
• Only engage or disengage the Engaging the rear axle interaxle lock:
Functional description differential lock at low speed (max.
7 km/h) or, even better, when the
The differential locks can be engaged to vehicle is at a standstill
prevent the individual wheels of the driven axles • Do not drive on consolidated
from spinning before negotiating unfavourable ground with the transverse lock
or unconsolidated ground (e.g. sand, water, engaged
mud). • Disengage the transverse lock
Depending on the equipment in the vehicle, it immediately after reaching firm
is possible to engage the transverse lock (with ground
2 driven wheels) or the interaxle lock and the
transverse locks in succession (with 4 driven Engaging and disengaging differential
wheels). locks
CAUTION • Press the top of the rocker switch
Before engaging or disengaging
– The functions of the ABS may be Note
restricted if the differential lock is When engaging the differential locks,
switched on and there is tension in always do this in the correct sequence:
the driveline. First engage the interaxle lock,
– When the transverse lock is then engage the transverse lock(s).
engaged on solid ground, there is Disengage the locks in reverse order.
no differential function between the Only engage or disengage the
left and right wheels. It is harder to differential locks at low speed (max.
steer the vehicle. Danger of axle 7 km/h) or, even better, when the vehicle
drive damage. is at a standstill. The wheels must not
Serious accidents can be caused. spin.
Therefore:
Engaging the rear axle transverse lock(s):
204
Vehicle operation
Disengaging and engaging differential locks with rear wheel drive
Note
If the check lamp 2 remains lit after
disengaging: Stop the vehicle and drive
backwards for a few metres until the
display goes out.
If the check lamp 1 remains lit after

Check lamps 1 and 2 come on.
Disengaging differential locks

The differential locks must be disengaged in
reverse order: First disengage the rear axle
transverse lock(s), then the rear axle interaxle
lock.
the pedal)
• Brake the vehicle to a halt
The check lamps go out.
After engaging or disengaging

drive on slowly
205
Vehicle operation
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPM)
Tyre pressure monitoring system • Select the “Monitoring data” menu item Setting the nominal tyre inflation pressure
• Select the “Tyre pressure” menu item
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPM) The tyre inflation pressure of the tractor vehicle If tyres with a different nominal inflation
is displayed. pressure are used after changing a wheel (e.g.
Functional description If the tractor is equipped with “Trailer data changing from winter to summer tyres) then
(tyre pressure)” and the trailer or semitrailer the new nominal inflation pressure must be
In the tyre pressure monitoring system (TPM), is equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring entered in the Vehicle menu.
every wheel is equipped with a pressure system: • Call up the Vehicle menu
sensor (wheel module). These pressure • Select the “Monitoring data” menu item to • Select the “Vehicle” menu item
sensors determine the tyre inflation pressure display its tyre inflation pressure. • Select the “Settings” menu item
via the tyre valve and send the pressure values • Select the “Trailer” menu item • Select the “Nom. tyre press” menu item
to a control unit via radio signal. • Select the “Tyre pressure” menu item
The tyre inflation display can be called up when The tyre inflation pressure of the trailer or Display if the inflation pressure is incorrect
the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving. semitrailer is displayed.
Note
To obtain the correct information on the
driver’s display, switch off the ignition
before correcting the tyre inflation
pressure.
If tyres with a different nominal tyre
pressure are used after changing a
wheel (e.g. changing from winter to
summer tyres): The new nominal tyre
pressure must be entered in the Vehicle
menu. Tyre inflation pressure values
see “Characteristic data, checking and If the inflation pressure for one or more
setting values, fill quantities”, Page 408. The tyre inflation pressure of the 1st axle of tyres is incorrect, a message appears on the
the tractor vehicle or trailer is displayed. The display. The “central warning light” and the
Displaying the inflation pressure axles are numbered from front to back and their “tyre pressure monitoring system” check lamps
values can be called up in the corresponding come on and a signal sounds. Immediately
• Call up the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle sequence. check the tyre inflation pressure and correct
menu”, Page 288. it if necessary. For tyre inflation pressure,
• Select the “Vehicle” menu item
206
Vehicle operation
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPM)
see “Characteristic data, checking and setting

values, fill quantities”, Page 408.
TPM interference
Note
The radio signals are sometimes subject
to local interference caused by other
radio systems which transmit on the
same radio frequency. To ensure
interference-free radio reception,
move the vehicle out of the zone of
interference or interrupt the transmitter.
For more information about check lamps and
messages on the display, refer to an overview
containing information about dealing with
the particular malfunction, see “Overview of
displays and messages”, Page 254.
207
Vehicle operation
Important notes on safety and operation
TRAILER OPERATION
• Do not stand between the tractor • Always check the coupling heads
Important notes on safety and
vehicle and the trailer when the and sockets of the tractor vehicle
operation tractor vehicle is reversing and the trailer before hitching up
• Before hitching up and unhitching and, if necessary, have them
Notes on safety the trailer, use the parking renewed in a MAN Service
brake and/or chocks on the rear workshop
Comply with following the safety instructions:
wheels to prevent the trailer from • Immediately renew damaged
– For hitching up, the front axle of an
rolling away. See the operating plug connections for the electrical
articulated drawbar trailer must be able
instructions provided by the trailer supply to the trailer
to turn and must not be braked. See the
manufacturer.
operating instructions provided by the trailer Note
manufacturer. CAUTION After a change in the load, the vehicle
– Carefully reverse the tractor vehicle up to the Danger of accidents! feels slightly different when braking. The
parked trailer – Damaged or worn coupling heads electronic braking system first has to
– Regularly check the rubber seals on the for supplying compressed air to adapt the brake force distribution to the
coupling heads and the brake and reservoir the trailer can lead to failure of the changed vehicle load. For it to do this,
line for damage, renew them if necessary trailer brake the vehicle must be braked a few times.
– Always keep the trailer coupling closed and – Damaged sockets and plug
locked, even when operating without a trailer connections for the electrical Cleaning the sockets on the tractor vehicle
– Always comply with the local regulations for supply to the trailer can lead to
hitching up and unhitching failure of the trailer brake WARNING
Serious accidents can be caused. Danger of damage!
CAUTION
Therefore, please always ensure the Contact corrosion is caused
following: by moisture, dirt and road salt
Hitching up and unhitching a trailer
penetrating the sockets. This leads to
can result in serious accidents.
greater resistance and considerable
heat buildup when the electricity
following:
supply to the trailer is connected
• Do not let the trailer roll up to the
up. The consequence is charring
tractor vehicle to hitch it up
damage to the plug connections and
the cable harness.
208
Vehicle operation
Therefore, please always ensure the Coupling heads and sockets Duo-Matic dual coupling head for
following: compressed air
• Always switch off the ignition and Note
the lights before cleaning the The coupling heads and the sockets for
sockets the trailer are located on a mounting
• Use compressed air to blow dry plate or on the vehicle frame close to
sockets and plug connections the trailer coupling.
regularly, and if necessary clean The vehicles are equipped either with
them using a dry, lint-free cloth two coupling heads or with a Duo-Matic
• If the sockets and plug dual coupling head for the compressed
connections are damaged, have air supply to the trailer.
them renewed at a MAN Service The vehicles are equipped either with
workshop two 7-pin sockets or with one 15-pin
socket for the electricity supply to the
Never use water or mechanical objects for
trailer.
cleaning the sockets on the tractor vehicle. Only
blow out the sockets with compressed air, with
Standard coupling heads for compressed Trailer socket (15-pin)
the pressure not to exceed 8 bar.
Before cleaning, always switch off the ignition air
and the light.
1 Brake line coupling head (yellow)

2 Reservoir line coupling head (red)
209
Vehicle operation
Trailer sockets (7-pin) Connecting and disconnecting compressed • Make the electrical connections for the ABS,
air lines and electrical cables brake and light connections of the trailer
• Check the functions of the trailer brake and
Connecting the rear lights of the trailer
CAUTION
Disconnecting
Danger of accidents if the CAUTION
compressed air lines and electrical Danger of accidents!
plug connections for the trailer are The trailer brake can release and the
pulled off when driving. This can unbraked trailer can roll away when
result in a serious accident due to the coupling heads are removed.
failure of the trailer brake and the Serious accidents can be caused.
trailer’s electrical system. Therefore, please always ensure the
1 Socket for auxiliary consumers in the Therefore, please always ensure the following:
trailer following: • Observe the sequence when
2 Socket for the standard electricity supply • Connect the compressed air lines removing the coupling heads
to the trailer and electrical connections so they • Use the parking brake and/or
are not under tension and can chocks on the rear wheels
Socket for ABS and EBS adjust to all the movements of the to prevent the trailer from
trailer without chafing or kinking rolling away. See the operating
instructions provided by the trailer
Note manufacturer.
In vehicles with a Duo-Matic dual
• Disconnect the electrical connections for the
coupling head, the compressed air
ABS, brake and light connections of the
supply for the brake and reservoir line
trailer
is integrated in one coupling head. This
• First disconnect the reservoir line coupling
specifies the sequence.
head (red) 2
• First connect up the brake line coupling head • Disconnect the brake line coupling head
(yellow) 1 (yellow) 1
• Then connect up the reservoir line coupling
head (red) 2
• Look and check that the tractor vehicle and
the trailer are correctly connected together
210
Vehicle operation
Note
Attach the compressed air lines to
the holding fixtures provided to avoid
damaging the compressed air lines and
in order to keep them clean.
211
Vehicle operation
Rockinger normal hitch system
Rockinger normal hitch system 1 Hand lever • Do not stand in the area between the tractor
2 Coupling pin and trailer
One-hand operation 3 Check pin • Carefully reverse the tractor vehicle up to the
parked trailer until the trailer coupling closes
Controls without check pin Hitching up a trailer Moving the drawbar eye into the jaw causes the
coupling pin 2 to be raised and unlocked. The
CAUTION
coupling pin 2 drops downwards and closes the
trailer coupling.
Failure to follow the safety • Connect up the compressed air lines and
instructions can result in serious electrical cables
accidents. • Release the drawbar height adjuster
Therefore, please always ensure the • Release the parking brake on the rear axle
following: of the trailer and/or remove the chocks from
• Follow the safety instructions when the rear wheels
hitching up and unhitching, see
“Important notes on safety and Checking after hitching up
operation”, Page 208
• Use the parking brake and/or chocks to CAUTION
1 Hand lever prevent the trailer from rolling away. See the Danger of accidents!
2 Coupling pin operating instructions provided by the trailer The check pin 3 must be flush
manufacturer. with the locking housing when the
Controls with check pin • Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it trailer coupling is completely locked.
engages Serious accidents can be caused by
The jaw is locked in its position and cannot be not having the trailer coupling locked
moved from side to side any longer. This makes properly.
it easier to guide the drawbar eye into the jaw. Therefore, please always ensure the
• Check that the jaw is fixed following:
• Release the parking brake on the front axle • Check whether the check pin 3 is
of the articulated drawbar trailer. See the projecting from the locking housing
operating instructions provided by the trailer If the trailer coupling is not locked properly:
manufacturer. • Drive forwards and backwards about 1 metre
• Use the height adjustment feature to set the with the tractor vehicle
trailer’s drawbar to the height of the lower
part of the jaw
212
Vehicle operation
Rockinger normal hitch system
• Recheck to see if the trailer coupling is Closing the trailer coupling manually
completely locked and repeat the hitching
Note
procedure if necessary
Always keep the trailer coupling closed
and locked, even when operating
Unhitching a trailer
without a trailer.
• Apply the parking brake to prevent the tractor
Close the trailer coupling manually
if the trailer coupling has not closed
• Use the parking brake and/or chocks on
completely after unhitching the trailer.
the rear wheels to prevent the trailer from
rolling away. See the operating instructions • Use a suitable tool to lift the coupling pin 2
provided by the trailer manufacturer. and unlock it
• Fix the trailer drawbar at the height of The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the
the trailer coupling. See the operating trailer coupling is closed and locked.
instructions provided by the trailer
manufacturer.
• Disconnect the compressed air lines and
electrical cables
• Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it
engages
• Do not stand in the area between the tractor
and trailer
• Carefully drive the tractor vehicle forwards
and disconnect the tractor vehicle from the
trailer
Driving out the drawbar eye pushes the
coupling pin 2 upwards again and unlocks it.
The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the
trailer coupling is closed and locked.
213
Vehicle operation
Ringfeder normal hitch system
Ringfeder normal hitch system Therefore, please always ensure the • Release the parking brake on the rear axle
following: of the trailer and/or remove the chocks from
One-hand operation • Follow the safety instructions when the rear wheels
Controls “Important notes on safety and Checking after hitching up
• Use the parking brake and/or chocks to CAUTION
prevent the trailer from rolling away. See the Danger of accidents!
operating instructions provided by the trailer The check pin 3 must be flush
manufacturer. with the locking housing when the
• Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it trailer coupling is completely locked.
engages Serious accidents can be caused by
The jaw is locked in its position and cannot be not having the trailer coupling locked
moved from side to side any longer. This makes properly.
it easier to guide the drawbar eye into the jaw. Therefore, please always ensure the
• Check that the jaw is fixed following:
• Release the parking brake on the front axle • Check whether the check pin 3 is
of the articulated drawbar trailer. See the projecting from the locking housing
1 Hand lever
operating instructions provided by the trailer If the trailer coupling is not locked properly:
2 Coupling pin
manufacturer. • Drive forwards and backwards about 1 metre
3 Check pin
• Use the height adjustment feature to set the with the tractor vehicle
trailer’s drawbar to the height of the lower • Recheck to see if the trailer coupling is
Hitching up a trailer
part of the jaw completely locked and repeat the hitching
CAUTION • Do not stand in the area between the tractor procedure if necessary
Danger of accidents! and trailer
Failure to follow the safety • Carefully reverse the tractor vehicle up to the Unhitching a trailer
instructions can result in serious parked trailer until the trailer coupling closes • Apply the parking brake to prevent the tractor
accidents. Moving the drawbar eye into the jaw causes the vehicle from rolling away
coupling pin 2 to be raised and unlocked. The • Use the parking brake and/or chocks on
coupling pin 2 drops downwards and closes the the rear wheels to prevent the trailer from
trailer coupling. rolling away. See the operating instructions
• Connecting up the compressed air lines and provided by the trailer manufacturer.
electrical cables • Fix the trailer drawbar at the height of
• Release the drawbar height adjuster the trailer coupling. See the operating
214
Vehicle operation
instructions provided by the trailer Two-hand operation • Use the parking brake and/or chocks to
manufacturer. prevent the trailer from rolling away. See the
• Disconnect the compressed air lines and Controls operating instructions provided by the trailer
electrical cables manufacturer.
• Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it • Pull out the safety button 3 and turn it
engages forwards in the driving direction into the outer
• Do not stand in the area between the tractor locking position
and trailer • Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it
• Carefully drive the tractor vehicle forwards engages
and disconnect the tractor vehicle from the The jaw is locked in its position and cannot be
trailer moved from side to side any longer. This makes
Driving out the drawbar eye pushes the it easier to guide the drawbar eye into the jaw.
coupling pin 2 upwards again and unlocks it. • Check that the jaw is fixed
The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the • Release the parking brake on the front axle
trailer coupling is closed and locked. of the articulated drawbar trailer. See the
1 Hand lever operating instructions provided by the trailer
Closing the trailer coupling manually 2 Coupling pin manufacturer.
3 Safety button • Use the height adjustment feature to set the
Note
trailer’s drawbar to the height of the lower
Hitching up a trailer part of the jaw
without a trailer. Close the trailer CAUTION and trailer
coupling manually if the trailer coupling Danger of accidents! • Carefully reverse the tractor vehicle up to the
has not closed completely after
Failure to follow the safety parked trailer until the trailer coupling closes
unhitching the trailer.
instructions can result in serious Moving the drawbar eye into the jaw causes the
• Use a suitable tool to lift the coupling pin 2 accidents. coupling pin 2 to be raised and unlocked. The
and unlock it Therefore, please always ensure the coupling pin 2 drops downwards and closes the
The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the following: trailer coupling.
trailer coupling is closed and locked. • Follow the safety instructions when • Connecting up the compressed air lines and
hitching up and unhitching, see electrical cables
“Important notes on safety and • Release the drawbar height adjuster
operation”, Page 208 • Release the parking brake on the rear axle
of the trailer and/or remove the chocks from
the rear wheels
215
Vehicle operation
Checking after hitching up Unhitching a trailer Closing the trailer coupling manually
• Apply the parking brake to prevent the tractor
Note
• Use the parking brake and/or chocks on
the rear wheels to prevent the trailer from
without a trailer. Close the trailer
rolling away. See the operating instructions
coupling manually if the trailer coupling
provided by the trailer manufacturer.
• Fix the trailer drawbar at the height of
the trailer coupling. See the operating
instructions provided by the trailer • Use a suitable tool to lift the coupling pin 2
manufacturer. and unlock it
• Disconnect the compressed air lines and The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the
electrical cables trailer coupling is closed and locked.
• Pull out the safety button 3 and turn it
CAUTION forwards in the driving direction into the outer
Danger of accidents! locking position
The safety button 3 must be in • Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it
the inner locking position when the engages
trailer coupling is completely locked. • Do not stand in the area between the tractor
Serious accidents can be caused by and trailer
not having the trailer coupling locked • Carefully drive the tractor vehicle forwards
properly. and disconnect the tractor vehicle from the
Therefore, please always ensure the trailer
following: Driving out the drawbar eye pushes the
• Check whether the safety button 3 coupling pin 2 upwards again and unlocks it.
is in the inner locking position The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the
trailer coupling is closed and locked.
If the trailer coupling is not locked properly:
• Drive forwards and backwards about 1 metre
with the tractor vehicle
• Recheck to see if the trailer coupling is
216
Vehicle operation
Ringfeder low hitch system
Ringfeder low hitch system Therefore, please always ensure the

following:
Controls • Follow the safety instructions when
“Important notes on safety and
• Use the parking brake and/or chocks to
prevent the trailer from rolling away. See the
operating instructions provided by the trailer
manufacturer.
• Unlock the hand lever 1 by opening the safety
lock 4
• Push the hand lever 1 inwards as far as the
stop (zero position)
The trailer coupling is now ready for hitching
up.
1 Hand lever • Use the height adjustment feature to set the
2 Coupling pin trailer’s drawbar to the middle of the jaw
3 Check pin • Do not stand in the area between the tractor
4 Safety lock and trailer
• Carefully reverse the tractor vehicle up to the
One-hand operation parked trailer until the trailer coupling closes
Moving the drawbar eye into the jaw causes the
Hitching up a trailer coupling pin 2 to be raised and unlocked. The
• Push the hand lever 1 outwards as far as the coupling pin 2 drops downwards and closes the
CAUTION
stop (top dead centre position) trailer coupling.
The trailer coupling is now open. • Connecting up the compressed air lines and
Failure to follow the safety
electrical cables
instructions can result in serious
• Release the drawbar height adjuster
accidents.
• Release the parking brake on the rear axle
of the trailer and/or remove the chocks from
the rear wheels
217
Vehicle operation
Checking after hitching up • Recheck to see if the trailer coupling is

CAUTION
• Secure the hand lever 1 by closing the safety
The check pin 3 must be flush with lock 4 when the trailer coupling is completely
the locking housing and the check locked
lamp on the instrument panel must
come on when the trailer coupling is Unhitching a trailer
completely locked. Serious accidents • Apply the parking brake to prevent the tractor
can be caused by not having the vehicle from rolling away
trailer coupling locked properly. • Use the parking brake and/or chocks on
Therefore, please always ensure the the rear wheels to prevent the trailer from
following: rolling away. See the operating instructions • Push the hand lever 1 outwards as far as the
• Check whether the check pin 3 is provided by the trailer manufacturer. stop (top dead centre position)
projecting from the locking housing • Fix the trailer drawbar at the height of The trailer coupling is now open.
• Check whether the check lamp on the trailer coupling. See the operating • Do not stand in the area between the tractor
the instrument panel comes on instructions provided by the trailer and trailer
manufacturer.
Note
If the coupling pin 2 is clamped by the
electrical cables
trailer’s drawbar eye, it is possible to
• Unlock the hand lever 1 by opening the safety
open the trailer coupling by moving the
lock 4
tractor vehicle forwards and backwards
slightly. As soon as the coupling pin 2
comes free, the spring-type accumulator
built into the actuator pulls up the
coupling pin 2 and opens the trailer
coupling.
• Carefully drive the tractor vehicle forwards
and disconnect the tractor vehicle from the
trailer
• Drive forwards and backwards about 1 metre
218
Vehicle operation
Closing the trailer coupling manually
Note
Deactivating the check lamp

The check lamp always comes on when the
trailer coupling is closed, regardless of whether
a trailer is hitched up or not.
Switching off the check lamp:
• Push the hand lever 1 inwards as far as the

stop (zero position)
• Lock the hand lever 1 by closing the safety
lock 4
219
Vehicle operation
Rigid drawbar (central axle) trailer
Rigid drawbar (central axle) trailer – In vehicles with a low hitch system, make
sure there is sufficient clearance between
Notes on safety the trailer and tractor vehicle
Note CAUTION
When operating with a rigid drawbar Danger of accidents!
trailer (central axle trailer), a suitable Danger of accidents if the
trailer coupling approved by MAN compressed air lines and electrical
must be installed in conjunction with plug connections for the trailer are
reinforcement plates. Refer to the pulled off when driving. This can
instructions regarding vehicle loading, result in a serious accident due to
see “Loading the vehicle”, Page 323. failure of the trailer brake and the
trailer’s electrical system.
Safety instructions for driving Therefore, please always ensure the
The driving characteristics of rigid drawbar following:
trailers (central axle drawbar trailers) are totally • Connect the compressed air lines
different from those of articulated drawbar and electrical connections so they
trailers. are not under tension and can
The following safety instructions for driving with adjust to all the movements of the
rigid drawbar trailers (central axle trailers) must trailer without chafing or kinking
be followed in all circumstances:
– The minimum load on the front axle of the
tractor vehicle must be 25 % of the total
weight of the vehicle
– Do not exceed the permitted axle loads
– If the vehicle is unladen, only tow an unladen
rigid drawbar trailer (central axle trailer)
– Do not let the total vertical slewing
angle exceed 20° either way (upwards
or downwards)
– Do not exceed a horizontal slewing angle of
90°
220
Vehicle operation
One-hand operation Ringfeder controls operating instructions provided by the trailer

manufacturer.
Rockinger controls • Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it
engages
The jaw is locked in its position and cannot be
moved from side to side any longer. This makes
it easier to guide the drawbar eye into the jaw.
• Check that the jaw is fixed
• Use the drawbar support to set the trailer’s
drawbar to the middle of the jaw. See the
operating instructions provided by the trailer
manufacturer.
Note
1 Hand lever With a rigid drawbar trailer (central axle
2 Coupling pin trailer), the drawbar eye must strike
1 Hand lever 3 Check pin the centre of the jaw when hitching up.
2 Coupling pin Failure to follow these instructions can
Hitching up a trailer lead to damage to the jaw, drawbar eye,
automatic unit and support fixture.
CAUTION
Danger of accidents! • Do not stand in the area between the tractor
and trailer
• Carefully reverse the tractor vehicle up to
the parked trailer until the trailer coupling
accidents.
engages
Moving the drawbar eye into the jaw causes the
following:
coupling pin 2 to be raised and unlocked. The
• Follow the safety instructions when
coupling pin drops downwards and closes the
trailer coupling.
“Important notes on safety and
• Connecting up the compressed air lines and
1 Hand lever electrical cables
• Use the parking brake and/or chocks to • Retract the drawbar support
2 Coupling pin prevent the trailer from rolling away. See the
3 Check pin
221
Vehicle operation
• Release the parking brake on the rear axle See the operating instructions provided by Two-hand operation
of the trailer and/or remove the chocks from the trailer manufacturer.
the rear wheels • Disconnect the compressed air lines and Controls
electrical cables
Checking after hitching up • Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it
engages
CAUTION
and trailer
The check pin 3 must be flush • Carefully drive the tractor vehicle forwards
with the locking housing when the and disconnect the tractor vehicle from the
trailer coupling is completely locked. trailer
Serious accidents can be caused by Driving out the drawbar eye pushes the
not having the trailer coupling locked coupling pin 2 upwards again and unlocks it.
properly. The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the
Therefore, please always ensure the trailer coupling is closed and locked.
following:
• Check whether the check pin 3 is 1 Hand lever
Closing the trailer coupling manually 2 Coupling pin
projecting from the locking housing
Note 3 Safety button
• Drive forwards and backwards about 1 metre Always keep the trailer coupling closed
and locked, even when operating Hitching up a trailer
• Recheck to see if the trailer coupling is without a trailer. Close the trailer CAUTION
completely locked and repeat the hitching coupling manually if the trailer coupling Danger of accidents!
procedure if necessary has not closed completely after
Unhitching a trailer • Use a suitable tool to lift the coupling pin 2 accidents.
• Apply the parking brake to prevent the tractor and unlock it Therefore, please always ensure the
vehicle from rolling away The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the following:
• Use the parking brake and/or chocks on trailer coupling is closed and locked. • Follow the safety instructions when
the rear wheels to prevent the trailer from hitching up and unhitching, see
rolling away. See the operating instructions “Important notes on safety and
provided by the trailer manufacturer. operation”, Page 208
• Use the drawbar support to fix the trailer
drawbar at the height of the trailer coupling.
222
Vehicle operation
• Use the parking brake and/or chocks to • Connecting up the compressed air lines and If the trailer coupling is not locked properly:
prevent the trailer from rolling away. See the electrical cables • Drive forwards and backwards about 1 metre
operating instructions provided by the trailer • Retract the drawbar support with the tractor vehicle
manufacturer. • Release the parking brake on the rear axle • Recheck to see if the trailer coupling is
• Pull out the safety button 3 and turn it of the trailer and/or remove the chocks from completely locked and repeat the hitching
forwards in the driving direction into the outer the rear wheels procedure if necessary
locking position
• Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it Checking after hitching up Unhitching a trailer
engages • Apply the parking brake to prevent the tractor
The jaw is locked in its position and cannot be vehicle from rolling away
moved from side to side any longer. This makes • Use the parking brake and/or chocks on
it easier to guide the drawbar eye into the jaw. the rear wheels to prevent the trailer from
• Check that the jaw is fixed rolling away. See the operating instructions
• Use the drawbar support to set the trailer’s provided by the trailer manufacturer.
drawbar to the middle of the jaw. See the • Use the drawbar support to fix the trailer
operating instructions provided by the trailer drawbar at the height of the trailer coupling.
manufacturer. See the operating instructions provided by
the trailer manufacturer.
Note
With a rigid drawbar trailer (central axle
electrical cables
trailer), the drawbar eye must strike
• Pull out the safety button 3 and turn it
the centre of the jaw when hitching up.
CAUTION forwards in the driving direction into the outer
Failure to follow these instructions can
Danger of accidents! locking position
lead to damage to the jaw, drawbar eye,
The safety button 3 must be in • Push the hand lever 1 upwards until it
automatic unit and support fixture.
the inner locking position when the engages
• Do not stand in the area between the tractor • Do not stand in the area between the tractor
trailer coupling is completely locked.
and trailer and trailer
Serious accidents can be caused by
• Carefully reverse the tractor vehicle up to • Carefully drive the tractor vehicle forwards
not having the trailer coupling locked
the parked trailer until the trailer coupling and disconnect the tractor vehicle from the
properly.
engages trailer
Moving the drawbar eye into the jaw causes the Driving out the drawbar eye pushes the
following:
coupling pin 2 to be raised and unlocked. The coupling pin 2 upwards again and unlocks it.
• Check whether the safety button 3
coupling pin 2 drops downwards and closes the The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the
is in the inner locking position
trailer coupling. trailer coupling is closed and locked again.
223
Vehicle operation
Closing the trailer coupling manually
Note
• Use a suitable tool to lift the coupling pin 2
and unlock it
The coupling pin 2 drops downwards and the
trailer coupling is closed and locked again.
224
Vehicle operation
SEMITRAILER OPERATION
• Do not stand between the tractor Note

Important notes on safety and
vehicle and the semitrailer when After a change in the load, the vehicle
operation the tractor vehicle is reversing feels slightly different when braking. The
• Before hitching up and unhitching, electronic braking system first has to
Notes on safety secure the semitrailer with chocks adapt the brake force distribution to the
at the rear wheels to prevent it from changed vehicle load. For it to do this,
Comply with following the safety instructions:
rolling away the vehicle must be braked a few times.
– Have the fifth wheel coupling checked at a
MAN Service workshop if you can feel any CAUTION
play between the kingpin and the fifth wheel Cleaning the sockets on the tractor vehicle
coupling plate – Damaged or worn coupling heads WARNING
– Regularly check the rubber seals on the for supplying compressed air to the Danger of damage!
coupling heads and the brake and reservoir semitrailer can lead to failure of the Contact corrosion is caused
line for damage, renew them if necessary semitrailer brake by moisture, dirt and road salt
– When driving without a semitrailer, cover – Damaged sockets and plug penetrating the sockets. This leads to
the rear wheels of the vehicle using roll-up connections for the electrical greater resistance and considerable
screens or mudguards supply to the semitrailer can lead heat buildup when the electricity
– Always comply with the local regulations for to failure of the semitrailer brake supply to the trailer is connected
hitching up and unhitching the semitrailer Serious accidents can be caused. up. The consequence is charring
CAUTION Therefore, please always ensure the damage to the plug connections and
Danger of accidents! following: the cable harness.
• Always check the coupling heads Therefore, please always ensure the
Hitching up and unhitching a
and sockets of the tractor vehicle following:
semitrailer can result in serious
and the semitrailer before hitching • Always switch off the ignition and
accidents.
up and, if necessary, have them the lights before cleaning the
renewed in a MAN Service sockets
following:
workshop
• Immediately renew damaged
plug connections for the electrical
supply to the semitrailer
225
Vehicle operation
• Use compressed air to blow dry Coupling heads for compressed air Trailer sockets (7-pin)
sockets and plug connections
regularly, and if necessary clean
them using a dry, lint-free cloth
• If the sockets and plug
connections are damaged, have
them renewed at a MAN Service
workshop
Never use water or mechanical objects for
cleaning the sockets on the tractor vehicle. Only
blow out the sockets with compressed air, with
the pressure not to exceed 8 bar.
Before cleaning, always switch off the ignition
and the light.
1 Brake line coupling head (yellow) 1 Socket for auxiliary consumers in the
2 Reservoir line coupling head (red) trailer
Coupling heads and sockets
2 Socket for the standard electricity supply
Note Trailer socket (15-pin) to the trailer
The coupling heads and the sockets for
the trailer are located behind the cab. Socket for ABS and EBS
The vehicles are equipped either with
two 7-pin sockets or with one 15-pin
socket for the electricity supply to the
trailer.
226
Vehicle operation
General operation Hitching up a semitrailer • Open the fifth wheel coupling

• Set the height of the semitrailer by extending
WARNING
Hitching up or retracting the semitrailer legs. See the
operating instructions provided by the
– When the frame is set above or semitrailer manufacturer.
below the ride height, the vehicle’s • Do not stand in the area between the tractor
braking and steering properties will and semitrailer
be different • Carefully reverse the tractor vehicle under
– When the frame is above or below the semitrailer until the fifth wheel coupling
the ride height, there may be either locks
no suspension travel remaining, or • Apply the parking brake to prevent the tractor
the remaining suspension travel vehicle from rolling away
may be very short. As a result, the • Move the semitrailer legs to their driving
running gear and frame may suffer position once the semitrailer has been
damage if the vehicle is driven. hitched up
– The tyres may rub against the The semitrailer plate must make contact with
central part of the mudguards if the the fifth wheel coupling plate without an air gap
WARNING
frame is set below the ride height. after hitching up.
Danger of damage!
The semitrailer plate must be about
damaged as a result. Connecting up the compressed air lines
50 mm lower than the top edge of
Therefore, please always ensure the and electrical cables
the fifth wheel coupling plate when
following:
hitching up. If the semitrailer plate is CAUTION
above the top edge of the fifth wheel Danger of accidents!
driving
• If possible, do not move the vehicle coupling plate, the vehicle may be
Danger of accidents if the
if its frame is above or below the damaged when it is driven under the
compressed air lines and electrical
ride height semitrailer.
plug connections for the semitrailer
• If you have no other alternative, Therefore, please always ensure the
are pulled off when driving. This can
only drive the vehicle at walking following:
result in a serious accident due to
• Check the height of the semitrailer
pace or only for short distances failure of the semitrailer brake and
when hitching up, set the correct
the semitrailer’s electrical system.
height if necessary
• Chock the rear wheels of the semitrailer to
prevent it from rolling away
227
Vehicle operation
Therefore, please always ensure the • Observe the sequence when WARNING
following: removing the coupling heads Danger of damage!
• Connect the compressed air lines • Chock the rear wheels of the There is a risk of jamming the kingpin
and electrical connections so they semitrailer to prevent it from rolling in the fifth wheel coupling plate when
are not under tension and can away driving the vehicle out from under the
adjust to all the movements of • Park the vehicle on a surface which is semitrailer.
the semitrailer without chafing or horizontal and even Therefore, please always ensure the
kinking • Apply the parking brake to prevent the tractor following:
• First connect up the brake line coupling head vehicle from rolling away • Lower the air suspension or extend
(yellow) 1 • Deploy the semitrailer legs. See the the semitrailer legs until the load is
• Then connect up the reservoir line coupling operating instructions provided by the taken off the fifth wheel coupling
head (red) 2 semitrailer manufacturer. but the semitrailer is not yet lifted
• Look and check that the tractor vehicle and • Chock the rear wheels of the semitrailer to off the fifth wheel coupling plate
the trailer are correctly connected together prevent it from rolling away • Carefully drive the tractor vehicle out from
• Make the electrical connections for the ABS, • Disconnect the electrical connections for the under the semitrailer
brake and light connections of the semitrailer ABS, brake and light connections of the The fifth wheel coupling remains open and is
• Check the functions of the semitrailer brake trailer automatically ready to be hitched up again.
and the rear lights of the semitrailer • First disconnect the reservoir line coupling
• Remove chocks from the rear wheels head (red) 2 Clearance between the tractor vehicle and
• Disconnect the brake line coupling head semitrailer
Unhitching a semitrailer (yellow) 1
Note
Disconnecting the compressed air lines
Attach the compressed air lines and
and electrical cables
electrical cables to the holding fixtures
CAUTION provided to avoid damaging them and in
Danger of accidents! order to keep them clean.
The semitrailer brake can release
and the unbraked semitrailer can roll Unhitching a semitrailer
away when the coupling heads are • Open the fifth wheel coupling
removed. Serious accidents can be
caused.
following:
228
Vehicle operation
Tyre clearance • If the clearance is not sufficient,

raise the frame to maximum
Normal tractors 40 mm above the ride height
and drive at a maximum speed of
Note 50 km/h.
With the air suspension lowered or when • If there is a pressure loss in the
the leaf suspension is fully compressed, air suspension system, only drive
it is sufficient if the distance between the at walking pace and for short
tyres and mudguards is at least 40 mm. distances, e.g. for manoeuvring
When driving with snow chains, also • Immediately contact a MAN
take account of the additional clearance Service workshop if there is a
requirement which depends on the pressure loss in the air suspension
thickness of the snow chains. system
WARNING
Danger of damage! Tractors for large-volume transport Note
Restricted clearance between the When driving with snow chains, also
semitrailer and the tractor vehicle can WARNING take account of the additional clearance
cause damage to the tractor vehicle Danger of damage! requirement which depends on the
and the semitrailer when driving In vehicles with a particularly low thickness of the snow chains.
over humps, ramps, dips and other frame (referred to as vehicles for
obstacles. The manoeuvrability of the large-volume transport), the distance Altering the fifth wheel lead
vehicle is restricted when driving over between the tyres and the middle
obstacles. part of the mudguards is very small.
Therefore, please always ensure the Even at the normal ride height, there
following: may not be sufficient clearance for
• Only drive over humps, ramps and driving with snow chains since the
dips slowly and carefully mudguards could be damaged.
• Only drive over bumps, kerbs Therefore, please always ensure the
and similar obstacles slowly and following:
carefully • Before driving, check whether
there is sufficient clearance
229
Vehicle operation
The fifth wheel coupling is mounted at the

factory to ensure optimum weight distribution
between the axles.
Note
In the Federal Republic of Germany, the
responsible authorities are required to
reassess the permitted semitrailer load
if the fifth wheel lead a is altered. Please
comply with the statutory regulations in
your own country.
Assume a balanced weight distribution when
calculating the fifth wheel lead a.
Comply with the relevant regulations governing
the overall length of the vehicle. It is essential to
pay attention to the swivelling radius in relation
to the cab and the rear of the vehicle.
230
Vehicle operation
Jost fifth wheel coupling
Jost fifth wheel coupling • Swivel hand lever 2 forwards in the direction Opening the JSK 37 fifth wheel coupling
of the arrow, pull it out and clip its locking
Operation notch onto the edge of the plate
CAUTION
Checking after hitching up
accidents.
following:
• Follow the safety instructions
when hitching up and unhitching
a semitrailer, see “Important
notes on safety and operation”, • Lift drop-lock 1
Page 225 • Swivel hand lever 2 forwards in the direction
of the arrow, pull it out and clip its locking
Opening the JSK 36 fifth wheel coupling notch onto the edge of the plate
CAUTION
If you cannot clip in the snap hook 1
then the fifth wheel coupling has not
closed fully. Serious accidents can be
caused.
following:
• Check the fifth wheel coupling has
closed completely after hitching up
by clipping in the snap hook 1
If the fifth wheel coupling is not closed properly:
• Detach snap hook 1 • Repeat the hitching up procedure
231
Vehicle operation
Jost fifth wheel coupling
CAUTION CAUTION
Danger of accidents! Danger of accidents!
If the drop-lock 1 does not drop The fifth wheel coupling has not
into the locked position then the fifth locked completely if the locking notch
wheel coupling has not closed fully. 1 is not completely inserted into the
Serious accidents can be caused. fifth wheel coupling plate. Serious
Therefore, please always ensure the accidents can be caused.
following: Therefore, please always ensure the
• Check the drop-lock 1 to make following:
sure the fifth wheel coupling has • Check the hand lever to make
closed completely after hitching up sure the fifth wheel coupling is
If the fifth wheel coupling is not closed properly: completely locked after hitching up
• Repeat the hitching up procedure • Swivel hand lever 2 forwards in the direction If the fifth wheel coupling is not locked
of the arrow, pull it out as far as the stop and completely:
Opening the JSK 42 fifth wheel coupling clip its locking notch onto the edge of the • Repeat the hitching up procedure
plate
• Pull out lever 2

Note
To prevent the fifth wheel coupling being
opened inadvertently, it is possible to
lock a padlock 3 in the hole in the slide
grip.
232
Vehicle operation
Adjustment device for fifth wheel couplings made by Jost
Adjustment device for fifth wheel Altering the fifth wheel lead • Apply the parking brake and chock the rear
couplings made by Jost wheels of the semitrailer to prevent it from
Note
rolling away
The fifth wheel coupling should only be
Introduction • Detach snap hook 1
adjusted when the semitrailer is hitched
• Swivel locking lever 2 forwards in the driving
up, in order to make it easier to move the
The adjustment device is used for adjusting the direction, pull it out and clip its locking notch
fifth wheel coupling.
mounted fifth wheel coupling and enables the onto the insertion edge
fifth wheel lead to be altered. Comply with the CAUTION • Slowly drive the tractor vehicle forwards or
local regulations in force when doing this. Danger of injury! backwards until the desired fifth wheel lead
The adjustment device is designed for use on is achieved
Danger of crushing your fingers when
consolidated roads and is only allowed to be • Unclip the locking lever 2 from the insertion
moving the fifth wheel coupling.
used on tractors with three axles. edge
The locking lever 2 springs back inwards and
following:
Operation locks the adjustment device automatically.
• Only move the fifth wheel coupling
• Attach snap hook 1
CAUTION if there are no persons in the
Danger of accidents! danger zone
Checking after moving the fifth wheel
Failure to follow the safety • Do not reach in between the
coupling
instructions can result in serious carriage 3 and the slider frame
accidents. when moving the fifth wheel CAUTION
Therefore, please always ensure the coupling Danger of accidents!
following: If you cannot clip in the snap hook
• Follow the safety instructions then the adjustment device has not
when hitching up and unhitching engaged fully. Serious accidents
a semitrailer, see “Important can be caused by uncontrolled
notes on safety and operation”, movements of the semitrailer.
Page 225 Therefore, please always ensure the
following:
• Check the adjustment device has
engaged completely by clipping in
the snap hook
If the adjustment device has not engaged
completely:
233
Vehicle operation
Adjustment device for fifth wheel couplings made by Jost
• Drive the tractor vehicle slowly forwards and

backwards again until the carriage of the
adjustment device engages.
234
Vehicle operation
Georg Fischer fifth wheel coupling
Georg Fischer fifth wheel coupling • Swivel hand lever 2 backwards in the Opening the Georg Fischer SK-S 38-36 fifth
direction of the arrow, pull it out and clip its wheel coupling
Operation locking notch onto the edge of the plate
CAUTION
accidents.
following:
notes on safety and operation”,
Page 225
• Detach the snap hook 1
• Swivel hand lever 2 backwards, pull it out
Opening the Georg Fischer SK-S 36-20 fifth and clip its locking notch onto the edge of
wheel coupling CAUTION the plate
The cam 3 must be at the same level Checking after hitching up
as the hand lever when the coupling
CAUTION
is closed. The fifth wheel coupling
has not closed completely if the cam
If you cannot clip in the snap hook
3 is below the hand lever. Serious
then the fifth wheel coupling has not
Therefore, please always ensure the closed fully. Serious accidents can be
following: caused.
• Check the hand lever to make Therefore, please always ensure the
sure the fifth wheel coupling is following:
• Check the fifth wheel coupling has
completely locked after hitching up
closed completely after hitching up
• Push the unlocking lever 1 downwards If the fifth wheel coupling is not closed properly:
by clipping in the snap hook
• Repeat the hitching up procedure
If the fifth wheel coupling is not closed properly:
235
Vehicle operation
Georg Fischer fifth wheel coupling
• Repeat the hitching up procedure
236
Vehicle operation
Georg Fischer dual height fifth wheel coupling
Georg Fischer dual height fifth Setting the dual height fifth wheel coupling
wheel coupling to the raised height
CAUTION
Introduction Danger of injury!
The dual height fifth wheel coupling was Danger of injury when setting the
designed for 2-axle tractors for large-volume dual height fifth wheel coupling to the
transport. The dual height feature allows raised height.
the use of the same tractor with different Therefore, please always ensure the
semitrailers. following:
Familiarise yourself with the manufacturer’s • Except for the operator, no-one
instructions before hitching up a semitrailer for is allowed to remain in the area
the first time and when using the dual height between the dual height fifth wheel • Unlock the height adjustment of the dual
fifth wheel coupling (see notices on side of dual coupling and the tractor vehicle height fifth wheel coupling by pulling out the
height fifth wheel coupling). when the dual height fifth wheel locking lever 1
coupling is being set to the raised • Swivel the locking lever 1 forwards in the
Operation height direction of the arrow as far as the stop
The fifth wheel coupling plate 2 is automatically
CAUTION moved to the hitching-up position.
accidents.
following:
notes on safety and operation”,
Page 225
• Check that the actuation valve is closed
(switch 3 of the actuation valve must be
horizontal) • Use one hand to pull out the working lock 4
and hold it firmly
237
Vehicle operation
• Use your other hand to open the actuation • Close the actuation valve by turning the Therefore, please always ensure the
valve by turning the switch 3 anticlockwise switch 3 clockwise (switch 3 of the actuation following:
(switch 3 of the actuation valve must be valve must be horizontal) • Except for the operator, no-one
vertical) The dual height fifth wheel coupling moves is allowed to remain in the area
The fifth wheel coupling plate 2 is raised to down to the raised height. between the dual height fifth wheel
slightly above the raised position. • Swivel the locking lever 1 backwards as far coupling and the tractor vehicle
as the stop when the dual height fifth wheel
The lever lock of the locking lever 1 coupling is being returned to the
automatically engages. initial height
• Check that the actuation valve is closed
CAUTION (switch of the actuation valve must be
Danger of accidents! horizontal)
Accidents can be caused by
uncontrolled movements of the
semitrailer if the lever lock is not
engaged and the actuation valve is
open.
following:
• Use the handle 5 to swivel the supports of the • Only drive if the lever lock is
fifth wheel coupling forwards in the direction engaged and the actuation valve
of the arrow as far as the stop is closed
Returning the dual height fifth wheel

coupling to its initial height
• Unlock the height adjustment of the dual
CAUTION height fifth wheel coupling by pulling out the
Danger of injury! locking lever 1
Danger of injury when returning the • Swivel the locking lever 1 forwards in the
dual height fifth wheel coupling to the direction of the arrow as far as the stop
initial height. • Open the actuation valve by turning the
switch 3 anticlockwise (switch of the
actuation valve must be vertical)
238
Vehicle operation
The dual height fifth wheel coupling is lowered

to its initial height.
• Swivel the locking lever 1 backwards as far
as the stop
The lever lock of the locking lever 1
automatically engages.
CAUTION
Accidents can be caused by
uncontrolled movements of the
semitrailer if the lever lock is not
• Use the handle 5 to swivel the supports of engaged and the actuation valve is
the fifth wheel coupling backwards in the open.
direction of the arrow Therefore, please always ensure the
following:
• Only drive if the lever lock is
engaged and the actuation valve
is closed
• Use one hand to pull out the working lock 4

and hold it firmly
• Use your other hand to close the actuation
valve by turning the switch 3 clockwise
(switch 3 of the actuation valve must be
horizontal)
239
Vehicle operation
Holland Euro-Hitch fifth wheel coupling
Holland Euro-Hitch fifth wheel • Swivel the hand lever 2 backwards in the
coupling direction of the arrow and pull it out as far as
the stop
Operation
CAUTION
accidents.
following:
• Follow the safety instructions • Pull the hand lever outwards in the direction
when hitching up and unhitching of the arrow without operating the release
a semitrailer, see “Important lever
notes on safety and operation”, The hand lever remains stopped at the cast rib
Page 225 of the fifth wheel coupling plate if the fifth wheel
coupling is completely closed
Opening the fifth wheel coupling CAUTION If the fifth wheel coupling is not closed properly:
Danger of accidents! • Repeat the hitching up procedure
The fifth wheel coupling is not
completely closed if the cast rib
on the fifth wheel coupling plate does
not engage in the locking notch of
the hand lever. Serious accidents
can be caused.
following:
• Check the hand lever to make
sure the fifth wheel coupling is
completely locked after hitching up
• Unlock the hand lever 2 by pulling the release
lever 1
240
Vehicle operation
Interchangeable body
INTERCHANGEABLE BODIES
Interchangeable body The stop block 1 is used for lengthways • Turn the lever 3 of the locking plate to the
centring of the interchangeable body or left.
Taking up interchangeable body or container and can be adjusted lengthways for The centre pin end with spindle and clamping
container interchangeable bodies with different lengths. nut 5 drops down.
• Unlock the lever 2. • Repeat this procedure on all four corner
Securing the stop block • Move the stop block 1 in the desired locks.
direction.
• Move lever 2 to the locking position. Taking up an interchangeable body or
• Move the stop block 1 slightly until you can container
hear the lever 2 engage.
Lowering the centre pin ends
1 Stop block
2 Lever of the adjustable stop block
WARNING • If the interchangeable body has a centring

Danger of damage! tunnel, insert two centring rollers 7 into the
Damage to the vehicle before taking bearing points on both the front and rear
up the interchangeable body or • Lower or raise the chassis to the crossmembers and secure them.
container due to the stop block 1 not drive-through height for the interchangeable • Carefully drive the chassis in underneath
being secured. body or container. the interchangeable body until you reach the
Therefore: • Push the drop-lock 4 upwards until it stop block 6.
• Lever 2 of the stop block 1 must engages. The centring rollers 7 must guide the
be engaged before taking up the • Unscrew the clamping nut 5. interchangeable body when the chassis is
interchangeable body or container driving in.
241
Vehicle operation
Interchangeable body
• Apply the parking brake. • Push centre pin end 8 on the clamping nut up Note
• Push up the centre pin end at the clamping into the bracing hole of the interchangeable Make sure the support legs have
nut. body. engaged correctly and that they are
• Turn the centre pin end so the centre pin end • Turn the centre pin end 8 through 90° in the locked and secure!
is lengthways to the vehicle and lock it using bracing hole. Follow the instructions issued by the
the locking plate. • Tighten clamping nut 5 using a special body manufacturer.
• Repeat this procedure on all four corner spanner. • Push the drop-lock 4 upwards until it
locks. • Fold drop-lock 4 down to secure the clamping engages.
• Raise the chassis until the supporting legs nut. • Unscrew clamping nut 5 using a special
of the interchangeable body lift clear of the • Repeat this procedure on all four corner spanner.
ground. locks. • Push up the centre pin end 8 at the clamping
• Retract and secure the interchangeable body nut.
Note • Turn centre pin end 8 through 90° so it can
support legs.
If the interchangeable body or container be guided through the bracing hole of the
does not have a centring tunnel, remove WARNING interchangeable body.
the centring rollers 7 before driving the Danger of damage! • Repeat this procedure on all four corner
chassis in. The tyres can rub against the locks.
mudguard when driving with the • Lower the chassis until the interchangeable
Securing the interchangeable body chassis lowered. The mudguard can body is supported on its support legs and the
be damaged or lost if the vehicle is vehicle can be driven out.
driven for a long distance.
Therefore, before starting to drive:
• Raise the chassis to ride height
• Check the vehicle to make sure the
load is positioned correctly
Setting down the interchangeable body or

container
• Apply the parking brake.

• Raise the chassis.
• Unlock and extend the interchangeable body
• Turn clamping nut 5 downwards. support legs.
242
Vehicle operation
Ladder on the cab
OTHER EQUIPMENT
Ladder on the cab
Safety
CAUTION
Danger of injury!
The ladder fastenings on the cab wall
are not designed for climbing on.
They may break off if climbed on.
This could result in a fall from the
ladder entailing serious injuries and
damaging the vehicle.
Therefore:
• Always remove the ladder from the Controls
cab wall before using it 1 Ladder
2 Toggle fastener: For securing the latter
WARNING 3 Mounting for ladder
Danger of damage! 4 Check rivet in the ladder rung: Shows
The ladder restricts the clearance whether the ladder is correctly positioned
between the vehicle and the on the cab.
semitrailer. 5 Air deflector
When driving over ramps and dips
with a gradient of more than 6°
(approx. 13% incline), this leads to
considerable damage to the vehicle
and the semitrailer.
Therefore:
• Do not drive over any ramp or dip
with a gradient of more than 6°
(approx. 13% incline)
243
Vehicle operation
Ladder on the cab
Removing and fitting the ladder • Fold up the tensioning hook 8 and press it
onto the ladder rung
CAUTION
• Fold the lock flap 7 upwards until you hear
the locking lever 6 engage
You might slip and fall from the • Pull the lock flap 7 to check it has engaged
vehicle when removing and fitting the securely
ladder 1.
Severe injuries could result. Note
Therefore: It is possible to secure a padlock in the
• Make sure you are standing on a hole in the locking lever 6 to deter theft.
solid surface with enough grip • Swivel the air deflector 5 back inwards
Removing • Release the tensioning hook 8 upwards from

• Swivel the air deflector 5 outwards the ladder rung and fold it down
• Lift the ladder 1 out of the mounting 3
Fitting
Toggle fastener 2:
• Push the locking lever 6 upwards and fold
the lock flap 7 downwards
• Hook the ladder rung with the check rivet 4
into the holder 3, making sure the check rivet
4 points outwards
244
Vehicle operation
Breakdown call (HelpCall)
Breakdown call (HelpCall) For more information about display messages,

see “Overview of displays and messages”,
Function Page 254.
In case of a vehicle malfunction, the driver Note

can request technical assistance using the The breakdown call can also be
breakdown call. triggered with the ignition off if it is
Information about all events that might have not possible to switch on the ignition.
led to the malfunction is stored in the vehicle. Follow the procedure as described
This information is sent to the responsible MAN above. Stick to the timings in seconds,
Service workshop when the breakdown call is because no information appears on the
triggered. display.
It is only possible to transmit a reduced
• Press the top of the rocker button until
Triggering the breakdown call amount of information.
“Enable breakdown call” appears on the
display (approx. 10 to max. 20 seconds) The telephone is switched on when the ignition
• Stop the vehicle – taking account of the traffic The check lamp in the rocker switch lights up is switched on or the rocker button is pressed.
situation red. The telephone is switched off again with a time
• Shift the gearbox to neutral • Release the rocker button briefly, for approx. delay after the ignition is switched off.
• Apply the parking brake 1 second
• Switch off the engine, see “Switching off the The check lamp in the rocker switch goes out.
engine”, Page 152 • Press the rocker button again briefly, for
• Use wheel chocks to prevent the vehicle from approx. 1 second
rolling away The check lamp in the button comes on briefly
• Switch on the ignition and then goes out again.
The breakdown call is active, “Breakdown call
active” appears on the display.
• Wait for confirmation of receipt, do not switch
off the ignition during this period
Once “Breakdown call received” appears on
the display, this means the breakdown call has
been confirmed and sent to the responsible
workshop.
245
Vehicle operation
Axle load display
Axle load display
The axle loads are calculated from the pressure

in the air-sprung bellows. The following are
required for optimum measurement: Vehicle
horizontal, brake released, air suspension
steady.
The measuring system cannot be calibrated.
The design of the system means the display is
accurate to ±10 % at nominal axle load. The
errors are greater when the vehicle is unladen. Example for air/air suspension display.
The vehicle’s axles are numbered from front to
Displaying the axle load rear.
If the tractor is equipped with “trailer data (axle
• Call up the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle load)” and the trailer is equipped with an axle
menu”, Page 288. load indicator:
• Select the “Monitoring data” menu item • Select the “Monitoring data” menu item
• Select the “Axle load” menu item • Select the “Trailer” menu item or
• Then select the “Trailer 2” menu item
• Select the “Total axle load” menu item
The trailer or semitrailer axle load is displayed.
The axle load display depends on the trailer
system.
Example for leaf/air suspension display.
246
Vehicle operation
Snowplough and gritter equipment (mounting plate)
Snowplough and gritter equipment Mounting plate to Austrian standard S2044

(mounting plate)
Adjusting the height (approx. 15 mm)
Mounting plate form A, size 5 to DIN 76060 The mounting plate in accordance with Ö-Norm
S2044 can be adjusted in its height and angle.
Adjusting the angle Refer to the body builder’s operating
The DIN 76060 mounting plate can only be instructions.
adjusted in its angle.
Refer to the body builder’s operating
instructions.
• Unscrew the top and bottom mounting bolt 5

on both sides
• Remove the mounting plate holder on both
sides.
• Turn the mounting plate holder through 180°
and reinstall on both sides.
The mounting plate is raised or lowered by
15 mm depending on the position of the
• Pull the spring cotter pins 3 out on both sides
eccentric 6
• Remove the washer 1 on both sides
• Screw on the top and bottom mounting bolt
• Pull out the pin 2 with washer on both sides
5 firmly on both sides
• Pull the spring cotter pins 3 out on both sides • Fold down the mounting plate 4
• Fold up the mounting plate
• Remove the washer 1 on both sides • Resecure mounting plate in reverse order
• Set the required angle of the mounting plate
by turning the left and right shackle pin 4
• Resecure mounting plate in reverse order
247
Vehicle operation
Snowplough and gritter equipment (mounting plate)
Adjusting the angle
• Pull the spring cotter pins 4 out on both sides

• Remove the washer 2 on both sides
• Set the required angle of the mounting plate
by turning the left and right shackle pin 1
• Resecure mounting plate in reverse order
248
Vehicle operation
Compressed air in the cab
Compressed air in the cab Unscrewing the compressed air line Blowing with compressed air
CAUTION CAUTION
Danger of injury! Danger of injury!
– People could trip over the Air emerges from the nozzles of the
compressed air hose. compressed air gun at high pressure
– A leaking compressed air hose when blowing with compressed air.
results in a pressure loss in This throws up dust. It can penetrate
compressed air circuit 4. the eyes, mouth and ears.
Therefore: Therefore:
• Stow away the compressed air • Wear protective glasses
hose securely again after using it • Wear a half mask that filters
• Renew a compressed air line that particulates (respiratory protection
leaks over mouth and nose)
• Unscrew the wing nut 1 • Wear ear defenders
CAUTION • Do not point the jet of compressed
Danger of accidents! air at anyone
Only blow with compressed air when • Press the button 3 on the compressed air
the vehicle is at a standstill! gun
Otherwise, you will be distracted from
the traffic. Accidents may result if
you brake too late or veer off the
carriageway.
Therefore:
• Only blow with compressed air
when the vehicle is at a standstill
• Put on the protective cap 2
Screwing the compressed air line tight
• Pull off the protective cap 2

• Tighten the wing nut 1
249
Vehicle operation
Compressed air in the cab
250
Displays and check lamps
Displays and messages about the vehicle status
DISPLAYS AND MESSAGES ABOUT THE VEHICLE STATUS
Display and check lamps Displays and messages
Stop message: Safety

This means that road safety is compromised or
there is a risk of damaging the vehicle!
CAUTION
A stop message means road safety
is compromised or the vehicle is not
ready for driving!
Therefore:
• Stop the vehicle immediately, A stop message is active if:
taking account of the traffic – Central warning light 1 flashes red
situation – The “Stop” symbol and a message appear
The symbols on the display 1 and the check
• If necessary, switch off the engine, on the display
lamps 2, as well as the analog instruments,
apply the parking brake and – Acoustic signal sounds
inform the driver about the vehicle status.
secure the vehicle to prevent it In addition, a check lamp may light up red,
All indications on the display and check lamps,
from rolling away e.g. 2.
• Repair the malfunction Meaning of the stop message and action to
Page 254.
immediately, obtain workshop take see “Overview of displays and messages”,
The check lamps 2 can be lit or flash red, yellow,
assistance if necessary Page 254.
blue and green. The number and position of
lamps may vary depending on the equipment
Red message: Workshop
in the vehicle.
This means that it is necessary to bring the
Regularly check the function of the check lamps
vehicle to a workshop without delay! Road
in order to make sure that the information
safety may be reduced!
shown on the check lamps is accurate, see
“Interior lighting”, Page 65!
251
CAUTION – An acoustic signal sounds • Immediately rectify the malfunction

Danger of accidents! In addition, a check lamp may light up red, in the exterior lighting
A red message means driving safety e.g. 3. • If there is a malfunction in the
may be impaired and the vehicle’s Meaning of the red message and action to take; anti-lock brake system (ABS),
operating permit is invalidated! see “Overview of displays and messages”, drive slowly and carefully, apply
Therefore: Page 254. the brakes in a measured
• Drive slowly and carefully fashion and immediately contact
• If necessary, stop the vehicle Yellow message: Information a MAN Service workshop for
– taking account of the traffic This means information and recommended assistance.
situation – switch off the engine, action are displayed before and during a
apply the parking brake and journey.
secure the vehicle to prevent it
from rolling away CAUTION
• Rectify the malfunction Danger of accidents!
immediately if necessary – The vehicle’s operating permit may
• If necessary, immediately contact be invalidated and continuing to
a MAN Service workshop drive may not be permitted if there
is a yellow message for the exterior
lighting
– The braking response of the
vehicle changes if there is a
yellow message from the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). For more A yellow message is active if:
information, see “Electronic brake – Central warning light 1 lights up yellow
system (EBS)”, Page 123! – The “Information” symbol and a message
Therefore: appear on the display
– Acoustic signal sounds
In addition, a check lamp may light up red,
e.g. 4.
Meaning of the yellow message and action
A red message is active if: to take; see “Overview of displays and
– Central warning light 1 lights up red messages”, Page 254.
– The “Workshop” symbol and a message
appear on the display
252
Several messages on the display Yellow message – Acknowledging and

clearing
Yellow messages do not generally indicate that
road safety is restricted.
Exceptions are malfunctions in the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) and the exterior lighting
which must be rectified immediately.
If required, the yellow messages can be
acknowledged and cleared from the display.
If the malfunctions are still active, the yellow
messages will not appear again until the
ignition has been switched off and switched on.
A function message is active if:
– A symbol and a message appear on the
Example of several messages on the display.
display
A message is displayed. The other active
and/or
messages are automatically displayed
– A check lamp lights up red, yellow, green or
alternately.
blue
The other messages can also be called up
Meaning of the function message see
manually:
“Overview of displays and messages”,
Page 254.

The yellow message is acknowledged and
temporarily cleared.
Function: Function message

A function or a recommended action is
displayed.
The next message is displayed.
253
Overview of displays and messages
OVERVIEW OF DISPLAYS AND MESSAGES
Display Check lamps Audi- Significance Remarks/further procedure

ble
Symbol Text message signal
Malfunction Yes Example of a Stop message. Road safety is compromised or there is a
brake risk of damaging the vehicle!
Flashes Red • Stop the vehicle immediately, taking
red account of the traffic situation
• If necessary, switch off the engine, apply
the parking brake and secure the vehicle
to prevent it from rolling away
• Rectify the malfunction immediately
• Obtain workshop assistance if
necessary
Malfunction Yes Example of a Red message. It is necessary to bring the vehicle to a
brake workshop without delay! – Driving safety
Red Red may be impaired!
• Drive slowly and carefully
• If necessary, stop the vehicle – taking
account of the traffic situation – switch
off the engine, apply the parking brake
and secure the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
• Rectify the malfunction immediately
necessary
254

ble
Malfunction – Yes Example of a Yellow message. There may be a malfunction on a system.
electrical system • Obtain workshop assistance
Yellow Exception:
Defects on the brake system and lighting
equipment must be rectified immediately.
• Immediately rectify the malfunction in
the lighting system
• If there is a malfunction in the brake
system, drive slowly and carefully, apply
the brakes in a measured fashion and
immediately contact a workshop for
assistance
Lock Yes Safety – Cab lock: • Lock the cab correctly, see “Tilting the
cab The cab is not fully locked. At least one cab forwards and backwards manually”,
Flashes Red of the cab lock switching contacts is open. Page 116 and see “Tilting the cab
red [39, 295] forwards and backwards electrically”,
Page 119
255

ble
Air pressure Yes Safety – Service brakes: The vehicle cannot be driven!
too low Air pressure too low in one of the brake Display whilst driving:
Flashes Red circuits or an auxiliary consumer circuit. • Stop immediately, taking into
red [17, 23] account the situation on the road
Circ. 1 pressure Yes Safety – Service brakes: • Expect the braking power to be
too low Air pressure too low in brake circuit 1. [18, reduced
Flashes Red 24] Display whilst the vehicle is stationary:
red • Run the engine at increased revs until
Circ. 2 pressure Yes Safety – Service brakes: the shut-off pressure is reached and the
too low Air pressure too low in brake circuit 2. [19, check lamps go out
Flashes Red 25] If the pressure is not reached:
red • Do not move the vehicle. Obtain
Circ. 3 pressure Yes Safety – Service brake with trailer: workshop assistance.
too low Air pressure too low in brake circuit 3
Flashes Red (parking brake and trailer). [20, 26]
red
Circ. 3 pressure Yes Safety – Service brake with trailer (display
only for PSC):
Flashes Red Unexpected behaviour of the air pressure
red in brake circuit 3. [31]
Circ. 4 pressure Yes Safety – Auxiliary consumer:
too low Air pressure too low in brake circuit 4 (e.g.
Flashes Red pneumatic assistance for engine brake,
red clutch). [22, 28]
256

ble
Circ. 1 pressure Yes Workshop – Service brake (display only • Drive slowly and carefully
for PSC): • Keep an eye on the pressure gauge
Red Red Unexpected behaviour of the air pressure – the pressure must not drop below
in brake circuit 1. [29] 6 bar!
Circ. 2 pressure Yes Workshop – Service brake (display only • Run the engine at increased revs until
for PSC): the pressure is reached (the message
Red Red Unexpected behaviour of the air pressure goes out)
in brake circuit 2. [30] • Keep an eye on the pressure gauge
Circ. 3 pressure Yes Workshop – Service brakes without If the pressure drops below 6 bar:
too low trailer: • Stop the vehicle immediately – taking
Red Red Air pressure too low in brake circuit 3 account of the traffic situation and
(parking brake). [21, 27] run the engine at increased revs until
Circ. 3 pressure Yes Workshop – Service brake without trailer the pressure is reached (the message
(display only for PSC): goes out)
Red Red Unexpected behaviour of the air pressure If the pressure is not reached:
in brake circuit 3. [32] • Do not move the vehicle. Obtain
Circ. 4 pressure Yes Workshop – Auxiliary consumers (display workshop assistance.
only for PSC):
Red Red Unexpected behaviour of the air pressure
in brake circuit 4 (e.g. pneumatic
assistance for engine brake, clutch).
[33]
Malfunction Yes Safety – PSC: • Stop immediately, taking into
PSC The electronically controlled air account the situation on the road
Flashes Red management has failed. The brake circuits • Check the fuses, see “Electrical
red are no longer supplied with compressed system”, Page 365
air. [35] • Obtain workshop assistance
immediately
257

ble
Limp-home Yes Workshop – Service brakes: • Drive slowly and carefully
brake control unit The electronic braking system incl. ABS, • Note the different braking
Red Red ASR and ESP on the tractor has failed. characteristics
[34] • Greater tendency for wheels to lock
• Obtain workshop assistance
immediately
Trailer brake Yes Workshop – Service brakes: • Drive slowly and carefully
The trailer brake system has failed [36] • Note the different braking
Red Red characteristics
• Check the anti-jackknife brake, see
“Anti-jackknife brake”, Page 135
immediately
Tractor ABS Yes Info – ABS: • Drive slowly and carefully
Restricted tractor ABS functioning. [4] Greater tendency for wheels to lock.
Yellow Yellow • Apply the brakes in a measured fashion
immediately
Trailer ABS Yes Info – ABS: • Drive slowly and carefully
Trailer ABS function has failed. [1, 296] Greater tendency for wheels to lock.
Yellow Yellow • Apply the brakes in a measured fashion
Trailer ABS Yes Info – ABS: • Check the tractor vehicle and trailer plug
failure Trailer ABS function has failed. [3] connection, clean it if necessary and
Yellow Yellow insert the plug fully
• Check the cable between tractor vehicle
and trailer and fit a new one if necessary
immediately
– – – – Function – ABS info: –
A trailer without ABS is hitched up. [7]
Yellow
258

ble
– – – – Function – ABS off-road: In contrast to the standard ABS function,
ABS off-road logic control is active. ABS off-road logic control reacts differently
Flashes ABS function is not available or is depending on the speed:
yellow restricted. [5] – Up to 15 km/h
ABS function switched off, wheels may
lock
– From 15 km/h to 40 km/h
The spin threshold is increased to
approx. 10 km/h, this means the wheel
locks longer during ABS control than in
standard ABS control.
The loose base material is pushed like
a wedge in front of the wheel, thereby
improving the braking effect.
– Above 40 km/h
Standard ABS function
Functional description see “Electronic
brake system (EBS)”, Page 123
Malfunction Yes Safety – Instrument panel: • Stop immediately, taking into
electrical system The connection between the instrument account the situation on the road
Flashes Red panel and the central electrical system has • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
red failed. [209, 210, 211] Page 365
Yellow
immediately
– – Yes Safety – Instrument panel: • Stop immediately, taking into
The connection between the instrument account the situation on the road
Flashes Yellow panel and the central electrical system has • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
red failed. [215] Page 365
immediately
259

ble
Malfunction Yes Info – Instrument panel (ABS warning • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
electrical system /malfunction): Page 365
Yellow Yellow The connection between the instrument • Obtain workshop assistance
panel and the central electrical system has immediately
failed. [212]
– – Yes Info – Instrument panel (ASR warning • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
/malfunction): Page 365
Yellow Yellow The connection between the instrument • Obtain workshop assistance
panel and the central electrical system has immediately
failed. [214]
ASR Yes Info – ASR: • Start off carefully!
failure The tractor ASR function has failed. [10] • Obtain workshop assistance
Yellow Yellow immediately
– – – – Function – ASR active [9] More information, see “Electronic brake
system (EBS)”, Page 123.
Yellow
– – – – Function – ASR: More information, see “Electronic brake
Spin threshold increase is switched on. system (EBS)”, Page 123.
Flashes [12]
yellow
260

ble
Malfunction Yes Workshop – ESP and ASR: • Start off and drive carefully!
ESP The tractor ESP or ASR function has • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
Red Yellow failed. No automatic brake intervention Page 365
during cornering at excessive speed and • Obtain workshop assistance
when skidding. [43] immediately
Malfunction Yes Info – ESP and ASR: • Start off and drive carefully!
ESP The Electronic Stability Program has • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
Yellow Yellow failed or only functions with restrictions. Page 365
No automatic brake intervention during • Obtain workshop assistance
cornering at excessive speed and when immediately
skidding. [41, 42]
– – – – Function – ESP and ASR: More information see “Electronic brake
Spin threshold increase is switched on. system (EBS)”, Page 123.
Flashes [44]
yellow
– – – – Function – ESP and ASR: –
ESP and ASR are engaged. [40]
Yellow
Parking brake – Yes Workshop – Parking brake: • Obtain workshop assistance
display defect Functioning of the parking brake cannot immediately
Red be displayed. [114]
– – – – Function – Parking brake: –
The parking brake is applied, the spring
Red actuator is depressurised. [46]
Brake pad/lining – Yes Info – Brake wear: • Obtain workshop assistance
wear There is uneven brake wear or the brakes immediately, check the brake
Yellow are totally worn. [74, 361] linings/pads and change them
261

ble
Check trailer – Yes Info – Service brakes in trailer: • Obtain workshop assistance
brake lining/pad There is uneven trailer brake wear or the immediately
Yellow trailer brakes are totally worn. [342, 344]
Check brake – Yes
lining trailer 2
Yellow
Trailer – Yes Info – Trailer service brakes: • Drive slowly and carefully
brake temp. The trailer brake temperature is too high. • Note the different braking
Yellow [343, 345] characteristics
Brake temp. – Yes • Stop and let the brakes cool down if
trailer 2 necessary
Yellow • Obtain workshop assistance if
necessary
Engine brake Yes Workshop – Engine brake: • Obtain workshop assistance
failure The engine brake has failed. [55] immediately
Red Red
– – – – Function – Engine brake: –
(for vehicles without Intarder/retarder):
The engine brake is active. [193]
262

ble
Retarder temp. – Yes Safety – Gearbox/retarder: • Use the service brake (pedal brake) for
too high The oil temperature in the Intarder/retarder braking
Flashes is much too high. Gearbox damage is • Switch off the Intarder/retarder and
red possible! [229] deactivate MAN BrakeMatic
• Stop immediately, taking into
account the situation on the road
• Run the engine at increased revs to
improve cooling
After cooling down:
• Check the oil level in the gearbox, top
up the oil if necessary
immediately if necessary
Retarder temp. – – Yes Function – Gearbox/retarder: • Use the service brake (pedal brake) for
too high The oil temperature in the Intarder/retarder braking
is too high. [228] • Switch off the Intarder/retarder and
deactivate MAN BrakeMatic
• Shift to a lower gear (increase engine
speed) to improve cooling
After cooling down:
• Check the oil level in the gearbox, top
up the oil if necessary
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – Primary retarder: • Use the service brake (pedal brake) for
sust.-action brake The retarder has failed. [149] braking
Red • Check the fuses, see “Electrical
system”, Page 365
263

ble
Retarder power – – Yes Function – Intarder/retarder: • Use the service brake (pedal brake) for
reduced The retarder torque is reduced braking
(overheating protection). [148, 151] • Shift to a lower gear (increase engine
– – – – Function – Retarder: • Use the service brake (pedal brake) for
The retarder power is limited, the braking
preselected level is additionally displayed • Shift to a lower gear (increase engine
in the symbol at the bottom right. [360] speed) to improve cooling
– – – – Function – Controlled engine brake, –
Intarder/retarder:
The controlled engine brake or Intarder
/retarder is activated, the preselected level
is additionally displayed in the symbol at
the bottom right (e.g. 1st level). [191]
– – – – Function – MAN BrakeMatic: If the engine brake or the Intarder/retarder
The controlled engine brake or has been activated by MAN BrakeMatic,
Intarder/retarder are activated by no level is displayed in the symbol
MAN BrakeMatic. [192]
Malfunction – Yes Safety – Central on-board computer • Stop immediately, taking into
on-board computer (ZBR): account the situation on the road
Flashes The central on-board computer has failed • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
red [213] Page 365
immediately
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – Electrical connection to the • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
electrical system driveline: Page 365
Red Electronic system interrupt. [177] • Obtain workshop assistance
immediately
264

ble
Malfunction – Yes Safety – Vehicle management computer • Stop immediately, taking into
veh. man. computer (FFR): account the situation on the road
Flashes The vehicle management computer has • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
red failed. [173] Page 365
immediately
Malfunction Yes Workshop – ECAS: • Do not move the vehicle unless
air suspension The electronically controlled air absolutely necessary
Red Red suspension has failed. • If you have no other alternative, only
– When the vehicle frame is lowered: drive the vehicle at walking pace and
Note the changed braking and steering only for short distances
characteristics! • Obtain workshop assistance
– When the vehicle is raised above the immediately, see “Electronically
ride height: controlled air suspension (ECAS)”,
Danger of chassis and frame damage! Page 96
[38]
INFO – Yes Function – Ride height: • Set the ride height, see “Electronically
No ride height No ride height has been set.[37] controlled air suspension (ECAS)”,
Yellow Page 96
Ride height – Yes Info – Ride height: • Obtain workshop assistance
not reached The ride height is not reached or cannot immediately
Yellow be set. [75]
– – – – Function – Ride height (only The leading or trailing axle is relieved,
displayed with “starting-traction control see “Air-sprung leading and trailing axle”,
Yellow Scandinavia”: Page 102.
The starting-traction control is switched
on. [378]
Alternator Yes Workshop – Charge check: The check lamp is located in the
displ. defective The charge check does not work. [376] speedometer.
Red Red • Obtain workshop assistance
265

ble
Alternator Yes Workshop – Charge check: The check lamp is located in the
failure The alternator has failed. [375] speedometer.
Red Red • Obtain workshop assistance
Charge voltage – Yes Info – Charge check: • Switch off unrequired loads
too low The charge voltage is too low when the • Obtain workshop assistance if
Yellow engine is running. [137] necessary
Charge voltage – Yes Info – Charge check: • Obtain workshop assistance
too high The charge voltage is too high at rated
Yellow speed (engine). [139]
Flame start – Yes Info – Flame start: • Check the fuses, see “Electrical
failure The flame start system power supply is system”, Page 365
Yellow interrupted. [116, 117, 118, 119] • Obtain workshop assistance if
necessary
– START ENGINE – – Yes Function – Flame start: –
The engine is ready to start. [121]
– Pre-glow – – Yes Function – Flame start: –
Indication of pre-heating time. [120]
– – – – Function – Flame start For information see “Starting and
[47] switching off the engine”, Page 144.
Yellow
– REPEAT PRE-GLOW – – Yes Function – Flame start: • Preheating must be repeated
The engine is no longer ready to start.
[122]
Malfunction – Yes Safety – EDC: • Stop immediately, taking into
engine ctrl. unit The engine control unit has failed. [169, account the situation on the road
Flashes 294] • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
red Page 365
immediately
266

ble
Boost pressure – Yes Info – Charge air pressure (engine): • Obtain workshop assistance
sensor defective The charge pressure cannot be measured immediately
Yellow correctly. [146]
Oil pressure Yes Safety – Engine oil pressure: • Stop immediately, taking into
too low Red The engine oil pressure is too low. [50] account the situation on the road
Flashes • Check the engine oil level and top up the
red oil if necessary, see “Every day before
starting the engine”, Page 299
necessary
Engine oil temp. Yes Workshop – Engine: • Shift to a lower gear to improve cooling
too high The engine oil temperature is too high. [60] • Stop the vehicle immediately – taking
Red Red account of the traffic situation and run
the engine at increased revs
Once the oil temperature has fallen (the
message disappears):
• Switch off the engine and let it cool down
• Check the engine oil and coolant levels,
see “Every day before starting the
engine”, Page 299
necessary
267

ble
Engine oil level – Yes Info – Engine oil level: • Check the engine oil level, see “Every
The oil level too low or has significantly day before starting the engine”,
Yellow deviated from permitted minimum value. Page 299
[145] If the vehicle is on a slope, the display
opposite may appear even though the oil
level is actually OK.
Display appears if no oil level can be
measured electrically or there is a defect
in the electronics/wiring.
Coolant temp. Yes Workshop – Engine: • Shift to a lower gear to improve cooling
too high The coolant temperature is too high. [56] • Stop the vehicle – taking account of the
Red Red traffic situation – and run the engine at
increased revs
Once the message has disappeared, the
cooling water temperature has fallen and
the display on the temperature gauge is
outside the red zone:
• Switch off the engine and let it cool down
• Check the coolant level, see “Every day
before starting the engine”, Page 299
•
Coolant level – Yes Info – Engine: • Top up the coolant, see “Every day
too low There is not enough fluid in the cooling before starting the engine”, Page 299
Yellow system. [131] • Obtain workshop assistance if
necessary
Engine speed Yes Function – Engine: • Shift to a higher gear or reduce speed
too high The engine speed is too high. [54]
Red Red
268

ble
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – Exhaust system: • Obtain workshop assistance
emissions control A malfunction has occurred in a system immediately
Yellow which monitors or influences the exhaust
gas quality. [271]
Top up – Yes Info – Exhaust system (Euro 5): • Top up the reducing agent (AdBlue)
AdBlue The reducing agent (AdBlue) has all been At about -11 °C and below, the fluid level
Yellow used, apart from the reserve. [351] may be displayed incorrectly (reducing
agent frozen).
Top up Yes Info – Exhaust system (Euro 5): • Top up the reducing agent (AdBlue)
AdBlue The tank for the reducing agent (AdBlue) immediately
Yellow Flash. is empty. [352] If the warning is not heeded:
yellow – The engine torque is noticeably reduced
after the next vehicle standstill.
– May be punishable by law in an EU
country.
– Incentives may be invalidated in an EU
country (including retrospectively).
269

ble
– – – – Function – Engine and/or exhaust gas • Top up the reducing agent (AdBlue)
aftertreatment: immediately
Flashes – Euro 4 and 5: the exhaust gas emissions • Obtain workshop assistance
yellow (NOx) are too high. immediately
– Euro 4 and 5: A malfunction has If the warning is not heeded:
occurred in a system which monitors – The engine torque is noticeably
or influences the exhaust gas quality reduced:
(EGR, sensor, etc.). – After the next vehicle standstill if no
– Euro 5: a malfunction prevents dosing reducing agent is dosed.
(consumption) of reducing agent. [363] – After approx. 50 operating hours if
there is a malfunction in a system
which monitors the exhaust gas
quality.
– May be punishable by law in an EU
country.
– Incentives may be invalidated in an EU
country (including retrospectively).
Information about Euro 5 see “Economical
driving”, Page 316.
– – – – Function – Engine and/or exhaust • Obtain workshop assistance
post-treatment: immediately
Yellow – Malfunction in the common-rail system
– Malfunction in a system that influences
exhaust gas quality
– Catalytic converter defective or not fitted
[330]
Change Yes Info – Air filter: • Change the air filter, see “Dry air filter”,
air filter The air filter is clogged. [49] Page 390
Yellow Yellow • Obtain workshop assistance if
necessary
270

ble
– – – – Function – Fuel filter heater (integrated in Check lamp does not go out 5 seconds
the fuel service centre): after engine start:
Yellow The check lamp goes out 5 seconds after • Check the fuse in the engine
engine start. [305] compartment, see “Electrical system”,
Page 365
necessary
– – – – Info – Fuel: The check lamp is located in the
Indication of the fuel reserve. [377] speedometer.
• Refuel, see “Every day before starting
Yellow
the engine”, Page 299
Tank sensor – Yes Workshop – Fuel: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure The fuel reservoir monitor has failed. [128] Page 365
Red • Obtain workshop assistance
Press clutch – Steady Safety – Clutch: • Press the clutch pedal fully down when
pedal tone The clutch did not separate when the gear changing gear
Flashes was changed. [184] • Obtain workshop assistance if
red necessary
Clutch oil level – Yes Workshop – Clutch: • Top up the oil, see “Every month before
too low The reservoir level is too low. [134] starting the engine”, Page 306
Red • Obtain workshop assistance if
necessary
Clutch overload – Yes Workshop – Clutch: • Shift to a lower gear
SHIFT DOWN Too much load when starting off, a lower • Reduce the clutch slipping time
Red gear should be selected. [133]
Clutch! – Yes Info – Clutch: • Shift to a lower gear
The clutch slip is too high. [354]
Yellow
271

ble
Clutch lining – Yes Info – Clutch: • Obtain workshop assistance
wear The clutch lining is worn. [132] immediately
Yellow
Clutch overload – – Cont. Function – Clutch with manual gearbox: • Shift to a lower gear
SHIFT DOWN tone The clutch is overloaded when starting off. • Note recommendations for a long clutch
[185] service life, see “Economical driving”,
Page 316
Gearbox temp. – Yes Safety – Gearbox: • Switch off the Intarder/retarder and
too high The gear oil temperature is much too high. deactivate MAN BrakeMatic
Flashes [225] • Shift to a lower gear to improve cooling
red • Stop the vehicle immediately – taking
account of the traffic situation and run
the engine at increased revs
Once the oil temperature has fallen and
the message disappears:
• Switch off the engine and let the gearbox
cool down
• If ZF 6 HP automatic gearbox fitted:
Check the oil level in the gearbox, top
up the oil as necessary, see “Every week
after starting the engine”, Page 312
necessary
272

ble
Gearbox temp. – Yes Safety – Gearbox: • Switch off the Intarder/retarder and
too high The gear oil temperature is too high. [223] deactivate MAN BrakeMatic
Yellow • Shift to a lower gear (increase engine
After cooling down:
• If ZF 6 HP automatic gearbox fitted:
Check the oil level in the gearbox, top
up the oil as necessary, see “Every week
after starting the engine”, Page 312
Air pressure Yes Workshop – Gearbox: • Obtain workshop assistance
DO NOT SHIFT No air pressure is available at the immediately
Red Red automatic gearbox. Gear changes not
possible. [48]
Comfort shift Yes Workshop – ComfortShift (manual • Press the clutch pedal down fully
defective gearbox): • Obtain workshop assistance
Red Red The ComfortShift button does not work. Description of the ComfortShift button, see
[62] “MAN ComfortShift and ZF 16 S manual
gearbox”, Page 160.
Malfunction – Yes Safety – Gearbox: The vehicle cannot be driven!
gearbox ECU The gearbox ECU has failed. • Stop immediately, taking into
Flashes Gear shifts are no longer possible. [174] account the situation on the road
red • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
Page 365
immediately
No acceleration – Yes Function – Automatic gearbox: Gearbox cannot change gear due to high
Prompt to “take foot off accelerator” after engine speed.
Red the ignition is switched on. [127] • Reduce accelerator setting (“foot off
pedal”)
273

ble
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL – – Steady Function – Gearbox: • Close the doors
tone The engine cannot be started until the • Shift the gearbox to neutral N
doors are closed and the gearbox is in
neutral N. [124, 125, 126]
– – – – Function – “Transverse” differential lock: More information see “Differential locks”,
The differential lock is activated. [371] Page 204.
Yellow
– – – – Function – “Interaxle” differential lock: More information see “Differential locks”,
The differential lock is activated. [372] Page 204.
Yellow
Apply – – Yes Function – Parking brake: • Apply the parking brake, see “Parking
parking brake Prompt to apply the parking brake. [115] brake (handbrake)”, Page 130
Service due – Yes Info – Service: • Have the necessary service work
A unit in your vehicle is due for a service. performed
Yellow [159] • Obtain workshop assistance
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – Telematic on-board module • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
TBM (TBM): Page 365
Yellow The telematic on-board module has failed. • Obtain workshop assistance
[181] immediately
Check – Yes Info – MAN Telephone system: • Check the telephone (reception,
phone The telephone has failed. [317] battery, card, etc.), see the operating
Yellow instructions for the mobile phone or
permanently installed phone
– Enable breakdown – – – Function – Breakdown call: • Trigger breakdown call, see
call Trigger the breakdown call the next time “Breakdown call (HelpCall)”, Page 245
the button is pressed (to prevent operating
errors). [183]
– Breakdown call – – – Function – Breakdown call: • Wait for confirmation “Breakdown call
active The breakdown call has been triggered. received”
[178] • Repeat breakdown call if necessary, see
“Breakdown call (HelpCall)”, Page 245
274

ble
– Breakdown call – – – Function – Breakdown call: The breakdown call has been received
received The breakdown call is confirmed and passed on to the responsible MAN
(automatic). [179] Service workshop, see “Breakdown call
(HelpCall)”, Page 245.
– Breakdown call – – – Function – Breakdown call: • Repeat breakdown call, see
cancelled The breakdown call was cancelled. “Breakdown call (HelpCall)”, Page 245
The ignition was switched off after the
“Enable breakdown call” message or the
breakdown call button was not pressed
correctly. [182]
– Breakdown call – – – Function – Breakdown call: • Establish the connection to the mobile
No network No connection to mobile phone network phone network, see the operating
(e.g. no coverage). [180] instructions for the mobile phone or
permanently installed phone
INFO! error – Yes Function – Central lubrication: • Top up the grease, see “BEKA-MAX
grease cent.lubr Insufficient grease in central lubrication central lubrication system”, Page 109
Yellow system reservoir. [168] • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
Page 365
– Central – – – Function – Central lubrication: For information see “BEKA-MAX central
lubrication system Automatic or manual interim lubrication lubrication system”, Page 109.
takes place. [379]
275

ble
Steer oil press. – Yes Workshop – Power steering: If the message occurs after a cold start:
too low – Not enough oil in the power steering. • Briefly increase the engine idling speed
Red – The changeover valve has failed. to more than 1300 rpm
– An electrical short-circuit has occurred. The steering system is ready when the
[216, 217] message goes out.
If the message is still displayed:
• Check the oil level in the power steering
and top up the oil if necessary, see
“Every month before starting the
engine”, Page 306
immediately
Steer oil press. – Yes Info – Power steering: • Briefly increase the engine idling speed
too low Not enough oil in the power steering. [369] to more than 1300 rpm
Yellow The steering system is ready when the
message goes out.
If the message is still displayed:
• Park up the vehicle
Steering oil – Yes Info – Power steering: • Check the oil level in the power steering
level fault – Not enough oil in the power steering. and top up the oil if necessary, see
Yellow – An electrical short-circuit has occurred. “Every month before starting the
[141] engine”, Page 306
immediately
– – – – Function – Hydraulic oil level: • Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank
– The hydraulic reservoir level is too low. • Top up oil if necessary
Red – The electrical connection to the • Obtain workshop assistance
hydraulic switch contact is defective. immediately
[302]
276

ble
Malfunction – Yes Safety – Steered trailing axle: The vehicle cannot be driven!
rear axle steering – The trailing axle no longer steers. [270] • Stop immediately, taking into
Flashes – The steering performance is restricted, account the situation on the road
red especially when cornering. [355, 356] Continuing driving, even with the steered
rear axle lifted, is not permitted!
immediately
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – Steered trailing axle: • Drive slowly and carefully
rear axle steering The steering performance is restricted, • Obtain workshop assistance
Red especially when cornering. [355, 356] immediately
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – Steered trailing axle: • Check the oil level in the power steering
rear axle steering Not enough oil in the trailing axle power of the leading or trailing axle and top up
Red steering. [147]. the oil if necessary, see “Every month
before starting the engine”, Page 306
immediately
– – – – Function – Steered trailing axle: • Switch the ignition off and on
The steered trailing axle is not functioning • Manoeuvre the vehicle forwards and
Red properly. [288] backwards
• Park the vehicle straight ahead
necessary
Oil temperature – Yes Info – Front-wheel drive: • Drive more slowly until the message
too high The hydraulic system oil temperature for disappears
Yellow front wheel drive is too high. [357] • Run the engine with the vehicle
stationary until the message disappears
necessary
277

ble
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – Front-wheel drive: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
HydroDrive The hydrostatic front wheel drive has Page 365
Yellow failed. [325] • Obtain workshop assistance
immediately
Headl. cleaning – Yes Info – Headlight cleaning: • Check defective connections to the
failure The headlight cleaning system has failed. headlight cleaning system
Yellow [241] • Obtain workshop assistance if
necessary
– – – – Function – Screen washers: • Top up the fluid, see “Every week before
The fluid level in the windscreen washer starting the engine”, Page 304
Yellow tank is too low. [61]
Tipper operation – Safety – Tipper: Goes out after tipper operation has
The tipper body is operating. [199] finished.
Flashes Red • Lower the tipper body completely
red • See operator’s manual provided by
body manufacturer
Lock – Safety – Liftgate: • Lock the liftgate correctly
liftgate The liftgate is open or not fully locked. • See operator’s manual provided by
Flashes Red [201] body manufacturer
red
– – – – Function – PTO 1: –
Power take-off 1 is activated. [189]
278

ble
Defective switch – Yes Workshop – Lighting: • Obtain workshop assistance
haz.warn. lights The electrical connection to the hazard immediately
Red warning light switch is defective. The
hazard warning light function cannot be
activated. [158]
LH headl. height – Yes Info – Lighting: • Obtain workshop assistance
autom. failure The left/right headlight beam regulator has immediately
Yellow failed. [100, 101]
RH headl. height – Yes
autom. failure
Yellow
LH trac. indic. – Yes Info – Turn indicators in tractor vehicle: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure Failure of a left-hand/right-hand tractor Page 365
Yellow indicator. The bulb load is not in tolerance. • Change the bulb immediately, see
RH trac. indic. – Yes [86, 87] “Changing bulbs”, Page 376
failure • Perform a light test, see “Exterior
Yellow lighting”, Page 58
necessary
Defective switch – Yes Workshop – Switch defective: • Obtain workshop assistance
LH turn indic. The electrical connection to left-hand immediately
Red /right-hand turn indicator switch is
Defective switch – Yes defective. [153, 154]
RH turn indic.
Red
279

ble
LH trai. indic. – Yes Info – Turn indicators in trailer 1: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure Failure of a left/right turn trailer indicator. Page 365
Yellow The bulb load is not in tolerance. [84, 85] • Change the bulb immediately, see
RH trai. indic. – Yes “Changing bulbs”, Page 376
failure • Perform a light test, see “Exterior
Yellow lighting”, Page 58
necessary
Side marking – Yes Info – Lighting: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
fault Failure of at least one of the left/right-hand Page 365
Yellow side marker lights on the tractor. [370] • Change the LED block immediately, see
“Changing bulbs”, Page 376
necessary
LH high beam – Yes Info – Lighting: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure A left-hand/right-hand high beam or winter Page 365
Yellow service lamp has failed. [88, 90, 89, 91] • Change the bulb immediately, see
RH high beam – Yes “Changing bulbs”, Page 376
failure • Obtain workshop assistance if
Yellow necessary
LH fog lamp – Yes Info – Lighting: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure A left- or right-hand fog lamp bulb has Page 365
Yellow failed. [94, 95] • Change the bulb immediately, see
RH fog lamp – Yes “Changing bulbs”, Page 376
Yellow necessary
280

ble
Trac. r.fog lamp – Yes Info – Lighting: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure The tractor or trailer rear fog lamp has Page 365
Yellow failed. [98, 99] • Change the bulb immediately, see
Trai. r.fog lamp – Yes “Changing bulbs”, Page 376
Yellow necessary
low beam The electrical connection to the hazard immediately
Red headlight low beam switch is defective.
[152]
high beam The electrical connection to the headlight immediately
Red high beam switch is defective [155]
headlight flash The electrical connection to the headlight immediately
Red flash switch is defective [156]
Defective switch – Yes Info – Lighting: • Obtain workshop assistance
fog lamp The electrical connection to the fog lamp immediately
Yellow switch is defective [97]
park lt. ON The electrical connection to the parking immediately
Red light switch is defective. [157]
LH tractor – Yes Info – Lighting: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
park lt. failure The left/right parking-light or winter-service Page 365
Yellow bulb on the tractor has failed [106, 107, • Change the bulb immediately, see
RH tractor – Yes 108, 109, 110, 111] “Changing bulbs”, Page 376
park lt. failure • Obtain workshop assistance if
Yellow necessary
281

ble
Parking lights – Yes Info – Lighting: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure The parking light is defective. [112, 218] Page 365
Yellow • Obtain workshop assistance if
necessary
Winter service – Yes Info – Lighting: • Obtain workshop assistance
light failure The snowplough and gritter lighting is immediately
Yellow defective. [113]
Aux. high beam – Yes Info – Lighting: • Obtain workshop assistance
failure The additional headlight high beam is immediately
Yellow defective if genuine MAN fog lamps are
fitted. [96]
LH aux high beam – Yes Info – Lighting: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure The left/right additional headlight high Page 365
Yellow beam has failed if genuine MAN fog lamps • Change the bulb immediately, see
RH aux high beam – Yes are fitted. [92, 93] “Changing bulbs”, Page 376
Yellow necessary
LH low beam – Yes Info – Lighting: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure The left-hand/right-hand low beam or Page 365
Yellow winter service lamp has failed. [79, 80, 81, • Change the bulb immediately, see
RH low beam – Yes 82] “Changing bulbs”, Page 376
Yellow necessary
– – – Turn Function – Turn indicator on trailer: –
indica- The turn indicator on the trailer is flashing.
Green
tors [13, 14]
– – – – Function – Headlight low beam: The check lamp is located in the rev
Headlight low beam (driving lights) on. counter.
Green [362]
282

ble
– – – – Function – Headlight high beam: –
Headlight high beam is on. [45]
Blue
– – – – Function – Fog lamps: The check lamp is located in the rev
The fog lamp is on. [380] counter.
Green For information, see “Exterior lighting”,
Page 58.
– – – – Function – Rear fog lamp: The check lamp is located in the rev
The rear fog lamp is on. [381] counter.
Yellow For information, see “Exterior lighting”,
Page 58.
Trac. brake lamp – Yes Workshop – Brake lamp: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
failure The tractor/trailer brake lamp has failed. Page 365
Red [77, 78] • Change the bulb immediately
Trai. brake lamp – Yes • Obtain workshop assistance if
failure necessary
Red
Light test – – – Function – Light test for exterior lighting: For information, see “Exterior lighting”,
The light test can be started. [67] Page 58.
END light test – – – Function – Light test for exterior lighting: For information, see “Exterior lighting”,
The light test is complete and the lighting Page 58.
values have been stored successfully. [72]
– Light test – – – Function – Light test for exterior lighting: For information, see “Exterior lighting”,
ABORT The light test was cancelled. [73] Page 58.
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – EU monitoring device: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
tachograph The EU monitoring device (tachograph) Page 365
Red has failed. [170] • Obtain workshop assistance
immediately
For more information, see “EU monitoring
device (tachograph)”, Page 322.
283

ble
Check – Yes Workshop – EU monitoring device: • Obtain workshop assistance
tachograph The EU monitoring device (tachograph) is immediately
Red not OK. [171, 172] For more information, see “EU monitoring
device (tachograph)”, Page 322.
– – – Yes Workshop – Digital EU monitoring device: • See EU monitoring device operating
The digital EU monitoring device instructions (e.g. driver card
(tachograph) is not OK. [358, 359] (Smartcard) not inserted, driving time
Yellow exceeded)
immediately
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – Customer-specific special • Obtain workshop assistance
body control unit module (KSM): immediately
Red The control unit for external data exchange
has failed. [175]
Code invalid – – Yes Function – Immobiliser: • Use legitimate key, see “Starting and
interlock active The key code is unknown. [167] switching off the engine”, Page 144
– – – Yes Function – Emergency off: For information, see “Switching off the
Switch on the emergency off switch.[198] engine in an emergency”, Page 153.
Red
– – – Yes Function – Belt check: • Driver must put on seat belt
The driver is not wearing a seat belt. [200] For information about the warning tone,
see “Seat belts”, Page 29.
Red
Malfunction – Yes Info – LGS: • Obtain workshop assistance
Lane Guard System Lane Guard System has failed. [219]
Yellow
– – – – Function – LGS: • Clean the field of vision if necessary
The Lane Guard System does not detect • Lane Guard System is switched on and
Yellow the edge of the lane or the vehicle is passive
travelling below 60 km/h. [220] For information see “Lane Guard System”,
Page 158.
284

ble
– – – – Function – Road speed limiter: For information see “Cruise control (FGR)
The road speed limiter is switched on. and road speed limiter (FGB)”, Page 155
MAN BrakeMatic is not switched on. [253,
254]
– – – – Function – Cruise control: For information see “Cruise control (FGR)
The cruise control is switched on. and road speed limiter (FGB)”, Page 155
MAN BrakeMatic is not switched on. [251,
252]
– – – – Function – Road speed limiter and For information see “Cruise control (FGR)
MAN BrakeMatic: and road speed limiter (FGB)”, Page 155
Road speed limiter and MAN BrakeMatic and see “MAN BrakeMatic”, Page 142
are switched on. [255]
– – – – Function – Cruise control and For information see “Cruise control (FGR)
MAN BrakeMatic: and road speed limiter (FGB)”, Page 155
Cruise control and MAN BrakeMatic are and see “MAN BrakeMatic”, Page 142
switched on.
[256]
Malfunction Yes Info – TPM: • Check/correct the tyre inflation
tyre pressure mon. The tyre pressure monitoring system has pressure, see “Changing a wheel”,
Yellow Yellow failed. Causes include e.g.: Page 334
– The wheel modules are not assigned to • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
the control unit. Page 365
– The wheel modules are not fitted. [176, • Obtain workshop assistance
236]
Tyre Yes Info – TPM: • Stop immediately, taking into
defective Rapid pressure loss from at least one tyre. account the situation on the road
Yellow Yellow [239] • Check the tyre inflation pressure
• Change the wheel if necessary, see
“Changing a wheel”, Page 334
285

ble
Tyres Yes Info – TPM: • Drive slowly and carefully
Pressure loss from at least one tyre. [237, • Stop at a suitable location
Yellow Yellow 238] • Check the tyre inflation pressure
• Change the wheel if necessary, see
Tyre pressure Yes Info – TPM: This message is displayed for only about
The electrical connection to a wheel 2 minutes after the ignition is switched on
Yellow Yellow module has failed. [235] when the tyres are cold.
• Check/correct the tyre inflation
pressure, see “Changing a wheel”,
Page 334
Check tyre – Yes Info – TPM: This message is displayed for only about
pressure Check the tyre pressure. [230] 2 minutes after the ignition is switched on
Yellow when the tyres are cold.
• Check the tyre inflation pressure
• If necessary, increase or reduce the
inflation pressure see “Changing a
wheel”, Page 334
Tyre pressure Yes Info – TPM: • Stop the vehicle – taking account of
The tyre pressure is too low or too high. the traffic situation
Yellow Yellow [231, 233] • Correct the tyre inflation pressure, see
• Change the wheel if necessary and/or
obtain workshop assistance
Trailer tyres – Yes Info – TPM: • Check the tyre inflation pressure –
The tyre inflation pressure is too low or too increase/reduce as necessary, see
Yellow high. [338, 339] “Changing a wheel”, Page 334
286

ble
Trailer2 tyres – Yes Info – 2nd trailer tyres: • Check the tyre inflation pressure –
The tyre inflation pressure is too low or too increase/reduce as necessary, see
Yellow high. [340, 341] “Changing a wheel”, Page 334
Malfunction – Yes Workshop – ZFR: • Check the fuse, see “Electrical system”,
veh. man. computer The additional vehicle computer has failed. Page 365
Red [323] • Obtain workshop assistance
immediately
287
Vehicle menu
VEHICLE MENU
Tour speed Chassis number

Vehicle menu contents
Driving times Speed limiter
Current consumption Engine type
Values can be displayed or adjusted on various
Charge pressure Engine number
levels in the Vehicle menu.
Monitoring data Display OFF
The contents of the Vehicle menu depend on
Engine oil (terminate continuous display)
the vehicle equipment.
Oil level (only when engine stopped) Settings
Note Oil pressure (only when engine Warning speed
A permanent display can be selected running) Warning signal
and set using the “Driving data” and Axle load Set time
“Monitoring data” menu item. Battery voltage Display brightness
The displayed fuel consumption is a Tyre pressure Daytime dr. lights
calculated value rather than a measured Brake pads Nominal tyre press.
value. It provides a guidance value, Reservoir pressure Nominal tyre press. for axle 1, 2 and
not the precise fuel consumption. After Crankshaft revs other axles
refuelling, first drive for a few miles so Operating data Consumption in ...
that realistic average fuel consumption Trailer Selection of units:
figures are shown once more. Brake pad l/100km, km/l, l/h or mpg
The Display language is set using the Tyre pressure Adv warning service
Total axle load Display in weeks
“Language” menu item. This menu item
Trailer 2 Display in km
can be called up using the Vehicle menu
Brake pad Language
or directly using the “Language” button.
Tyre pressure Messages
If no Trip data are indicated, first select
Total axle load Cancel confirmation of messages, display all
the “Reset tour” menu item (delete
Service messages again
memory).
List of “components”
The “Vehicle” menu item has the following Diagnosis
submenu items: Control units
Tractor vehicle Checklamps
Driving data Red symbols
Reset tour Yellow symbols
Tour consumption Vehicle data
288
Vehicle menu
Using the Vehicle menu Therefore:

• Do not operate the Vehicle menu
Controls and indication on the display unless the vehicle is at a standstill
1 Display of menu selection, e.g. “Vehicle”

menu
2 Display of possible left button functions,
e.g. scroll through Vehicle menu
The Vehicle menu is operated using the left and
3 Display of possible right button functions,
right buttons.
e.g. exit Vehicle menu
There are two ways of using the buttons: • Give the left button a long press
All possible displays for button actions and
– Press and hold (long press), e.g. to call up The display shows the “Vehicle”, “Audio”,
functions are shown on the following table
the Vehicle menu “Phone” and “Messages” menus, see “Vehicle
“Possible button actions and functions”.
– Press briefly (short press), e.g. to scroll menu contents”.
through the Vehicle menu
Note
The possible button functions are shown by
The Vehicle menu closes automatically
symbols on the display.
Calling up and using the Vehicle menu if no button is pressed for about
30 seconds.
CAUTION
Exceptions: Continuous displays, see
“Vehicle menu contents”.
Operating the vehicle menu whilst
• Control the Vehicle menu, press the
driving may distract your attention
corresponding button on the instrument
from the road.
panel with the help of the display
Accidents may result if you brake too
late or veer off the carriageway.
289
Vehicle menu
All possible displays for button actions and Possible button actions and functions
functions are shown on the following table
“Possible button actions and functions”.
Display symbol Button actions Button function

for button
Button Push
Call up the Vehicle menu
Long Alternatively
Go back one menu level without storing values
Short Scroll through Vehicle menu or select values
Completely exit the Vehicle menu and save values
Long Alternatively
Completely exit the Vehicle menu and continuously show the selected menu item on the display
Short Go back one menu level and store values
Setting the display language The display language is set.

The display languagee is set using the
“Language” menu item. This menu item can Calling up the continuous display
be called up using the Vehicle menu or directly The “Driving data” and “Monitoring data” menu
using the “Language selection” button. items, see “Vehicle menu contents”, can be
• Call up the Vehicle menu used to select a menu item to be permanently
• Call up the “Language” menu item indicated on the display.
• Select and store the language • Call up the Vehicle menu
The display language is set. • Call up the “Driving data” or “Monitoring data”
Alternatively menu item
• Select the menu item that you want to have
as a continuous display
• Press the button
The “Language” menu item appears on the
display.
• Select and store the language
290
Vehicle menu
Exiting the Vehicle menu
• Press and hold the right button

The selected menu item is permanently
• Give the left button a long press
indicated on the display.
The Vehicle menu closes.
Alternatively
Terminating the continuous display
• Select the blank line (dash) at the end of the
• Call up the Vehicle menu
menu items
• Select the “Display OFF” menu item
• Press the right button briefly
The continuous display is terminated.
• Press the right button briefly

The Vehicle menu closes.
291
Vehicle menu
292
Regular inspection work and care procedures
Checking and maintenance points
CHECKING AND MAINTENANCE POINTS
Behind the front flap Behind the front flap in vehicles with Left-hand side of vehicle
snowplough and gritter equipment
Behind the front flap in vehicles without
snowplough and gritter equipment
9 Separ primary fuel filter

5 Filler neck for coolant
6 Filler neck for oil
1 Filler neck for coolant
2 Filler neck for engine oil
3 Expansion tank for clutch actuator
4 Filler neck for screen washers and
headlight cleaning system
Note
Opening and closing the front flap, see
“Opening and closing the front flap”,
Page 111.
1 Battery box
27 Test connections
28 Compressed air reservoir
293
Fuel tank for Euro 5 Combination tank for fuel and hydraulic oil
1 Battery box
5 Filler neck for reducing agent
4 Filler neck for fuel 4 Filler neck for fuel
6 Filler neck for hydraulic oil
Right-hand side of vehicle Combination tank for fuel and reducing
agent for Euro 5
Fuel tank for Euro 4
Right-hand side of the vehicle or
in the frame
Hydraulic oil tank for MAN HydroDrive
Right-hand side of the vehicle ahead of the fuel
tank:
4 Filler neck for fuel

4 Filler neck for fuel 5 Filler neck for reducing agent
294
Co-driver’s side 20 Dipstick for engine oil
Cab tilt mechanism
Or in the vehicle frame:
1 Poly-V-belt
14 Screw cap for hydraulic oil

15 Changeover valve lever When the cab is tilted forwards,
right side of vehicle
When the cab is tilted forwards,
left side of vehicle
6 Filler neck for hydraulic oil

7 Sight glass
17 BEKA-MAX central lubrication system
295
Behind the cab
ZF 6 HP … automatic gearbox
1 Screw cap with dipstick
At the rear of the vehicle
18 Compressed air reservoir
296
Summary of inspection work and care procedures
SUMMARY OF INSPECTION WORK AND CARE PROCEDURES
Note • Trailer coupling, sockets and coupling Every six months

More frequent inspections may be heads: Check their condition and function Description of activities see “Every six months
required, depending on the weather, • Fifth-wheel coupling, adjustment device, before starting the engine”, Page 308.
application and operating conditions. lifting equipment, sockets, coupling • Batteries: Check the electrolyte level, see
Checks not listed here may be heads, connection cables and connection “Electrical system”, Page 365.
necessary for special equipment, body lines: Check their condition and function • Fuel tank: Drain off water
components and conversions. • Cab tilt mechanism: Check the oil level
Every week
Note
Description of activities see “Every week before
Only use service products, e.g. oils, Perform the following checks after
starting the engine”, Page 304.
lubricants, coolants and reducing agents starting the engine
• Tyres and wheels: Check inflation pressure
(AdBlue), that have been approved by
and condition
MAN. Every day
• Wheel nuts: Check for firm attachment
For service products approved by MAN Description of activities see “Every day after
• Screen washers and headlight cleaning
see the supplied “Maintenance Record” starting the engine”, Page 309.
system: Top up the fluid and check function
booklet. • Engine: Check the oil pressure
• Engine, gearbox, transfer case, driven
axles, steering, cooling and heating • Brake system: Check function and
system: Check for leakage effectiveness
Perform the following checks
• Separ primary fuel filter: Drain off water • Air suspension system: Check the body
before starting the engine lean
• Snowplough and gritter equipment
(mounting plate): Check condition • Steering system: Check the play
Every day
Description of activities see “Every day before Every week
Every month
starting the engine”, Page 299. Description of activities see “Every week after
Description of activities see “Every month
• Engine: Check the oil level starting the engine”, Page 312.
before starting the engine”, Page 306.
• Cooling system: Check the fluid level • ZF 6 HP ... automatic gearbox: Check the
• Clutch actuator: Check the oil level
• Fuel: Check the level in the tank oil level
• Central lubrication system, BEKA-MAX:
• Reducing agent (AdBlue) with Euro 5: • Air suspension system: Check the
Check the lubricant level
Check the level in the tank condition of the air-sprung bellows
• Poly-V-belts: Check condition
• Lighting and signal system: Check its
• MAN HydroDrive: Check the oil level
condition and function
297
Summary of inspection work and care procedures
Every month
Description of activities see “Every month after
starting the engine”, Page 313.
• Air dryer: Check its function and
effectiveness
After off-road driving
Description of activities see “After off-road

driving”, Page 314.
• Foreign bodies between the spring
leaves: Remove
• Stones and objects wedged between the
twin tyres: Remove
Before the onset of winter
Additional inspection work before the winter

season starts, see “Winter operation”,
Page 325.
298
Every day before starting the engine
DESCRIPTION OF INSPECTION WORK AND CARE PROCEDURES
Perform the following checks Engine The oil level is not measured when the engine
before starting the engine is running, and the oil level can no longer be
Checking the oil level on the Vehicle menu called up.
Every day before starting the engine • Turn the ignition key to the driving position II
WARNING
• Set the air suspension (ECAS) to the ride
Danger of damage!
Safety notes height, see “Electronically controlled air
– Having the oil level too low and suspension (ECAS)”, Page 96
Note using the incorrect oil can lead to • Call up the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle
Comply with the notes on safety and engine damage. menu”, Page 288
environmental protection, see “Safety”, – Having the oil level above the MAX • Select the “Monitoring data” menu item
Page 399 and see “Environmental mark promotes oil consumption, • Select the “Engine oil” menu item
protection”, Page 403. is uneconomical and pollutes the
environment.
WARNING – Immediately contact a MAN
Danger of damage! Service workshop if the oil level is
Dirt, liquid and small parts that get shown to be above the MAX mark
into the filler holes can damage the although you have not topped up
engine, gearbox and steering. the oil.
• Thoroughly clean the • Check the oil level every day
corresponding checking and • Correct the oil level immediately if
maintenance points before the oil level is below the MIN mark
starting work or above the MAX mark
• Only use oils approved by MAN
When the ignition is switched on but the engine The oil level is displayed.
is not started, the oil level is measured at • Top up the oil to the correct level through the
10 second intervals. This measured value is filler neck
stored and can be called up on the display at • Exit the Vehicle menu
any time.
299
Measuring the oil level after stopping the Topping up the oil Cooling system
engine • Switch off the ignition
CAUTION
After the engine has been running, there are • Open the front flap, see “Opening and closing
Danger of scalding!
between 2 and 5 litres of oil in the engine block. the front flap”, Page 111
This oil drains back to the oil sump when the The coolant may be hot and the
engine is stopped. The time the oil takes to coolant container under pressure
flow back into the sump depends heavily on after the engine has been stopped.
the viscosity and the temperature. If the tank is opened quickly and
The oil level cannot be measured correctly until without care, the escaping steam
all the oil has flowed back from the engine into could cause serious scalding.
the oil sump. Therefore:
The following table presents the waiting times • Let the coolant cool down
for the oil level measurement. These are the • Wear suitable hand protection
minimum times after which the oil level can be • Protecting your hand with a cloth,
measured correctly. The waiting time refers to carefully unscrew the screw cap
the oil temperature when the engine is stopped. by about 2 to 3 turns and let the
We recommend only measuring the oil level excess pressure escape
• Top up the oil through the filler neck 1 (red • Do not open the tank fully until
when the engine is cold, since the engine
screw cap) there is no more pressure in the
oil expands when the engine is hot and this
• Check the oil level cooling system
falsifies the engine oil level.
Top-up volume between MIN and MAX marks:
The oil temperature can be called up using
D 2066 and D2676 Checking the fluid level
the Vehicle menu and read off the display, see
engines............. ...................... approx. 6 litres • Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface
“Vehicle menu”, Page 288.
D 2868 engine ............. ..............approx. litres • Open the front flap, see “Opening and closing
Waiting times for the oil to flow back:
the front flap”, Page 111
Oil temperature Waiting time
-40 °C 180 min
0 °C 90 min
+20 °C 45 min
+50 °C 5 min
+80 °C 4 min
+110 °C 3 min
300
• Slowly pour in the coolant through the filler

neck until the level reaches the top of the
sight glass 3
• Close the screw cap 2
• Close the front flap
Fuel and reducing agent
Checking the level in the tank
Note
Check the fuel’s cold-resistance
• Check the fluid level at the sight glass 3 of properties before the onset of the cold • Check the fuel gauge and, if necessary, top
the container 1 season. up the fuel and reducing agent
The fluid level is not allowed to be below the • Turn the ignition key to position II
Fuel gauge for Euro 4: Note
middle of the sight glass 3 when the engine is
Try to avoid running out of fuel as
cold.
otherwise it will be necessary to bleed
the fuel system.
Topping up coolant
WARNING Refuelling
Danger of damage!
If a significant volume of fluid has WARNING
been lost and the engine is also at Danger of fire and explosion!
a hot operating temperature, topping Fuel is highly inflammable and can
up coolant leads to engine damage. explode.
• Do not top up coolant when • Switch off the engine and the
the engine is at a hot operating auxiliary heater before refuelling
temperature Fuel gauge for Euro 5: • Keep away sources of fire, sparks
and naked flames. Do not smoke!
• Carefully open the screw cap 2
• Check the antifreeze concentration before
the winter season starts and increase the
concentration if necessary
301
Note Topping up reducing agent

The fuel may overflow due to thermal
expansion. Therefore, do not fill the fuel WARNING
tank right up to the top. Danger of damage!
– Reducing agent can overflow
through the tank ventilation
– An overfilled tank may crack open
if it freezes
– Reducing agent is highly corrosive
(rust-inducing)
Therefore:
• Only top up the reducing agent
tank until the nozzle switches off
• Immediately rinse reducing agent
off metal surfaces (steel or
aluminium, even if painted) with
plenty of clean water
• Open the screw cap 5 of the reducing agent
tank
• Fill reducing agent into the reducing agent
tank
• Close the screw cap 5 of the reducing agent
tank
Lighting and signal system

• Open the screw cap 4 of the fuel tank
• Fill diesel fuel into the fuel tank
Checking the condition and function of the
• Close the screw cap 4 of the fuel tank
exterior lighting
Do not fill any fuel into the tank for reducing
• Clean the exterior lighting of the vehicle
agent 5 or the tank for hydraulic oil 6!
• Check the complete exterior lighting for
condition (damage) and function, see
“Exterior lighting”, Page 58
302
Defective bulbs are shown on the display,

Page 254.
• Fit new bulbs to replace any that are not
working, see “Changing bulbs”, Page 376
Checking the function of the check lamps

• Check the function of the check lamps, see
“Vehicle menu”, Page 288
Sockets, coupling heads, connection

cables and lines for operation with trailer
and semitrailer
• Check the sockets and coupling heads for

trailers for contamination and condition
• Clean any sockets and coupling heads that
are contaminated, see “Trailer operation”,
Page 208 and see “Semitrailer operation”,
Page 225
• Check the condition of connection cables
and lines
• Have worn connection cables and lines
renewed in a MAN Service workshop
303
Every week before starting the engine
Every week before starting the engine Checking condition

• Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile
Tyres and wheels and from in between twin tyres
• Check the condition of the tyres, tread
Checking inflation pressure wear and tread depth, complying with the
regulations of your particular country
CAUTION
• Check the tyres for damage such as nails,
cuts, cracks or bulges
Having the tyre inflation pressure too • Renew damaged tyres
low or too high is dangerous and
damages the tyre, because Wheel nuts
– Driving behaviour is impaired
– The tyre may be damaged Checking firm attachment • Unscrew the screw cap 4
– The tyre’s temperature rises • Retighten all wheel nuts to the prescribed • Top up the container for the screen washers
significantly and it could burst tightening torque and headlight cleaning system with a suitable
Serious accidents can be caused. Tightening torque for wheel nuts, see cleaning agent until the filler edge
Therefore: “Changing a wheel”, Page 334. Add antifreeze before the onset of the winter
• Check the tyre inflation pressure season. Pay attention to the mixing ratio.
every week before starting driving • Screw on the screw cap 4
Screen washers and headlight cleaning
• Correct the tyre inflation pressure • Check the function of the windscreen wipers,
system
if it is too low or too high screen washers and headlight cleaning
Topping up the fluid system
Note
Always check the tyre inflation pressure • Switch off the windscreen wipers
• Open the front flap, see “Opening and closing Engine, gearbox, transfer case, driven
with the tyres cold. Do not let air out of
the front flap”, Page 111 axles, steering, cooling and heating
overinflated tyres if they are hot.
system, hydraulic tipper system
• Check the inflation pressure of the tyres
(including the spare tyre) is correct see Checking for leaks
“Changing a wheel”, Page 334 • Check for leaks in the engine, gearbox,
Tyre inflation pressure values, see transfer case, driven axle(s), steering,
“Characteristic data, checking and setting cooling and heating system, hydraulic tipper
values, fill quantities”, Page 408. system
• If necessary, have the leak repaired in a MAN
Service workshop
304
Every week before starting the engine
Separ primary fuel filter Draining the condensation • Check the mounting plate and the holders for
damage and cracks
Checking
• Take the drain hose and clip from the vehicle

tool kit and screw onto hose port 11
The deposits of condensation and impurities • Position a suitable container to catch the fluid
must not reach the lower edge of the centrifuge • Unscrew the bleed screw 10
9. The condensation in the condensation • Open the stopcock 12
separator must be drained first. • Let the condensation and impurities drain out
• Check the Separ primary fuel filter for and dispose of them correctly
condensation and impurities • Close the stopcock 12
• Tighten the bleed screw 10 to the prescribed
Note
tightening torque
Drain water from the condensation
• Remove the collecting tank and drain hose
separator once a year if running on poor
Tightening torque:
quality fuel or at temperatures below
Bleed screw 10............. .................8 to 10 Nm
-30 °C.
The fuel tank must be at least half full of
Snowplough and gritter equipment
fuel to drain the condensation.
(mounting plate)
If an implement is mounted on the mounting

plate (e.g. snow plough):
305
Every month before starting the engine
Clutch actuator
Checking the oil level
CAUTION
The gears can no longer be shifted
if the oil level in the expansion tank
has dropped below the MIN marks.
Therefore: • Check the oil level in the expansion tank 13 • Check the lubricant level
• Correct the hydraulic clutch The oil level in the expansion tank 13 must be The lubricant level in the tank 20 must be
actuator oil level between the MIN and MAX marks. between the MIN and MAX marks.
• Slowly and carefully drive to the • If the hydraulic oil level is too low, top up to • Remove the protective cap 22
nearest MAN Service workshop the correct level through the filler hole 12 • Clean the grease nipple
and have the clutch actuator • Use a grease gun to top up the grease up to
checked BEKA-MAX central lubrication system the MAX mark
• Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface • Put on the protective cap 22
• Open the front flap, see “Opening and closing Checking the lubricant level • Tilt the cab backwards
the front flap”, Page 111 • Tilt the cab, see “Tilting the cab forwards
and backwards manually”, Page 116 and
see “Tilting the cab forwards and backwards
electrically”, Page 119
306
Poly-V-belt
Checking for condition
Oil tank in the vehicle frame:
1 Poly-V-belt
• Tilt the cab, see “Tilting the cab forwards
and backwards manually”, Page 116 and
see “Tilting the cab forwards and backwards
electrically”, Page 119
• Check the poly-V-belt 1 for cracks and wear
• If the poly-V-belt 1 is damaged or worn,
immediately have a new poly-V-belt fitted at
a MAN Service workshop
• Tilt the cab backwards
• Check the oil level in the sight glass 7
MAN HydroDrive The oil level must be visible in the middle of the
sight glass 7.
Checking the oil level • Top up the hydraulic oil to the correct level
• Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface through the filler neck 6
Oil tank on the right-hand side of the vehicle
ahead of the fuel tank:
307
Every six months before starting the engine
Every six months before starting the engine • Place a suitable collecting tank under the fuel
tank
Fuel tank • Unscrew the drain plug 20 by max. two turns
• Let the condensation drain out
Draining off water • Tighten the drain plug 20 to the prescribed
tightening torque
WARNING
Tightening torques:
Danger of damage!
Aluminium tank, drain plug with aluminium
Risk of environmental pollution from sealing ring 20............. ........................ 50 Nm
leaking fuel. Steel tank, drain plug with copper sealing
Therefore: ring 20............. ................................... 90 Nm
• Prevent any uncontrolled leakage
of fuel when draining water from
the fuel tank
• Unscrew the drain plug by
maximum two turns
Note
To avoid the condensation freezing,
you should always drain the water from
the fuel tank before the onset of cold
weather.
308
Every day after starting the engine
Perform the following checks after • Exit the Vehicle menu • If the brakes are defective,
immediately stop the vehicle with
starting the engine Note regard to the traffic conditions
An oil pressure of 4.0 to 5.0 bar must be and protect it in accordance with
Every day after starting the engine set up at rated speed when the oil has statutory regulations
heated up. • Immediately inform a MAN Service
Engine The minimum oil pressure must not drop workshop
below 1.0 bar at idling speed.
Checking the oil pressure
WARNING Brake system

Danger of damage!
Having the oil pressure too high or Checking function and effectiveness
too low causes engine damage. CAUTION
Therefore:
• Immediately bring the vehicle to a
The service brakes may fail if the
halt and stop the engine, taking
reservoir pressure in the pneumatic
account of the traffic situation,
brake system is too low.
if the “Oil pressure too high” or
Therefore:
“Oil pressure too low” message
• Do not set the vehicle in motion
appears on the driver’s display
until the STOP message has Reservoir pressure gauge for Euro 4:
• Check the oil level and correct it,
disappeared from the display. The reservoir pressure in brake circuits I and II
see “Every day before starting the
is displayed.
engine”, Page 299 CAUTION
• Contact a MAN Service workshop Danger of accidents!
if you cannot determine why the oil
The vehicle can no longer be braked
pressure is too low or too high
if the brakes are defective. Serious
• Start the engine accidents can be caused.
• Call up the Vehicle menu, see “Vehicle Therefore:
menu”, Page 288 • Check the brakes and braking
• Select the “Monitoring data” menu item effect before starting your journey
• Select the “Engine oil” menu item
The oil pressure is displayed.
The oil pressure must be 1.2 to 1.5 bar at idling
speed.
309
Air suspension system
Checking the body lean
Note
There should be no clearly visible body
lean in the sideways direction on a
flat, level surface when the air-sprung
bellows are inflated.
Reservoir pressure gauge for Euro 5:

– If the reservoir pressure in both brake circuits
is below 6 bar when the ignition is switched
on, the reservoir pressure in circuit II is
always displayed.
– The reservoir pressure in brake circuit II is
displayed in normal operation. The reservoir
pressure in circuit I is only displayed if it is
lower than the reservoir pressure in circuit II.
If the reservoir pressure in brake circuits I and • Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface
/or II is below 6 bar: • Use chocks and apply the parking brake to
• Run the engine and charge the compressed prevent the vehicle from rolling away
air system until the shut-off pressure A STOP message is indicated on the instrument • Checking the body lean
panel and the “Brake” and “Central warning If an air-sprung bellows has failed:
light” check lamps remain lit until the reservoir • Use the electronically controlled air
pressure in brake circuits I and II reaches suspension (ECAS) to lower the vehicle
approx. 6 bar. completely
• Before driving, check whether there is
sufficient clearance between the tyres and
adjacent parts
310
• Slowly and carefully drive to the nearest

MAN Service workshop, determine the cause
and correct the problem
Steering system
Checking the play

• Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead
position
• Slowly turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels move
The steered wheels must visibly move after
approx. 40 mm steering angle.
• If the play is significantly greater, have the
cause rectified in a MAN Service workshop
311
Every week after starting the engine
Every week after starting the engine Air suspension system
ZF 6 HP ... automatic gearbox Checking the condition of the air-sprung

bellows
Checking the oil level
WARNING
Danger of damage!
Having too little gear oil or a gear oil
of the wrong type can cause gearbox
damage.
Therefore:
• Check the gear oil level every • Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface
week • Use chocks and apply the parking brake to
• If the gear oil level is below the prevent the vehicle from rolling away
marks on the dipstick, immediately • Shift the gearbox to neutral “N”
correct the gear oil level and • Run the engine at idling speed
contact a MAN Service workshop • Check all air-sprung bellows for damage and
• Pull out the screw cap with dipstick 1
ageing
Note • If any air-sprung bellows are damaged, have
Do not check the oil level immediately new ones fitted at a MAN Service workshop
after a journey. Wait until the gear oil
cools to about 30 °C before checking
the oil level.
Checking the oil level with the gear
oil too hot or too cold will falsify the
measurement result.
Check the automatic gearbox for leaks
every time you check the oil level.
Immediately contact a MAN Service
workshop if gear oil has been lost.
The gear oil level must be between the marks 7.
• Immediately correct the gear oil level if the
gear oil level is not in between the marks 7
312
Every month after starting the engine
Every month after starting the engine
Air dryer
Checking function and effectiveness
Note
Check the function and effectiveness of
the air dryer more often at temperatures
below 0 °C or if the weather is very
humid.
CAUTION
• Charge the compressed air system up to the
shut-off pressure
If the air dryer is not functioning, it can
• Use chocks and apply the parking brake to
freeze in winter and lead to failure of
prevent the vehicle from rolling away
the brake system. Serious accidents
• Dry the area on the water drain valve 18 of
can be caused.
the compressed air reservoir
Therefore:
• Press the water drain valve 18 from the side
• Regularly check the air dryer by
using a suitable tool
operating the water drain valve on
Only air should emerge.
the compressed air reservoir
If condensation emerges:
CAUTION • Drain all compressed air reservoirs
Danger of injury! • Check the air dryer again after one week
• If condensation has collected again, have the
Using an unsuitable tool to operate
granulate cartridge of the air dryer renewed
the water drain valve can cause you
in a MAN Service workshop
to slip and injure yourself.
Therefore:
• Use a suitable tool
• Wear suitable eye and hand
protection
313
– Foreign bodies (e.g. stones) between the

spring leaves reduce the service life of leaf
springs. As a result, remove the foreign
bodies using a steam cleaner. Following
the instructions for cleaning with a steam
cleaner, see “Cleaning and care of the
vehicle”, Page 393.
– Foreign bodies (e.g. stones) between the
twin tyres reduce the service life of the tyres.
Therefore remove the foreign bodies.
314
Normal operation
Running in
RUNNING IN
CAUTION
We recommend running in the Brake pads
vehicle carefully
• After driving approx. 50 kilometres For reasons of manufacture, new brake pads
It is extremely important for the durability, (30 miles), retighten the wheel have a reduced friction coefficient. As a result,
reliability and economy of the vehicle to run in nuts to the prescribed tightening drive particularly carefully when the vehicle
the engine and the other assemblies carefully torque, see “Changing a wheel”, is new and every time after the brake pads
during the initial driving period. Page 334. are renewed, taking account of the possibly
Drive with similar care after mechanical reduced braking effect.
assemblies and parts have been renewed as Special requirements for manual gearboxes
well as after mechanical assemblies have been The clutch does not achieve its optimum Oil consumption
overhauled. functional effectiveness until the vehicle has
been started about 50 times with a full payload. An oil consumption of up to approx. 1 % of
During the first 2000 kilometres Engage the clutch and move off especially fuel consumption should be considered normal
carefully during this running-in period. during the engine’s running-in period (up to
(1200 miles) Refer to the instructions for moving off, approx. 50,000 km). For this reason, check
see “Manual gearbox”, Page 160 and see the oil level more frequently during this period.
Always comply with the following “Economical driving”, Page 316. The oil consumption does not stabilise until
instructions
after the running-in period. Afterwards, an oil
• Drive carefully when running in the vehicle Special requirements for automatic consumption of max. 0.5 % of fuel consumption
• Do not tow trailers gearboxes should be considered normal.
• Only operate with tractor - trailer units • Avoid excessive engine revs
half-laden
• Only drive up to maximum ¾ of the maximum
speed or permitted engine speed in each After the first 2000 kilometres
gear (1200 miles)
• Gradually increase the road speed until the
maximum road speed and/or the maximum
engine speed limit is reached.
315
Normal operation
Economical driving
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Optimising the condition of the Correct tyre inflation pressure see Continuously moving off in an excessively
vehicle “Characteristic data, checking and setting high gear can reduce the service life of your
values, fill quantities”, Page 408 clutch by more than 80%!
Constant care and maintenance of your Continuously moving off with excessively
vehicle high revs can reduce the service life of your
Clutch and gearbox operation
Optimum fuel consumption values can only be clutch by more than 60%!
achieved if the vehicle is in flawless condition Refer to the instructions for moving off, see
(e.g. clean air filters, effective cooling system). “Manual gearbox”, Page 160.
Operating the vehicle’s clutch correctly is very
important in terms of achieving a long service
Setting the roof spoiler correctly life. Incorrect operation drastically curtails
The roof spoiler must be adapted to the the service life. In the worst-case scenario,
dimensions of the body or semitrailer. This the clutch could be irreparably damaged by
is the only way to achieve a demonstrable overheating within a very short time.
fuel saving. Setting the roof spoiler, see “Roof The heavier the load on the vehicle and the
spoiler”, Page 110. steeper the uphill or downhill slope, the lower
the gear you should select. Clutch wear can be
Avoiding unnecessary driving resistance reduced significantly by selecting a low starting
Properly lashing tarpaulins and setting the gear and a low starting engine speed and by
adjustable tarpaulin framework to the lowest not accelerating until the clutch has engaged.
possible height increases the service life of The effects of the selected gear and the engine
the tarpaulins, reduces air resistance and thus revs when moving off are shown in the graphs
considerably reduces fuel consumption. on the following page.
Graph 1:
Setting the tyre pressure accurately X = Clutch service life in %
Having the tyre inflation pressure 1 bar too Y = Gear for moving off (L = Low splitter box,
low increases fuel consumption by up to 5 %. S = High splitter box)
This additional consumption is the result of Graph 2:
increased flexing work by the tyre, in which X = Clutch service life in %
case the driving energy is converted into heat. Y = Engine speed when moving off:
This also reduces the service life of the tyre.
316
Normal operation
Economical driving
317
Normal operation
Economical driving
Changing gear at the right time emissions regulation, and therefore forms part
If you need to shift down before negotiating an of the type approval for the vehicle within the
uphill stretch, do so before starting the climb. EU. Operating the vehicle without reducing
This permits you to drive into the slope with agent will invalidate the type approval, i.e. the
a high enough engine speed, thereby enabling vehicle is not allowed to be driven on public
you to finish the slope without further gearshifts, roads. For information about the quality of the
if possible. reducing agent, see the supplied “Maintenance
Record” booklet.
Do not change gear unnecessarily; use the
engine torque
Each gearshift represents a loss of time
and speed due to the interruption in tractive
force. Consequently, gearshifts increase fuel The central warning light comes on and a
consumption. At the same time, the clutch and message appears on the display when the tank
the synchronisers are exposed to increased for reducing agent (AdBlue) is empty.
wear. In such cases, refill with reducing agent
immediately or eliminate the malfunction. If the
With manual gearbox: Skip gears if warning is not heeded, fuel consumption may
possible; split gears if necessary be increased.
Skip unnecessary gears when shifting up and The engine torque is noticeably reduced in the
down. Only engage the splitter box in order to following cases:
The "exhaust gas check" check lamp on the
keep the engine in the optimum speed range – After the next vehicle standstill if the tank for
speedometer flashes when:
on long uphill stretches. reducing agent is empty.
– the exhaust gas emissions (NOx) are too
– After approx. 50 operating hours if there is a
high
malfunction in a system which monitors the
Operation with reducing agent – a malfunction has occurred in a system
exhaust gas quality.
which monitors or influences the exhaust gas
(AdBlue) for Euro 5 In this case, it may be a against the law or
quality (EGR, sensor, etc.)
other regulations to operate the vehicle in
– the tank for the reducing agent (AdBlue) is
Adding reducing agent (trade name “AdBlue”) EU countries and possibly other countries.
empty
to the exhaust purification system converts This could be punishable by law. In addition,
pollutants in the exhaust into environmentally – a malfunction prevents dosing (consumption)
incentives offered on the purchase and/or
of reducing agent
friendly substances (nitrogen and water). during the operation of the vehicle (e.g. tax
Operating the vehicle with reducing agent reductions, road tolls) may be invalidated
is required for compliance with the Euro 5 retrospectively. This may be the case in the
318
Normal operation
Economical driving
country of registration or in another country WARNING Economic engine operation

where the vehicle is operated. Danger of damage!
The driver must regularly top up the reducing The proportioning system is blown Starting the engine
agent during operation of the vehicle, see empty for about 2 minutes after the Do not press the accelerator down when you
“Every day before starting the engine”, ignition is switched off. Residues will start the engine. The engine ECU regulates
Page 299. Reducing agent consumption is be left in the proportioning system the injection volume when the engine is being
approx. 5% of fuel consumption. if the vehicle electrical system is started, and it takes factors such as the engine
switched off during this time (using temperature into consideration. This prevents
WARNING the battery master switch, battery unnecessarily high injection volumes and,
Danger of damage! isolator or EMERGENCY OFF consequently, smoke emissions.
– Do not mix any fuel, water switch). This may result in damage
or other additives (e.g. winter to the proportioning system (e.g. Warming up
additives) with the reducing agent. blockage due to crystal formation or The engine temperature increases very slowly
Otherwise, components of the freezing of the reducing agent). at idling speed under little load. Therefore:
exhaust purification system may Therefore: Do not run the engine to warm it up at a
fail (e.g. catalytic converter) or • Wait at least 2 minutes before standstill. Instead, warm up the engine under
suffer irreparable damage (e.g. switching off the vehicle electrical medium load. This is the most efficient way for
seals). system using the battery master the engine, gearbox and drive axles to reach
– Dirt must not be allowed to switch or battery isolator switch their operating temperature. There are no time
enter the reducing agent tank. • Restart the vehicle as quickly losses since there is no separate warming up
Otherwise, components of the as possible after operating the time for the engine with the vehicle stationary.
exhaust purification system and EMERGENCY OFF switch
the injection system may fail (e.g. The reducing agent starts freezing even at Cab heater
blocked injection nozzles). about -11 °C. As a result, the fluid level may be The vehicle’s engine is designed to drive the
Therefore: displayed incorrectly at such a low temperature. vehicle. Consequently, it is not an optimum
• Only fill reducing agent into the heat source at idling speed! An auxiliary heater
Information about cleaning residues of reducing
tank provided
agent see “Cleaning and care of the vehicle”, needs only ¼ to 1/3 of the fuel consumed by a
Page 393. vehicle’s engine at idling speed. Naturally, there
Safety notes for handling reducing agent see is also less vibration and noise and reduced
“Safe working with the vehicle”, Page 399. exhaust emissions.
Environmental protection notes for handling
reducing agent see “Disposing of hazardous With the vehicle at a standstill
substances”, Page 403. It is worth stopping the engine when the vehicle
is at a standstill for a relatively long period.
319
Normal operation
Economical driving
The idling speed consumption of the engine Drive smoothly traffic conditions and statutory regulations
is approx. 1 to 2 litres per hour. A smooth driving style without major speed permit this. You do not need to expend extra
peaks or fluctuations (see EC monitoring device fuel in accelerating to “buy” the kinetic energy
Stopping the engine disc) produces a higher average speed and which the vehicle gains.
Do not press the accelerator down before you lower fuel consumption. For example, also take
stop the engine. All this achieves is to boost advantage of “synchronised traffic lights”. Avoid stopping unnecessarily and do not
fuel consumption. use the brakes when not needed
Keep your distance Driving slowly but steadily instead of stopping
Maintaining a sufficient distance from the (e.g. at traffic lights) reduces fuel consumption
Economical driving style vehicle in front not only provides more safety, it because it avoids the need for the vehicle
also gives you the chance to adapt your driving to move off from stationary and subjects the
Low revs, high load
to changing traffic conditions. A longer distance driveline to less wear.
The economical operating range of the turbo
means you do not need to use the brakes so For example, a 40 tonne tractor/trailer unit
diesel engine is about 50 to 70 % of its
much, and consequently you do not need requires about 0.5 litres of fuel to accelerate
rated speed and about 80 % of full load.
to accelerate so much either. This reduces from 0 to 60 km/h (approx. 0 to 40 mph).
Consequently, try to keep the needle of the
fuel consumption since it avoids unnecessary Listen to traffic reports so as to avoid traffic
rev counter in the green zone during normal
acceleration. jams.
driving and run the engine under high load.
Use your momentum
High power if necessary; low revs whenever Sensible use of the cruise control
A heavy commercial vehicle possesses a
possible
great deal of inertia. This means once the
Use the full available power up to rated speed Application
vehicle has gathered momentum, it only loses
when you need a lot of power, e.g. when driving If used intelligently, the cruise control can
speed at a slow rate if no further propulsion
uphill, overtaking, adjusting your speed to other make driving more comfortable. However,
is provided. You can use this momentum “for
traffic at sliproads, etc. it cannot anticipate traffic conditions when
free”, for example you can take your foot off
regulating the road speed. As a result, using
the accelerator in advance of the crest of a hill
Use the rev counter the cruise control unintelligently increases fuel
or use it to free-wheel on the flat.
Engine revs represent an important parameter consumption unnecessarily – in the same way
You can take your foot off the accelerator as
in driving economically. Whenever possible, as if the driver were to drive without anticipating
far as 800 metres before a motorway exit on
engage a gear that allows the engine to operate the road conditions ahead.
a level stretch of road if the traffic conditions
in the optimum speed range. The optimum
permit. The loss of time involved is minimal.
speed range is shown on the rev counter as
Cease using the brakes in good time before
a “green range”.
reaching the floor of a valley and allow the
vehicle to pick up momentum – provided the
320
Normal operation
Economical driving
Before crests of hills followed by downhill

gradients
The cruise control and the road speed limiter
cannot detect that the hill will soon come to an
end, so they continue driving at full load until
the vehicle’s speed reaches the set value. After
this, the vehicle has to be braked immediately
because its speed increases when driving
downhill. Switching off the systems before the
crest of the hill allows the vehicle to roll over the
crest at a slower speed. After the crest of the
hill, it is not then necessary to brake the vehicle
very much, if at all.
Switch off cruise control in good time

Switch off the cruise control when you can tell
that it will be necessary to slow down, e.g.
before motorway exits or if there is a traffic
tailback ahead. The cruise control cannot tell
that it will soon be necessary to reduce speed,
and it therefore maintains the set speed until the
clutch or the brake is used. If the cruise control
is switched off as soon as you detect the need
to slow down ahead, the vehicle will roll up to
the obstacle or bend, etc. without consuming
fuel and it is not then necessary to brake the
vehicle very much, if at all.
321
Normal operation
EU monitoring device (tachograph)
EU MONITORING DEVICE (TACHOGRAPH)
Special note torn around the edge or at the engaging hole, on. First check the fuses. Immediately visit a
wavy or damaged in any other way! MAN Service workshop.
– Comply with the EU monitoring device – If the vehicle is not going to be used for some
operating instructions supplied with the time, always insert a recording sheet into the
vehicle. EU monitoring device, close it and switch
– Observe the regulations valid in the country it to “Rest time”. Reason: Reduced current
concerned. consumption in rest position.
– Anyone making modifications to the EU
monitoring device or signal routing may be
committing a crime! This could be punishable
Digital EU monitoring device
in law.
Comply with the operating instructions issued
by the manufacturer of the digital EU monitoring
Analog EU monitoring device device. They are supplied with the vehicle.
– Keep the recordings protected from damage.

Malfunctions
– Always carry with you the recordings for the
last 7 days and spare recording sheets.
– The recording sheets are related to a
particular person and therefore cannot be
transferred.
– Only use tachograph discs appropriate
for the EU monitoring device. Check that
the measuring range final value and the
inspection code correspond.
– Fill in the box on the recording sheet correctly
before you start your journey.
– Only insert tachograph discs that are in
perfect condition into the EU monitoring
device. They are not allowed to be folded,
In the event of an EU monitoring device failure
or malfunction, the “TCO” check lamp comes
322
Normal operation
Loading the vehicle
LOADING THE VEHICLE
Fundamental principles (e.g. minimum load in two-axle truck never Loading and unloading tippers
less than 25 %, in other vehicles never less
– Comply with the body and trailer operating than 20% of the current gross vehicle weight; – Load the tipper body so the centre of gravity
instructions supplied with the vehicle. a minimum limit of 25 % should always is as close to the middle as possible.
– Observe the regulations valid in the country be observed when operating with a rigid – Take care when loading large rocks or
of operation. drawbar/centre axle drawbar trailer). agglomerations of bulk material; do not let
– Do not exceed the permitted axle loads or – During braking, additional load is transferred them drop onto the tipper body from a great
gross vehicle weight rating. towards the front, the load on the front axle height.
– Lean the load against the bulkhead having increases. Risk of overloading the front axle! – Use a tension chain if you have one. Avoid
checked the stability of the bulkhead. – Take great care if the payload has frozen the side walls bowing out.
– Secure the payload so no items can slip or onto the load bed. Risk of body distortion! – The wheels subjected to load during tipping
fall onto the road. must be on a flat, level and consolidated
– Avoid high point-loads when driving on the base.
Loading errors
load bed with a forklift. – In vehicles with a loading crane mounted
– Distribute the payload along a sufficient Cause Effect behind the cab, take care that the permitted
length appropriate for the particular vehicle One-sided loading – Overloading of the front axle load is not exceeded.
type. springs and tyres on – In vehicles with a rear-mounted loading
– Make sure the payload is distributed evenly. one side crane, take care that the permitted rear axle
– Position the centre of the load in the middle of – Increased risk of tilting load is not exceeded.
the loading length. Do not position it in front over when cornering
of the centre otherwise the front axle may be Inadequately tight When braking or
overloaded. lashing of the cornering:
– Note the load index of the tyres and the payload onto the – Payload shifting
necessary inflation pressure. load bed – Damage to the walls
– Note that there is an increasing risk of Gaps between the When braking or
overloading the front axle during unloading payload and the cornering:
from the rear towards the front (distribution side walls and/or – Payload shifting
traffic). gaps between the – Damage to the walls
– When the payload is shifted towards the rear payload items – Increased risk of tilting
axle, make sure the load on the steering axle over when cornering
does not fall below the minimum amount
323
Normal operation
Immobiliser
IMMOBILISER
Functional description not been recognised by the immobiliser. The

immobiliser remains active, the engine cannot
The immobiliser prevents anyone using your be started.
vehicle without authorisation. It is activated Use a different ignition key to start the vehicle.
automatically when the ignition is switched off. It
is deactivated when the vehicle is started. Your
vehicle is provided with a special ignition key
for this purpose. The engine cannot be started
unless the vehicle’s own ignition key is used.
Therefore:
Look after the ignition key carefully and avoid
losing it if at all possible!
Ordering replacement ignition

keys
If you have lost a key, the authorisation of this
key must be deactivated. To do this, bring the
vehicle and all the keys you still have to a MAN
Service workshop.
A key (replacement key due to loss or an
extra key) can only be ordered through a MAN
Service workshop. The vehicle must be brought
to the workshop when the keys are handed
over.
Immobiliser malfunction
If the “Code invalid, interlock active” message

appears on the display: The ignition key has
324
Normal operation
Winter operation
WINTER OPERATION
Service products Re-apply the preserving agent throughout the Fuel tank
winter months at points exposed to particular
For service products approved by MAN see the risk. Thoroughly wash the vehicle at frequent Drain the water from the fuel tank before the
supplied “Maintenance Record” booklet. intervals to remove any corrosive substances onset of the cold season, see “Every six months
When operating the vehicle in extremely which may contain salt. before starting the engine”, Page 308.
cold conditions (temperatures below approx.
-30 °C), use service products that are identified
Radiator cover Fuel
as suitable for use in extremely cold conditions.
If vehicles are operated in even colder
We recommend using a radiator cover to Fill up with diesel oil which has sufficient cold
conditions than those specified for products
ensure that the intercooler cannot freeze flow properties (winter-grade fuel).
“suitable for use in extremely cold conditions”,
due to condensation build-up even under We recommend using winter diesel which the
it may be necessary to contact your MAN
unfavourable climatic conditions. The fuel manufacturer has guaranteed for use at
Service workshop to discuss what special
appropriate radiator cover is available from temperatures down to -22 °C.
measures to take.
your MAN Service workshop. Adding petrol to the mix is not permitted. If you
use FAME (biodiesel, e.g. RME) when driving
Corrosion protection in winter, ask your fuel supplier about the fuel’s
Engine oil cold-resistance properties. The changeover
The “winter service” should always be from summer to winter diesel must be made
Switch from high viscosity to low viscosity
performed before the onset of the cold when the fuel tank is empty. If winter diesel is
engine oil in good time.
season. You can have the necessary work mixed with summer diesel, the cold-resistance
performed by your MAN Service workshop. properties are reduced.
The scheduled maintenance work has to be Engine idling at temperatures
carried out in addition to the winter service in below 0 °C Fuel filter
order to ensure problem-free operation of the
vehicle, of course. Lengthy idling at temperatures below 0 °C leads Remember that the heated fuel filtration system
We also recommend you apply a wax-based to cooling down and increased engine wear. and heated fuel lines (special equipment) do
sealing agent to the cab, underside of the As a result, avoid idling phases of longer than not make it possible to use summer-grade
vehicle, body and chassis before winter sets 30 minutes. diesel in winter. With a fuel filter heating
in.
system, “flocculation” of the diesel fuel does
not commence until a temperature of about
325
Normal operation
Winter operation
5 °C lower than if there were no fuel filter WARNING Auxiliary heater running on diesel
heater. Drain the fuel filter water separator Danger of damage!
or heating oil
every day in extremely cold conditions. Do not mix any winter additives
Also, in extremely cold conditions (e.g. for reducing the freezing The heating oil solidifies at outside
(temperatures below approx. -30 °C), temperature) to the reducing agent. temperatures below about -5 °C, meaning
carry a spare filter insert with you in the Otherwise, components of the that the heater can no longer run on heating
vehicle. exhaust purification system may oil. You should therefore use the same fuel as
fail (e.g. catalytic converter) or suffer used in the engine if outside temperatures are
irreparable damage (e.g. seals). low.
Separ primary fuel filter Therefore:
• Only fill reducing agent (“AdBlue”)
Drain the primary fuel filter (Separ) every day into the tank provided Auxiliary heater running on gas
at temperatures below -30 °C.
We recommend carrying a spare primary The lowest outside temperature at which
fuel filter insert with you in the vehicle under Compressed air system gas-driven auxiliary heaters function without
extremely cold conditions. any problems whatsoever depends a great
The air dryer must be functioning correctly deal on the quality of the gas used.
to guarantee trouble-free operation in cold Commercially available propane reliably turns
Fuel service centre
weather. As a precautionary measure in from liquid to gas at temperatures down to
extremely cold conditions (temperatures below about -30 °C. If the temperature is any lower
To prevent the condensation from freezing, you
about -30 °C), we recommend installing a than this, however, gas-driven auxiliary heaters
should always drain the water from the fuel
heater element for the air dryer or a heated air no longer function reliably.
service centre before the onset of cold weather,
dryer from the MAN parts range.
see “Fuel system”, Page 364.
Electrical system
Operation with reducing agent Auxiliary heater (stationary heater)
All electrical plug connections should be in
(“AdBlue”) for Euro 5 An auxiliary heater is a specified requirement perfect condition.
for vehicles used in extremely cold countries The following care products have been
The reducing agent starts freezing even at (temperatures below about -30 °C). authorised by MAN for use with the plug
about -11 °C. As a result, the fluid level may be
connections and are available in every MAN
displayed incorrectly at such a low temperature.
Service workshop:
– For washing grease, oil and dirt out of plug
connections: Contact cleaner
326
Normal operation
Winter operation
– For corrosion protection of sensitive plug Flame start system Snow chains
connections (e.g. control unit plugs) after
cleaning using contact cleaner: Electronics Always check the function of the flame start Fit snow chains on the wheels of the driven
oil system on the driver’s display. The check axles before driving on roads with a heavy
– For corrosion protection of plug connections lamp must come on, see “Starting the engine”, covering of snow or roads with a tightly
normally found on the outside of the vehicle Page 146. packed-down snow surface. Do not fit the
(e.g. bayonet connections on sensors, Under extreme conditions, visit a MAN Service chains too tightly, it should be possible for them
central distributors, etc.) after cleaning with workshop to have new flame glow plugs fitted move slightly on the wheels (self-cleaning).
contact cleaner: Electronics grease once a year before the onset of cold weather.
WARNING
It goes without saying that these products are
Danger of damage!
useful throughout the year, not just in cold
Additional measure under extreme Vehicles with air suspension:
weather.
low-temperature conditions There is insufficient space for driving
(below -25 °C) with snow chains when the frame is
Poly-V-belts lowered below the ride height. The
Additional measures must be taken on mudguards can be damaged.
The poly-V-belts must be in perfect condition • Set the normal ride height for
the vehicle for operation under sustained
and correctly tensioned. driving
low-temperature conditions below -25 °C
You should always carry a spare set of
without damage. Each MAN Service workshop
poly-V-belts in your vehicle. WARNING
will be pleased to advise you on which
Danger of damage!
measures have to be taken (e.g. cold
Vehicle with a particularly low frame
Batteries weather package) depending on the vehicle
height (referred to as “a vehicle with
variant and the engine type. Operation under
optimised volume”):
The batteries must be in perfect condition and extremely cold conditions is not permitted
The gap between the tyres and the
the battery terminals must be greased with unless additional measures are taken.
middle part of the mudguards is very
terminal grease. Batteries that have already
small. Even at the normal ride height,
suffered from exhaustive discharge may be
reusable under normal operating conditions;
Tyres there may not be sufficient clearance
for driving with snow chains. The
however, they are more than likely to fail if used
Check that all tyres are suitable for winter use; mudguards can be damaged.
in cold conditions.
change to winter tyres if necessary. Therefore:
Fully charge the batteries before the onset of
cold weather. Keep the battery charge level at
more than 90 % at all times during the cold
season.
327
Normal operation
Winter operation
• Before driving, check whether

there is sufficient clearance
• If there is not sufficient clearance
available: Raise the frame to
maximum 40 mm above the ride
height and drive at a maximum
speed of 50 km/h (30 mph).
Snow chains on vehicles with

MAN HydroDrive
Only affects the driven front axle: Snow chains

approved by MAN are not available for all
tyre sizes. You can contact any MAN Service
workshop for information about which tyre sizes
have which snow chains approved for them.
WARNING
Danger of damage!
Hydraulic lines can be damaged
when driving with snow chains. This
can result in oil loss and failure of the
front wheel drive.
Therefore:
• Only fit snow chains if this is
approved by MAN for the tyre size
in question
• Only use snow chains approved by
MAN
• After mounting snow chains,
check whether there is sufficient
clearance between the chains and
the hydraulic lines
328
Normal operation
Off-road driving
OFF-ROAD DRIVING
As well as taking advantage of the vehicle’s • When driving over a step in the ground, let
high ground clearance and all-wheel drive, the vehicle roll up to it slowly until the front
it is very important when driving off-road to wheels make contact. Then accelerate.
operate the transfer case and the differential • Alter the tyre inflation pressure to suit the
locks correctly. terrain
Please always ensure the following: • Fit tyre chains in good time
– ABS only functions with restrictions when Special inspection work and care procedures
the differential locks and transfer case are are required after driving off-road, see “After
engaged. off-road driving”, Page 314
– ABS does not take effect at slower than about
5 km/h.
Correct off-road driving:
• Switch off the horizontal seat suspension
(blocking)
• Wherever possible, negotiate uphill and
downhill gradients at right-angles to the
contour line
• Do not interrupt the engine braking sequence
when negotiating downhill gradients, i.e. do
not disengage the clutch
• Engage 1st gear in good time prior to steep
downhill gradients so you can make optimum
use of the engine braking effect
• Engage the transverse lock if the ground
surface composition differs from one wheel
track to the other
• If possible, only let the wheels on one side
of the vehicle run over any raised sections
of ground; this is to prevent damage to the
attachments and chassis
329
Normal operation
Off-road driving
330
Do-it-yourself jobs
Tyres and wheels
WHEELS, TYRES, CHANGING WHEELS
Tyres and wheels – Protect the tyres from substances that harm Tyre inflation pressure
the type material
CAUTION
Introduction, safety and economy – Avoid sudden braking and do not corner at
excessive speed
Improving safety and economy – Regularly check the tyres for irregular wear Having the tyre inflation pressure too
Tyres are one of the vehicle components that – Only drive with tyres that are authorised for low or too high is dangerous and
are subject to the highest loadings. The tyre your vehicle damages the tyre, because
composition and compliance with the specified – On each axle (and between drive axles on – Driving behaviour is impaired
tyre inflation pressure are determining factors all-wheel drive vehicles), only ever use tyres – The tyre may be damaged
not only in terms of tyre service life but also, to of the same type, size (rolling radius), with – The tyre’s temperature rises
a significant extent, driving comfort and, above the same tread configuration and of the same significantly and it could burst
all, road safety. brand Serious accidents can be caused.
Always bear the following points in mind – Try to avoid driving over kerbstones if at all Therefore, please always ensure the
to avoid tyre damage, extend service life possible (carcass damage) following:
and therefore improve road safety and fuel – If you cannot avoid driving over a kerbstone,
before starting driving
economy: approach it at right angles and at a slow
• Correct the tyre inflation pressure
– Always drive with the tyres inflated to the speed
if it is too low or too high
correct pressure Refer to the vehicle documents to see which
– Always drive with tyres that have a sufficient tyres are authorised for your vehicle. Note Having the tyre inflation pressure too low
tread depth the applicable regulations since they may increases wear on the outside of the tyre profile
– Fit new tyres after 6 years, irrespective of the differ from country to country. Retreaded or and also increases fuel consumption.
tread depth regrooved tyres should also only be used At high sustained speeds with a high payload,
– Always negotiate relatively large according to the valid regulations. a tyre with insufficient inflation pressure has
irregularities on the road surface at a slow Always have new tyres fitted at a MAN Service to absorb more flexing energy. This means the
speed workshop since the tyres used have to be tyre temperature rises excessively and can lead
– Regularly check the tyres for damage such entered in the vehicle ECU. to separation of the tyre surface or the tyre
as nails, cuts, cracks or bulges bursting.
– Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile Having the tyre inflation pressure too high leads
and from in between twin tyres to increased wear in the middle of the tyre
– Always fit new tyres to replace any which are pattern.
damaged Serious accidents can be caused.
331
Do-it-yourself jobs
Tyres and wheels
Tyre inflation pressure values, see Tyre size

“Characteristic data, checking and setting
values, fill quantities”, Page 408.
Load index
If restrictions are imposed, the maximum

permitted tyre width can be seen on the
6 Tyre width in mm warning notice 1. It is located in the entrance
7 Ratio of tyre height to tyre width in % area on the driver’s side of the cab.
8 Rim diameter in inches
The nominal sizes of the tyre are specified Speed index
1 Load index with single tyres on the side of the tyre. However, the
2 Load index with twin tyres actual dimensions of tyres from different
The load index 1 or 2 is shown in the side of the manufacturers may differ slightly, while the
tyre. tread configuration may be significantly
different. Make sure there is sufficient
clearance for the wheels. Inadequate wheel
clearance results in tyre damage and damage
to the vehicle. Never use tyres that are wider
than permitted for your vehicle.
9 Speed index
Always use tyres with a permitted tyre size
and of the corresponding speed index 9 (e.g.
332
Do-it-yourself jobs
Tyres and wheels
G = 90 km/h, J = 100 km/h, K = 110 km/h, the load indices and speed symbols specified
L = 120 km/h and M = 130 km/h) which are in the vehicle documents.
suitable for the top speed.
Spare wheel
Note
The size of the spare wheel should
match the size of the wheels of the twin
tyres and should be compatible with the
front axle wheels.
If super-wide tyres are fitted, the spare
wheel is only allowed to be used as an
emergency wheel for a short time.
CAUTION
If the spare wheel has a different
tyre size or tread to the wheel that
is removed (e.g. as is the case with
winter or wide tyres), the changed
rolling circumference will restrict the
ABS and the vehicle's steering will be
impaired.
Therefore:
• Drive slowly and carefully
• Avoid sudden braking and do not
corner at excessive speed
• Only use the spare wheel for a brief
period
If the spare wheel is to be used continuously,
make sure that the tyre size and tread
configuration of the spare wheel correspond to
those of the wheel that is changed and also to
333
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
Changing a wheel Deactivating air suspension Removing the spare wheel
CAUTION
Preparations for changing a wheel
Danger of injury!
CAUTION The jack may slip out of position
Danger of accidents! due to regulation of the electronically
Danger of accidents if the vehicle is controlled air suspension. Serious
not sufficiently secured. injuries can be caused.
Therefore: Therefore, please always ensure the
• Always wear a high visibility tabard following:
when changing a wheel at the • Switch off the ignition
roadside • Wait 20 seconds after switching
• Secure the vehicle in accordance off the ignition, until the air
with the legislation in force in the suspension no longer adjusts
country in question the level • Push a socket spanner onto the hexagon
• Switch off the battery master profile 3
Note switch or battery isolator • Turn the socket spanner to tighten the cable
On semitrailer tractors, unhitch the • Do not switch on the ignition, of the spare wheel hoist
semitrailer before changing a wheel, see battery master switch and battery • Unscrew the mounting nuts 1
“Semitrailer operation”, Page 225. isolator during the wheel change • Insert an extension into the socket spanner
Centring sleeves are supplied in the tool • Lower the spare wheel by turning the socket
kit of vehicles with aluminium wheels, in spanner with the extension anticlockwise
order to protect the rims and to facilitate • Remove the brace
• Use wheel chocks to prevent the vehicle from
the wheel change. Centring sleeves for
rolling away
steel wheels can be ordered through any Jacking points
MAN Service workshop.
CAUTION
Danger of injury!
The vehicle may drop uncontrollably
if the jack is overloaded, tilts or slips.
Server injuries can result.
334
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
Therefore, please always ensure the Front axle with air suspension, non-driven Tandem rear axle with leaf-spring
following: suspension
• Place the jack on a flat, level
surface that is solid enough to
carry the load
Note
You can place a wooden block under the
jack to ensure the jacking height will be
adequate.
Front axle with leaf-spring suspension,

non-driven
• Place the jack in the recess 6 in the holder on

the front axle beam on the side of the vehicle • Place the jack in the recess 9 in the holder
at which a wheel is to be changed on the axle beam on the side of the vehicle
at which a wheel is to be changed
Driven front axle
Rear axle with air suspension
• Place the jack in the recess 5 underneath

the spring pack on the side of the vehicle at
which a wheel is to be changed
• Place the jack in the recess 7 underneath the

front axle beam on the side of the vehicle at
which a wheel is to be changed
335
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
• Place the jack in the recess 10 on the air • Position the jack on the side at which the One-piece rims without tyre pressure
suspension mounting on the side of the wheel is to be changed underneath the axle monitoring
vehicle at which a wheel is to be changed beam 11, ensuring that the jack does not slip
Removing the wheel
Automatically lifting trailing or leading axle Lifting trailing or leading axle
Note
The leading or trailing axle is raised if
the vehicle is unladen or partially laden.
It may be necessary to lower the
trailing or leading axle pneumatically
before changing the wheel, in order to
avoid the wheel pressing against the
mudguard during the wheel change, see
“Electronically controlled air suspension
(ECAS)”, Page 96.
• Position the jack on the side at which the
wheel is to be changed underneath the axle • Unscrew all wheel nuts and remove them
beam 11, ensuring that the jack does not slip except for three equally distributed nuts
Note
• Push centring sleeves 1 up to the stop on
The leading or trailing axle is raised if
two free wheel studs located opposite one
the vehicle is unladen or partially laden.
another
The vehicle does not have to be raised
• Position the jack at the jacking point provided
for the wheel change.
• Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
Place the jack on a wooden block and
changed is clear of the ground
under the axle beam in order to secure
• Unscrew the remaining wheel nuts and
the vehicle.
remove the wheel from the wheel hub
It may be necessary to remove the
mudguard before changing the wheel,
in order to avoid the wheel pressing
against the mudguard during the wheel
change
336
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
Fitting the wheel Tightening torque for wheel nuts (8-hole • Unscrew the valve extension from the tyre
rims) valve 3
Hub centring............. ..................475 ± 25 Nm • Unscrew all wheel nuts 4 and remove them
except for three equally distributed nuts
Tightening torque for wheel nuts (10-hole • Push centring sleeves up to the stop on
rims) two free wheel studs located opposite one
Hub centring............. ..................575 ± 25 Nm another
Stud centring............. .................475 ± 25 Nm • Position the jack at the jacking point provided
• Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
Front wheels with tyre pressure monitoring changed is clear of the ground
(TPM) • Unscrew the remaining wheel nuts 4 and
remove the wheel from the wheel hub
Note
If tyres are fitted that have a different
Fitting the front wheel
• Clean the contact surface on the rim 2, wheel nominal tyre pressure, e.g. changing
nuts and wheel studs between winter and summer tyres, the Note
• Guide the wheel onto the wheel studs with nominal pressure must be entered in The wheel modules in the wheel
the help of the centring sleeves 1 the Vehicle menu, see “Tyre pressure embellishers are programmed for the
• Screw on the wheel nuts and use a wrench monitoring system”, Page 206. corresponding wheel position (e.g. “front
to tighten them in a crosswise pattern until left”) and must not be swapped over.
finger-tight Removing the front wheel • Clean the contact surface on the rim, wheel
• Remove the centring sleeves 1 and screw on nuts and wheel studs
the remaining wheel nuts • Guide the front wheel onto the wheel studs
• Use the jack to lower the vehicle with the help of the centring sleeves
• Tighten the wheel nuts in a crosswise pattern • Screw on the front wheel with two wheel nuts
to the prescribed tightening torque 4 located opposite one another
• Remove the chocks • Remove the centring sleeves.
• Retighten the wheel nuts to the prescribed • Push on the wheel embellisher so that the
tightening torque after a short test drive and valve extension can be screwed onto the tyre
after about 50 – 150 km (30 – 90 miles) valve 3.
• Regularly check that the wheel nuts are firmly • Screw on the remaining wheel nuts 4 and
seated use a wrench to tighten them in a crosswise
pattern until finger-tight
• Use the jack to lower the vehicle
337
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
• Tighten the wheel nuts 4 in a crosswise Removing the rear wheel

pattern to the prescribed tightening torque
• Screw the valve extension onto the tyre valve
3 and tighten it
• Check the screw connection of the tyre valve
for leaks
• Correct the tyre inflation pressure if
necessary (the ignition must be switched off
when doing this)
• Remove the chocks
• Retighten the wheel nuts 4 to the prescribed
tightening torque after a short test drive and • Unscrew all wheel nuts 4 and remove them
after about 50 – 150 km (30 – 90 miles) except for three equally distributed nuts 4
• Regularly check that the wheel nuts 4 are Note • Push centring sleeves up to the stop on
firmly seated The wheel modules 5 are programmed two free wheel studs located opposite one
for the corresponding wheel position another
Tightening torque for wheel nuts (10-hole (e.g. “rear left”) and must not be • Position the jack at the jacking point provided
rims) swapped over. • Raise the vehicle until the rear wheel to be
Hub centring............. .................. 575 ± 25 Nm • Unscrew the valve extension 6 from the tyre changed is clear of the ground
valve 3 • Unscrew the remaining wheel nuts 4 and
Super-wide tyres with tyre pressure • Mark the position of the wheel module 5 remove the rear wheel from the wheel hub
monitoring (TPM) • Unscrew the wheel nuts 4 and remove the
wheel module 5 Fitting the rear wheel
Note • Clean the contact surface on the rim, wheel
If tyres are fitted that have a different nuts and wheel studs
nominal tyre pressure, e.g. changing • Guide the rear wheel onto the wheel studs
between winter and summer tyres, the with the help of the centring sleeves
nominal pressure must be entered in • Screw on the rear wheel using two wheel
the Vehicle menu, see “Tyre pressure nuts 4 located opposite one another and
monitoring system”, Page 206. each offset to the tyre valve 3 by 90°
• Remove the centring sleeves
338
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
• Regularly check that the wheel nuts 4 are Removing the rear wheels
firmly seated
Tightening torque for wheel nuts (10-hole

rims)
Hub centring............. ..................575 ± 25 Nm
Twin tyres with tyre pressure monitoring

(TPM)
Note
Mark the installation positions of the
• Place the wheel module 5 onto the wheel wheels and the wheel modules before
studs in accordance with the marking 3 and changing the wheel. The tyre valves
and wheel modules of the inboard and 5a Wheel module of the outboard twin tyre
screw it on with two wheel nuts 4
outboard twin tyres must be returned 5b Wheel module of the inboard twin tyre
• Screw on the remaining wheel nuts 4 and
use a wrench to tighten them in a crosswise to the same position in relation to one
Note
pattern until finger-tight another after the wheel change as
The wheel modules 5 are programmed
• Use the jack to lower the vehicle before the wheel change.
for the corresponding wheel position
• Tighten the wheel nuts 4 in a crosswise If tyres are fitted that have a different
(e.g. “rear left outboard”) and must not
nominal tyre pressure, e.g. changing
pattern to the prescribed tightening torque be swapped over.
• Screw the valve extension 6 onto the tyre between winter and summer tyres, the
valve 3 and tighten it nominal pressure must be entered in
the Vehicle menu, see “Tyre pressure
• Check the screw connection of the tyre valve
3 for leaks monitoring system”, Page 206.
• Correct the tyre inflation pressure if
necessary (the ignition must be switched off
when doing this)
• Remove the chocks
• Retighten the wheel nuts 4 to the prescribed
tightening torque after a short test drive and
after about 50 – 150 km (30 – 90 miles)
339
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
• Mark the installation position of the wheel Therefore, please always ensure the Note
module 5a of the outboard twin tyre following: To restrict the pressure loss from the
• Unscrew the valve extension 6 from the tyre • It is essential to correct the tyre inboard twin tyre, also unscrew the valve
valve 3 inflation pressure after changing a extension 7 when changing the outboard
• Unscrew the wheel nuts 4 and remove the wheel rear wheel.
wheel module 5 • Mark the installation position of the inboard
rear wheel
• Remove the inboard rear wheel from the
wheel hub
Fitting the rear wheels

• Clean the contact surface on the rim, wheel
nuts and wheel studs
• Guide the inboard rear wheel onto the wheel
hub with the help of the centring sleeves,
observing the correct installation position
• Thread the wheel module 5b of the inboard
• Undo all wheel nuts 4 and remove them all twin tyre through the outboard rim
• Mark the installation position of the wheel except for three equally distributed nuts 4 • Guide the outboard rear wheel onto the
module 5b of the inboard outboard twin tyre • Locate the jack at the designated jacking wheel hub with the help of the centring
• Unscrew the wheel nuts 4 and remove the point sleeves, observing the correct installation
wheel module 5b • Raise the vehicle until the rear wheel to be position
• Thread the wheel module 5b through the rim changed is clear of the ground • Screw on the rear wheels with two wheel nuts
of the outboard twin tyre • Mark the installation position of the outboard 4 located opposite one another
rear wheel • Remove the centring sleeves
CAUTION • Unscrew the remaining wheel nuts 4 and
Danger of accidents! remove the outboard rear wheel from the
The inboard twin tyre loses air wheel hub
when the valve extension 7 is • Unscrew the valve extension 7 from the tyre
removed from the wheel module valve of the inboard twin tyre
5b. Serious accidents can be caused
by inadequate tyre inflation pressure.
340
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
installation position and screw it on with two Trilex rims

wheel nuts 4
Note
• Screw on the remaining wheel nuts 4 and
On twin Trilex wheels, there is an
use a wrench to tighten them in a crosswise
intermediate ring between the inboard
pattern until finger-tight
and outboard Trilex wheels. The
intermediate ring presses the inboard
• Tighten the wheel nuts 4 in a crosswise
Trilex wheel onto the wheel rim when
pattern to the prescribed tightening torque
the outboard Trilex wheel is mounted.
• Screw the valve extension 5a onto the tyre
valve 3 and tighten it
• Check the screw connection of the tyre valve Removing the Trilex wheel
3 for leaks
• Fit the valve extension 7 with new O-rings • Check the tyre inflation pressure
and insert it into the wheel module 5b • Correct the tyre inflation pressure if
• Place the wheel module 5b of the inboard necessary (the ignition must be switched off
twin tyre onto the wheel studs observing the when doing this)
installation position and screw it on with two • Remove the chocks
wheel nuts 4 • Retighten the wheel nuts 4 to the prescribed
tightening torque after a short test drive and
after about 50 – 150 km (30 – 90 miles)
• Regularly check that the wheel nuts 4 are
firmly seated
Tightening torque for wheel nuts (10-hole • Unscrew all collar nuts 8 and remove them
rims) except for three equally distributed collar
Hub centring............. ..................575 ± 25 Nm nuts 8
• Position the jack at the jacking point provided
• Raise the vehicle until the Trilex wheel to be
changed is clear of the ground
• Unscrew the remaining collar nuts 8
• Place the wheel module 5a of the outboard • Remove the clamping plates 10
twin tyre onto the wheel studs observing the • Remove the Trilex wheel from the wheel hub
341
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
Fitting the Trilex wheel Tightening torque for collar nuts and wheel Inflating tyres with test connection
rim nuts
Note CAUTION
Collar nut 8.................................335 ± 15 Nm
When mounting the Trilex wheel, look Danger of injury!
Wheel rim nut 9............. .............575 ± 25 Nm
out for any openings on the brake drum The tyre may burst if the tyre inflation
for the tyre valve. When the rim is put on, pressure is too high.
Taking up a spare wheel
the tyre valve must be located between Therefore, please always ensure the
two spoke mitres. following:
• Clean the contact surface on the rim, collar • Do not exceed the maximum tyre
nuts 8 and Trilex bolts inflation pressure
• Place the Trilex wheel onto the wheel hub
• Put on two clamping plates 10 at opposite Tyre inflating hose without pressure gauge
positions (top and bottom)
• Screw on the collar nuts 8 and use a wrench
to tighten them until finger-tight
• Put on the remaining clamping plates 10
• Screw on the remaining collar nuts 8 and use
a wrench to tighten them until finger-tight
• Tighten all collar nuts 8 to the prescribed • Insert the brace in the spare wheel with fixing
tightening torque. Work in succession, not pins and fix it in place
diagonally across, around the rim several • Turn the socket spanner with the extension
times increasing the torque as you go. to raise the spare wheel and use the fixing
• Check the tyre inflation pressure pins to align it with the holder on the spare
• Correct the tyre inflation pressure if wheel hoist
necessary (the ignition must be switched off • Screw on the mounting nuts 1 and tighten
when doing this) them
• Remove the chocks • Slacken the cable of the spare wheel hoist
• Retighten the collar nuts 8 to the prescribed and remove the socket spanner from the
tightening torque after a short test drive and hexagon profile 3
after about 50 – 150 km (30 – 90 miles) It is possible to secure a padlock in the hole in
• Regularly check that the collar nuts 8 and a fixing pin (to deter theft).
wheel rim nuts 9 are firmly seated
342
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing a wheel
Note Tyre inflating hose with pressure gauge

The tyre can be inflated using the test
connection for either compressed air Note
reservoir “21” (brake circuit I) or “22” The tyre can be inflated using the test
(brake circuit II). connection for either compressed air
Prior to this, the reservoir pressure reservoir “21” (brake circuit I) or “22”
in the corresponding brake circuit (brake circuit II).
must be reduced by venting air from • Remove the cap from the test connection
the compressed air reservoir until • Remove the protective caps from the tyre
the reservoir pressure is below the valves
prescribed tyre inflation pressure. • Attach the connection of the tyre inflating
• Remove the cap from the test connection hose to the tyre valve
• Remove the protective caps from the tyre • Screw the other end of the tyre inflating hose
Note onto the test connection with a union nut
valves
The approximate tyre inflation pressure • Start the engine and run it at increased revs
• Attach the connection of the tyre inflating
can be read off the compressed until the specified tyre inflation pressure is
hose to the tyre valve
air reservoir gauge. The exact tyre reached
• Screw the other end of the tyre inflating hose
inflation pressure must be checked and • Remove the tyre inflating hose
onto the test connection with a union nut
corrected if necessary. • Put the cap onto the test connection
• Start the engine and run it at increased revs
until the specified tyre inflation pressure is • Remove the tyre inflating hose • Put the protective caps on the tyre valves
reached • Put the cap onto the test connection
• Put the protective caps on the tyre valves
• Run the engine until the shut-off pressure is
reached
• Check the tyre inflation pressure with a
pressure gauge and correct the pressure if
necessary
343
Do-it-yourself jobs
TOW-STARTING AND TOWING AWAY
Basic principles for tow-starting – The steering system must be fully – A towing lug on all other vehicles is allowed
and towing away mechanically and hydraulically functional to be subjected to a tensile force of max. 23 t
– The wheels must be able to turn, there must in line with the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Towing away involves establishing a secure not be any axle damage When towing with only one towing lug, the
connection to a broken-down vehicle on It is essential to obtain assistance from broken-down vehicle will tend to “crab” and the
consolidated ground. All other situations a professional recovery company if the load capacity of the towing lug is reduced to
and conditions come under the heading of preconditions for towing are not met. about 10 t. This means the actual total weight
“recovery”. The work involved in the latter case of the broken-down vehicle is not allowed to be
must be undertaken by a professional recovery more than 15 t.
Breakdown recovery
company.
Always comply with the regulations of the MAN does not recommend tow-starting the
specific country when towing away. For your vehicle to start the engine. We recommend
own safety when towing, switch on the hazard jump starting to start the engine, see “Jump
warning lights of the towing and broken-down starting and start assistance”, Page 347. It is
vehicles. essential that the battery and the starter of the
broken-down vehicle are intact.
Preconditions for towing away
Vehicles with plastic bumpers
It is only permitted for a tow rod or tow rod
with tow bar to be used for towing, in order to Fitting the towing lug
ensure a secure connection between the towing For towing and tow-starting, the vehicle is • Remove the cover 1 over the tapped hole for
and broken-down vehicles. Always remove the equipped with two mounting threads for the
propshafts of the broken-down vehicle, in order the towing lug
towing lugs. The tapped holes are in the
to avoid serious damage to the vehicle. bumper behind two covers.
The following aspects are very important when – A towing lug on 4x2 and 6x2 vehicles
towing with a tow rod: with leaf front suspension is allowed to be
– Keep the engine running during the tow subjected to a tensile force of max. 14 t in
– The compressed air pressurisation system line with the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
and compressed air brake system must be
intact
344
Do-it-yourself jobs
To achieve a stable connection on both towing

lugs and ensure an even force transfer, we
recommend that the towing bar 5 also be used.
The towing bar and a second towing lug can be
obtained from any MAN Service workshop.
– The towing bar 5 on 4x2 and 6x2 vehicles
with leaf front suspension is allowed to be
subjected to a tensile force of max. 28 t in
line with the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
– The towing bar 5 on all other vehicles is
allowed to be subjected to a tensile force
of max. 46 t in line with the longitudinal axis
• Screw the towing lug 2 completely into the of the vehicle. • Unlock and pull out the pin 6
mounting thread • Insert the tow rod into the tow bar hitch
• Pull the spring cotter pin 4 out of the pin 3 • Insert and lock the pin 6
• Pull the pin 3 out of the towing lug 2
Vehicles with steel bumpers
• Insert the tow rod into the towing lug 2 and
Vehicles with steel bumpers are equipped with Preparations for towing
secure it with pin 3
a central tow bar hitch.
• Secure the pin 3 using spring cotter pins 4
– The tow bar hitch on light four-axle vehicles, Disconnecting the driveline
4x2 and 6x2 vehicles, is allowed to be
Towing bar
subjected to a tensile force of max. 18 t in
line with the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
– The tow bar hitch on all other vehicles is
allowed to be subjected to a tensile force
of max. 25 t in line with the longitudinal axis
of the vehicle.
Prior to towing, always interrupt the driveline by

removing the propshaft.
345
Do-it-yourself jobs
• Support the propshaft • Support the propshaft between the transfer

case and the front axle
• Support the propshaft between the transfer
case and the rear axle
• Unscrew the mounting bolts 7 from the
propshaft at the front axle and at the transfer
case, and remove the propshaft
Towing with a tow rod
Towing
The vehicle to be towed must have a driver to
steer and brake the vehicle.
• Unscrew the mounting bolts 7 from the • Start the engine
propshaft at the driven axle and at the • Charge the compressed air system up to the
gearbox, and remove the propshaft shut-off pressure
• Shift the gearbox to neutral “N”
Disconnecting the driveline in all-wheel • Tow the vehicle slowly
drive vehicles • Do not exceed the max. towing speed of
60 km/h (37 mph)
After towing
• Stop the engine after towing
• Apply the parking brake and use chocks to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away
Prior to towing, always interrupt the driveline by

removing the propshafts.
346
Do-it-yourself jobs
Jump starting and start assistance
JUMP STARTING AND START ASSISTANCE
• If you get battery acid in your eyes,

Fundamental principles – Before defrosting, check vehicle batteries
rinse thoroughly with water and
for mechanical damage (e.g. cracks and
seek medical assistance
If the engine cannot be started because the fissures)
• If you swallow battery acid,
vehicle batteries are too flat, it is possible to – If battery acid has leaked out, have the
rinse out your mouth with water
start the engine using jump leads and the surrounding electronic components and
and seek medical assistance
batteries of a second vehicle. Before using the cables renewed in a MAN Service workshop
immediately
jump leads, it is essential to take account of the
CAUTION
operating instructions for use of the jump leads. WARNING Risk of explosion!
Only authorised jump leads with an adequate Danger of damage!
conductor cross section are allowed to be used. Frozen vehicle batteries can explode
Danger of damage to electronic when the jump leads are connected.
components due to voltage spikes. Therefore, please always ensure the
Preparations Therefore, please always ensure the following:
following: • It is essential to defrost
CAUTION • Do not use a boost-charger or frozen vehicle batteries before
Danger of injury! jump starter to jump-start the jump-starting
Danger of acid burns to the eyes and vehicle
the skin by leaking battery acid. Follow these start assistance instructions:
Therefore, please always ensure the – Before jump-starting, it is essential to read
following: the instructions about preventing damage
• Wear protective gloves and when handling batteries, see “Safe handling
protective glasses when working of batteries”, Page 404 Start assistance with jump leads
on the batteries – Only use batteries with the same rated with batteries next to each other
• If you get battery acid on any areas voltage (24 volts) for jump-starting
of your skin, thoroughly wash it off – The capacity (Ah) of the batteries providing CAUTION
with soap and water the power is not allowed to be significantly Risk of explosion!
• Change any splashed clothing less than the capacity of the batteries Risk of explosion due to spark
receiving the power formation and oxyhydrogen gas
– It is essential to defrost frozen batteries when disconnecting and connecting
before jump-starting the jump leads. Serious injuries can
be caused.
347
Do-it-yourself jobs
Therefore, please always ensure the Removing the cover from the battery box 3 Batteries in the vehicle receiving the
following: power
• Make sure the surrounding • Stop the engine of the vehicle providing the
area is well ventilated before power
disconnecting and connecting the • Connect the positive terminals of the
jump leads batteries together
• Comply with the sequence for • Connect the negative terminal of the battery
disconnecting and connecting the providing the power to a bright metal surface
jump leads on the engine block or gearbox of the vehicle
• Do not bring the terminal clips of receiving the power
the positive and negative leads
into contact with one another Note
• Make sure that the vehicle Do not connect the negative cable to the
receiving the power does not vehicle frame. The vehicle frame does
touch the vehicle providing the • Open the bayonet locks of the cover 1 of the not have an earth connection. This could
power. If the two vehicles are battery box lead to follow-on damage to the vehicle’s
touching, current may flow even • Remove the cover 1 from the battery box electrical system.
when only the positive terminals • Start the engine of the vehicle providing the
are connected. Connecting and disconnecting jump leads power
• Run the starter of the engine for the vehicle
WARNING receiving the power for a maximum of
Danger of damage! 15 seconds
Short circuit if the positive cable
touches electrically conductive Note
vehicle components. If the engine has not started after
Therefore, please always ensure the 15 seconds, wait about 2 minutes and
following: try again.
• Do not bring the positive cable • Stop the engine of the vehicle providing
(red) of the jump leads into contact the power once the engine of the vehicle
with electrically conductive vehicle receiving the power has started
components • Disconnect the negative cable of the jump
leads
2 Batteries in the vehicle providing the
• Disconnect the positive cable of the jump
power
leads
348
Do-it-yourself jobs
Start assistance in vehicles with • Run the starter of the engine for the vehicle • Stop the engine of the vehicle providing the
mechanical battery master switch receiving the power for a maximum of power
15 seconds • Switch off the ignition of the vehicle receiving
the power
Note
• Switch off the electrical battery isolator switch
If the engine has not started after
5 of the vehicle receiving the power by
15 seconds, wait about 2 minutes and
pushing the switch upwards
try again.
• Connect the jump leads
• Stop the engine of the vehicle providing • Push the electrical battery isolator switch 5
the power once the engine of the vehicle downwards to switch back on again.
receiving the power has started • Start the engine of the vehicle providing the
• Disconnect the jump leads power
Start assistance in vehicles with electrical receiving the power for a maximum of
battery isolator switch 15 seconds
Note
Note
The mechanical battery master switch
4 interrupts the connection between
the vehicle battery and the vehicle’s
try again.
electrical system.
The mechanical battery master switch 4 • Stop the engine of the vehicle providing
is located on the battery box. the power once the engine of the vehicle
receiving the power has started
• Stop the engine of the vehicle providing the
• Disconnect the jump leads
power
• Switch off the ignition of the vehicle receiving
Fitting the cover on the battery box
the power
• Place the cover 1 on the battery box
• Switch off the mechanical battery master
• Close the bayonet locks of the cover 1 of the
switch 4 of the vehicle receiving the power
Note battery box
The electrical battery isolator switch
• Switch the mechanical battery master switch
interrupts the connection between
4 back on
• Start the engine of the vehicle providing the
electrical system.
power
349
Do-it-yourself jobs
Start assistance with jump leads if WARNING

Danger of damage!
compact battery box is used
Short circuit if the positive cable
CAUTION touches electrically conductive
Risk of explosion! vehicle components.
Risk of explosion due to spark Therefore, please always ensure the
formation and oxyhydrogen gas following:
when disconnecting and connecting • Do not bring the positive cable
the jump leads. Serious injuries can (red) of the jump leads into contact
be caused. with electrically conductive vehicle
Therefore, please always ensure the components
following:
• Make sure the surrounding Opening the battery box • Fold the frame 2 forwards
area is well ventilated before • Press the cover 3 of the battery box
disconnecting and connecting the backwards and lift it off upwards
jump leads
• Comply with the sequence for Connecting and disconnecting jump leads
disconnecting and connecting the
jump leads
• Do not bring the terminal clips of
the positive and negative leads
into contact with one another
• Make sure that the vehicle
receiving the power does not
touch the vehicle providing the
power. If the two vehicles are
• Open the locks 1
touching, current may flow even
when only the positive terminals
are connected.
4 Positive terminal (+, red cover)
5 Negative terminal (–, white cover)
power
350
Do-it-yourself jobs
• Connect the positive terminals of the Start assistance in vehicles with • Run the starter of the engine for the vehicle
batteries together mechanical battery master switch receiving the power for a maximum of
• Connect the negative terminal of the battery 15 seconds
providing the power to a bright metal surface
Note
on the engine block or gearbox of the vehicle
receiving the power
Note try again.
Do not connect the negative cable to the • Stop the engine of the vehicle providing
vehicle frame. The vehicle frame does the power once the engine of the vehicle
not have an earth connection. This could receiving the power has started
lead to follow-on damage to the vehicle’s • Disconnect the jump leads
electrical system.
• Start the engine of the vehicle providing the Start assistance in vehicles with electrical
power battery isolator switch
• Run the starter of the engine for the vehicle Note
receiving the power for a maximum of The mechanical battery master switch
15 seconds 4 interrupts the connection between
Note the vehicle battery and the vehicle’s
If the engine has not started after electrical system.
15 seconds, wait about 2 minutes and The mechanical battery master switch 4
try again. is located on the battery box.
• Stop the engine of the vehicle providing • Stop the engine of the vehicle providing the
the power once the engine of the vehicle power
receiving the power has started • Switch off the ignition of the vehicle receiving
• Disconnect the negative cable of the jump the power
leads • Switch off the mechanical battery master
• Disconnect the positive cable of the jump switch 4 of the vehicle receiving the power
Note
leads • Connect the jump leads
The electrical battery isolator switch
• Switch the mechanical battery master switch
interrupts the connection between
4 back on
electrical system.
power
351
Do-it-yourself jobs

power
• Switch off the ignition of the vehicle receiving
the power
• Switch off the electrical battery isolator switch
of the vehicle receiving the power by pushing
the switch upwards
• Push the electrical battery isolator switch
downwards to switch back on again.
power
receiving the power for a maximum of
15 seconds
Note
try again.
• Stop the engine of the vehicle providing
the power once the engine of the vehicle
receiving the power has started
• Disconnect the jump leads
Closing the battery box

• Push the cover 3 of the battery box in at the
back
• Press the cover down until you can hear it
clip in
• Make sure the retaining hook 6 is hooked in
• Fold the frame 2 back
• Close the locks 1
352
Do-it-yourself jobs
Releasing spring-loaded brake cylinders in an emergency
RELEASING SPRING-LOADED BRAKE CYLINDERS IN AN EMERGENCY
We recommend that only a recovery specialist

should release the spring-loaded brake
cylinders in an emergency and only in the
following situations:
– To recover the vehicle from a hazardous
situation
– To recover the vehicle with the assistance of
a qualified recorder specialist
The procedure for releasing the spring-loaded
brake cylinders in an emergency is described
in the “Trucknology® mobile - Breakdown
assistance, recovery, towing” booklet. This can
be obtained from any MAN Service workshop.
353
Do-it-yourself jobs
Partially masking the headlights, right-hand/left-hand traffic
PARTIALLY MASKING THE HEADLIGHTS, RIGHT-HAND/LEFT-HAND TRAFFIC
Introduction The edges of the cut-to-size adhesive film must

be placed on the upper and glass edge and
The headlight's cone of light is asymmetrical so vehicle-outside glass edge for affixing. Start at
as to illuminate a wide area at the edge of the the beginning of the glass radius.
roadway. Halogen headlights:
In countries where the traffic drives on the 1 Left-hand drive vehicle:
opposite side of the road to the traffic in the 1a Driver's side
country of registration, the cone of light shines 1b Co-driver’s side
towards oncoming traffic rather than the edge 2 Right-hand drive vehicle:
of the roadway. 2a Co-driver’s side
2b Driver's side
CAUTION
Danger of accidents! Xenon headlights:
In countries where the traffic drives 3 Left-hand drive vehicle:
on the opposite side of the road 3a Driver's side
to the traffic in the country of 3b Co-driver’s side
registration, oncoming road users
may be dazzled. 4 Right-hand drive vehicle:
Serious accidents can be caused. 4a Co-driver’s side
Therefore: 4b Driver's side
• Mask the headlights using an
opaque adhesive film
• Cut some commercially available opaque
adhesive film to the following dimensions (in
mm)
• Mask the relevant area on the headlight glass
Vehicle with plastic bumper
The area to be masked on the headlight glass

is the same for halogen and xenon headlights.
354
Do-it-yourself jobs
355
Do-it-yourself jobs
356
Do-it-yourself jobs
357
Do-it-yourself jobs
358
Do-it-yourself jobs
Applying the adhesive film

The area to be masked on the headlight glass
is the same for halogen and xenon headlights.
The cut-to-size adhesive film must be affixed
to the headlights as shown on the following
diagrams:
– Driver's side: Horizontally over the marking
lines on the headlight glass (shown by
broken lines on the diagrams)
– Co-driver’s side: Horizontally next to the
marking lines on the headlight glass (shown 5b Co-driver’s side 6b Driver's side
by broken lines on the diagrams) Right-hand drive vehicle:
Left-hand drive vehicle: Adhesive film
5 Left-hand drive vehicle:
5a Driver's side
5b Co-driver’s side
6 Right-hand drive vehicle:
6a Co-driver’s side
6b Driver's side
6a Co-driver’s side
5a Driver's side
359
Do-it-yourself jobs
360
Do-it-yourself jobs
361
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing the engine oil
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
The engine oil is changed at the regular

maintenance intervals and this is therefore
described in the Maintenance Manual. The
Maintenance Manual is not supplied with the
vehicle. This can be obtained from any MAN
Service workshop.
Note
Only use oils approved by MAN.
For service products approved by MAN
see the supplied “Maintenance Record”
booklet.
362
Do-it-yourself jobs
Poly-V-belt
POLY-V-BELT
The poly-V-belt is tensioned using an automatic

tensioning device. The tension is checked at
the regular maintenance intervals and this is
described in the Maintenance Manual. The
Maintenance Manual is not supplied with the
vehicle but can be obtained from any MAN
Service workshop.
Check the condition of the poly-V-belt, see
“Every month before starting the engine”,
Page 306.
363
Do-it-yourself jobs
Fuel system
FUEL SYSTEM
Bleeding the fuel system Draining the fuel service centre

(FSC)
Note
The fuel system must be bled if the WARNING
vehicle runs out of fuel or after the fuel Danger of damage!
filter has been changed.
Risk of environmental protection from
leaking fuel.
Therefore:
• Prevent any uncontrolled leakage
of fuel when draining water from
the fuel service centre (FSC)
• Unscrew the drain plug 2 by max.
two turns
Note
To avoid the condensation freezing, you
should always drain the water from the
fuel service centre (FSC) before the
onset of cold weather.
and backwards manually”, Page 116 or see • Tilt the cab, see “Tilting the cab forwards
“Tilting the cab forwards and backwards and backwards manually”, Page 116 or see
electrically”, Page 119 “Tilting the cab forwards and backwards
• Unscrew the primer 1 of the hand-operated electrically”, Page 119
pump • Place a suitable collecting tank under the fuel
• Use the primer 1 to pump the hand pump service centre (FSC)
until resistance can be felt • Unscrew the drain plug 2 by max. two turns
• Screw in the primer 1 of the hand-operated • Let the condensation drain out
pump and tighten it • Tighten the drain plug 2 until it is finger-tight
• Tilt the cab backwards • Tilt the cab backwards
Tightening torque
Drain plug 2.................................... 2 to 4 Nm
364
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Disconnecting: First the negative

Description of the electrical – Connect the disconnected positive and
lead, then the positive lead
system negative cables together to make a
Connecting: First the positive lead,
conductive electrical connection.
then the negative lead
The electrical system of the vehicle consists – Connect a protection device (ANTIZAP
of the batteries, the central electrical system, SERVICE SENTRY) as described in the
General information instructions supplied with the unit.
the vehicle management computer (FFR), the
– Do not use a boost-charger to jump-start the – Always weld using direct current. Check the
central on-board computer (ZBR) and several
vehicle. electrodes for correct polarity.
control units for the various electrical and
– Always disconnect the positive and negative – Switch on the mechanical battery master
electronic components.
leads before boost-charging batteries. switch if there is one.
The vehicle electrical power supply is provided
– To avoid short-circuits, the ignition must be – If there is an electrical battery isolator switch,
by vehicle batteries that are recharged by an
switched off before the wiring plugs of the shunt it at the connections of the solenoid
alternator when the engine is running.
control units are disconnected or connected switch.
The electrical system voltage is 24 volts
up. – Earth the welding equipment at a point
provided by two batteries connected in series.
– Always renew damaged sockets. offering good conductive properties, as close
– It is essential for 12-volt units to be powered as possible to the welding area.
Basic measures via a transformer. – Do not lay the cables to the welding
equipment in parallel to electrical cables
WARNING When washing the vehicle in the vehicle.
Danger of damage! – Protect the starter and alternator against – To avoid voltage peaks, make sure the parts
Damage to electrical components by moisture, e.g. splash water. to be welded are joined together so there is
short circuit. – Always switch off the ignition and the lights a good conductive connection, e.g. using the
Therefore, please always ensure the before cleaning the vehicle. negative clip of the welding equipment.
following: – Only use a compressed air gun to clean
• Switch off the battery master out sockets – never do this with water or During painting work on the vehicle
switch or disconnect the batteries mechanical objects.
before working on electrical WARNING
components When doing electric arc welding on the Danger of damage!
• Comply with the sequence for vehicle Control units can be damaged by
disconnecting and connecting the – Always disconnect the batteries. high temperatures.
batteries
365
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
Therefore, please always ensure the Changes to the electrical system Vehicle body components
following:
• Only expose control units to high WARNING
Retrofitting electronic components
temperatures up to max. 95 °C for Danger of damage!
Changes to the electrical system, e.g. installing
short periods. various control units, may make it necessary to Damage to wiring harnesses and
• At relatively high temperatures up reprogram the electronic system of the vehicle. electrical components by short circuit
to max. 85 °C, do not exceed a Always contact an MAN Service workshop and incorrect polarity.
drying time of two hours. before undertaking such changes on the Therefore, please always ensure the
– Remove the batteries. electrical system. following:
– Avoid temperatures above 90 °C (drying Work on the vehicle management computer • Body components are only allowed
oven). (FFR) and/or the central on-board computer to be mounted on the vehicle in
(ZBR) is only allowed to be performed in a MAN accordance with the valid MAN
When the engine is running Service workshop. Guidelines to fitting bodies
• When body components are
Note retrofitted onto the vehicle, route
Even straightforward work on the an extra negative cable with an
electrical system, such as retrofitting adequate cross section from the
additional lighting elements, may require load to the central earthing point
data to be entered and updated in on the engine or the battery
the electronic system (e.g. vehicle • Do not use the vehicle frame as an
management computer or central earth return, because the vehicle
on-board computer) using the MAN frame does not have an earth
diagnostic and programming system. connection
Unless express reference is made to • It is essential to avoid incorrect
a self-programming process of the polarity
corresponding electronic component,
– Never disconnect the batteries from the changes to the vehicle’s electrical
circuit or switch off the battery master switch system must be made by a MAN Service Handling batteries
when the engine is running. workshop.
– If the “Battery” check lamp comes on and CAUTION
a message appears on the display, it is Risk of explosion!
imperative to visit a MAN Service workshop. Risk of explosion due to highly
explosive oxyhydrogen gas.
366
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
Therefore, please always ensure the Above 12.6 V Battery charged Taking batteries into operation
following: Below 12.6 V Recharge the battery, do not
• Only have work on the batteries use a boost-charger
performed by a MAN Service The open-circuit voltage of the battery is set
workshop approx. 5 hours after the last charging with
the engine running or 1 hour after the last
Parking the vehicle for longer than 1 week discharging by disconnecting the battery.
Disconnect the negative terminals if the vehicle We recommend a charge current of 1/10 of the
is to be parked for longer than one week. battery capacity, see battery identification (e.g.
Switching off the battery master switch alone a charge current of 9 A for a capacity of 88 Ah).
is not sufficient! – Lead sulphate forms in batteries which are
Comply with the following instructions when severely discharged. Generally speaking, it
parking the vehicle for longer than 1 week: is impossible to regenerate them by charging
– Disconnect the electrical connection by when this has happened.
disconnecting the negative terminals – Leave the battery to rest for about 1 hour – Batteries are ready for use if they are filled
– Charge the batteries before parking the after charging before using it. with electrolyte up to the MAX mark 2.
vehicle (batteries with a low charge level can Note
freeze and suffer irreparable damage) Storage and transport of batteries If the battery case is coloured, the
– Store the batteries in a cool but frost-free – Store batteries in a cool but frost-free, dry electrolyte level of batteries ready for
place if you remove them place. use must be 10 to 15 mm above the top
– Check the charge level of the batteries – Recharge the batteries if the battery voltage edge of the plates in each cell.
regularly and correct the charge if necessary is below 12.6 V.
– Recharge the battery if there is insufficient
by recharging – Store and transport the batteries horizontal
power to start the engine
and secure from tilting, so as to prevent any
Battery life leakage of battery acid.
Maintaining batteries
Comply with the following instructions when – To avoid short circuits, do not remove the
Batteries need regular care. Even
taking the vehicle out of service for longer than covers from the positive terminal until you
zero-maintenance batteries require regular
1 week, so as to achieve a long service life of are about to connect up the terminals.
care. Zero-maintenance only means that there
the vehicle batteries: – Place the protective caps on the positive
is no need to check the electrolyte level if
Measure the open-circuit voltage or check terminals of the removed “old” batteries.
the vehicle is used under normal operating
the electrolyte strength at regular intervals (at
conditions.
least once a month) in order to avoid battery
– Keep batteries clean and dry
exhaustion.
Reference values for open-circuit voltage:
367
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
CAUTION Checking the electrolyte level • If you get battery acid in your eyes,
Risk of explosion! rinse thoroughly with water and
Wiping down the battery with a CAUTION seek medical assistance
dry cloth can lead to the battery Risk of explosion! • If you swallow battery acid,
exploding due to the electrostatic Highly explosive oxyhydrogen gas rinse out your mouth with water
charge build-up. builds up during lengthy journeys and seek medical assistance
Therefore, please always ensure the and when charging the batteries, immediately
following: particularly if you are using a • Only have work on the batteries
• Only wipe down batteries with boost-charger. performed by a MAN Service
damp cloths Therefore, please always ensure the workshop
– In the case of low-maintenance batteries, following: • Replace damaged batteries
• Take particular care after long immediately
check the electrolyte level regularly and top
journeys and when charging the • If battery acid has leaked out,
up with distilled water if necessary.
batteries. have the surrounding electronic
– In case of considerable water consumption
• Ensure adequate ventilation in the and pneumatic components and
in the battery, have the alternator regulator
room. cables renewed in a MAN Service
checked at a MAN Service workshop.
• Thoroughly ventilate the battery workshop
– Do not use any so-called electrolyte
box.
improvers.
• Do not use a boost-charger.
– Recharge the battery if the acid strength is
below 1.21 kg/l. CAUTION
Danger of injury!
Vehicle batteries, batteries next to Leaking battery acid can cause acid
each other burns to the eyes and the skin.
Note following:
The vehicle batteries are located in the • Wear appropriate protective
battery box on the left-hand side of the clothing, protective glasses and
frame in the direction of travel. acid-proof gloves when working
on the batteries
• If you get battery acid on any areas • Remove the cover 1 from the battery box
of your skin, thoroughly wash it off • Unscrew and remove all locks on the top side
with soap and water of the batteries
• Change any splashed clothing • Check the electrolyte level
368
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
The electrolyte level should be 10 to 15 mm Note • Switch off the electrical battery
above the top edge of the plates in each cell. Many vehicle functions are controlled by isolator switch if there is one
The electrolyte level must not reach the tab the central on-board computer (ZBR) • Switch off the mechanical battery
projecting sideways into the opening. which must first save its latest status master switch if there is one
• Top up the electrolyte with distilled water if before it can be deenergised. • Comply with the sequence for
the electrolyte level is too low The central on-board computer also disconnecting and connecting the
• Do not top up with too much electrolyte monitors the lock functions of the batteries
• Place the cover 1 on the battery box vehicle. As a result, if the doors are open • Avoid short circuits through tools
• Close the bayonet locks of the cover 1 then it is necessary to wait for longer
than 5 minutes before disconnecting the
Disconnecting batteries or operating the batteries or operating the battery master
battery master switch switch. The waiting time is reduced to
Always stick to the following sequence when about 1 minute if the doors are closed.
disconnecting batteries or operating the battery Failure to wait for this time to elapse will
master switch: result in incorrect entries being made in
• Switch off the engine, see “Switching off the some control units, e.g. central on-board
engine”, Page 152 computer.
• Switch off all current consumers (e.g. hazard
warning lights and external/internal lighting) Connecting the batteries
• Switch off the ignition • First the positive lead, then the negative lead
• Close the doors • Remove the cover 1 from the battery box
• Wait approx. 1 minute Removing and installing batteries
• Switch off the mechanical battery master
WARNING
switch/electrical battery isolator switch if one
Danger of damage!
is fitted, see “Battery master switch and
battery isolator switch”, Page 144 Risk of damage to electrical
• Disconnect the batteries: Negative terminal components by short circuit.
first, then positive terminal Therefore, please always ensure the
following:
• Switch off the ignition before
renewing the batteries
• Close the doors
• Wait approx. 1 minute
369
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
Note Charging batteries CAUTION

When renewing the vehicle batteries, Risk of explosion!
always fit batteries of the same size, WARNING The battery may explode due to
capacity and voltage. Danger of damage! oxyhydrogen gas formation if the
Always replace both batteries at the Damage to electronic components electrolyte temperature is too high.
same time. Renewing only one battery when charging with a boost-charger. Therefore, please always ensure the
will significantly reduce the service life of Therefore, please always ensure the following:
the new battery. following: • Stop charging the battery if the
• Unscrew the mounting nuts 4 from the • Do not use a boost-charger electrolyte temperature exceeds
retaining hoops • Disconnect the batteries first 55 °C
• Disconnect the batteries if boost-charging is absolutely
– The battery has been fully charged when the
• Remove the batteries from the battery box necessary
acid strength and charge voltage do not rise
• Clean the battery posts and battery terminals • Remove the batteries from the vehicle any further within 2 hours
of the new battery and apply a light coat of • Connect the positive terminal of the battery – Check the electrolyte level after charging and
terminal grease to the positive output of the battery charger have the electrolyte level corrected in a MAN
• Insert new batteries into the battery box • Connect the negative terminal of the battery Service workshop if necessary
• Put on the retaining hoops to the negative output of the battery charger
• Screw on the mounting nuts 4 of the retaining
Note Vehicle batteries, compact battery
hoops and tighten them to the prescribed
Only use suitable DC battery chargers.
tightening torque box
Refer to the manufacturer’s operating
• Connect the new batteries
instructions! Note
• Tighten the mounting nuts 4 of the battery
Ensure good ventilation in the room The vehicle batteries are located in the
terminals to the prescribed tightening torque
whilst the battery is being charged. battery box on the left-hand side of the
• Place the cover 1 on the battery box
• Close the bayonet locks of the cover 1 • Switch on the charger frame in the direction of travel.
We recommend a charging current of 1/10 of the
Tightening torques battery’s capacity (Ah).
Mounting nut 4.......................................8 Nm • After charging, first switch off the charger and
Mounting nut for battery terminals............. .... 6 then disconnect the battery terminals
Nm
370
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
Opening the battery box Checking the electrolyte level of the top • Change out of any splashed
battery clothing
• If you get battery acid in your eyes,
CAUTION rinse thoroughly with water and
Risk of explosion! seek medical assistance
Highly explosive oxyhydrogen gas • If you swallow battery acid,
builds up during lengthy journeys rinse out your mouth with water
and when charging the batteries, and seek medical assistance
particularly if you are using a immediately
boost-charger. • Only have work on the batteries
Therefore, please always ensure the performed by a MAN Service
following: workshop
• Take particular care after long • Replace damaged batteries
journeys and when charging the immediately
• Open the locks 1 batteries • If battery acid has leaked out,
• Ensure adequate ventilation in the have the surrounding electronic
room. and pneumatic components and
• Thoroughly ventilate the battery cables renewed in a MAN Service
box workshop
• Do not use a boost-charger. • Unscrew and remove all locks on the top side
of the batteries
CAUTION
• Check the electrolyte level
Danger of injury!
The electrolyte level should be 10 to 15 mm
Leaking battery acid can cause acid above the top edge of the plates in each cell.
burns to the eyes and the skin. The electrolyte level must not reach the tab
Therefore, please always ensure the projecting sideways into the opening.
following: • Top up the electrolyte with distilled water if
• Wear appropriate protective
• Fold the frame 2 forwards the electrolyte level is too low
clothing, protective glasses and
• Press the cover 3 of the battery box • Do not top up with too much liquid
acid-proof gloves when working
backwards and lift it off upwards
on the batteries
• If you get battery acid on any areas
of your skin, thoroughly wash it off
with soap and water
371
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
Checking the electrolyte level of the bottom • Switch off the mechanical battery master
battery switch/electrical battery isolator switch if one
is fitted, see “Battery master switch and
battery isolator switch”, Page 144
Note
Many vehicle functions are controlled by
the central on-board computer (ZBR)
which must first save its latest status
before it can be deenergised.
The central on-board computer also
monitors the lock functions of the
vehicle. As a result, if the doors are open
• Pull out the bottom battery and place it on
then it is necessary to wait for longer
the frame 2
than 5 minutes before disconnecting the
• Check the electrolyte level as described
• Unhook the retaining hook 4 and fold the batteries or operating the battery master
above
frame downwards switch. The waiting time is reduced to
• Push the bottom battery in all the way
• Unfasten the screws 5 (for lowering the about 1 minute if the doors are closed.
• Push the cables 7 behind the holder 8
bottom battery) Failure to wait for this time to elapse will
• Insert the retaining clip 6
result in incorrect entries being made in
• Tighten the screws 5
some control units, e.g. central on-board
Tightening torque for screws 5............. ...9 Nm
computer.
Disconnecting batteries or operating the
battery master switch
Always stick to the following sequence when
disconnecting batteries or operating the battery
master switch:
• Switch off the engine, see “Switching off the
engine”, Page 152
• Switch off all current consumers (e.g. hazard
warning lights and external/internal lighting)
• Press the retaining clip 6 backwards and • Switch off the ignition
upwards and release it • Close the doors
• Pull the cables 7 (3 pcs.) out of the holder 7 • Wait approx. 1 minute
372
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
9 Positive terminal (+, red cover) Note

10 Negative terminal (–, white cover) When renewing the vehicle batteries,
• Disconnect the batteries: First negative, then always fit batteries of the same size,
positive capacity and voltage.
Always replace both batteries at the
Connecting the batteries same time. Renewing only one battery
• First positive, then negative will significantly reduce the service life of
the new battery.
Removing and installing the top battery • Disconnect the batteries
WARNING
Danger of damage!
Risk of damage to electrical • Align the clip 12
components by short circuit. • Put on the retainer 11
Therefore, please always ensure the • Tighten the screws 5
following: Tightening torque for screws 5............. ...9 Nm
• Switch off the ignition before
renewing the batteries Removing and installing the bottom battery
• Close the doors • Disconnect the batteries
• Wait approx. 1 minute • Pull out the battery as described in “Checking
• Switch off the electrical battery the electrolyte level of the bottom battery”
isolator switch if there is one • Clean the battery posts and battery terminals
• Switch off the mechanical battery • Unscrew the bolts 5
• Remove the retaining clip 11 of the new battery and apply a light coat of
master switch if there is one terminal grease
• Comply with the sequence for • Remove the battery from the battery box
• Clean the battery posts and battery terminals • Connect the new batteries
disconnecting and connecting the • Push in the new battery as described in
batteries of the new battery and apply a light coat of
terminal grease “Checking the electrolyte level of the bottom
• Avoid short circuits through tools battery”
• Insert the new battery into the battery box
• Connect the new batteries • Tighten the screws 5
Closing the battery box

• Push the cover 3 of the battery box in at the
back
373
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
• Press the cover down until you can hear it • After charging, first switch off the charger and Central electrical system
clip in then disconnect the battery terminals
• Hook in the retaining hook 4 Removing the cover for the central
CAUTION
• Fold the frame 2 back electrical system
Risk of explosion!
• Close the locks 1
The battery may explode due to
Charging batteries oxyhydrogen gas formation if the
electrolyte temperature is too high.
WARNING Therefore, please always ensure the
Danger of damage! following:
Damage to electronic components • Stop charging the battery if the
when charging with a boost-charger. electrolyte temperature exceeds
Therefore, please always ensure the 55 °C
following: – The battery is fully charged when the
• Do not use a boost-charger electrolyte strength and the charge voltage
• Disconnect the batteries first no longer increase over a 2 hour period
if boost-charging is absolutely – Check the electrolyte level after charging and
necessary have the electrolyte level corrected in a MAN • Fold down the flap 1
• Remove the batteries from the vehicle Service workshop if necessary • Lift and remove the cover 2
• Connect the positive terminal of the battery • Install the batteries
to the positive output of the battery charger Renewing fuses
• Connect the negative terminal of the battery WARNING
to the negative output of the battery charger Danger of damage!
Note Damage to electronic components
Only use suitable DC battery chargers. and control units.
Refer to the manufacturer’s operating Therefore, please always ensure the
instructions! following:
Ensure good ventilation in the room • Do not shunt out fuses
whilst the battery is being charged. • Do not install fuses with higher
fuse ratings. Fire risk!
• Switch on the charger
We recommend a charging current of 1/10 of the
battery’s capacity (Ah).
374
Do-it-yourself jobs
Electrical system
• Only use new fuses as specified in All fuses are identified on the position diagram
position diagram on the inside of the cover.
• Only fit new fuses when the ignition Switch off the ignition and the load and find out
is switched off, as well as the what caused the short circuit before renewing
corresponding loads a blown fuse.
The central electrical system groups The central electrical system is fitted with
together the most important electrical control blade-type fuses or automatic circuit breakers.
components. The fuses are located on the An automatic circuit breaker is switched back
circuit board of the central electrical system. on by pressing the reset button 7.
Fitting the cover for the central electrical

system
• Position the cover 2 at the top edge
• Push the bottom of the cover into the detents
• Close the flap 1
375
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
CHANGING BULBS
Therefore:
Fundamental principles
• Let bulbs cool down before
changing them
Before changing a bulb, always switch off the
ignition.
The information on the bulb cap of the new bulb Plastic bumper
must match the data listed in the “Overview of
bulbs” table, see “Characteristic data, checking Folding out the headlight housing
and setting values, fill quantities”, Page 408.
Fault messages may appear on the display if
the bulb load is incorrect.
Do not touch the new bulb’s glass with your
bare fingers. The heat generated when the bulb
is switched on would evaporate the fingerprint • Undo the hexagon socket head screw 2
you leave behind, which would then condense
on the mirror insert. This will lead to fading
of the reflector. Always grip the bulb on the
connection lug or the bulb cap if at all possible.
If this is not possible, protect your fingers with
a clean cloth before touching the bulb’s glass.
Perform a light test after changing the bulb of
any of the vehicle’s external lights, see “Exterior • Remove the cover 1 at the cab entrance
lighting”, Page 58. If you have changed a
bulb for the high or low-beam headlights,
also check the headlight setting and have the
headlights adjusted in a MAN Service workshop
if necessary. • Remove the cover 3
CAUTION
Danger of injury!
Bulbs and bulb caps may be hot. This
could cause burns.
376
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
Headlight low beam and daytime driving

light
Note
The bulb for the H7 headlight low beam
is of the same design as the bulb for the
high beam.
You can use the headlight high beam
bulb as a temporary replacement for the
H7 headlight low beam bulb if you do not
have a spare bulb available.
• Unlock the cover cap 5 with the two metal
• Undo the bolts 4 clips Changing the low beam H7 bulb:
• Fold out the headlight housing • Remove the cover cap 5 • Pull cable connector 8 off the bulb cap
CAUTION • Unclip the wire hook 9 outwards and fold it
Danger of injury! upwards
• Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket
H7 halogen bulbs are pressurised
• Insert the new bulb into the recesses in the
and may burst when being changed.
reflector with the projection on the holder
Therefore:
plate uppermost
• Wear protective gloves and
• Fold the wire hook 9 down over the bulb cap
protective glasses when changing
and hook it into the locking lugs
halogen bulbs
• Plug the cable connector 8 onto the bulb cap
• Take particular care when gripping
halogen bulbs CAUTION
Danger of injury!
Xenon bulbs are under high voltage.
5 Headlight low beam and daytime driving Changing xenon bulbs can result in
light serious injuries from electric shocks.
6 Headlight high beam Therefore:
7 Turn indicator • Always have xenon bulbs changed
at a MAN Service workshop
377
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
• Turn the cover cap 6 anticlockwise up to the Turn indicator

stop
• Remove the cover cap 6
Changing the daytime driving light bulb:

• Pull out the yellow tab 10
• Unscrew the tab 7
• Lightly press the bulb into the tab and
• Unscrew the defective bulb in anticlockwise
unscrew in anticlockwise direction
• Pull cable connector 11 off the bulb cap direction
• Fit a new bulb to replace the one that has
• Unclip the wire hook 12 outwards and fold it • Screw in the new bulb in clockwise direction
blown
downwards • Insert the tab 7
• Insert the tab 10
• Pull the blown bulb out of the bulb socket
• Put on the cover cap 5
• Insert the new bulb into the recesses in the Closing the headlight housing
• Lock the cap 5 with the two metal clips
reflector with the projection on the holder • Fold in the headlight housing
plate pointing downwards • Screw in and tighten the bolts 2 and 4
Headlight high beam
• Fold the wire hook 12 up over the bulb cap • Insert the covers 1 and 3
CAUTION and hook it into the locking lugs • Perform a light test, see “Exterior lighting”,
Danger of injury! • Plug the cable connector 11 onto the bulb Page 58
H7 halogen bulbs are pressurised cap • Check the headlight adjustment and have
and may burst when being changed. • Place any projecting cables into the headlight it readjusted at a MAN Service workshop if
Therefore: housing necessary
• Wear protective gloves and • Insert the cover cap 6 and turn clockwise to
protective glasses when changing lock
halogen bulbs
halogen bulbs
378
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
Folding out the auxiliary headlight • Press together the ends of the wire hook 19,
then unclip the hook and fold it outwards
• Pull the blown bulb out of the bulb socket
plate
• Fold the wire hook 19 over the bulb cap and
hook it into the locking lugs
• Plug the cable connector 18 onto the bulb
cap
• Place any projecting cables into the headlight
housing
16 Cornering light • Insert the cover cap 16 and turn clockwise to
17 Additional high-beam headlight and fog close
• Unscrew the screws 13
lamps
• Remove the cover 14
Additional high-beam headlight and fog
Cornering light lamps
• Turn the cover cap 16 anticlockwise up to the • Turn the cover cap 17 anticlockwise up to the
stop and remove it stop and remove it
• Undo the screw 15 under the door entrance

• Fully fold out the fog lamp
• Pull cable connector 18 off the bulb cap • Press together the ends of the wire hook 20,
then unclip the hook and fold it downwards
379
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
• Pull the blown bulb out of the lamp base Door entry point • Insert the new bulb into the recesses in the
• Insert the new bulb into the lamp base reflector with the projection on the holder
• Insert the bulb holder into the reflector recess plate
• Hook the wire hook 19 into the locking lugs • Fold the wire hook 4 over the bulb cap and
• Place any projecting cables into the headlight hook it into the locking lugs
housing • Fit the cable connectors 2 and 3 onto the
• Insert the cover cap 17 and turn clockwise to bulb cap
close • Insert the bulb housing into the holder
• Screw in and tighten the screws 1
Closing the auxiliary headlight
• Fold in the auxiliary headlight
Steel bumper
• Screw in the screws 15 under the door
entrance
Folding out the steel bumper
• Screw in the screws 13
• Insert the cover 14 • Unscrew the bolts 1
• Perform a light test, see “Exterior lighting”, • Remove the bulb housing from the holder
Page 58
• Check the headlight adjustment and have
it readjusted at a MAN Service workshop if
necessary
• Unscrew the triple-square bolts 1

• Fold out the steel bumper 2 as far as the stop
• Pull cable connectors 2 and 3 off the bulb

cap
• Unclip the wire hook 4 inwards
380
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
Overview of lighting on the steel bumper • Remove the cover cap • Pull cable connector 4 off the bulb cap
• Unclip the wire hook 5 outwards
CAUTION
Danger of injury!
H7 halogen bulbs are pressurised reflector with the projection on the holder
and may burst when being changed. plate uppermost
Therefore: • Fold the wire hook 5 down over the bulb cap
• Wear protective gloves and and hook it into the locking lugs
protective glasses when changing • Plug the cable connector 4 onto the bulb cap
halogen bulbs Low beam Xenon bulb:
halogen bulbs
Note
1 Headlight low beam and parking light The bulb for the H7 headlight low beam
2 Headlight high beam is of the same design as the bulb for the
3 Fog lamp high beam.
4 Turn indicator You can use the headlight high beam
bulb as a temporary replacement for the
Headlight low beam and parking light H7 headlight low beam bulb if you do not
have a spare bulb available.
Changing the low beam H7 bulb:
CAUTION
Danger of injury!
Xenon bulbs 6 are under high
voltage. Changing Xenon bulbs 6
can result in serious injuries from
electric shocks.
Therefore:
• Always have Xenon bulbs 6
changed at a MAN Service
• Unlock the cover cap by pressing down the workshop
securing lock 3
381
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
Changing the parking light bulb: CAUTION

Danger of injury!
H7 halogen bulbs are pressurised
and may burst when being changed.
Therefore:
• Wear protective gloves and
protective glasses when changing
halogen bulbs
halogen bulbs
• Insert the cover cap of the headlight housing

and lock it in place
• Using a screwdriver, carefully push the
The securing lock 3 must clip in.
locking lug 7 upwards
• Pull the bulb out of the headlight housing
Headlight high beam
together with the cable connector 8 and bulb
socket
• Fit a new bulb to replace the one that has
blown
• Insert the new bulb into the headlight housing
together with the cable connector 8 and bulb
socket • Pull cable connector 10 off the bulb cap
The bulb socket must audibly clip into the • Unclip the wire hook 11 outwards
headlight housing. • Pull the blown bulb out of the bulb socket
plate uppermost
• Fold the wire hook 11 down over the bulb cap
• Turn the cover cap 9 anticlockwise up to the and hook it into the locking lugs
stop • Plug the cable connector 10 onto the bulb
• Remove the cover cap 9 cap
382
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
• Place any projecting cables into the headlight Fog lamp • Insert the new bulb into the recesses in the
housing reflector with the projection on the holder
• Insert the cover cap 9 and turn it clockwise plate uppermost
to lock • Fold the wire hook 17 down over the bulb
cap and hook it into the locking lugs
Turn indicator • Plug the cable connector 16 onto the bulb
cap
• Place any projecting cables into the headlight
housing
• Insert the cover cap 15 and turn it clockwise
to lock
Checking the headlight setting

• Turn the cover cap 15 anticlockwise up to the
stop CAUTION
• Remove the cover cap 15 Danger of accidents!
Incorrectly set headlights can dazzle
oncoming traffic.
• Turn the bulb socket 13 anticlockwise up to Therefore:
the stop • Check the headlight setting when
• Pull the bulb socket 13 out of the turn the vehicle is unladen
indicator housing • Have incorrectly set headlights
• Protecting your fingers with a clean cloth, readjusted by a MAN Service
replace the blown bulb with a new one. workshop
• Insert the bulb socket 13 into the turn
indicator housing and turn it clockwise to
• Set the headlight beam regulator to “0”
lock
• Check the headlight setting
• Check the function of the turn indicators
Note • Pull cable connector 16 off the bulb cap

Perform a light test after changing a • Unclip the wire hook 17 by pressing it
bulb of the turn indicator, see “Exterior together at the ends
lighting”, Page 58. • Pull the blown bulb out of the bulb socket
383
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
Turn indicator on cab • Protecting your fingers with a clean cloth, see “Tilting the cab forwards and backwards
screw the new bulb 2 into the bulb socket electrically”, Page 119
Removing the turn indicator glass • Unscrew the mounting screws 3
Installing the turn indicator glass • Remove the cover frame for the clearance
• Fit the turn indicator glass and seal onto the lamp
cab
• Screw in and tighten the mounting screws 1 Changing the bulb
• Check the function of the turn indicators
Note
Perform a light test after changing a
bulb of the turn indicator, see “Exterior
lighting”, Page 58.
Clearance lamps on the cab

• Unscrew the mounting screws 1
• Remove the turn indicator glass Removing the cover frame for the clearance
lamp
Changing the bulb
• Disconnect the defective bulb 4 from the
cable
• Connect the new bulb
Fitting the cover frame for the clearance

lamp
• Put on the cover frame for the clearance lamp
• Screw in and tighten the mounting screws 3
• Tilt the cab backwards

• Turn the blown bulb 2 anticlockwise to and backwards manually”, Page 116 and
remove it from the bulb socket
384
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
Changing side marker lights (SML) Rear lamp unit

WARNING Overview of rear lamp unit
Danger of damage!
Damage to the central on-board
computer (ZBR) by using
non-authorised side marker lights
(SML).
Therefore:
• Only install side marker lights
(SML) authorised by MAN with
LED technology
• Mark the routing of the SML cable and the
position of the plastic cable ties
• Remove the attachment discs 5 of the side
marker light
• Press the plug projection 6 forwards and pull 1 Turn indicator
off the plug 7 2 Brake lamp
• Remove all plastic cable ties 3 Rear lamp
• Remove the side marker light with SML cable 4 Rear fog lamp
• Fit the new side marker light with attachment 5 Licence plate light/rear lamp
disc 5 6 Reversing lamp
• Route the SML cable according to the 7 Position lamp
marking
• Attach the SML cable using plastic cable ties
• Connect the plug 7 of the SML cable
• Check the function of the side marker lights
(SML)
385
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
Changing the bulb Inside the cab Changing the interior lighting bulb on the
headlining
Note
The interior lighting in the cab is switched
on by opening the doors. As a result,
always close the doors before changing
bulbs.
Changing an interior lighting / reading light

bulb
• Unscrew the mounting screws 8

• Remove the lens for the rear lamp unit • Using a screwdriver, press the side of the
• Press and turn the blown bulb to unclip it from bulb housing 2 of the interior lighting down
the bulb socket in the rear lamp unit slightly and remove the cover frame 2
• Protecting your fingers with a clean cloth, clip • Unclip the blown interior lighting bulb from
the new bulb into the bulb socket the bulb socket
• Check the function of the bulb • Protecting your fingers with a clean cloth, clip
• Put on the lens for the rear lamp unit the new bulb into the bulb socket
• Screw in and tighten the mounting screws 8 • Put on the bulb housing 2 of the interior
• Unscrew the mounting screws 1 lighting
Note • Remove the cover frame of the interior
Perform a light test after changing a bulb lighting/reading light
for the brake lamp or rear fog lamp, see • Unclip the blown interior lighting or reading
“Exterior lighting”, Page 58. light bulb from the bulb socket
• Protecting your fingers with a clean cloth, clip
the new bulb into the bulb socket
• Put on the cover frame of the interior lighting
/reading light
• Screw in and tighten the mounting screws 1
386
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
Changing a bunk lighting bulb • Press the wire hook 4 down and disconnect
the cable plug
• Open the storage locker
• Push out the bulb housing inwards through
the storage locker
Changing the bulb, side storage locker on

the cab and storage locker on cab rear wall
• Press the wire hook 4 down and disconnect

the cable plug
• Using a screwdriver, press the bulb housing 3
• Push out the bulb housing inwards through
of the bunk lighting down slightly and remove
the storage locker
the cover frame 3
• Open the side storage locker on the cab
• Unclip the blown bunk lighting bulb from the
bulb socket
Removing the bulb housing, storage locker
on cab rear wall
• Put on the bulb housing 3 of the bunk lighting • Turn the bulb socket 5 anticlockwise up to
the stop
Removing the bulb housing, side storage • Pull the bulb socket 5 out of the bulb housing.
locker on the cab • Protecting your fingers with a clean cloth,
replace the blown bulb with a new one
Note
• Insert the bulb socket 5 into the bulb housing
The bulb housing for the side storage
and turn it clockwise to lock
locker on the cab is located inside the
cab behind the co-driver’s seat.
Installing the bulb housing, side storage
locker on the cab
• Press the bulb housing from the outside into
the opening in the side storage locker
387
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
• Connect the cable plug in the inside of the Entry lamp

cab so the wire hook 4 locks in place
• Close the side storage locker on the cab
Installing the bulb housing, storage locker

on cab rear wall
• Press the bulb housing from the inside
through the storage locker into the opening
• Connect the cable plug so the wire hook 4
locks in place
• Close the storage locker
Changing the bulb, top storage locker • Open the storage locker 6
• Using a screwdriver, press the side of the
cover frame 7 of the storage locker lighting • Using a screwdriver, press the side of the
down slightly and remove the cover frame 7 bulb housing 8 down slightly and remove the
• Unclip the blown interior lighting bulb from bulb housing 8
the bulb socket
• Put on the cover frame 7 of the storage locker
lighting
• Close the storage locker 6
• Turn the bulb socket 5 anticlockwise up to

the stop
• Pull the bulb socket 5 out of the bulb housing.
388
Do-it-yourself jobs
Changing bulbs
• Protecting your fingers with a clean cloth,

replace the blown bulb with a new one
• Insert the bulb socket 5 into the bulb housing
and turn it clockwise to lock
• Press the bulb housing 8 into the opening in
the door trim
389
Do-it-yourself jobs
Dry air filter
AIR FILTER
Dry air filter
Fitting a new air filter cartridge
WARNING
Danger of damage!
Drawing in uncleaned air leads to
engine damage.
following:
• Do not change the air filter
cartridge unless the engine is
stopped • Press the air filter cover 2 against the air filter • Wipe out the air filter housing 4 and dust
• Check that all fasteners on the housing and open the locking strap collector with a clean cloth
intake unit are sealed. Tighten the • Remove the air filter cover 2
hose clamps if necessary. Note
• Do not blow out the air filter Only use a flame-retardant air filter
cartridge and air filter housing cartridge 3.
using compressed air • Insert the air filter cartridge all the way into
• Install the air filter cartridge and air the air filter housing and make sure the seal
filter cover correctly is making good contact
• Tilt the cab, see “Tilting the cab forwards • Check the correct installation position of the
and backwards manually”, Page 116 and air filter cartridge (air filter cartridge must be
see “Tilting the cab forwards and backwards seated on the clean air port with an air-tight
electrically”, Page 119 seal)
• Pull the air filter cartridge 3 out of the air filter

housing
390
Do-it-yourself jobs
Dry air filter
Checking the water drain valve
WARNING
Danger of damage!
Water can collect in the air pipe.
Drawing in water can lead to engine
damage.
following:
• Regularly clean the water drain
valve and check its function
• Put on the air filter cover 2 The water drain valve 6 may get gummed up or
• Press the air filter cover 2 against the air filter become blocked.
housing and close the locking strap • Check the function of the water drain valve
• Tilt the cab backwards • Clean the water drain valve 6 if it is
contaminated
WARNING
Danger of damage!
Air filter cartridges are hazardous
waste and must be disposed
of in accordance with the local
environmental protection and waste
disposal measures. Contraventions
The water drain valve is located on the left-hand
are punishable.
side of the vehicle ahead of the air filter on the
underside of the air pipe 5.
following:
• Dispose of air filter cartridges
in accordance with the local
regulations
391
Do-it-yourself jobs
Dry air filter
392
Cleaning and care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
CLEANING AND CARE OF THE VEHICLE
Cleaning the windows with the • Press the button 2 and pull out the extension
wiper set until you hear it engage
• Attach the wiper 5 or ice scraper 4 and clean
The wiper set can be used to remove dirt, ice the windows
and snow from the windows. It is not necessary • Press the button 3 and remove the wiper or
to stand on the bumper in order to clean the ice scraper
windscreen. Reattach the bar behind the front flap:
• Open the front flap, see “Opening and closing • Press the button 2 and slide in the extension
the front flap”, Page 111 until you hear it engage
• Press the bar into the holder on the left-hand
side
• Press the bar on the right-hand side into
the holder with the flat side of the extension
(button upwards)
Washing
Regular expert care serves to maintain the

value of your vehicle.
CAUTION
Danger of fatal injury!
• Remove the bar 1
• Turn off the engine in a vehicle with
a high-voltage electrical system
before washing it (high-voltage =
electrical system voltage in excess
of 24 V).
– Only clean the vehicle in a suitably equipped
washing area. Comply with the regulations in
force and take the necessary precautions to
protect the environment!
393
Cleaning and care
– During the first few weeks, new vehicles and – Wash the vehicle more frequently during the Cleaning in the vehicle wash
new paint should be washed frequently, but winter months.
using only clean water. Do not use a steam – Do not paint over brake lines or treat them Before driving into a vehicle wash, retract
cleaner during the first 6 weeks. with grease, petrol, benzene, kerosene or /unscrew/fold up the aerials, wing mirrors and
– Rinse out the sponge frequently and mineral oils. When spraying and greasing, the front mirror.
thoroughly. take care to prevent the brake hoses coming
– Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. into contact with the spray or grease.
Paintwork care
– Use a brush and water to clean alloy wheels
and aluminium side walls.
Cleaning with the front flap open – Touch up minor paint damage immediately.
– Clean alloy wheels using cleaning-grade
– Apply anti-corrosion protection to the
spirit or a special cleaning agent for alloy
During cleaning with the front flap open (e.g. vehicle’s paintwork in good time.
wheels if they are very dirty. Comply with
cleaning the radiator), avoid letting any cleaning
the safety instructions when doing this, see
fluid enter the ventilation system.
“Safety”, Page 399. Reducing agent (AdBlue) for
• Switch the ventilation to “Recirculating air”,
– Do not spray water onto units which are at Euro 5
see “Heating, ventilation, air-conditioning
operating temperature.
system and auxiliary heater”, Page 68.
– Protect sockets (semitrailer/trailer), the Reducing agent (“AdBlue”) is highly corrosive
This closes the fresh air flap in the ventilation
starter, the alternator and the starter motor (rust-inducing). Immediately rinse reducing
system.
against water spray. agent off metal surfaces (steel or aluminium,
– If you are using a steam cleaner, always even if painted) with plenty of clean water.
follow the manufacturer’s instructions and The reducing agent crystallises when it dries.
maintain a minimum clearance of 30 cm This means the residues can block the air
between the nozzle and the surface of the inlet and outlet of the reducing agent tank.
paintwork. Consequently, regularly clean the tank cap with
WARNING plenty of clear water.
Damage to seals!
• When using a steam cleaner, Cleaning the sockets of tractor
do not direct the spray onto the and trailer
steering knuckles and propshafts.
– Lubricate the vehicle after you have cleaned Never use water or mechanical objects for
it with a steam cleaner or grease-dissolving • Do not spray the fluid onto the intake cleaning sockets for the tractor and trailer. It
agents (see the Maintenance Manual). opening 1 of the ventilation system is best to use compressed air at about 6 to 8
394
Cleaning and care
bar with a cleaning attachment fitted to the end – Alkaline cleaning detergents, e.g. curd soap, if the vehicle is to be parked in the open for
of the pipe. certain textile detergents long periods. Never use chemical solvents,
The ignition and the lights must be switched off – Caustic solutions, e.g. toilet cleaner beeswax, shoe polish, chemical stain removers
during cleaning. – Acids, e.g. hydrochloric acid, vinegar, lemon or similar products to treat leather.
– Descalers, e.g. citric acid – Use a lightly moistened cotton or wool cloth
– Degreasers, e.g. acetone, methylene to rub seats made from real leather. Use
Rear-view mirror chloride, trichlorethylene, benzine a mild soap solution (2 dessert spoons
– Cleaners with high ammonia content, e.g. dissolved in 1 litre of water) to clean sections
– Clean dirty mirror surfaces using a glass
toilet cleaner which are very dirty. Take care not to soak the
cleaner
– Cleaners containing chlorine or leather at any point. Then dry off the leather
hypochlorides, e.g. Domestos, Chavel by rubbing it with a soft, dry cloth.
Cab interior water – In addition, treat the leather seats with a
– Solvents, e.g. ethanol, isopropanol, alcohols, special leather care product every six months
Cleaning the cab interior acetone, trichloraethylene, benzene, assuming normal use. Allow the product to
– Clean the steering wheel, shift lever, dirty hexane, benzine work in, then wipe the seats down with a soft
upholstery and the floor covering with a – Coarse cleaners, e.g. scourers, steel wool, cotton or wool cloth.
solution of warm water and detergent. Do scouring sponges, blades, fabrics with
not use scouring agents. woven-in metal threads, hard cloths or paper Removing stains: Products and how to use
– Wash the curtains at 30 °C using a mild bags them
detergent. The substances listed can be obtained from
– Use lukewarm water and soap to clean the Caring for and cleaning the seats and chemists or specialist shops. Never pour the
seat belts. Do not use chemical cleaning bunks products onto the fabric. The types of treatment
agents. – Use a damp cloth to wipe down plastic are based on experience. Try out each product
– Prevent door and window seals from freezing parts (e.g. loops, holders or levers). Use a first on an unobtrusive area. We cannot accept
up in frosty weather by treating them with solvent-free cleaning and care product (e.g. any liability for damage.
commercially available products. washing-up liquid) to tackle more stubborn Comply with the safety instructions when
dirt. handling solvents such as cleaning-grade
Instrument panel – Use a moistened special cleaning cloth spirit, see “Safety”, Page 399.
Only use a soft cotton cloth or window to clean upholstery and fabric covers.
(chamois) leather to clean the glass front Alternatively, use a dry foam product and a
of the instrument panel. If necessary, use soft brush.
an aqueous, neutral and weak alkaline glass Leather is sensitive to oil and grease and also to
cleaner without abrasive additives. Never use: prolonged exposure to sunlight. Consequently,
protect the leather seats from direct sunlight
395
Cleaning and care
Water-soluble stains
Stain types Cleaning agent Application for all stain types

Blood, egg, excrement, – Cold water • Apply the cleaning product to a smooth, soft cloth
urine – Shampoo spray e.g. Sapur A stain remover • Dab the stained area with it until the stain has
– Carpet foam solution dissolved
• If necessary, gently rub the stain from the outside
towards the centre. Do not rub it too forcefully,
otherwise the surface will be altered or discoloured
• Finally, wipe clean with clear water
Products containing – Cold water Use as directed above, using the listed agents in
fat, vomit, coffee with – Shampoo spray e.g. Sapur A stain remover succession if necessary.
milk, cocoa, lipstick, – Carpet foam solution
mayonnaise, milk, cream, – Cleaning-grade spirit
gravy, soup – Stain remover, e.g. Sapur B stain remover
– General beverages, – Cold water Use as directed above.
beer, wine, cola, fruit – Shampoo spray e.g. Sapur A stain remover If using solvents such as cleaning-grade spirit, alcohol,
juice, carbonated – Carpet foam solution stain remover, first let the treated areas dry out.
beverages, – Cleaning-grade spirit
– sugary liquids – Alcohol
– Fruit – Stain remover, e.g. Sapur B stain remover
396
Cleaning and care
Non-water-soluble stains
Stain types Cleaning agent Application for all stain types

Butter, beeswax, paint – Cleaning-grade spirit • Apply the cleaning product to a smooth, soft cloth
(lacquer), grease, varnish, – Stain remover, e.g. Sapur B stain • Dab the stained area with it until the stains have dissolved
resin, charcoal, indelible remover • If necessary, gently rub the stain from the outside towards the centre.
pencil, nail varnish, oil, oil – Shampoo spray Do not rub it too forcefully, otherwise the surface will be altered or
paint, soot, tar discoloured.
• Finally, wipe clean with clear water
Paraffin (waxes), stearin Scrape off as much as possible, Use as directed above.
wax e.g. candles cleaning-grade spirit
Rust 15 % sodium fluoride solution or dissolve Use as directed above.
salt of sorrel in water, 1 teaspoon to 100 ml
water
Chewing gum, Plasticine Freezing spray Spray on, break up the frozen area with a hard object (hammer) and
remove
397
Cleaning and care
398
Important notes on safety and environmental protection
Safe working with the vehicle
SAFETY
• Do not throw any objects out of the Therefore:

window • Do not weld or drill in the vicinity of
• In particular, do not throw any plastics, in particular plastic tubes
Special safety measures
glowing cigarette butts out of the Other safety measures:
CAUTION window – Tow-starting and towing away: see
Danger of fatal injury! Throwing objects out of the vehicle when you “Tow-starting and towing away”, Page 344
• People with pacemakers: Stay at are on the move, in particular glowing cigarette – Changing tyres: see “Tyres and wheels”,
least 20 cm away from the running butts, can endanger other road users, e.g. Page 331
engine. Otherwise the pacemaker drivers of convertibles and motorcyclists. There – Preventing damage to the electrical system:
may fail. Cardiac arrest can be is a risk of following vehicles catching fire. see “Electrical system”, Page 365
caused.
Re-tightening wheel nuts
CAUTION
Danger of accidents/risk of fire! On new vehicles, and also following a wheel
Throwing waste out of the vehicle change, retighten wheel nuts after 50 km /
when on the move, e.g. empty drinks 30 miles, see “Changing a wheel”, Page 334.
cans and glowing cigarette butts, not
only pollutes the environment but can Mobile phones and radios
also endanger other people.
CAUTION
– The waste is a hazard to other road
users such as motorcyclists and
drivers of convertibles. It is essential to comply with the
– Glowing cigarette butts can ignite following so as to avoid damage to
forest fires. the outside aerial(s):
WARNING
– Glowing cigarette butts can cause • Remove the outside aerials before
Danger of damage and fire!
fires in vehicles behind yours. loading the vehicle onto trailers
Plastics are highly inflammable. They or ships, driving into low buildings
Therefore, please always ensure the may catch fire if welding or drilling is
following: such as garages or vehicle washes
carried out in the vicinity. A vehicle
Mobile phones and radio equipment must be
fire can be caused.
installed in accordance with the valid MAN
Guidelines to fitting bodies. They can be viewed
on the Internet at www.manted.de.
399
The vehicle’s electronic control systems may Air-conditioning system – Topping up air-conditioning systems and
malfunction if mobile phones and radios are refrigeration units with R 12 (CFC) is
operated with their aerials inside the cab. This The air-conditioning system is filled with forbidden.
represents a threat to the operational safety of CFC-free refrigerant R 134a.
the vehicle. Refrigerant fluids and vapours represent a Used engine oil
Consequently, you should ensure the functional health hazard! Therefore:
safety of your vehicle by not operating such – Avoid contact with refrigerant! Notes on safety when handling used engine
mobile telephones and radio equipment within – Wear gloves and protective glasses! oil
the vehicle unless they are connected to an – Obtain immediate medical assistance from a Lengthy or repeated skin contact with any
external aerial. doctor in case refrigerant contacts your skin type of engine oil removes grease from the
MAN Nutzfahrzeuge is unable to inspect or gets into your eyes. skin. This can cause dry skin, irritation or skin
every product on the market. We therefore – Do not drain gaseous refrigerants in inflammation. In addition to these hazards,
recommend that you contact a MAN Service enclosed rooms. Danger of suffocation! used engine oil contains dangerous materials
workshop and ask for their advice before you – Pump out coolants using a disposal system! which can cause skin cancer. However, used
purchase an external aerial system. – Never perform soldering or welding work, etc. engine oil is not regarded as a health hazard
on parts of the cooling system or near to it, provided that the basic rules of work safety and
Safety equipment and tool kit even if the coolant has been drained. Danger hygiene are complied with.
of explosion and poisoning!
Check the equipment is accessible, complete – Do not clean parts of the system using a Health protection precautions:
and functions correctly: steam cleaner! – Avoid lengthy, excessive or repeated skin
– Warning triangle – Have work on the refrigerant circuit contact with used engine oil
– Warning light performed in an authorised MAN Service – Protect your skin using a suitable skin
– First aid kit workshop! protection agent or protective gloves.
– Fire extinguisher (special equipment) – Propane/butane refrigerants are not – Clean areas of skin which have come into
– Chock permitted. contact with engine oil:
– Jack – Never mix R 134a refrigerant with R 12 – Wash the areas thoroughly with soap and
– Jacking block (CFC) refrigerant! This applies irrespective water.
– Tool kit of whether the refrigerants are in the – A nail brush enables more effective
Additional equipment it is sensible to carry: air-conditioning system, the filling system or cleaning.
– High-visibility tabard the disposal system. – Special cleaning agents make it easier to
– Towing lug – Never change over to refrigerant R 12 if clean dirty hands.
the system has already been filled with – Do not use petrol, diesel oil, gas oil,
refrigerant R 134 a! thinners or solvents.
400
– Apply a greasy skin cream after cleaning Halogen-free cold cleaners / contaminated Therefore:
your skin. fuel (cleaning-grade spirit) • Do not touch hot exhaust systems
– Change out of clothing or shoes which have • Do not remove heat shields or fit
become soaked with oil. Notes on safety when handling cold underbody guards onto them
– Never put oil-soaked rags into your clothing cleaning agents / fuels
pockets. – Keep out of reach of children Attachments, body components and
– Keep sources of ignition away and do not conversions
Reducing agent (“AdBlue”) for Euro 5 smoke
– Immediately remove clothing which comes Attachments, body components and
The reducing agent is a non-inflammable, into contact with cold cleaners or fuel conversions must be installed/performed in
colourless and odourless fluid that is soluble – Do not let cold cleaners or fuel flow down the accordance with the valid MAN Guide to Fitting
in water (trade name “AdBlue”). drain! Bodies. As a customer, you must obtain written
Comply with the following points: confirmation from the body manufacturer
– Make sure reducing agent does not come Notes on danger when handling cold regarding this requirement.
into contact with skin, eyes or clothing cleaning agents / fuels The Guide to Fitting Truck Bodies can currently
– Keep reducing agent out of the reach of – Inflammable/highly inflammable be viewed on the Internet at:
children – Health hazard if inhaled, swallowed or www.manted.de
If anyone comes into contact with reducing allowed to come into contact with the skin. The express written approval of MAN
agent: – Risk of serious damage to health if you are Nutzfahrzeuge AG is required for any
• In case of contact with the eyes, rinse the exposed to it for an extended period of time deviations from the Guide to Fitting Truck
eyes with plenty of clear water and seek – May cause cancer (fuel only) Bodies. This also applies to additional
medical assistance if necessary equipment such as air-conditioning units,
• In case of swallowing, immediately rinse Exhaust system tail lifts, loading cranes, retarders, etc.
out the mouth with plenty of clear water,
drink plenty of clear water and seek medical CAUTION Taking out of operation or putting into
assistance if necessary Danger of fire and burns! storage
• In case of contact with the skin, wash with The exhaust system and the heat
plenty of clear water shields get very hot (up to +200 °C). Comply with MAN Works Standard M 3069,
The reducing agent can decompose at high Prevent any easily combustible Part 3 if the vehicle is to be taken out of
tank temperatures (in excess of about 50 °C, materials (hay, leaves, grass, etc.) operation or put into storage for more than 3
e.g. due to the effect of direct sunlight). This can coming into contact with the hot months. This Works Standard can be obtained
liberate ammonia vapours (pungent odour). Do exhaust system. Otherwise there is from any MAN Service workshop.
not inhale these vapours. a risk of serious injury and damage
to property.
401
Accessories and parts
In your own interests, you are recommended

to use only accessories expressly approved by
MAN and genuine parts. The reliability, safety
and suitability of these parts and accessories
have been determined specifically for MAN
vehicles.
402
Disposing of hazardous substances
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Disposing of hazardous thin the reducing agent with plenty of clear

substances water.
Disposing of used oil Disposing of coolant
Used engine oil can damage groundwater Treat undiluted antifreeze as hazardous waste.
quality. Consequently, take care to dispose of Comply with the locally applicable regulations
used engine oil properly. when disposing of coolant (mixture of antifreeze
– Never pour used oil onto the ground, into and water).
water or down the drains or sewers.
– Collect and dispose of used engine oil Disposing of batteries
carefully. Contact the point of sale, supplier
Starter batteries contain hazardous waste
or your local authority for information about
materials and must be disposed of properly.
collection depots.
Never dispose of used batteries in the
– Comply with the local regulations in force.
domestic refuse!
Comply with the local regulations in force.
Disposing of filter cartridges, filter inserts,
box-type filters, desiccant cartridges
Filter inserts, cartridges and box-type filters

(oil and fuel filters, desiccant cartridges for the
air dryer) are classified as hazardous waste
materials and must be disposed of properly.
Comply with the local regulations in force.
Reducing agent (“AdBlue”) for Euro 5
Do not pour large quantities of reducing agent

down the drain, into bodies of water, the
groundwater or onto the ground. If necessary,
403
Safe handling of batteries
Safe handling of batteries Keep away sources of fire, sparks and

naked flames. Do not smoke!
Symbols on batteries
1 Keep away sources of fire, sparks and Take care not to generate any sparks when
naked flames. Do not smoke! removing and attaching electrical consumers
2 Wear protective glasses! or measuring devices directly on the battery
3 Keep children away from acid and terminals.
batteries Before disconnecting and connecting battery
4 Danger of acid burns! Batteries contain terminals: Switch off the mechanical battery
corrosive acid! master switch or electrical battery isolator
5 Follow the instructions in the operator’s switch (if fitted) and remove the corresponding
manual and documentation provided by fuse from the central electrical system to
the battery manufacturer! disconnect any directly connected current
6 Risk of explosion due to oxyhydrogen consuming apparatus (terminal 30), e.g.
gas! tachograph, interior lighting, etc.
7 Batteries contain hazardous waste WARNING
materials and must be disposed of Danger of damage!
properly.
Damage to electrical components by
short circuit.
following:
• Comply with the sequence for
disconnecting and connecting the
batteries
Disconnecting: First the negative
lead, then the positive lead
Connecting: First the positive lead,
then the negative lead
• Avoid short circuits due to incorrect
polarity and through tools
404
Batteries contain corrosive acid! Risk of explosion due to oxyhydrogen gas! • Batteries are hazardous waste
and must be disposed of
Do not tilt batteries. Tilting batteries can cause CAUTION correctly in accordance with the
the electrolyte to leak out of the breather orifice. Risk of explosion! environmental protection and
Highly explosive oxyhydrogen gas waste disposal regulations in
CAUTION builds up during lengthy journeys force.
Danger of injury! and when charging the batteries, • Follow the regulations for your
Acid burns to the eyes and the skin particularly if you are using a specific country inside and outside
by leaking battery acid. boost-charger. the EU.
Therefore, please always ensure the Therefore, please always ensure the
following: following:
• Wear appropriate protective • Take particular care after long
clothing, protective glasses and journeys and when charging the
acid-proof gloves when working batteries
on the batteries • Ensure adequate ventilation in the
• If you get battery acid on any areas room
of your skin, thoroughly wash it off • Thoroughly ventilate the battery
with soap and water box
• Change out of any splashed • Do not use a boost-charger
clothing
• If you get battery acid in your eyes, Disposing of a battery
rinse thoroughly with water and
seek medical assistance WARNING
• If you swallow battery acid, Danger of damage!
rinse out your mouth with water Severe environmental pollution by
and seek medical assistance battery acid.
immediately. Therefore, please always ensure the
following:
405
406
Technical data
Vehicle designation
VEHICLE DESIGNATION
Designation of the entire vehicles

The technical designation summarises the Example: TGL 12 . 240 4x2 BB
most important characteristics of the vehicle. Possible number of letters XXX XX X XXX XxXXX XX X -XXX
It is listed on the Data Card under the heading /digits:
“(03) Vehicle type”. The Data Card is inserted See legend: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
in an inside pocket in the Maintenance
Record.
Example: TGL 12.240 4x2 BB
1 Series, examples: TGL, TGM, TGS, TGX, 5d /X = With leading axle: Number of -WW = “World Wide” type
SX steered wheels -CKD = Kit
2 Gross vehicle weight (in tonnes) 5e -X = With trailing axle or leading No value for medium-high and high version.
3 Full stop = separator and trailing axle: Number of steered -LE = Low Entry
4 Engine power in PS acc. to DIN standard, wheels
rounded up to the nearest full 10 (PS = 5f H = MAN HydroDrive (hydrostatic
“Pferdestärke”, 1 PS = 0.986 horsepower front-wheel drive)
Cab designations
[international]) 6 Suspension type
C = Short-haul
5 Wheel formula, examples: BB = Leaf springs on all axles
M = Short-haul
4x2, 4x4 BL = Leaf/air suspension, at least one axle
L = Long-distance
6x2-2 = Non-steered trailing axle with air suspension
LX = Long-distance with high-roof
6x2-4 = Steered trailing axle LL = Air/air suspension, all axles with air
XL = Long-distance wide
6x2/2 = Non-steered leading axle suspension
XLX = Long-distance wide with high-roof
6x2/4 = Steered leading axle BH = Leaf/hydro suspension, at least one
XXL = Long-distance wide with extra high-roof
8x2-6 = Steered leading and trailing axle or axle with hydropneumatic suspension
2 front axles and 1 steered trailing axle LH = Air/hydro suspension
8x4 = 2 driven rear axles 7 S = Semitrailer tractor
8x8 No indication for chassis, tipper, etc.
Structure: 8 Design, examples:
5a X = Number of wheels -U = Ultra (low version, large-volume
5b x = separator transport)
5c X = Number of driven wheels -TS = Tank/silo in semitrailer tractor
407
Technical data
Characteristic data, checking and setting values, fill quantities
CHARACTERISTIC DATA, CHECKING AND SETTING VALUES, FILL QUANTITIES
Note
Tyre inflation pressure
The values for the tyre inflation pressure
vary depending on the manufacturer and
Tyre inflation pressure in bar with tyres cold.
tyre type. As a result, the values printed
Refer to the instructions on tyres and wheels,
here are only to be used as guidance
see “Tyres and wheels”, Page 331.
values for the tyre inflation pressure.
Always refer to the documentation
provided by the tyre manufacturer
for the exact tyre inflation pressure
values!
Twin tyres
Axle loads (kg) 7500 8000 9000 9500 10 000 11 000 11 500 12 000 13 000 14 000 15 000 16 000
Tyre size
275/70 R 22.5 — — 6,5 6,5 7,75 8,0 8,5 — — — — —
275/80 R 22.5 — — 6,25 6,5 7,0 7,75 8,25 8,5 — — — —
295/60 R 22.5 — — 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,25 8,5 9,0 — — — —
295/80 R 22.5 — — 5,75 6,0 6,5 7,25 7,75 8,0 — — — —
305/60 R 22.5 — — — 6,0 7,25 8,0 8,25 8,5 — — — —
305/70 R 22.5 — — — 6,0 6,5 7,25 7,5 8,0 — — — —
315/60 R 22.5 — — 6,0 6,5 6,75 7,25 7,75 8,25 — — — —
315/70 R 22.5 — — — 6,0 6,5 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,75 — — —
315/80 R 22.5 — — — 5,5 6,0 6,5 6,75 7,25 8,5 — — —
11 R 22.5 5,0 5,25 6,0 6,5 7,0 7,75 8,25 — — — — —
12 R 22.5 — — 5,75 6,25 6,75 7,25 7,75 8,0 — — — —
13 R 22.5 — — 5,5 5,75 6,0 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,25 — — —
12 R 24 — — — 4,75 5,0 5,5 5,75 6,0 6,5 7,25 8,0 8,5
408
Technical data
Single tyres
Axle loads (kg) 6300 6500 6700 6900 7100 7500 8000 8500 9000 9500 10 000 10 500 11 000 11 500
Tyre size
275/70 R 22.5 8,75 — — — — — — — — — — — — —
275/80 R 22.5 8,25 8,5 — — — — — — — — — — — —
295/60 R 22.5 8,5 8,75 9,0 — — — — — — — — — — —
295/80 R 22.5 7,5 7,75 8,0 8,25 8,5 — — — — — — — — —
305/60 R 22.5 8,5 8,75 9,0 — — — — — — — — — — —
305/70 R 22.5 8,0 8,25 8,5 8,75 9,0 — — — — — — — — —
315/60 R 22.5 8,0 8,0 8,25 8,25 9,0 — — — — — — — — —
315/70 R 22.5 7,5 7,75 8,0 8,25 8,5 9,0 — — — — — — — —
315/80 R 22.5 7,0 7,25 7,5 7,75 8,0 8,5 9,0 — — — — — — —
355/50 R 22.5 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,25 8,5 9,0 — — — — — — — —
385/55 R 22.5 6,0 6,25 6,5 6,75 7,0 7,25 7,75 8,25 9,0 — — — — —
385/65 R 22.5 — — 6,5 6,75 7,0 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 — — — — —
395/85 R 20 — — — — — 5,5 6,0 6,25 6,75 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,25 —
425/65 R 22.5 4,75 4,75 5,0 5,25 5,5 6,0 6,25 6,75 7,75 — — — — —
495/45 R 22.5 — — — — — 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,25 8,5 9,0
11 R 22.5 8,25 — — — — — — — — — — — — —
12 R 22.5 7,5 7,75 8,0 8,25 8,5 — — — — — — — — —
13 R 22.5 6,5 6,75 7,0 7,25 7,5 8,0 8,5 — — — — — — —
12 R 24 5,75 6,0 6,25 6,5 6,75 7,0 7,5 8,0 8,5 — — — — —
14 R 20 4,5 4,75 4,75 5,0 5,25 5,5 5,75 6,25 6,75 7,0 7,5 — — —
409
Technical data
Engines
Technical vehicle designation – –.320 – –.360 – –.400 – –.440 – –.480
Engine model: D2066LF 39 D2066LF 38 D2066LF 37 D2066LF 36 D2676LF 05
Emissions category: Euro 4
Combustion process: Direct injection
Injection system: Common rail
Mode of operation: 4-stroke diesel with turbocharging and intercooling
No. of cylinders and design: 6 in line, upright
Number of valves: 4 per cylinder
Swept volume in litres: 10,518 12,419
Rated power in kW (h.p.): 235 (320) 265 (360) 294 (400) (324) 440 353 (480)
at engine speed rpm: 1400 – 1900 1400 – 1900 1900 1900 1900
Max. torque in Nm: 1600 1800 1900 2100 2300
at engine speed rpm: 1000 – 1400 1000 – 1400 1000 – 1400 1000 – 1400 1050 – 1400
Idling speed rpm: 600 600 600 600 600
Technical vehicle designation – –.320 – –.360 – –.400 – –.440 – –.480 – –.530

Engine model: D2066LF 28 D2066LF 27 D2066LF 26 D2066LF 25 D2676LF 14 D2676LF 13
Emissions category: Euro 5
Combustion process: Direct injection
Injection system: Common rail
Mode of operation: 4-stroke diesel with turbocharging and intercooling
No. of cylinders and design: 6 in line, upright
Number of valves: 4 valves per cylinder
Swept volume in litres: 10,518 12,419
Rated power in kW (h.p.): 235 (320) 265 (360) 294 (400) (324) 440 353 (480) 397 (540)
at engine speed rpm: 1900 1900 1600 – 1900 1600 – 1900 1700 –1900 1900
Max. torque in Nm: 1600 1800 1900 2100 2300 2500
at engine speed rpm: 1000 – 1400 1000 – 1400 1000 – 1400 1000 – 1400 1050 – 1400 1050 – 1350
Idling speed rpm: 550 550 550 550 600 600
410
Technical data
Fill quantities (change quantities) Automated gearbox, MAN TipMatik ZF N221/10............. ......................... 1.0 litres
Gearbox fill quantity ZF NMV 221............. ........................ 2.0 litres
Note ZF 12AS 2130 TD............. ...............11.0 litres
Information about any units not ZF 12AS 2131 TD with Transfer case
indicated here can be obtained from Intarder............. ............................. 21.0 litres G 172 Z, Z-L............. ........................ 7.0 litres
any MAN Service workshop. ZF 12AS 2330 TO............. ...............11.0 litres G 172 P22, P32, P32-L............. ........ 5.8 litres
ZF 12AS 2331 TO with G 173 Z, Z-L............. ........................ 7.0 litres
D2066 and D2676 engines Intarder............. ............................. 13.0 litres G 173 Z-N, Z-LN............. .................. 7.2 litres
Engine oil, change quantity for engine with oil ZF 12AS 2330 TD............. ...............11.0 litres G 173 P22, P22-L............. ................ 5.8 litres
filter ............. ................................. 42.0 litres ZF 12AS 2331 TD with G 173 P22-N, P22-LN............. .......... 6.0 litres
Engine oil, top-up quantity between -MIN- and Intarder............. ............................. 13.0 litres G 173 P32, P32-L............. ................ 5.8 litres
-MAX- (notches).................... approx. 6.0 litres ZF 12AS 2530 TO............. ...............11.0 litres G 173 P32-N, P32-LN............. .......... 6.0 litres
ZF 12AS 2531 TO with G 252 Z-L, G 253 Z-L............. ........... 9.3 litres
D2868 engine Intarder............. ............................. 13.0 litres G 252 P32-L, G 253 P32-L............. ... 8.5 litres
Engine oil, change quantity for engine with oil ZF 12TC 2540 TO (with WSK and
filter................................................... 40 litres retarder)............. ............................ 12.0 litres Rear axles
Engine oil, top-up quantity between -MIN- and ZF 12AS 2740 TO............. .............. 12.0 litres HP-1342-E
-MAX- (notches)....................... approx. 6 litres ZF 12AS 2740 TO with Axle drive............. .......................... 12.0 litres
Intarder............. ............................. 14.0 litres Planetary drive............................. 2 x 1.5 litres
Manual gearbox, ZF 16 S and MAN ZF 12TC 2740 TO (with WSK and HP-1352
ComfortShift retarder)............. ............................ 12.0 litres Axle drive............. .......................... 12.0 litres
Gearbox fill quantity ZF 12AS 3140 TO............. .............. 12.0 litres Planetary drive............................. 2 x 2.1 litres
ZF 16S 182 TO............. ...................11.0 litres ZF 12AS 3141 TO with HPD-1353
ZF 16S 182 TO with Intarder............. .18.5 litres Intarder............. ............................. 14.0 litres Axle drive............. .......................... 10.5 litres
ZF 16S 192 TD............. .................. 13.0 litres Planetary drive............................. 2 x 2.1 litres
ZF 16S 192 TD with Intarder............. .21.5 litres Automatic gearbox HPD-1372-E
ZF 16S 222 TO............. .................. 13.0 litres Gearbox fill quantity Axle drive............. .......................... 13.5 litres
ZF 16S 222 TO with Intarder............. .21.5 litres ZF 6 HP.......................................... 30.0 litres Planetary drive............................. 2 x 1.5 litres
ZF 16S 232 TO............. .................. 13.0 litres ZF 6 HP with retarder............. ......... 30.0 litres HPD-1382
ZF 16S 232 TO with Intarder............. .21.5 litres Axle drive............. .......................... 13.5 litres
ZF 16S 252 TO............. .................. 13.0 litres Power take-offs Planetary drive............................. 2 x 2.1 litres
ZF 16S 252 TO with Intarder............. .21.5 litres Fill quantity in addition to gearbox fill quantity HPD-1682
ZF NH/4, NL/4............. ..................... 0.5 litres Axle drive............. .......................... 13.5 litres
ZF NH/1, NL/1............. ..................... 0.3 litres Planetary drive............................. 2 x 2.8 litres
411
Technical data
HY-1350 Name Designation Power

Axle drive............. .......................... 14.5 litres Clearance lamp on Capless bulb 5W
HYD-1370 cab
Axle drive............. .......................... 18.0 litres Interior lighting on Tubular bulb 3 W and
headlining 10 W
Interior lighting Spherical bulb 21 W
Electrical system Reading light Spherical bulb 10 W
Bunk lighting Tubular bulb 10 W
Voltage Lighting in storage Capless bulb 5W
Rated voltage in V: 24 locker on cab rear
Operating voltage in V: 28 wall
Lighting in top Tubular bulb 5W
Bulbs storage locker
Name Designation Power Entry lamp Capless bulb 5W
Low beam Halogen bulb 70 W
H7
Parking light Spherical bulb 10 W
High beam Halogen bulb 70 W
H7
Turn indicator, front Spherical bulb 21 W
Fog lamp Halogen bulb 70 W
H4
Rear fog lamp Spherical bulb 21 W
Rear lamp Spherical bulb 5W
Brake lamp Spherical bulb 21 W
Turn indicator, rear Spherical 21 W
bulb, orange
Position lamp Spherical bulb 5W
Reversing lamp Spherical bulb 21 W
Licence plate light Spherical bulb 5W
Turn indicator on Spherical bulb 21 W
cab
Side marker light LED 3W
412
Index
CATCHWORD
A Safety, function and use ................................................................. 84

Acoustic reversing warning........................................................... 53–54 Webasto coolant pre-heater ........................................................... 86
AdBlue Axle load display............................................................................... 246
Operation with reducing agent (“AdBlue”) for Euro 5 ........... 318, 326
Reducing agent (“AdBlue”) for Euro 5 .......................... 394, 401, 403 B
Air filter ............................................................................................. 390 Batteries
Air horn ............................................................................................... 53 Batteries next to each other.......................................................... 368
Air pressure Charging ............................................................................... 370, 374
Tyre inflation pressure .................................................................. 408 Checking the electrolyte level ............................................... 368, 371
Air suspension Compact battery box .................................................................... 370
Air/air suspension ......................................................................... 100 Connecting ........................................................................... 369, 373
Checking the body lean ................................................................ 310 Disconnecting ....................................................................... 369, 372
Checking the condition of the air-sprung bellows ......................... 312 Handling batteries......................................................................... 366
Functional description..................................................................... 96 Maintenance ................................................................................. 367
Leaf/air suspension ........................................................................ 98 Parking the vehicle for longer than 1 week................................... 367
Air-conditioning system .............................................................. 74, 400 Removing and installing ....................................................... 369, 373
Anti-jackknife brake .......................................................................... 135 Safe handling of batteries ............................................................. 404
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)........................................................... 125 Service life .................................................................................... 367
Anti-spin regulator (ASR).................................................................. 127 Storage and transport ................................................................... 367
Automated gearbox Taking into operation .................................................................... 367
MAN TipMatic 12-speed ............................................................... 164 Battery isolator switch (electrical) ..................................................... 144
MAN TipMatic 12-speed Fleet ...................................................... 170 Battery master switch (mechanical).................................................. 144
MAN TipMatic 12-speed for all-wheel drive .................................. 176 Black ice warning................................................................................ 44
Automatic driving with lights during the day for Austria ...................... 60 Brake
Automatic gearbox Anti-jackknife brake ...................................................................... 135
Checking the oil level.................................................................... 312 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ....................................................... 125
ZF 6 HP ........................................................................................ 182 Anti-spin regulator (ASR).............................................................. 127
Auxiliary air-conditioning unit...................................................... 74, 400 Brake assistant ............................................................................. 126
Auxiliary heaters BrakeMatic.................................................................... 136, 142, 148
Auxiliary air heater .................................................................... 68, 74 Checking function and effectiveness ............................................ 309
Eberspächer auxiliary air heater ..................................................... 92 Controlled engine brake ............................................................... 148
Eberspächer coolant pre-heater ..................................................... 89 Coupling force control................................................................... 127
413
Index
Drag-torque control....................................................................... 127 Changing a wheel............................................................................. 334

Electronic brake system (EBS) ..................................................... 123 Chassis number.................................................................................. 13
Electronic stability program (ESP) ................................................ 128 Check lamps
Engine brake, controlled ....................................................... 136, 138 Check lamp test .............................................................................. 66
Engine brake, non-controlled................................................ 136–137 Check lamps and warning lights ..................................................... 42
Frequent-stop brake ..................................................................... 133 Display and check lamps .............................................................. 251
Hill holder...................................................................................... 128 Displays and messages................................................................ 251
Intarder ......................................................................... 136, 140, 148 Overview of the symbols on the display and check lamps ........... 254
Non-controlled engine brake ........................................................ 148 Red message: Workshop ............................................................. 251
Parking brake (handbrake) ........................................................... 130 Stop message: Safety .................................................................. 251
PriTarder ....................................................................... 136, 138, 148 Yellow message: Information ........................................................ 252
Service brake (pedal brake) ......................................................... 124 Checking and maintenance points ................................................... 293
Spin threshold increase ........................................................ 127–128 Checking the air dryer ...................................................................... 313
Torque converter and clutch system (WSK) ................................. 148 Cigarettes, lighting.............................................................................. 55
BrakeMatic........................................................................ 136, 142, 148 Cleaning and care of the vehicle ...................................................... 393
Breakdown call (HelpCall) ................................................................ 245 Clutch actuator
Bulbs Checking the oil level.................................................................... 306
Changing ...................................................................................... 376 Compressed air in the cab................................................................ 249
Overview....................................................................................... 412 Continuous Damping Control (CDC) ................................................ 108
Bunk beds........................................................................................... 31 Controls
Bunks.................................................................................................. 31 Cab, right-hand drive vehicles ........................................................ 36
Buttons In the cab, left-hand drive vehicles ................................................. 34
Switches and buttons ..................................................................... 40 Instrument panel ............................................................................. 38
Switches and buttons ..................................................................... 40
C Cooling system
Cab, tilting forwards Checking the fluid level................................................................. 300
Electrically .................................................................................... 119 Topping up coolant ....................................................................... 301
Manually ....................................................................................... 116 Cornering light .................................................................................... 60
CDC, Continuous Damping Control.................................................. 108 Coupling force control....................................................................... 127
Central lubrication system, BEKA-MAX Cruise control
check the lubricant level ............................................................... 306 Cruise control ............................................................................... 155
Manual interim lubrication............................................................. 109 Cruise control systems
Central warning light Making intelligent use of the cruise control................................... 320
Displays and messages................................................................ 251 Cup holders ........................................................................................ 18
414
Index
D Checking the condition of the air-sprung bellows ......................... 312

Data Card ............................................................................................. 5 Economical driving ................................................................... 316, 320
Daytime driving lights Tyres and wheels.......................................................................... 331
Deactivating and activating............................................................. 60 Electric horn........................................................................................ 53
For EU ............................................................................................ 60 Electrical system............................................................................... 365
For Scandinavia.............................................................................. 60 Central electrical system .............................................................. 374
For the UK (DIM/DIP) ..................................................................... 60 Changes to the electrical system.................................................. 366
Differential locks Description.................................................................................... 365
Disengaging and engaging differential locks with rear wheel Renewing fuses ............................................................................ 374
drive .............................................................................................. 204 Safe handling of batteries ............................................................. 404
Engaging and disengaging differential locks and the transfer case Technical data............................................................................... 412
with all-wheel drive ....................................................................... 201 Electronic brake system (EBS)......................................................... 123
Engaging MAN HydroDrive and differential locks......................... 185 Electronic stability program (ESP).................................................... 128
Display Electronically controlled air suspension
Display and check lamps .............................................................. 251 Air/air suspension ......................................................................... 100
Displays and messages................................................................ 251 Checking the body lean ................................................................ 310
Language...................................................................................... 290 Checking the condition of the air-sprung bellows ......................... 312
Overview of the symbols on the display and check lamps ........... 254 Functional description..................................................................... 96
Red message: Workshop ............................................................. 251 Leaf/air suspension ........................................................................ 98
Stop message: Safety .................................................................. 251 Emergency off switch ....................................................................... 153
Using the Vehicle menu ................................................................ 289 Engine
Vehicle menu contents ................................................................. 288 Changing the engine oil ................................................................ 362
Yellow message: Information ........................................................ 252 Checking the oil level.................................................................... 299
Display language .............................................................................. 290 Checking the oil pressure ............................................................. 309
Disposing of hazardous substances................................................. 403 Economic engine operation .......................................................... 319
Doors, opening and closing ................................................................ 15 Engine number ............................................................................... 14
Drag-torque control........................................................................... 127 Engine power reduced.................................................................. 150
Draining the compressed air reservoir.............................................. 313 Engine torque reduced ................................................................. 150
Driving more economically Technical data............................................................................... 410
Economical engine speed range .................................................. 148 Topping up the oil ......................................................................... 300
Engine brake, controlled................................................... 136, 138, 148
E Engine brake, non-controlled............................................ 136–137, 148
ECAS Engine, starting and switching off
Checking the body lean ................................................................ 310 Important things to remember after starting the engine................ 148
415
Index
Starting the engine ....................................................................... 146 F

Switching off in an emergency...................................................... 153 Fill quantities (change quantities) ..................................................... 411
Switching off the engine................................................................ 152 Filter
Environmental protection Air filter ......................................................................................... 390
Disposing of hazardous substances ............................................. 403 Changing the engine oil filter ........................................................ 362
EU monitoring device ....................................................................... 322 Fire extinguisher ................................................................................. 17
Euro 5 First 2000 kilometres (1200 miles) ................................................... 315
Operation with reducing agent ("AdBlue") ............................ 318, 326 First-aid kit .......................................................................................... 17
Reducing agent (“AdBlue”) .......................................... 394, 401, 403 Flame start........................................................................................ 146
Exhaust gas check Fog lamps and rear fog lamp (switch with two settings)..................... 59
Operation with reducing agent ("AdBlue") .................................... 326 Frequent-stop brake ......................................................................... 133
Operation with reducing agent (“AdBlue”) .................................... 318 Front flap
Exterior lighting Opening and closing ......................................................................111
Automatic driving with lights during the day for Austria .................. 60 Fuel
Checking for condition and function ............................................. 302 Topping up .................................................................................... 301
Cornering light ................................................................................ 60 Fuel system
Daytime driving lights for Scandinavia............................................ 60 Bleeding the fuel system .............................................................. 364
Daytime driving lights for the UK (DIM/DIP) ................................... 60 Checking the air dryer .................................................................. 313
Deactivating and activating the daytime driving lights .................... 60 Checking the primary fuel filter and draining the condensation .... 305
EU daytime driving lights (acc. to ECE).......................................... 60 Draining the compressed air reservoir.......................................... 313
Fog lamps and rear fog lamp (switch with two settings) ................. 59 Draining the fuel service centre (FSC) ......................................... 364
Hazard warning lights ..................................................................... 60 Draining the fuel tank.................................................................... 308
Headlight beam regulator ............................................................... 64
Headlight cleaning system.............................................................. 62 G
Headlight high beam and headlight flash ....................................... 59 Gearbox
Light test for exterior lighting .......................................................... 63 Important information for reducing clutch wear ............................ 316
Parking lights and headlight low beam ........................................... 58 MAN ComfortShift manual gearbox .............................................. 160
Partially masking the headlights, right-hand/left-hand traffic ........ 354 MAN TipMatic 12-speed ............................................................... 164
Position lamps for the CIS .............................................................. 62 MAN TipMatic 12-speed Fleet ...................................................... 170
Priority vehicle light(s) .................................................................... 61 MAN TipMatic 12-speed for all-wheel drive .................................. 176
Rear fog lamp (switch with one setting).......................................... 58 ZF 16 S manual gearbox .............................................................. 160
Snowplough and gritter lights ......................................................... 62 ZF 6 HP ........................................................................................ 182
Working spotlight and manoeuvring light........................................ 60
416
Index
H Every week after starting the engine ............................................ 312

Handbrake ........................................................................................ 130 Every week before starting the engine ......................................... 304
Hazard warning lights ......................................................................... 60 Overview....................................................................................... 297
Headlight beam regulator ................................................................... 64 Instrument lighting .............................................................................. 65
Headlight cleaning system.................................................................. 62 Intarder ............................................................................. 136, 140, 148
Topping up the fluid ...................................................................... 304 Interaxle lock
Headlight flash.................................................................................... 59 Disengaging and engaging differential locks with rear wheel
Headlight high beam........................................................................... 59 drive .............................................................................................. 204
Headlight low beam ............................................................................ 58 Engaging and disengaging differential locks and the transfer case
Headlights with all-wheel drive ....................................................................... 201
Partially masking, right-hand/left-hand traffic................................ 354 Engaging MAN HydroDrive and differential locks......................... 185
Heating and ventilation ....................................................................... 68 Interchangeable body ....................................................................... 241
Heating the windscreen ...................................................................... 47 interior lighting
HelpCall ............................................................................................ 245 Interior lighting in roof ..................................................................... 65
Hill holder.......................................................................................... 128 Interior lighting .................................................................................... 65
Hydrostatically driven front axle (MAN HydroDrive) Adjusting the instrument lighting..................................................... 65
Checking the oil level.................................................................... 307 Checking the function of the check lamps ...................................... 66
Engaging ...................................................................................... 185 Time-controlled entry and interior lights.......................................... 65
Topping up the oil ......................................................................... 307 Isolator switch
Battery isolator switch (electrical) ................................................. 144
I
Ignition .............................................................................................. 146 J
Immobiliser ....................................................................................... 324 Jack
Indicators ............................................................................................ 46 Jacking points ............................................................................... 334
Inflation pressure Securing in the cab ......................................................................... 31
Tyre inflation pressure .................................................................. 331 Jump starting .................................................................................... 347
Inspection work and care procedures
After driving through mud and fording .......................................... 314 L
Checking and maintenance points ............................................... 293 Ladder on the cab............................................................................. 243
Every day after starting the engine ............................................... 309 Lamps
Every day before starting the engine ............................................ 299 Bulbs............................................................................................. 412
Every month after starting the engine........................................... 313 Changing bulbs............................................................................. 376
Every month before starting the engine........................................ 306 Lane Guard System
Every six months before starting the engine ................................ 308 Lane Guard System (LGS) ........................................................... 158
417
Index
Lane Guard System (LGS) ............................................................... 158 Model plate ......................................................................................... 13

Leading axle
EU starting-traction control ........................................................... 102 N
Load reduction .............................................................................. 104 Notes on safety
Raising (lifting) .............................................................................. 105 Tyres and wheels.......................................................................... 331
Starting-traction control for Scandinavia....................................... 103
Steered leading or trailing axle ..................................................... 107 O
Light test for exterior lighting .............................................................. 63 Odometer
Lighting Speed in mph ................................................................................. 44
Checking for condition and function ............................................. 302 Trip odometer ................................................................................. 44
Exterior lighting ............................................................................... 58 Off-road driving................................................................................. 329
Interior lighting ................................................................................ 65 Opening and closing
Light test for exterior lighting .......................................................... 63 Opening and closing doors ............................................................. 15
Load reduction Storage lockers on the frame ......................................................... 18
Leading or trailing axle ................................................................. 104 Optimising the condition of the vehicle ............................................. 316
Loading the vehicle........................................................................... 323 Outside mirrors
Adjusting ......................................................................................... 51
M Heating ........................................................................................... 52
Maintenance Manual ............................................................................ 5 Outside temperature display............................................................... 44
Maintenance Record ............................................................................ 5
MAN BrakeMatic....................................................................... 136, 142 P
MAN HydroDrive Parking brake (handbrake) ............................................................... 130
Checking the oil level.................................................................... 307 Parking lights ...................................................................................... 58
Engaging ...................................................................................... 185 Poly-V-belt ........................................................................................ 363
Topping up the oil ......................................................................... 307 Checking for condition .................................................................. 307
Manual gearbox Position lamps for the CIS .................................................................. 62
Important information for reducing clutch wear ............................ 316 Power take-offs
MAN ComfortShift......................................................................... 160 Clutch-dependent power take-offs with manual gearbox.............. 188
ZF 16 S ......................................................................................... 160 Engine-dependent power take-off with manual gearbox .............. 191
Master switch MAN TipMatic 12-speed automated gearbox ............................... 193
Battery master switch (mechanical).............................................. 144 Transfer case ................................................................................ 199
Mileage counter ZF 6 HP automatic gearbox.......................................................... 196
Total mileage .................................................................................. 44 Priority vehicle light(s) ........................................................................ 61
Mobile phones .................................................................................. 399 PriTarder ........................................................................... 136, 138, 148
418
Index
R Co-driver's seat bench and centre seat .......................................... 27

Radio equipment .............................................................................. 399 Heated and ventilated seats ........................................................... 28
Raising (lifting) Static seats, Grammer .................................................................... 20
Leading or trailing axle ................................................................. 105 Semitrailer operation
Rear axle Adjustment device for fifth wheel couplings made by Jost ........... 233
EU starting-traction control ........................................................... 102 Georg Fischer dual height fifth wheel coupling............................. 237
Load reduction .............................................................................. 104 Georg Fischer fifth wheel coupling ............................................... 235
Raising (lifting) .............................................................................. 105 Holland Euro-Hitch fifth wheel coupling ........................................ 240
Starting-traction control for Scandinavia....................................... 103 Important notes on safety and operation ...................................... 225
Steered leading or trailing axle ..................................................... 107 Jost fifth wheel coupling ............................................................... 231
Rear fog lamp (switch with one setting).............................................. 58 Service literature................................................................................... 5
Reducing agent Shelves behind the seats ................................................................... 31
Topping up .................................................................................... 302 Side-impact protection device .......................................................... 113
Reducing agent (“AdBlue”) for Euro 5 .............. 318, 326, 394, 401, 403 Sliding roof.......................................................................................... 82
Rev counter Snowplough and gritter equipment (mounting plate)........................ 247
Displays on the rev counter ............................................................ 44 Snowplough and gritter lights ............................................................. 62
Engine speed ranges.................................................................... 148 Sockets
Ringfeder low hitch system,.............................................................. 217 In the cab ........................................................................................ 56
Roof hatch .......................................................................................... 81 Speed in mph ..................................................................................... 44
Roof spoiler ...................................................................................... 110 Speedometer
Roof spoiler, setting .......................................................................... 110 Speedometer displays .................................................................... 44
Running in ........................................................................................ 315 Spin threshold increase ............................................................ 127–128
Spring-loaded brake cylinders, releasing in an emergency.............. 353
S Start assistance ................................................................................ 347
Safety Starting and switching off the engine
Air-conditioning system ................................................................ 400 Starting in an emergency.............................................................. 151
Auxiliary air-conditioning unit ........................................................ 400 Starting-traction control
Mobile phones .............................................................................. 399 For EU .......................................................................................... 102
Radio equipment .......................................................................... 399 For Scandinavia............................................................................ 103
Safe working with the vehicle ....................................................... 399 Steered leading or trailing axle ......................................................... 107
Seat belts............................................................................................ 29 Steering wheel
Seats Adjustment...................................................................................... 33
Air-sprung comfort and luxury seats, Isringhausen ........................ 24 Checking the play ......................................................................... 311
Air-sprung comfort seats, Grammer ............................................... 22 Unlocking the steering .................................................................. 146
419
Index
Storage box with clipboard ................................................................. 95 Towing .............................................................................................. 344

Storage lockers TPM .................................................................................................. 206
In the cab ........................................................................................ 17 Trailer operation
On the frame................................................................................... 18 Important notes on safety and operation ...................................... 208
Stowage compartments Rigid drawbar (central axle) trailer................................................ 220
In the cab ........................................................................................ 17 Ringfeder low hitch system........................................................... 217
Sun blind............................................................................................. 57 Ringfeder normal hitch system ..................................................... 214
Sustained-action brakes ................................................................... 136 Rockinger normal hitch system .................................................... 212
Sustained-action brake operation / coasting ................................ 148 Trailing axle
Switches EU starting-traction control ........................................................... 102
Switches and buttons ..................................................................... 40 Load reduction .............................................................................. 104
Symbols on the display and check lamps Raising (lifting) .............................................................................. 105
Display and check lamps .............................................................. 251 Starting-traction control for Scandinavia....................................... 103
Displays and messages................................................................ 251 Steered leading or trailing axle ..................................................... 107
Overview of the symbols on the display and check lamps ........... 254 Transfer case
Red message: Workshop ............................................................. 251 Engaging and disengaging differential locks and the transfer case
Stop message: Safety .................................................................. 251 with all-wheel drive ....................................................................... 201
Yellow message: Information........................................................ 252 Transverse lock
Disengaging and engaging differential locks with rear wheel
T drive .............................................................................................. 204
Tachograph....................................................................................... 322 Engaging and disengaging differential locks and the transfer case
Technical data with all-wheel drive ....................................................................... 201
Cab designations .......................................................................... 407 Engaging MAN HydroDrive and differential locks......................... 185
Electrical system........................................................................... 412 Turn indicators .................................................................................... 46
Engine .......................................................................................... 410 Tyres
Fill quantities (change quantities) ................................................. 411 Air pressure .................................................................................. 408
Technical vehicle designation ....................................................... 407 Tyres and wheels.............................................................................. 304
Tyre inflation pressure .................................................................. 408 Changing a wheel ......................................................................... 334
Time Checking for condition .................................................................. 304
EU monitoring device ..................................................................... 45 Improving safety and economy..................................................... 331
Setting the hour display .................................................................. 45 Inflation pressure .......................................................................... 331
Tool kit ........................................................................................ 17, 400 Load index .................................................................................... 332
Torque converter and clutch system (WSK) ..................................... 148 Spare wheel.................................................................................. 333
Tow-starting ...................................................................................... 344 Speed index.................................................................................. 332
420
Index
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPM) ...................................... 206

Tyre size ....................................................................................... 332
V
Vehicle identification number (FIN/VIN).............................................. 13
Vehicle menu
Using ............................................................................................ 289
Vehicle menu contents ................................................................. 288
Vehicle model ..................................................................................... 13
Vehicle number................................................................................... 14
Vehicle speed control functions
Cruise control ............................................................................... 155
Road speed limiter........................................................................ 155
W
Warning lights
Check lamps and warning lights ..................................................... 42
Warning speed
Setting ............................................................................................ 45
Windows, opening and closing ........................................................... 49
Windscreen heating............................................................................ 47
Windscreen wipers and washers
Setting the intermittent wipe time ................................................... 47
Topping up the fluid ...................................................................... 304
Washing the windscreen................................................................. 47
Wiper set ...................................................................................... 393
Wiping the windscreen ................................................................... 47
Winter operation ............................................................................... 325
Wiper set .......................................................................................... 393
Working spotlight ................................................................................ 60
421
MAN Nutzfahrzeuge Aktiengesellschaft
Dachauer Straße 667 Operator’s Manual
80995 München Trucknology Generation TGS
www.man-mn.com without Multifunctional Steering Wheel / 2nd edition
Printed in Germany - Englisch -

TGS en - 81991877562

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TGS en - 81991877562

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TGS en - 81991877562

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator’s Manual

Trucknology Generation TGS

Trucknology Generation TGS

81.99187-7562 2nd edition

PUBLICATIONS AND INFORMATION RELATING TO YOUR VEHICLE

Publications supplied with the vehicle CAUTION Maintenance Record

Guide to Fitting Bodies

Attachments, bodies and conversions

Taking out of operation or putting into

List of abbreviations ............................................ 12 Sockets .......................................................... 56

Brake systems Power take-offs

A EVB Exhaust Valve Brake

KSM Customer-specified module (control unit for external data S

MODEL PLATE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE MODEL

VEHICLE NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER

The engine number can be seen:

The vehicle number describes the technical

OPENING AND CLOSING DOORS, CENTRAL LOCKING

CAUTION The door is unlocked.

Unlocking and opening the door Extra closing feature

• Insert the key 1 into the lock and turn in

Opening and closing doors from

Closing and locking the door

• Press the rocker switch 3

Unlocking and opening the door

• Pull the lever 1

STORAGE LOCKERS AND STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS

Storage lockers in the cab Closing the storage lockers

Opening the storage lockers Stowage compartment

Opening the stowage compartment:

Cup holders in the cab

Storage lockers on the frame

• Turn the T-handle 2 in direction C

Closing the storage lockers

DRIVER'S AND CO-DRIVER'S SEATS

• Fasten your seat belt before every

Setting the fore/aft position

Setting the backrest angle

Setting the seat surface angle

Setting the seat surface height

Air-sprung comfort seats, Note

Air-sprung comfort and luxury Note

Co-driver's seat bench and centre Therefore:

CAUTION Folding the backrest forward

Heated and ventilated seats Switching off the seat heating:

Switching on the seat heating:

Unfastening the seat belt

• Press the red button on the catch

Warning if seat belt is not worn

After the ignition is switched on, the “Seat belt

BUNKS AND SHELVES BEHIND THE SEATS

Securing the jack

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL

Instrument panel 8 – Time 17 Select language, see “Vehicle menu”,

Switches, buttons and dials Symbol Description Symbol Description

Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description

Check lamps Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Symbol Meaning Turn indicators on trailer

DISPLAYS ON THE REV COUNTER AND SPEEDOMETER